Fanuc 0 User Programming Guide

tltl;:
.i._
.t-."
'-
, iI
'i!
.r ';
-':i,.
*1:r+ "!'
,' -.!,::'l]i :; -' tr
],r'
,
$** r
*.' ... r.i*'
..
it.
i
l.r
'i;
,l
,::,..
i.
r'
:'
I
.'i
.:
'./ '"{,
..
i,'
;'
.
,-5
'.'*":
-';:
'1"
CONTENTS
I.
I
GENEML
I.
PROGRA]4I"IING
I.
INTRODUCTION
CONTROLLED AXES
20
I Controlled Axes
) 2 IncremenE Svstem
3 Maximum Stroke
3.
4.
PREPAMTORY FUNCTION
20
ZU
20
(G
2l
FUNCTION)
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
24
4.L Positioning (c00)

4.2 Single Direction Positioning (c60)
4.3 Linear Interpolation (G01)
4.4 Circular Inrerpolarion (c02, G03)
4.5 Helical Cutting (c02, c03)
4.6 Equal Lead Thread Curring (c33)
5.
24
25
26
27
29
31
FEED FUNCTIONS
I Rapid Traverse
5.2 Cutting Feed Rate
5.2.I Tangential speed constant control
5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp
5.2.3 Feed per minute (G94)
5.2.4 Feed per revolution (c95)
5.2.5 One-digit F code feed .
32
32
32
32
5.
5.3
32
33
33
33
....+
Override
5.3. 1 Feed rate overri-de
5.3.2 Rapid traverse override
5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
5.4. 1 Automatic acceler ation/deceleration after interpolation
5.5 Speed Control at Corn ers of Blocks
5.5.1 Exact stop
(G04)
34
34
35
35
36
37
5.5.2 Exact stop mode (G61)
5.5.3 CutLing mode (c64)

5,5.4 Tapping mode (c63)
5.5.5 Automatic corner override
5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop (c04)
34
37
37
37
(G62)
38
4I
L?
REFERENCE POINT
6.1 Automatic
Reference Point Return (G28, G29)

6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28)
6.I.2 Automatic return from reference point (C29)
6.2 Reference Point Return Check (G27)
6.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point Return (G30)
7.
42
43
43
44
COORDINATE SYSTEM
7.L Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, G54 to

7.I.1 Setting work coordinate sysrem (c92)
7.1.2 Setting work coordinate system (G54 to cs 9)
7.f.3 Selecting work coordinate systern (G54 co G59)
G59)
45
45
45
47
48
7.1.4 Changing work eoordinate system by program command

(csa to csg)
7.f.5 Setting and display of work zero point offset amount
7 .I.6
Systern variables
7.2 Plane Selection (G17,
G18,
49
50
5l
Gt9)
52
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION
R.
53
f Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91)

8.2 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21)
8.3 Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type
B.
53
s3
Decimal Point Programming
54
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
56
9. I
Spindle Speed Command

9.1.1 S 2-digit code
9.I.2 S 5-digit code
56
s6
56
IO. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

10.1 Tool Selection Command
LO.2 Tool Life Management ...
57
57
57
II. }IISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M, B FUNCTIONS)

11.1 Miscellaneous Function (M Function)
12.
63
64
Auxiliary Functions
II.2
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION .
65
67
67
67
1 Tape Start ..e.

12.2 Leader Section and Label Skip .
L2.3 Program Start
L2.4 Program Section
I2.4.1 Main program and sub program
12.4.2 Program number
12.4,3 Sequence number and block
12.4.4 0ptional block skip
12.4.5 Word and address
L2.4.6 Basic addresses and command value ranse
12.
L2.7
;:H:H
;:;'t::
Tape End
Tape
Format
12.8
";'.2
12.9 Tape Codes ...
::
::
::
::
::::::
::
.:::
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

I3.1 Canned Cycles (c73, Gl4, G76, G80 to
13.2 External Motion Function (G80, GB I)
I4.
::
::::..:::::::::::
68
68
72
IJ
/5
::
::::.::
::
77
78
79
79
79
79
80
GB9)
80
95
COMPENSA,TION FUNCTION .
I Tool Length Offset (c43, C44, G49)

L4.I.1 Tool length offset A...
14. f. 2 Tool length offset B . . .
L4.2 Cutter Cornpensation B (c39 to G42)
14.2.I Cut,ter compensation function.
14.2.2 Offset amount (H code)
14.2.3 Offset vector
L4.2.4 Plane selection and vector ...
14.2.5 Corner offset cj-rcular interpolation (G39)
L4.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40)
14.2.7 Cutter comDensation left (G41)
96
14.
vo
96
98
99
99
100
i00
100
....
f01
101
loz
14.2.8 Currer compensarion right (c42)

L4.2.9 General notes on offset
L4.2.10 Program example
14.3 Cutter Compensation C (G40 to c42)
14.3.1 Cutter compensation function .
i4.3.2 Offset amount (It code)
14.3.3 Offset veclor
14.3.4 Plane selection and vector ...
14.3.5 c40, c4l, and G42 .
L4,3.6 Details of cutter compensation C ...
L4.4 Changing of Tool Offset Amounr (Prograrnmable Dara Inpur) (G10)
14.5 Scaling (c50, c51)
14.6 Coordinate Systern Roration (c68, c69)
14.6.1 Command fcrmat
.
14.6.2 Relationship to other functions
15.
15.
MEASUREI"IENT FUNCTIONS
Skip Funcrion (c3I)
A ...
I Custom Macro Cou'unand
16.1.1 M98 (Single call)
16.1.2 Subprogram call using M code
16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code
f6.1.4 G66 (Modal call)
16.1.5 Argunent specification
16.2 Custom Macro Body .
L6.2.1 Variables.
16.2.2 Kind of variables
16.2.3 lulacro instrucrions (G65)
16.2.4 Notes on custom macro
Example of Custbm Macro
1 6. 3
.4. . .
16.3. f Bolt hole circle
16.3.2 Pocket machining
16.3.3 Interface signal ...
..;..
f6.3.4 Shearing machine ...
16.3.5 Program examples ...
16.4 Pattern Data Input Functj-on ...
16.4. I Pattern menu display
16.4.2 Pattern data display
16.4.3 Character-to-codes correspondence table
16.
17.
CUSTO}I MACRO
B ...
17. I Macro Ca11 Corunand (Custom Macro Command)

I 7 . l. I Simple calls
.1. . .
17. 1.2 Modal call .
I 7. 1.3 Macro call using G codes
17.1.4 Custoro macro call with M code
17.f.5 Subprogram call with M code
17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code
17.I.7
Dif ference between 1"198 (subprogram call) and

G65 (custom macro body call) ...
1.8 Multiplex calls

I7.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodlr
L7.2. I Custom macro body format
17.2.2 Variables
17.2.3 Types of varlables .
17.2.4 Arithnetic commands .
17.
f07
107
f07
107
i08
108
110
140
l4l
L42
L44
T47
I47
CUSTOM MACRO
16.
103
104
106
L49
... ..
150
150
150
150
150
151
153
153
154
157
L62
f63
163
L64
166
167
167
169
169
172
L75
I77
179
17 9
L82
183
183
184
184
184
185
i86
186
187
f89
200
17.2.5 Control c,onnands ...

17 .2.6 Macro and CNC statements ...
17.2.7 Codes and words used in custom macro
I7.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body
17 .4 Limitations ..
i8. 10/11 TAPE FORMAT ...
18.1 Difference Points of Tape Format
18.2 Address and Range of Command Values
f8.3 Key Position .
18.4 Each Address Restrictions
18.5 Setting of Setting Parameters .
18.6 Cautions of Each Function
III.
I.
208
2LI
2IL
2fl
2r3
2L3
2L3
2I4
.'. . . . 2I4
2L4
2L4
OPEMTION
INTRODUCTION
2. OPERATION DEVICES
2.1 CRT/MDI Panel
z.I.L MDI keyboard .
2.L.2 Function buttons
2.2 Machine Operator's Panel
2.3 Tape Reader ..
2.3.I Portable ?'
tape reader ..
2.3.2 Note for handling tape reader ..
2.4 FANUC casserre BI/B?/E|
2.5 FANUC PPR .
3.
203
POWER
ON/OFF
2T7
237
23L
'236
240
240
247
/,')
. )---
4. MANUAL OPERATION
4.L l"lanual Ref erence Point Return
4.2 l'Ianua1 Continuous Feed
4.3 STEP Feed
4.4 Manual Handle Feed
4.5 Manual Absolute 0N and OFF .
5.
232
233
234
236
AUTOMATIC OPEMTION
5.1 Operation Mode .
5. 1.1 Memory operation
5.L.2 MDI operation .
.
5. f.3 MDI operation-B
5.2 Starting Automatic Operation
.
5.3 Executing Automatic Operation
5.4 Stopping Automatic Operation
5.4.I Program stop (M00)
.2 Optional- scop (M01 )
5
^4
Program end (M02, M30)
5.4.3
5.4.4 Feed hold
5.4.5 Reset
5.5 Program Re-Start
5.6 l'lanual Handle Interruption .
5.6-l Handle interrupt operation
5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt
5.6.3 High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis
243
243
244
246
247
249
255
255
255
255
251
259
259
259
259
259
259
260
260
260
263
263
264
265
6.
TEST OPERATION
266
266
266
266
t A1l Axes I'lachine Lock .

6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
6.
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.
Auxiliary Function Lock
...
Feedrate Override
Rapid Traverse Override
Dry Run
Single Block
...
zot
267
267
268
269
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.1
269
Emergency Stop
7.2 Overtravel
8.
zoY
270
WHEN ALARM ARISES
PART PROGMM STOMGE
& EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM
271
27L
REGISTMTION)
1 Preparation for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation

2 Registering Prograrn to Memory
9.2.1 Registering with MDI key
9.2.2 Registering from NC tape
9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory
9.4 Program Number Search
9.5 Deleti-ng a Program
9,6 Deleting A11 Programs
9.7 Punching a Program
9.8 Punching A1l Programs .
9.9 Sequence Number Search
9. l0 Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape .
9.11 Inserti-on, Changing and Deleting the Word
9.1i.1 Word search
9.11.2 Inserting a word
9.11.3 Changing a word
9.1 .4 Deleting a word
..:..
ol .5 Deleting up to an EOB .
9.11.6 Deleting blocks
a 12 Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
q
o
o
o
q
a
IO.
13 Background Editing .
9. 13. 1 Registration from
MDI
9.13.2 Registration from CNC tape .

9. 13.3 CNC Eape punch . . .
14 Menu Prograrnming . .
15 Program Loading by TEACH IN Mode
16 Conversational Programming with Graphic
9. 16.I Prograroming .
9. 16.2 Confirmation of program . . .
9 . f6.3 Editing of program . . .
17 Nurnber of Regist.ered Programs .
18 Part Program Storage Length
. . .1
27r
27r
271
271
272
272
273
zt J
273
,1
.r'7 a
276
280
281
281
28r
282
282
283
284
284
284
286
Function
288
288
290
290
29I
291
t9 Editing Operation Using Full Keys

SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
292
I Offset Amount
l0.l.l
Setting and display of t,oo1 offset values
(function key: offset ) ...
L0.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: PAMI'I ) ...
I0.3 Custom Macro Variable
f0.4 System Parameter
10.4. I Parameter dlsplay
i0.4.2 Parameter setting ..
/,
275
294
294
10.
294
295
297
291
291
298
10.5
f0.6
10.7
10.8
1
1.
Pitch Error
Compensation
Data
300
300
300
Data Protection Key .

Software Operatorrs Panel
Tool Length Measurement
301
DISPLAY
I 1.
303
Program Display
Displaying Program Memory Used
IL.2
11.3 Command Value Display (Function key: PRGRM )
lI.4 Display for Program Check
Il.5 Current Position Display (Function key: POS )
11.6 Display of Run Tirne and Parts Count
11.6.1 Actual position screen
1 I . 6. 2 Parameter setting screen
Il.7 Alarm Display (Function key: ALARM ) ..
If.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Displav
tI.9
T2.
JUJ
303
305
306
. .t. . . . .
307
309
309
3
10
311
311
Clock
3r3
DATA OUTPUT
314
314
12.I Tool Offsets

12.2 Parameters
13. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

13.1 What is a File
13.2 File Heading
JI4
TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1
/82/FI)
3r5
315
13.3 Data Output Operation

13. 3. I CNC prQran output
f3.3.2 Offset data output
f3.3.3
315
parameter output
13.4 Data Input Operation
t3.4.1 CNC program input
13.4.2 Offset data input
13.4.3 CNC parameter input
13.5 File Deletion
Precautions
L 3. 6
i3.6.1 Request for cassette replacement
13.6.2 Cassette adaptor lamp conditions
CNC
f3.6.3 Write-protect key
13.7 Floppy Cassette Di-rectory Display

I3.7. I Display ...
13.7.2 File input/output
13.7.3 Other precautions
3r6
3i6
317
3r7
3L7
3r7
JId
318
318
318
318
319
319
320
320
322
323
L4. GRAPHIC FUNCTION

14.1 Drawing Range
I4.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter ..
14.2.1' Setting procedure of graphie parameter ..
L4.2.2 Details of graphic parameter .
L4.2.3 Tool path drawing .
325
I5.
JJU
MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION
I5.1 Outline
L5.2 Fo1low-up Signal

15. 3 Input Signal
15. 4 Cauti-on
16.
*FLWU
DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF OO-MB
1A I
nicn]arr
L6.2 Operation
327
327
328
329
JJU
330
330
332
???
JJJ
333
IV.
MAINTENANCE
FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT

Specifj-cation of Fuses
t. 2 Mounting Positions of Fuses
l. I
L.2.1 Power supply unit

I.2.2 Additional I/0 Bl
1 z.
',
L.
2.
2,
')
)2
-!
ts ,,rnpuL
unrt
T-^,.
339
339
F:i'
fi'l
339
34L
34L
5+J
APPENDIXES
TAPE CODE LIST
54
APPENDIX
FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
349
APPENDIX
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
3s2
APPENDIX
NOMOGRAPHS
INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH

TOOL PATH AT CORNER
351
357
360
RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING
363
APPENDIX
TAPE JOINING
364
APPENDIX
STATUS WI{EN TURNING THE POWER ON, WI{EN RESET
36s
I.
il
338
338
General
2 Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation,
Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control
3 NC System Check (No E.ools required)
7 PARA]'IETER
PARAMETER DISPLAY
APPENDIX
bt
337
APPENDIX
1.
2.
3.
JJ I
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 CNC Status Displav

2.5 Display of Position Deviation
2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point
V.
337
337
LIST
367
367
APPENDIX
CODES USED
IN
APPENDIX
ERROR CODE
LIST
APPENDIX
10 LIST
APPENDIX
1I LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
PROGRAM
OF OPERATION
496
497
514
5
r6
I
I
i
l\
GENERAL
This manual describes the programming, operation, and daily maintenance for 0-MB
and 00-MB. This manual includes all optional functions. For the functions
unique to each CNC system, see APPENDIX 11 I'LIST 0F SPECIFICATIONS".
For which options are provided with your system, see machine tool builder I s
,
manual.
Sometimes, the specification and usage of the system may be different

to t.he specification of the rnachine side operation panel.
So, see the machine tool builderts manual without, fail.
1.1
according
General Flow of Operation of CNC Machine Tool
the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program,
then operate the CNC machine by using the program.
l) First, prepare the prograrn from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine
too1, Then punch the paper tape to be read the program into the CNC system.
How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter II.
When machining
PROGRA}frIING.
2) Paper tape is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the workpieces and
tools on the machine, and operate the tools aceording to the programming.
Finally, execute the machining actua11y.
How to operate the CNC system is described in the Chapter III.
OPERATION.
Part drawing
CNC
Paper tape
CHAPTER
II
PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER
III
MACHINE TOOL
OPERATION
Before the actual programming, make the machining plan for how to machj-ne the
parc.
Machining plan
l. Determination of workpieces machining range
2. Method of mounting workpieces on the nachine tool
3. Machining sequence in every cutting process
4. Cutting tools and cutting conditions
Decide the cutting method in every cutt.ing process
t.
::i,
4':i.
-3-
\-\_
Cutting
Cutting
process
------\
procedure
a
L
Face cutting
Side cutting
Hole machining
1. CuEting nethod
Rough
Semi
Finish
2. Cutting tool
:
Tools
3. Cutting conditions
: Feedrate
Cutt ing
Depth
4, Tool
path
Face cutting
Prepare the program of the tool path and cutting condition according to the
workpiece figure, for each cutEing.
I'
-4-
r:.
rl
il
1.2 Notes on Reading This Manual

1)
The function of an
2)
This rnanual addresses as many subjects as posslble. But it would become too
voluminous to point out everything that should not or cannot be done.
Functlons which are not specifically stated as possible are impossible.
CNC machine tool system depends not only.on the CNC, but
on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo
system' the CNC, the operatorrs panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe
the function, programming, and operation relating to all connbinations. This
manual generally describes these fron the stand-polnt of the CNC. So, for
details on a particul.ar CNC machlne tool, refer to the manual issued by the
rnachine tool bullder, which should take precedence over this manual.
3) Notes refer to detailed and speeific items. So, when a irote is encountered,
terms used in it sometimes are not explained. In this case, first skip the
note' then return to it after having read over the manual for details.
-5-
II
PROGRAMMING
lr
il
1.
INTRODUCTION
l) Tool movement along workpiece parts figure

Interpolation (See II-4)
The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constltuting the workplece parts
flgure. (See Note)
a) Tool movement along stralght line
Progam
GOIY _;
X-Y-;
b) Tool movement along arc

Program
G03X
--
--
--;
of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs ls called the
interpolation.
Syutbols of the Progratmed commands G01, GO2, ... are called the preparatory
function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
The function
Control unit
X axis
a) Movement along
\n
staight line
_;
X-Y-;
colY
/v
G03X
Note)
-Y-
Y axis
j--t
a) Movement along
(
'\
straight line
R-; t
b; Mo"urnent along
7
b) Movement along
arc
,ll -'
Tool movement
the table rnay be moved without moving the tool in an actual

machine, thJ.s manual assumes that the tool noves with respect to the
Though
workpiece.
-9-
ilil,
2) Feed
Feed
ilfr
Irll
function (See II-5)
Itf
lrll
ti':
Iii
I
'
Table
of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called

the feed. Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example,
to feed the tool at a rate of 150 uun/min, specify the following in the
Movement
Program:
F150. 0
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed funetion.
3) Part drawing and tool movenent

a) Reference point (fixed position on rnachine)
An NC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Nornally, tool
change and prograurming of absolute zero point as described later are
performed *t this position. This position is called the reference point.
The t,ool can be moved to reference poi_nt in two ways:

i) Manual reference point return (See III-4.1)
Reference point return is perforrned by manual button operation.
ii) Automatic reference point return (See II-6.1)
Reference point return is performed in accordance with progranme,
commands.
In general, manual reference point return is performed flrst after th,

pov{er is turned on. In order to move the tool to reference point fo:
tool change thereafter, the function of automatic reference poin
return is used.
-10-
b) Coordinate system on part drawing and

--- Coordinate svstem (See III-8)
coordinate system specified by
Command
Program
Coordinate system
Part drarving
NC
lviachine
tool
NC
There are t\ro types of coordinate systems.

i) Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program
data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are used.
ii) Coordinate system specified by NC
The coordinate systen is prepared on the rnachine tool tab1e. Thi.s can
be achieved by prograrnning the distance from the present position of
the tool to zero point of the coordinate to be set.
of tool
t
Distance to zero point of
coordinate system to be set
a workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay

as follows:
hlhen
part drawing established

on the workpiece
Coordinate system
established on the
- lt -
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the NC in accordance

with the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system
on the part drawing, and cut a work piece into a shape on the drawing.
Therefore' in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the
drawing, the two coordinate systems must be set at the same position.
To set the two coordinate systems at the same positlon, simple methods
sha11 be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machlnings.
Some examples are shown below:
i) Using a standard point of the work.
Work standard point
Bring the Eool center to the standard

point. And set the coordinate system
specified by NC at this position.
Fixed
distancc
ii
ii)
Mountl"ng a workpiece
directly against the jig.

Meet the tool center to the reference
point. And set the coordinate system
point specified by CNC at this position.
Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined point from the reference
point.
!
tl
iii)
Mounting a pallet wj-th a workpiece against the jig.
t'
Jig and coordinate system

specified the same as ii).
Pallet
-L2-
shall
be
to indicate command dimensions for moving the tool

Absolute,
incremental commands (See II-8.1)
Coordinate values of comrnand for moving the tool can be indicated by
absolute or incremental designation.
i) Absolute coordinate values
The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero point of the
coordinate system, i.e. to the position of the coordinate values.
c) How
Tool
A (1s,60,40)
(1030,20)
Specify the tool movement from point A to point B by using the

coordinate values of point B as follows:
G90X10.0Y30. 0220.0;
ii)
Incremental coordinate values

Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool
position.
i..
e.i
v|,:
*:j;
30
u$,
,/
__J
Specify the tool
movement
c9 1X40. 0Y-30. 0z- 10.
from point A to point B as follows:
0;
_13_
4) Cutting speed
Spindle speed functlon (See II-9)
ll
,p^'%
,,1w,:.,*
7//)
rool
i-----(2/
IL
L---
Workpiece
--t
I
----J
The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut
is called the cutting speed.
As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in
rpm unit.
For example, when a workpiece having a diameter of 100 nn should be machined
at a cutting speed of 80 nrm/nln, the cutting speed in rpm un.it is calculated
to be approx. 250 rprn from N = 1000 V/nD. Therefore, specify the following:
S
250;
Spindle speed co*mand is called spindle speed function.
5) Selection of tool used for various machining
Tool Funetion (See II-10)
Tool number
ATC magazine
I^lhen
dri11ing, tapping, bearing, milling or the like,
is performed, it
is
necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool

and the number 1s specified in the program, the NC selects the corresponding
tool.
For example, when No.01 is assigned to a drilling tool and the tool is stored
at No.0l of the ATC magazine, the tool can be selected by specifying:
T01
This function is called the tool function.
-L4-
g
F
6) Command for machi.ne operations ----- Miscellaneous function (See II-11)

When machinlng is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle,
and feed coolant. For this purpose, on-off operations of spindle motor and
coolant valve should be controlled.
Spindle rotation
Coolant
/l
onloff
Workpiece
The function of specifying rhe on-off operations of the components of the

machine is called the miscellaneous function. In general, the function i-s
specified by an M code.
For example, when M03 is specified, the spindle is rotated clockwise at the
specified spindle speed.
configuration (See II-12)

A group of commands givpn to the NC for operating the machine is called the
program. By specif)'ing the conmands, the tool is moved along a straight line
or an arc, or the spindle notor is turned on and off.
In the program, specify the conmands in the sequence of act.ual tool move-
7) Program
ments.
Blobk'
Block
Block
Program
Tool movement sequence

Block
Block
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The
program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number
for discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number
for discriminating each program is cal1ed the program number
The block and the program have the following configurations.
*-
ft
*.
_ 15 _
a)
Block
Block
NCOOOO cCO xCO. O ZCCO . O MCO s CC r CO

s_:31:1."
numDer
preparatory
Interpolation
funltion
function
Spindle
function
Miscellaneous Tool
function
function
cR
End of
block
Each block consists of a sequence number for indicating the NC operatlon

sequence at the beginnlng of the block, and a CR code for lndicating the
end of the block.
b) Prograrn
Program number
Block
BIock
Bloc.k
M3O CR
end of program
Normally, a program number is speclfied after the CR code at the beginning

of the program, and a program end code (M02, M30) is specified at the end
of the program.
-15-
'r.
c)
Main program and subprogram
Mrin program
-----l
I
I
M98Pl@1
I
I
I
M98P'1002
I
Scbpiogrrm#l
----r
-io'oo'
-- )-|
'/"i
--j==-."
l.t'-.----...-.-
....--.--l
Program for hole
#l
Ntsg
-/ --
M98P1001
Subprogram #2
--
I
I
---l- or ooz
----"1
Program for hole #2
Lryg_
_ ____J
Hob *1
Hole
'\c
Hole
#l
#2
Hole #2
machining of the same pattern appears at many portlons of a program,

a Program for the pattern is created. This is calfed the subprogram. On
the other hand, the original program ls ca1led the naln program. When a
subprogram execution comnand appears during execution of the maln program,
conutrands of the subprogran are executed. When execution of the subprogran
is finished, the sequence returns to the main program.
When
8) Tool figure and tool motion by program (See II-14.1)

a) Machining using the end of cutter
Tool length compensation function.
Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools
have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program
in accordance wlth the tools.
Standard tool
-t
I
-t7-
Therefore, a standard tool is selected, anci the difference between the

position of the nose of the standard tool and the position of the nose of
eaeh tool used is measured in advance. B,v setting the rneasrrred value in
the NC (data display and setting: see III-11), rnachining can be performed
without alterjng the program even whcn the tool is changed.
. This function is ca1led the tc'o]. length conpensation.
b) Machining rrsJng the side of cutter
Cutter radius compensation (See
rr-14)
Because a cutter has a radlrrs, the cente!- of the cutter path goes around
the workpiece vrith the cutter radius deviated.
Cutter path using

cutter radius compensation
Machining part figure
Cutter
If raditrs of cutters are stored in menory, the tool can be uroved by cutter
radius apart from the machining part figure. Thls function is ca1led
cutter radius compensation.
-18-
9) Tool movement range ----- Stroke check

An area whieh the tool cannot enter can be specified by parameters. This
functlon is called the stroke check.
l---
r__
L_---l
Tutte
____r
L- .t'
tl
-Jl
tTr' -
7/////U//////////Z///////t
Rererencepoint
l,al,
4V
2',,
'44
t,
.- -t-i
',
:l
- ---{
*V
//rl-z7zzzrlzzzzrlz,.zzrzrrr2,
-19-
LJ
LJ
2.
CONTROLLED AXES
2.1 Controlled Axes

No. of basic controlled axes
Controlled axes expansion
l'lax. I axis (Max. 4 axes in total)
Basic simultaneouslv controll-ed axes
Simultaneously controlled axes
2.2
PMC
axes
Max. 4 axes
expansi-on
(Note)
axes
axis can be expanded up to the 2
axes
by an option.
Increment System
Least input increment
0.001
mm
0.001
deg
Least comnand increment
0.0001 inch
In increment
0.00I
mm
0.00f
deg
0.0001 inch
Maximum stroke
99999.999
mm
99999.999
deg
9999.9999 inch
systern 1/I0
ar
0.000f
mm
0.0001
deg
0.00001 inch
Least
command
increment
Maximum stroke
0.000f
rur
0.0001
deg
9999.9999 mm
999.99999 inch
9999.9999 des
0.00001 inch
of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are
functions that cannot be used between axes with different unit systems (circular
interpolation, cutter radius compensati.on, etc.)
For the incremen! system, see the machine tool builder's manual.
Combined use
2.3
Maximum Stroke
stroke = Leagt command i-ncrement x

2.2
Increment
Svstem.
See
Maximum
-20-
99999999
3.
PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTTON)
A number following address G determines the meaning of the

cerned block.
F^1 1^,'i6ft
Fr'^
c enl,Ps Are divi ded into the rurruwrug
Lwo tsr
Lypes.
u
command
for the con-
Lvsev
- I Y"
Meaning
One-shot G code
The G code is effective only in the block in whieh it is

f -i ^l
^-^^.i
Dgc!tllgu.
The G code is effective until
Modal G code
another G code of the
srolrD is sneeified.
(Example)
GOl and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.

{:t I I x
7_.
ut
Y-.
-.
uvvL
The following
GOl is effective in this range
t
t
G
codes are offered.

Funct ion
G code
Positionlng (Rapid traverse)
c00
G01
0l
Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
GO2
Circular interpolation/Helical
CW
c03
Circular interpolatio*/Helical
CW
c04
UWEIIT
l^dLL
DLvP
Exact stop
G09
00
GLO
n^+^
ud Ld
cll
Data setting mode cancel
XY olane selection
17.
GIB
02
ZX plane selection
cl9
G20
T**,,f
rrrPuL
r\)
^^*+i-DE L L r!r5
/. n l2nc
ir!l
qp lparr
on
.'-^L
flruLr
06
Input in
mm
Reference point return check
uLt
Return to reference point
c28
00
G29
Return from reference point
G30
2nd reference
-2r-
point return
same
i:.i
i/
il'
llllj
ll,.lt
illit,,
iil
,lii,
r,j.rlti
i
ii.,i'
iil
G code
Function
Group
G31
00
Skip function
c33
0l
Thread cutting
G39
00
Corner offset circular interpolation
Cutter compensation cancel
G40
Cutter compensation left
07
G4i
G42
cutter comPensation right
G43
Tool length compensation * direction

Tool length compensation - direetion
08
G44
c49
Tool length compensation cancel
G50
Scaling cancel
l1
caling
G51
Gf1+
Work coordinate svstem I selection
c55
Work coordinate system 2 selection
Gfo

L4
stem 5 selection
c58
I,iork coordinate
G59

00
c60
Single direction Positioning

Exact stop
G61
sY
mode
Automatic corner override
G62
I5
Tanni
c63
no
*tat*
00
c65
GOO
la
LL
-.*
Macro call,
F1acro
--*
Ilacro
comman-d-
modal call
l'lacro modal cal l cancel

Coordinate rotation
c68
LO
G69
mnde
Coordinate rotation cancel
LZ -
G code
Func t i on
uruuP
G73
svA
!Porb
Gl4
Counter tapping cycle
tr/O
Fine boring
GBO
Canned
c8l
Drilling
cycle, spot boring
G82
Drilling
cycle, counter boring
09
GB3
Arillino
ur
rrrrrrS
nrrnla
L)Lrc
cycle cancel
Peck dri I I ing evcle
GB4
T-*^;'-rdyPf
GB5
Boring cycle
c86
Boring cycle
G87
Baek boring cycle
c88
Boring cycle
c89
Boring cycle
c90
Ab
^.,^1^
116 Ly
Lrs
solut.e
conmand
03
not
lncrement.al command -
aot
00
Programming
Foorl
G94
05
c95
Gvd
nor
of absolute zero point
minrrt-o
Feed per rotation
Return to initial
l0
G99
point in canned cycle
Return to R point in canned cycLe
(Note l) G codes marked \ are initial G codes when turning power on.
For G20 and G2l, the G code before turning power off remains. G00 or
G0l can be selected by parameter setting.
ftr^rrn
OO aro nnl- mnd: I .
Therr
ara only effective in the
(Note 2) uT LUUEJ
-ÂÛI
rlrsJ
ere
^ F E;rUUy
block in which they are specified.
(Note 3 ) If a G code not listed on the table of G codes is i--..ts+^r
v!
utru ional
tLIPULLEUT
G code not specified in the system is commanded, an alarm (llo.0l0) is
di
sp
lay ed .
(Note 4) A number of G codes can be specified in the same block. l'lhen more than
one G code of the same group is specified, the G code specified later
is effective.
(Note 5) If. any G code of group 0t is specified in a canned cycle mode, che
canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the GB0 condj-tion is
entered. However a G code of group 0i is not affected by any of the
canned cycle G codes.
(Note 6) A G code is displayed from each group.
-23-
4.
ii
I
I
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.1
Positioning (G00)
G00
specifies positioning.
A tool
moves
to a certain posltion in the work coordinate
system
absolute command or to a position specified distance from the current

with an incremental comnand at a rapid traverse rate.
with
pos
an
i t ion
Format
GOO
IP-;
{
;
where lP-: Cornbination of optional axis address (of X, y, Z, A, B, C) as

x-Y-z-A-.. .
This nanual uses this notation hereinafter
; : End of block (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code)
This manual uses this notatoin hereinafter.
- Non linear interpolation type posltioning
Positioning is done with each axis independently. Tool path generally does
not become a straight line.
Starting point
o+------J
g-.
A----'Non linear interpolation positionjng
Eno potnt
(Note 1) The rapid traverse rate in the G00 coumand is set for each axis
independently by the machine tool builder (parameter No. 0518 to No.
0521). Accordingly, the rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the
address F.
In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the
end of a b1ock. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming
the in-position. (See Note 2).
(Note 2)'rln-position" means that the feed motor is withln the specified range.
(This range is determined by the roachine tool builder) (Parameter No.
0500 to No. 0503).
-24-
4.2
Single Direction Positioning (G60)
For accurate positioning without backlash,

direction is available.
Start
point
final
positioning .from only
O+_--__J
End point
one
(Direction for final

positioning is right
to left).
G60 is used insEed of G00 as below.
G60o
B _\_6_;
are set by the parameteT (No. 204 - 2O7z

An overrin-and--a pos-itionii[direction
P0STNI - 4, No. 29: G60X, Y, Z, 4). Even when a commanded positioning direction
coincides with that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end
point. (s, B, y, 6 = X, Y, Z or which one of additional axis A, B, C, U, V, W.
Simultaneous 3 axis is option. )
Overrun
End point
Temporary
(Note 1) G60 is a one/short G code.

(Note 2) During drilling
canned cycle,
no Single Direction Positioning is

effected in Z.
(Note 3) No Single Direction Positioning is effected in an axis for which no
voerrun has been set by the parameter.
(Note 4) When the move distance 0 is commanded, the Single Direction PosLtioning
is not performed.
(Note s) The direction set by the parameter is not effected by mirror image.
(Note 6) The Single Direction Positioning does nor apply to the shift motion in
the canned cycles of G76 and G87.
-25-
4.3
Linear Interpolation (G01)
F;
GOl P
This comiland i-ctuates the linear interpolation mode. The values of lP define
the distance of tool travel which will be conducted in absolute or incremental
mode, according to the current status of G90/G91. The feed rate is set to a
cutting feed speed commanded by F code and is a modal data.
(Program example)
(c91) GOl x200. 0
YI00. 0 F200. 0
Y axis
00.0
X lxis
(Start point)
200.0
The feed rate conmanded by the F code is ueasured along the tool path.
not coruranded, the feed rate is regarded as zero.
(Note 1) The feed rate of, each axis directlon is as follows.
o
B
Gole
B
Fc = *
. t
direction: FB = f
Feed rate of y axis direction: Fy =
f
Feed rate of E axis direction: Fe =
*
. t
' f
' t
Feed
Feed
rate of q axis direction:

rate of B axis
If ir is
y=ffi
(Note 2) The feed rate of the roa"r, axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min
(the unit is decimal point position)
G9l cOi B-90. 0 F300.
(Start point)
@nd point)
\Rotation
-26-
rate is 300 deg/min.
i,
!
4.4
Circular lnterpolation (G02, G03)
The
command
wl1l move a tool along a clrcular arc.
bel-ow
Arc on X-Y plane

\,1
/ t.G02.
^1 1
CO:J
Arc on Z-X plane
c,8 ,33it
{-I
}T
,R
tr
}F
Arc on Y-Z plane
crs
r[!]r
p
r
Date to be given
I
trI /
Specification of arc on
cl8
Specifi-cation of arc on ZX plane
ci9
Specification of arc on YZ plane
an.,
Clockwise direction
c03
Counterclockwise direction
G90 mode
Two of the X,
Y, and Z axes
End
G91 mode
Two of the X,
Y, and Z axes
Distance from start ooint to

point
4
of the I,
J, and K axes
The signed distance from start

point to center
Arc radius
Arc radius
Feed rate
Velocity along arc
Direction of
rotat ion
End point
Meaning
Command
Plane selection
position
^'
tJ
Distance from start

point to center
Tvro
XY plane
(CW)
(CCW)
point position in the work

coordinate system
end
The view is from the positive direction of the Z axis (Y axis or X axis) to the
negative direction on XY plane (ZX plane or \Z plane) in the right hand
Cartesian coordinate system.
ir.
I \\
lcor\
----\
I
\\co3
"o'
G02\
G17
Clockwise and counterclockwise directions
-27-
The end point of an arc ls specified by address X, Y or Z, and is expressed as

an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental
value, the coordinate of the end point which is viewed from the start point of
the arc is specifled. The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for
the X, Y, and Z axes, respeetively. The numerical value following I, J, or K,
however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start
point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and
G9 I, as shor,rn below.
End
point (x, y)
End point (2, x)
xl
z1
| lt
t_
I
tart
nnin t
j
Center
nni 11i
Start point
Center
I-_--l
Programming for circular interpolation
I,
be signed according to the direction.

radius can be specified with address'R instead of specifying the center by
I, J ,orK.
The command format is as follows:
J , and K must
The
c02
c03'
In this case, two types of arcs (one arc is less than 180o, and the other is
more than 180") are considered, as shown in the figure below. hrhen an arc
exceeding 180o is commanded, the radius must be specified with a negative value.
(Examp le
).
For arc (!) (1ess than 180')

c9
rc02x60. 0Y20. 0R50. 0F300. 0:
For arc O, (gr"ffithan

c9 IG02X60. 0Y20. 0R-50.
i8o')
F300. 0;
r=50mm
End point
\-..._
-28-
--/
i!.il!,1:
ir'r.1; I
l:i,,,,";. 'i.
'
(Program examPles)
Y axis
00
60
40
p'
90 r20 140
The above tool path can be programmed as follows:
l) In absolute programming
x200.0 Y 40.0 z0
G92
;
c90# c03 x140.0 Y100.0 r-60.0 F300. :
c02 x120.0 Y 60.0 I=50.0
;
0
X axis
200
or
G92 X200.0 Y 40.0 Z0

t
c90 G03 xr40.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ;
c02 xl20.0 Y 60.0 R50.0
;
2) In incremental programming
c9l c03 x-60.0 Y 60.0 r-60.0 F300. ;
c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 r-50.0
;
or
c91 c03 X-60.0 Y 60.0 R 60.0 F300. i
c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 R 50.0
;
The feed rate in circular interpolation is equal to the feed rate specified by
the F code, and the feed rate along the arc (the tangegtial feed rate of the
arc) is controlled to be the specified feed rate.
(Note 1) I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted.
(Note 2) If X, Y, and Z are all omitted or if the end point is located at the
same posi-tion as the start point, and when the center is commanded by
I, J, and K, an arc of 360o (a complete circle) is assumed.
c02I
; (A complete circle)
when nTs-@
an arc of 0o is programmed.
GO2R
; (The cutter does not move.)
(Note 3) The error between the specified feed rate and the actual tool feed rate
' is *2 - or less. However, this feed rate is measured along the arc
after the cutter compensation iS applied.
(Note 4) If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified'simultaneously, the arc
specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignored.
(Note 5) If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm j,s
displayed.
4.5
Helical Cuttins (G02, c03)
Helical
interpolation
is
enabled by specifylng another axis which moves

interpolation by circular commands. That is,
synchronously with the circular

the Lool can be moved helicallv.
ur/
,G02.
tGo3J
\
c18 ,G02
'c03'
.G02.
cl9 tco:
J
rr\
Lr
!U
rR
tI
,RtJ-
}Y
lv
-29-
t
t
'
l, l,t:-t1,
The command method is to simply add a move
interpolation
command
axes.
axis which is not circular
An F command specifies a feed rate along a circular arc.

rate of the linear axis is as follows:
Thereforc - the feed

t
!rr\
-- " Length of Linear axis

Length of circular arc
Determine the feed rate
various limit values.
so
the linear axis feed rate
does
not exceed any of the
Tool path
The feedrate along the circumference

of two circular interpolated axes is
the specified feedrate.
(Note l) Cutter compensation 1s applied only for a circular arc.

(Note 2) Tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a helical
cutting is commanded.
(Note 3) The additional axes can be specified as not the circular axes but the
linear axes.
-30-
4.6
Equal Lead Thread Cutting (G33)
Equal lead straight threads can be cut with a G33 command.

The command shown below is used for thread cutting and the lead is specified
numerically following address F.
In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path 1n rough cutting
through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when the
positlon coder mounted on the spindle detects a I-turn signal, threading is
started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is unchaged for
repeated thread cutting. NoEe that the spindle speed must remain constant from
roilph
crrttins
!vu6rr
fIMIDTT
{-.'^L
th-^..-L
L!r!vu6tr
^..!+ jh-
'I
LULLflr6.
l!
f -^r
lluL,
inCOrt.eCt
OCCur.
I
thread leaO will
etc. will produce somewhat incorrect
In general, the lag of the servo system,

leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To compensate for
this, a threading length somewhat longer than required should be specified.
Programmable lead legnth is as follows:
Least
lrfafrin
0.001
innrrf
mm
0.0001
Tnnh
i nnrr
mm
0.000I inch
l-
Lead range
command increment
0.00001 inch
Fl -
F50000
F50000
(0.01 - 500.00
mm)
(0.01 - 500.00
mm)
F1
Fl - F500000
(0.000i - 50.0000 inch)
Fl - F99999
(0.0001 - 9.9999 inch)
The spindle speed is limited as follows:

I <K
Maximum feedrate
Thread Ieao
Allowab le number of positlon
coder revolutions
p.
spindle speed (rpn)

or inch
Maximum feed rate:
mm/min or inch/mj,n
The smaller value of the maximum command value in the feed
per minute or of the maximum feed rate subj ect to
restriction by motors and machine tool.
Allowab le number of position coder revolutions: 4000 rpm (position coder A)
6000 rpm (position coder B)
(Note I ) Spindle speed is read continuously from the position coder mounted on
the spindle and converted into the feed raEe per minute to feed the
tool.
(Note 2) Feedrate override is applied to the converted feedrate, but is fixed to
Thread lead
(Note
(Noce
mm
1002.
3)
4
The converted feed rate applied with the feed rate clamp.
The feed hold is ineffective during thread cutting. If the feed hold
button is pushed during thread cuEting, the tool stops at the end point
of the block immediately following the block in which Ehread cutting is
completed.
5.
FEED FUNCTIONS
5.1
Rapid Traverse
Positioning is done in rapi<i

There is no need to program
the parameter (parameter No.
Rapid traverse rate can be
panel:
motion by the positjoning command (G00).

rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set in
05lB to No. 0521) (per axis).
overridden by a switch on the machine operator I s
F0, 25, 50, 1002.

F0: A eonstant speed set by parameter (data No. 0533)
5.2
Cutting Feed Rate
Feed speed
are
of llnear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02, G03)

with numbers after the F code.
conmanded
5.2.1 Tangential
speed constant control
In cutting feed' it is controlled so that speed of the tarrgential dlrectlon is

always the same commanded speed.
Starting point
*--
\ \E-
\
/t\
End point
./
rr
/', \l
/ 'xl l\at|
L_J
Fx
Starting
point
End point
Fz
For arc
F:
Fx:
Fz:,
Feedrate along tangential dlrection

Feedrate component along X-axis direction
Feedrate component along Z-axls direction
F
G;ryfrt
5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp
cuttlng feed rate uPper liurit can be set as parameter (data No.
rf the
actual cutting feed rate (feed rate with override) is conrmanded0527).
exceedlng
the
upPer limit, it i-s clanped to a speed not exceedlng the upper
linit
value.
The clamped va'lues is set in mr/rnin or inch/urln.
Except during acceleration or deceleration, the cNC arithmetlc
error for the
command value of the feed rate is hrithin +22. This error
is
applied
to the tine
measured for the tool to move a dlstanG of 500 mm or
more'under
stationary)
conditions.
-32-
5.2.3
Feed per minute (G94)
With the per
tool feed rate per minute is directlv
minute feed mode G94,

commanded bv numerical value after F.
Feed per minute
(mm/min or inch/min)
5.2.4
Feed per revolution (G95)
Specify feed per revolution mode by G95.

Following F, direetly specify the feed of tool per spindle revolution. It is
necessary to mount a position coder on the spindle.
c95 is modal. After G95 is specified, it is effective until G94 (feed per
minute) is specified.
Feed per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Per revolution feed
(Note) When the rotation speed of the position coder is I rpm or less, the feed
rate becomes nonunif orm.
In cases where rnachining is not adversely affected by feed rate
nonuniformity, the position coder can be used at I rpm or less.
Though the degree of nonuniformity differs according to the case, the
degree becomes large as the rotation speed becomes low under I rpm.
5.2.5 One-digit
F code feed
Specifying a one-digit number (1 to 9) following F produces a feed rate set

correspondingly to that number. The feed rate is set in advance as a parameter
for each number. F0 produces rapid traverse speed.
Rotating the manual pulse generator with the F l-digit feed rate change switch
on the machine operatorfs panel ON, increases or decreases the feed rate for the
currently selected number.
The increase or decrease of feed rate AF = -Fmax i per scale of manual pulse
I UUX
generat,or,
where, Fmax l:
feed rate upper limit for Fl-F4 (parameter setEing No. 583)
2: feed rate upper limit for F5-F9 (parameter setting No. 584)
value of l-127 (parameter setting No. 216)
X:any
Fmax
-33-
The feed rate set or altered is kept even while the power 1S
feed rate is displayed on the CRT.
When plural manual pulse generators are available, use the
generator without fail.
off.
The current
Ist manual pulse
Format of G94 and G95 is shown below.

Feed per minute
Feed per revolution
Meaning
Tool feed amount oer minute
Address
G code
G94
c95
Override
Overrides can be applied.
Clamp
The feed rate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.

The clamp value is set by the machine tool builder.
(The feedrate with an override applied is clamped.)
Value
Tool feed amount per

revolution
5.3 Override
Refer to machine tool builderfs manual for detai,ls of overrides.
a
5.3.1
Feed rate
5.3.2
Rapid traverse override
override
The per minute feed (G94) can be overridden using the switch on the machine
operatorrs panel by:
0 to 1502 (per every IO7") .
Feed rate override cannot. be applied to functions in which overrj-de 1s . inhibited.
Rapid traverse rate can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs
panel by:
!'0,
25 , 50, 1002.
F0: A constant speed set by parameter (data No.
!
r
i
i
-34-
0533)
5.4 Automatic
Acceleration/Deceleration
5.4.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Acceleration and deceleration 1s performed when st.arting and ending movement,

resulting in smooth start and stop.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feed rate changes, so
change in speed is also srnoothly done.
It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration when
programming.
Rapid traverse:
Liner acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameEer

set per axis) (Dara No. 0522 to 0525)
Cuttlng feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter set conmon to al1 axes) (Data No. 0530)
Jogging feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter ser per axis) (Data No. 0601 to 0604)
Rate after acceleration/deceleration
Rate after interpolation
control
Servo motor
distribution
(Interpoiation)
Pulse
Acceleration
/deceleration
con!rol
R.Bte after
interpolation
Rate after acceieration/decelera tion

control
Rate after acceleration/deceleration

control
Rapid traverse
F'
RMAX.
T
-R
Rapid traverse
Accelerat ion,/
deceleration time
constant
(data No. 0522 to
0s 2s)
t* -l t*"
-35-
JOG feed
Jog feed rate
I
Speed
'J' Jog feed time constant

(data No. 0530)
FJ
F1
*Ty
Time
Fr: Low feed rate after

" deceleration
(dara No. 0548)
TJ
F:c Feed rate, Dry run

race
F:c Acceleration/
deceleration
time constant
(data No. 0530)
5.5
Speed Control at Corners of Blocks
For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the acceleration or

deceleration is applied in feed start and feed stop, automatically with a time
constant so that the machine tool system is not jarred. Therefore, this need
not be considered when programming.
Because of automatic acceleration and deceleration, corners are not cut sharply.
In this case' cieceleration command (G04;) rnust be commanded at the corner to cut
sharp.
For example, if the tool moves along the X axis only in one block and along the
Z axis in the next block' the feed rate for the X axis decelerates while motion
along the Z axis accelerates and the actual tool path is as follows.
Insert a deceleration command here
'/
Programmedpath
Actual tool path
If the decele.ration command is j-nserted, the actual tool path matches the propath. The faster the feed rate and the larger the acceleration/
decereration tiine constant, the larger the error at the corner.
In circular lnterpolation, the actual arc radius is smaller than that of the
prograuuned arc. (See the Appendix. 3) This error can be mininized by rnaking
the acceleration/deceleration time constant of feed rate sma11.
grarnmed
-36-
(Note
I)
The following chart shows feed rate changes between blocks

information specifying different types of movement.
New
block
Prev ious
-----_r_...--. block
Posi t
-------\
ioning
Posi t ioning
Feed
Not moving
Not moving
x
Feed
of
The next block is executed after commanded rate has decelerated to

zeTo.
The next block is executed sequentially so that the feed rate is not
changed by very much.
However in the block G09 is specified or G6l mode, the next block is
not execut,ed until the feed rate is decelerated and reached to zero.
5.5.1 Exact stop (G04)
Move command in blocks commanded wiEh the command (G04;) decelerates, and
-in-nnqi t.i nn nhonI is performed. This command (G04; ) is not necessary for
deceleration at Ehe end point for positioning and in-position check is also done
r.l ^ ^ 1 1 ,,
duLUrudLrLdLLy.
This func.tion is used when sharp edges are required
piece corners in cutting feed.
for work-
r'Nnro I ) rrTn-nncigiontt means that the feed motor is within the specif ied range.
(This range is determined by machine tool builder.)
5.5.2 Exact
l.lhen G6 I
stop mode (G61)
is commanded, deceleration is applied to the en? point of cutting block

and in-position check is performed per block thereafter. This G6l is valid till
G61+ (cutting mode) , G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping mode) is
commanded.
5.5.3 Cutting mode (G64)

When G64 is commanded,
deceleration at the end point of each block thereafter is

not performed, and cutting goes on to the next block. This command is valid
till G6t (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping
mode) is commanded.
However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in-position check is
performed in the following case;
I) Posj-tioning mode (G00, c60)
2) Block with exact stop check (G09)
3) Next block is a block without movemenc cornmand
5.5.4 Tapping mode (G63)
When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded as l00Z)'
and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not decelerate at the end
of block to transfer to the next block. This command is valid till G6I (exact
stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cut-ting mode) is commanded.
5.5.5 Automatic corner override (G62)

When G62 is commanded during
cutter compensation, cutting feed rate is

automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time of the
corner is thus controlled so as no! to increase. This command is valid till G61
(exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is comnanded.
If cutting is made at a programmed feedrate at inner circular region during the
execuEion of the cutter compensation, Ehe cutter may be overloaded to rough cut
surfaces. This function automatically decelerates the tool movement to lighten
the cutter load at these region so as to obtain clean cut surfaces.
1) Automatic override at inner corners
a) Operating conditions
The feedrate is automatically overridden when all the following
conditions are satisfied in both blocks before and after a corner.
i) G code of group 0I is G0I, G02, or G03
ii) The offset quantity is not 0 in the offset mode.
i.ii) The offset is made inside at a corner to be machined.
iv) An axis moves along the offset plane.
v) Neither G4I nor G42 command is included in the subsequent block.
vi) Neither G4l nor G42 command is included in the previous block, or the
block is not started up, if either command is included.
vii) An inner corner is smaller than 0 preset by a parameter.
The angle is judged about the programmed path.
i) Straight line - straight line
Programmed path
Cutter center path
ii)
iii)
Straight line-arc
Arc - straight line
iv) Are -
arc
-38-
t'lhen 0 5 0p, the corner is regarded as inside.

0p value is set by parameter (No. 0215) (2S0pSl78 unir.)
rf I is almost, equal to gp, the decision may include an error wirhln
0.001".
b) Motion area
When a corner is judged as inside,
the feedrate is overridden from the

distance range within Le of the block on this side from the intersect.j-on
of the corner to the distance range within Ls of the next block from the
intersection of the corner. Distances Ls and Le are linear distances
from a point on the cutter center path to the intersection of the
corner. Le and Ls are set by parameters (No. 0580 and 0581), respectively.
hogrammed path
.-4:
.,,rrA, uviltcr
plrL
Lurlsr
ôhro? -.rh
L
-
-a/
\-
\- -
The feedrate is overriden from point a to point b.
Programnred path
Cutter center path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to b.

In case of an arc, this override function to the end point of a block is
effective when the following condition is satisfied.
1) The distance is within Le.
2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or
in the next quadrant.
The override function to the
end point of a block is effective when the

following condition is satisfied.
i) The distance is within Ls.
2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or
in the next quadrant.
-39-
(ExarnpIe)
In case of disc
/'/"/a,i\
'/
\,V
'/
",r.'l'r,
./
L,l
Progranrnrerd path
\v
\h
/"
\' -
--/
center path
Regarding program @ of an arc, the feed.rate is overridden from point a

to point b and from point c to point d.
(Note) Ls and Le are the distances along the arc in case of 10/fl series, while
they are the distances between point a and b and between c and d along
the straight line in case of 0 series.
c) Overri-de quantity
The override guantity is set by parameter No. 0214
l<override quanrity (I7. srep)s100(%)
It is also effective for the dry run and FI digit coumand.
In case of an F4 digit command, actual feedrate becomes
F x (internal corner override) x (feedrate override)
d) Whether internal corner override is effective or not
Whether the internal corner is overridden or not i,s selectable by G
codes. G62 is added to G61 and G64 in group 15 as shown in the fo11owing table. These G codes are also related to whether the exact stop
check mode is effective or not.
Exact stoD check
mode
Internal corner override
G61
Effective
Ineffective
c62
Ineffective
Ef
c64
Ineffective
Ineffective
fect ive
(Note 1) G64 functions when povrer is turned on or under the clear condition.
(Note 2) Specify G09, if you want to check the exact stop in G62 mode.
(Note 3) The internal circular cutt.ing feedrate change described in (2)
always effective without being affected by these G codes.
-40-
;tt'
1e
t.
I,
ts
b
i,
I
Internal circular cuEting feedrate change

In case of the internal offset circular cutting, the feedrate 1n the
programmed path is se! to the specified F by setting actual feedrate to F x
Rc/Rp (where, Rc: Cutter center path radius
Rp: progranmed rbdius) wirh
reference to the specified feedrate (F).
This change is also effective for dry run and Fl digit command.
(Example 1)
ogrammed path
However, if
Rc is very small as compared with Rp, nc/Rp = 0, causing the

cutter to stop. Accordingly, the minimum reduction ratio (lDR) is set to
nake the actual feedrate. F x (MDR) when Rc/npSlOn.
MDR is set by parameter No. 02i3.
I SI,TDR ( 1Z sreP) S100
This is also applicable to Fl digit and dry run.

The reduction ratio of the automatic override at internal corners is not
affected by MDR.
(Note 1) If the automatic override at internal corner overlaps the internal
circular cutting, actual feedrate becomes as folfows.
FxRc/Rpx(override at corner)x(feedrate override)
5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop
(G04)
With the G04 cornmand, shifting to the next block can be delayed.
Shifting to the next block can be delaved for the commanded minutes.
Format
Per second
c94c04
dwe11
{:.
A
orX
-}
When
P or X
is
: Dwell time coruranded in
seconds
9999.999 sec In incrernent system 1/10,

9999.9999 sec)
omiEted, t.his command (G04;) is turned to exacE stop command.
(0.001
0.0001
-41 -
6. REFERENCE
POINT
point is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can

be
moved
easily
by the reference point return function.
The reference
Y
I
o
Re ference poin
6.1 Automatic
Reference Point Return (G28, G2g)
6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28)

G28rP _;
This command specifies automatic return
to the reference point for the specified

axes. IP
is an intgrmediate coordinate and is conmanded by absolute or
incrementaTvalue. Thg intermediate coordinate specified in thls block are
stored in memory.
The G2B block is used to position the tool at the interurediate point of all
specified axes at the rapid traverse speed, then move to the reference point at
the rapid traverse rate. rf the machine lock has not been set, the Reference
Return lamp goes on.
Positioning to the interrnediate point or to the refererice point is done at rapid
traverse rate of each axis. (Non linear positioning).
rn general, this command is usec for automatic tool changing (ATC).
Therefore,
for safety, the cutter rad.ius compensation, ."
should
b"
"".r".11"d
(Note 1) when the G28 command is specified when manual return
to the reference
polnt has not been performed after the power has been
turned on; the
movement from the intermediate point is the same as in manual return
to
the reference point. In this ease, the direction from the intermediate
point is equal to that for return to reference point selected by paraDeter (No. 0003 ZMX, ZI,IR, ZIIZ).
(Note 2) The coordinate value specified in G28 command is memori zed for
all axes
as is tlte coordinate value of the intermediate point. In othr words,
for axes not specified in the G28 block, the cooidinate value memorlzed
for intermediate point earlier is Eaken as the coordinate value of the
intermediate point for the axj-s.
Example:
NIXI. OZ2.O;
N2G28X40.0;
N3G28260.0;
Intermediate point (40.0,

)
Intermediare poinr (40.0, 60.0)
-42-
6.1.2 Automatic return from reference point
G29P
(G29)
_;
This command positions the tool at the cornmanded position via the intermediate
point of a conunanded axj-s . In general, it is commanded immediately following
in" cz8 ccmmand or G30.
For incremental programming, the cornmand value specifies the incremental value
from the intermediate Point.
In the G29 block operation, all commanded axes are positioned at thg intermediate point defined by the previous G2B or G30 corunand, and then to the
commanded point from the intermediate point at the rapld traverse speed.
Application example of G28 and G29
Reference poinl
Tool is changed
ai R point.
Intermediate point
X (rnm)
0
(c91)
G28X1300.0Y700.0;
Ttltl.
300
I 300
800
(Program A to B)
G29X1800.0Y300.0; (Program B to C)
As shov,rn in the example, the prograuuer is not required to calculate the actual
nove distance from the intermediate point to the reference point.
(Note l) llhen the work coordinate system is changed after the tool reaches the
reference point through the intermediate point by the G28 or G30 com-
mandr'the intermediate point also shifts to a ner^r coordinate system.

If G29 is then commanded, the tool moves to the commanded position
through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the new coordinate system.
{
Si
s
g
S.
6.2
Reference Point Return Check (GZ7l
A reference point is fixed on the rnachine tool and the cutter can be moved to
that point by the reference point return function.
The G27 reference point return check functlon checks whether or not the program
returns to the reference point normal1y, as programmed.
G27lF
:
This comnnnd-positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the
reference point, the reference point return lamp lights up and the next block is
executed. However, if the position reached by the tool is not the reference
Point, an alarm is displayed.
-43-
(uote t) In an offset mode, the position to be reached by the tool with the G27
cornmand is the posiEion obtained by adding the offset va1ue.
Therefore, if the position with the offset value added is not the
reference point, the lamp does not light up, but an ararm is displayed
instead. Usually, cancel offsets before G27 is commanded.
(Note 2) when the machine tool system is an inch system wit.h metric input, the
reference poinr return lamp may also light up even if the programmed
position is shifted from the reference point by lp. This is because
the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than
its least command increment.
(Note 3) If G27 is commanded with machine lock on, the reference point return
check is not done.
6.3 2nd,3rd,4th
Reference Point Return (G30)
(P2\
II
c30 {P3)
tl
lP4.r
P2,
_-t
P4: Selection of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point

If omitted, the 2nd reference point is selected.
This com-and returns the commanded axis to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point
automatically through the specified position. Each reference point return LED
lights after completion of the return.
The positions of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point are determined by
presetting the distance from the reference point as a pararDeter (Dat.a No. 0735
to No. 0738, No. 0780 to,A787) during field adjustment. This funcrion can be
used after the first reference point return has been completed. This function
is the same as G28 reference point return, except that this function returns the
tool to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point instead of the primary reference
point.
If G29 1s commanded imrnediately following G30, the tool is positioned to the
point commanded by G29 through the intermediate point commanded by G30. This
motion is the same as thac by the G29 command following the G28 command.
The G30 command is generally used when the automatic tool changer (ATC) position
differs from the reference point.
(Note I) At least one manual reference point return or automatic reference point
return must be performed by the G28 command after the power supply is
turned on, prior to issuing G30 command.
(Note 2) Like the G2B command, cancel the cutter compensation, and tool length
offset before thi-s command is executed.
-44-
7,
COORDINATE SYSTEM
the position to be reached by the tool is taught, the CNC moves the tool to
that position. The position to be reached by the tool is given as'a coordinate
value in a coordinate system.
The position to be reached by the tool id commanded with a coordinate value of
one of the coordi-nate systems, as required. The coordinate value consi-sts of
one component for each program axis.
If there are t.hree program axes (X, Y, and Z), the coordinate value is expressed
as follows:
I^lhen
I 40.0
Position of
tool when X40.0Y30.0235.0
is commanded
Since the number of program axes, that is, the number of components for the
coordinate value, varies with the machine tools, the coordinate value is
referred to as IP
in this manual.
7.1
Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, GS4-G59)
A coordinate system used for work machining is called the work coordinate
system. The work coordinate system is set by either of the following method:
l) Using G92 command.
2) Using G54 ro G59 command.
In case of 1),'a work coordinate system is established by specifying coordinate
values after G92.
In case of 2), six work coordinate systems are preset from CRT/MDI panel as
setting data and any of them can be selected by G54 to G59 command.
7.1.'l
Setting
work coordinate system - Method by G92

system
1) Establishing coordinate
G92]p
Thi;-;*","nd-Lstablishes rhe work coordinare sysrem so that a certain point.

of the tool, for example the tool tip, becomes Ip in the established work
coordinate system.
A.y subsequent absolute commands use the DosiEion in Ehis work coordinaEe
system.
-45-
(Exarnple 1)
Meet the programming

start point with the tool
tip and command G92 at
the start of program.
c92X25.2223.0;
(Exanple 2)
Coordinate system setting by the G92X600.021200.0, command

(When a start point is based on the base point of the tool holder)
As shovrn above, G92 is also used to align the base point of the tool holder with
the start poinf and to establish a coordinate system at the beginning of the
program. If an absolute command is issued, the base point moves to the commanded position.
In order to move the tool tip to the comrnanded position, the
difference from the tool tip to the base point is compensated by tool length
offset.
(Note 1) If a coordinaie system is set with the G92 comrnand in offset mode, the
coordinate system is set so that. the position before tool length
compensation is applied becomes that specified by G92.
(Note 2) In the cutter radius compensation, offset is temporarily cancelled by a
G92 command.
-46-
' 'lj:.:i
+,#.;
j.;
Automatic coordinate system setting
If rtlrr is seE to the parameter APRS (No. 0010), the work coordinare systeu is
se! automatically when the manual reference poinc return has been completed.
In this case' set the distance o, B, and y to the parameters No. 0708, No. 0709
and No.0710 so that the machine position (top of the standard tool or the
standard point of holder) after manual reference point return becomes X = o, Y =
B and Z = "y.
It is equivalent to command the following.
G92X a
Zy;
.2 Setting work coordinate system - Method by G54 - G59

l) Setting work coordinate system
Six work coordinaEe systems can be set.
These six systems are decided by setting the distances of each axis from the
machine zero point to the zero points of the coordinate systems, (i.e. the
work zero point offset value, by using the CRT/MDI panel).
7.1
Work coordinate
Work coordinate
Work coordinate
Work coordinate
system
system 2
systern 3
system 4
EOF54
Work coordinate
system 5
Work coordinate
system 6
ZOFSI: Work zero point offset value

of work coordinaEe system I
Z0FS2: Work zero point offset value
of work coordinate system 2
Z0FS3: Work zero poi.nt offset value
of work coordj-nate system 3
re
-47-
2)
Shifting work coordinate svstem

Six work coordinate systems can be shifted bY a specified value (external
work zero point offset value).
Work coordinate
systern
Work coordinate
Work coordinate
system 4
systern 3
ZOF'S
ZOFS
ZOFS
ZOFS I
Work coordinate
system
ZOFS
I'XOFS
ZOFS
Machine zero point
Wotk coordinate
systenr 6
EXOFS:
External work zero point offset value
Elternal work zero poig,t offset value can be changed in three ways.
a Using CRT/MDI panel
Using program (cl0)
Q]
(f Using external work c oordinate system shift function.
An input sign enables you to change work coordinate systems. Refer to
machine tool builder's manual for detiils.
(Note l) The external work zero point offset amount can be
set within the
range of 0 and +7.999 nm or 0 and +0. 799 inch for every axis.
(Note 2) When G92 i.s sp&ifi.ed afrer a shlft value has been
specified, the
shift value is ignored.
(Exarnple)
when G92x100.0280.0;
is courmanded, a work coordinate system in which present

tool position is x = 100.0, z - 80.0 is establishei,
irrespective of set
shift value.
7.1.3
Selecting work coordinate system (Gb4 Gsg)

Six coordinate systems proper to- the machine tool are set in advance, permitting
the selecrion of any of rhem by G54 ro G59.
G54
L{ork coordinate system I
G55 .
I^/ork coordinate system 2
G56 .
Worli coordinate system 3
G57
Work coordinate system 4
G58
Work coordinate system 5
G59 .
Liork coordinate system 6
The six coordinate systems are determined by setting distances (work
zero offset
varues) in each axis from the machine i"to point to their respective
zero
points
-48-
,
.
, . rr=:,;f;_;
i:!;'.
I :.;
,,1.
Example: G55G00X20.02100. 0;
40.0220.0;
In the above example, positioning is made to positions ({=20.0, Z=100.0) and

({=40.0e Z=20.0) in work coordinate sysrem 2.
Where the tool is positi.oned on the machine depends on work ,"ro poirrt offset
values.
Work coordinate
System 2
Work coordinate
System I
4
--l ( 40.0 , 20.0 )

--1---1(20.o,loo.o)
0.0
20.0
20.0
I 00.0
Machine zero point
7.1.4
When
Changing work coordinate system by program command
(Gs4
lP
eoordinate
command
can be used to
systemlto6are
established after
point
reference
return after Ehe
po!r'er. is turned on.
When the power is
turned onr G54
coordinate system
is selected.
G59)
they are to be moved for each program, a progranmed
shift them.
1) Using Gl0
clO L2 Pg
p=0
Work
P/ = Gs-'(
: External work zero point offset value.

DL= 6j-f
I to 6: Correspond to work coordinate system 1 to 6. P)
= 6fL
: Work zero point offset value of each axis.
lP
:' Ci'l
Dd
2) Using G92
P"rJfT
_;
ce2P
By this command, six !/ork coordinate systems move to creatf a new work
coordinate system so that the tool tip becomes the coordinate value IP
commanded by G92.
Since the distance shifteC at this time is added to al& subsequent work zero
point offset values, all work coordinate systems move by Ehe sarne distance.
If G92X100Y100; is
commanded when the
Y'
tool is positioned
ar (200, 160) in
G54 mode, work
coordinate system I
(X' - Y') shifted
by vector A is
created.
100
200
i{hen creating a new work coordinate system with the G92 command, a certain point
of the tool becomes a certain coordinate value; therefore, the new work
coordinate system can be determined irrespective of the old work coordinate

system. If the G92 command is used to determine a start point for machining
based on workpieces, a nerd coordinate system can be created even if there is an
error in the old work coordinate system. If the relative relationship among the
G54 to G59 work coordinate systems are correctly set at the beginni-ng, all work
coordinate systems become new coordinate systems as desired.
-49-
I 2000
G54 work
coordinate
system
G55 rvork
coordinate
s),stem
z'
t
Work zero point

shift value created
by G92
New rvork zero point

offset value
f\
Work zero point offset value

specified by parameter
L'
-Z
01d work coordinate system

New work
coordinate system
If G92X600.021200.0; is commanded,(shov,rn ia the dlagram above) when the G54 work

coordinate system is specified, the G55 work coordinate system is set in so that
the black point on the tool shor,un in the diagram above becomes position (600.0,
f200.0); provided that the relative relationship between the G54 and G55 work
coordinate systems is set correctly.
Therefore, :ln loading pallets aE te/o different positions, the two pallet
eoordinate systems are set as G54 and G55 work coordinate systems. hrhen the
coordinate system of one pallet is moved by the G92 command, the coordinate
system of the other pa1let is also moved in the same manner, provided that the
relative relationship of the two \^/ork coordinate systems is set correctly.
Accordingly, a wbrkpiece placed on two pallets can be machined with the same
program by merely specifying either G54 or G55.
7.1.5 Setting
I
and display of work zero point offset amount
) Display
-pr.""
a)
l-oFSETl.
b) Press FFacfr tey to display ttlnlork Coordinates" screen
"woRKtt. )
-50-
(Press soft k.y
c) The work
zero point offset amount is displayed on two pages: press

k"y, and select a required page.
t{Xt<
CIRDII.fITES
Ml.
_ax
z
A
01
(E1B 1.810
f.
MTR
Y
z
A
"PAGE',
L.4
-3.s@
o.&t
a.@
MTA
a.w
a.gzg
a.em
a.m
@,x
z
A
9-m
6X
t4.@
ta,w
L5..m
9.W3
9.WA
9.@B
o.s@
ADRS.
11:S:45
l.rDt
lsr.srll,,*-1 tr*.ln
The following is displayed on each page.
i) Page t
00: Shift amount of work coordj.nate system
01: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system I (c54)
02: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 2 (G55)
03: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 3
(C56)
'.\
2)
11/ Eage I
04: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate sistem i (c57)
05: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system 2
(c58)
06: Work zero point offset amount of work coord.inate system 3 (c59)
Set t ing
a) Adjust the cursor to the number to be changed or set.
Step I
Cursor
Press [Tl E.
cursor
next
b)
7.1.6
A continuous push on this key moves -the cursor. Move the

over the Pa8e, and the screen will be changed to the screen
on the
Page.
Step 2
Key inl No. IINUMBER ll mTur-l
in.E: l-y .l,.[ z I or [E_l
T:y
(Note l) rhe workEoordiiii'tE system
range of 0 - +7.999 mmor0
System variables
amount can be entere

+0. 7999 inch.
within the
It is possible to know the offsec amount by reading the value of system

variables tt2500 to ll2806 for rhe work offser amount, and
it
is
also
possible
to
modify the offset amount by substituting a value for system variable
/ll.
51
Work offset No.

Y
Work
External work zero point offset
{t2500
c54
It2sor
c59
{t2506
c54
c59
112606
ll27 00
ll27 0r
c59
ll27 06
Ext.ernal work zero point offset
#2800
c54
ll28Ar
amount
112600
It260L
I
c54
c59
7.2
offset
#2806
Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)
A plane in which circular interpolation and cutter compensation is performed can

be selected with one of th,ese G codes:
ci7 .
XY plane
ZX plane
c18 .
c19.
YZ plane
If GI7, Gl8, or Gl9 is not specified in a b1ock, the plane remains unchanged.
(Example)
G18X
ZX plane
The plane
is not changed (ZX plane)
The movement command is not related to the plane selectj-on.

For example, when G177. ; is specified, the Z axis does not exist in the XY
plane. OnIy the XY plane is selected and Z axLs moves independently of the
plane.
-52-
' :,t,::-
,:i#;!ri
B.
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION
8.1
Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, Gg1)
There are t\,to ways to corunand travels of the axes; the absolute command, and the
incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point
is programmed; in the incremental conunand, move distance of the axis itself is
programmed. , G90 and G91 are used to couunand absolute or incremental command,
respectively.
G90: Absolute comrnand
G9l : Incremental cormand
100.0
For the above figure, incremental conmand prograrnming results in:

c9l x-60.0 Y40.0;
While absolute command programnring results in:
c90 x40.0 Y70.0;
8.2
Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21)
Either inch or metric input can be selected bv G code.

Unit
G code
Inch
c20
0.0001 inch
Millimeter
c21
0.001
systems
mn
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program. The unit systems of the following
itens can be changed with G codes:
(l) Feedrate comrnanded by F code
(2) Positional command
(3) Offset value
(4) Unit of scale for manual pulse generaEor
(5) Ilovement distance in step feed
(6) Some parameters
(Note l) IÎhen the power is turned oo, the NC status is the same as that held
before the power r{as turned off.
(Note 2) GzO and G2l must not be swltched during a program.
(Note 3) When the machine unit and the input unit systems are different, the
maxlmum error is half of the least command increment. This error is
not accumulated.
(Note 4) When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (c2l) and vice versa,
the offset value must be reset according to the input unit.
I
-53-
8.3
Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type Decimal Point Programming
This control can input numerical values with a decimal point. However, some
addresses cannot use a decimal point. A decimal point may be used with rnm,
inches or second values. The location of decimal point is mm, inch or second.
ZL5.O 215 millimeters or Zl5 inches.
F10.0 10 uun/min. or l0 inch/min.
G04X1 . D,rell for one second
The following addresses can be used with a decj-mal point iXrYrZrIrJrKrQ,
R, 4-th, F.
Use a parameter to select input method; whether to input by pocket calculator
type input, or by the former type decirnal point input.
(Example )
Program
command
Pocket calculator type

decimal point input
Former type decimal

point input
000 mm
000 nm
lmm
1000 nm
xl 000
xl 000.
1
1
(I{ote i) In the dwell comrLand, decimal point can be used wj-th address X but not
with address P. (This is because P is also used for a sequence
number. )
(Note 2) The appropriate G code should be specified before the numerical values
are specified {n one block.
l) G20; (inch dimension)
Xl.0G04;.......
Because the value Xt.0 is not regarded as the
number of seconds, buE the distance of motion (in
inches), Xl0000G04 is assumed resulting in dwelling
for f0 seconds. Indication also changes from 1.0
to 10.0 when G04 is input.
G04Xt.0 ..
This is regarded as G04X1000 and dwell is performed
tor a seconcl .
(Note 3) There is a great difference in values with and without the decimal
point, when programned by conventional decimal point progra'nming.
G2L ; (rniillmeter dimensions)
]ll.
,!L
mm
X0.001
G20; (inch dimension s)
..I
xt.
mn
Xl inch
X0.0001 inch
(Note 4) Values with and without a decimal point can be specified together.
Xl000223.7;
X10.Y22359;
(Note 5) Valuef less than the least input increment are rounded off.
When XL.23456 is specified, XI.234 is assumed in rnillimeter input and
XL.2345 is assumed in inch inpuE.
Also, the number of digits must not exceed the ma:<imum number of digits
a1lowed.
XL.23456789
XL.2345678 ...
This is an error because it exceeds B digits.

This is not an error because it is within 8 disits.
Jq
$-.o"
':iit;'i'1ffi'
li*i'
(Note 6) When a number ryith a decimal point has been input, the number is converted into an integer of the least input increment.
Example:
X123400 (input in inches)

XI2.34
This converted integer is checked for its number of digits.
Example:
x123456.7
Xl23456700 (input in inch)
An alarm occurs because the converted integer exceeds 8
-55-
digits.
t,_
9. SPINDLE SPEED
9.1
FUNCTION
Spindle Speed Command
By specifying a numerical value following address S, a code signal and a strobe

signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This ls mainly used to control the
spindle speed.
An S code can be comnanded in a block. Refer to the machlne tool bui-lder's
manual for the number of digits com-andable with address S and the correspondence between the S codes and machine operations.
Llhen a move corrmand and an S code are specified in the same block, the commands
are executed in one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous executlon of the move cornmand and S function comnands.
ii) Executtng S function comrnands upon completion of move cornmand execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderrs specificatLons. In certain cases, these sequences nay be provided together in an NC
machine. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool bullder for details.
9.1.1
S 2-digit code
The spindle speed is controlled by address S and a following 2-digit number.

Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
(Note 1) htren a 2-digit S code is set in parameters and the 5-digit S code has
been commanded, the loner two digits are available.
9.1.2 S S-disit code
The spindle speed ls directly

number.
The unit
controlled by address S and a followlng 5 dlgits
of spindle spe& may differ depending on nachlne tool builder.
-56-
a,-.;.*lr
10. TooL
FUNCTTON
(T
FUNCTTON)
10.1 Tool Selection Command
By specifying a 2-d,igitl4-digit numerical value following address ;, a BCD

2-digit l 4-digit code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine
tool. This is mainly used to select tools on the machine.
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builder's
manual for the number of digits commandable with address T and Ehe correspondence between the T eodes and machine operations.
When a move conmand and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands
are executed in one of the fol|owing two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move conunand and T function commands.
(ii) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderts specifications. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
1O.2 Tool Life Management
Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency
of use) for each group being specified. The function of accumulating the tool
life of each group in use and selecting and using che next tool previously
sequenced in the same group, is called the tool life management function.
1) Setting the tool life dara

Tools used sequentially in each group and their respective tool life
previously set by the following format tape in the cNC equipment.
Tape format
____
c10T
Prog ram number
Star t of setting tool life data
_L
Meaning
AA
Pfo llowed by group No. (l to 128)

Lfo llowed by tool life (l to 9999) (Note
TAAAAH00D
(l)
TAAAAH00D
(2)
T followed by tool
No.
o"." for the next
group
H followed by tool length offset No.

D followed by cutter compensation No.
Tools are selected in the sequence of (1
through (2) ro (N).
rAAAA;ooD
(N)
P___LAAAA;
TAAAAH00D
GII
MN? /M?N\
\rrJv"
End
of setting tool life data
End
of Program
-57 -
are
The setting operation is as follows.
(i) Insert the aborze tape into the tape

reader and load the tape in the EDIT
mode, as wj.th an ordinary CNC tape.
The program will be registered in
the part program memory and will be
made ready for display and editing.
Part Program
(ii) Perform a cycle srarr operation in
storage &
the AUTO mode to run the program.
editine area
The data will be stored in the tool
life data area of the memory; at the
(ij) AUTO
mode
same time, the already existing tool
life data of all groups will be
cancelled and the life counters will
Presetting
be
cleared. Data once stored is not
Display
erased
by turning the power off.
Tool life data area
(iii) Executing a cycle start operation in
the TAPE mode instead of rhe
operation of (i), stores the program
contents directly from the tape onto
the tool life data area. In this
case, however, display and editing
cannot be done as i_n (i).
(Note) TAPE mode is not always prepared according to the machine tool builders
in 0 series.
(iii)
TAPE mode
(Note l) Whether tool life is to be indicated by time (minutes) or by frequency,

it is set by a parameter. (No. 0039-LCTH)
(tlote 2) Tool nurnber is up to 4 digits.
(Note 3) D and H codes are up to 254,
No. of groups
No. of tools
I6
r6
32
64
128
(Note 4) The number of groups and the number of tools per group Ehat can be
registered are combined by setting in one of four ways as follows:
In any combination, up to 256 tools can be registered. Combination i
is selected for up to 16 gruops, each with up to 16 toolsl combination
2 for.up to 32 groups, each wit.h up to 8 tools; and the tike. To
change a combination, change the parameter, then reset the tool groups.
If the tool groups are not reset, former tool groups are selected.
Therefore after changing parameter, execute the group setting program
^ ^^.i *
dXdllt.
(tlote 5) CJaes H and D, when not in use, can be omitted.

(Note 6) The same tool No. can appear at any frequency and at any place in the
set data.
-58-
The following is a concrete example of the tape format.
0000i
GlOL3 ;
P001L0150;
T001
lH02Dl3
Data
T0132H05D08;
T0068H14D16;
P002L1400 ;
T0061H15D07 ;
T024LH25D04 ;
T0134H17D03;
T0074H08D21;
P003L0700 ;
T0012H14D08;
T0202H22DO2 ;
of group I
Data of group
Data of group
Gll
M02
(Note 7) Group Nos. specified by P need not be consecutive. A11 registerable

groups need not be set, either.
(Note 8) When the optional tool life nanagemenr 5L2 pairs is combined, 53m of
part program length is used for the data storage. Accordingly, 320m
or more part progr.am storage is required.
(Note 9) The tool compensation numbers registered as the tool life management
data is linited to the tool compensation numbers permitted to the NC.
2) Specifying tool life data, etc. in a machining program

In a machining program, tool groups, eEc. are specified by using the T
as follows.
codes
Meaning I
Tape format
TVVVV
Group No.
MO6T n
Terminates the tool specified by

(Note 2) and begins to use the tool specified by
V V V V.
c43H
of tools which are to be used after

the next M06 command + tool life management
ignore No. (Note I)
L-l LJ L-I
6a
[99: makes the tool offset specified by group No.

{
effective.
l.00: Cancels tool length offset.
I
c4lH o
TAAAA
Makes cutter compensaEion, specified

[99:
t-gtonp No. effecEive.
i
l.OO: Cancels cutter compensation.
by
Uses a tool specified by A A A A after the next

M06 command.
MO6T
*or- r"rol
Terminates the tools ofVVVVandbegins

use the tool of A A
End of the machining program.
_59 _
to
(Note l) From T0000 to TAAAA, stipulated by the tool life management ignore No.
AAAA, are handled as ordinary T code commands, and no tool life
management is Performed. When the T code of AAAA plus the group No. is
designated, tool life management is executed for the related group.
The value of the tool life management ignore No. is set by a parameter.
When the value is 100, for example, from T0000 to T0I00 are output as
ordinary T codes; and when the T0t0l is designated, a T code of a tool,
which has not reached its life end among the tools of group 1, is
output.
(Note 2) The above tape format uses the tool return No. command method (Type A),
which requires a tool return command at the time of tool change. Type
B and Tvpe C are also available.
Concrete examples of the tape fomat when the tool life management ignore No. is
100 are described on each type.
Tvoe
lleaning
Format
Set the tool of group 01 to the waiting position.

1,t06
(Toloo)
Set the tool of group 01 to the spindle. (Uote I)

Machining using the tool of group 01.
Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle.

Load the tool of group 01 to the magazine.
Machining using the tool- of group 02.
Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle.

M06T102;

Uses the tool length compensation value of the
tool of group 03.
G43H99:
l'
I
I
G4
Uses the cutter compensation value of the tool of

group 03.
lH99;
I
I
I
Cutter comDensation cancel.

I
unn.
.'
Tool length compensation cancel.
(Note i) The return tool may not be specified. If a T code is specified in

the same block as I'106, the T code shall be the tool number of the tool
to be loaded in the magazine. The tool number is of the tool attached
to the spindle at present. If the tool is under the tool life
management, specify the tool group of the too1. When the tool group
must, be specified, if the tool group specified here (group of return
tool) and che tool group currently under management is different for
each other, an alarm is generated. (No alarm is issued if parameter
0039-IGIN is set).
-60-
TyPe
Format
Tl0l
I
I
M06T102;
I
Meaning
Set the tool of group 0l to the waiting posit,ion.


I
M06T103;

Load the tool of group 0l to the magazi-ne.
Load the tool of group 03 to the waiting
posi tion.
c43H99;
I

tool of group 02.
I
I
c4 rH99
I
I
I
9rv
Uses the cutter comDensation value of the tool of

group 02.
CuEter compensation cancel.
H00;
I
I
M06T104;

Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle.
Bring the tool of group 04 to the waiting
posit 1on.
-61 -
Type
Format
MO6T IO
Meaning
1
I
I
Bring the tool of group 01 to the waiting

position.
I
I
M06T102;
I
I
Bring the tool of group 0l to the spindle.

*L^
Ot F^
--î+i-^
Bring the rnn'l ^f -r^"^
w4
LU
LLIE
WdILITIB
6rvsl/
position.
I
I
Machinign using the tool of group 01.
I
I
I
M06T103:
l'
I
I
I

Load the tool of group 0l to the magazine.
Load the Eool of group 03 to the wait.ing
pos
it ion.
I
I
Machining usign the tool of group 02.
I
I
G43H99;
I
I

tool of group 02.
G4lH99;
I
Uses the cutter compensation value of the tool of

group 02.
Cutter compensation cancel.

I
I
rJnn.
(Note l) Whether T code following M06 is used as back number or as waiting code
for next exchange is set by the parameter (No. 0039-I'16TCD).
2) Counting tool life
Tool life is counted by time or by frequency. The life count is executed
every group and the contents of life counter is not cleared by turning off
Po\^/er.
tool life is specified by time (minutes)

In this case, a T code in the machining program specifies tool life
management group and the time during which the tool is used in the cutting
mode from the M06 specification to the next M06 specification is countec
at certain intervals (four seconds). The time for single block stop, feed
hold, rapid traverse, dwell, machine lock, time to wait for FIN signal
etc., is disregarded.
(Note 1) The tool life can be set up to max of 4300 min.
b) When tool life is specified by frequency
The couriter for groups of tools that were used is increased by one, every
process from the time that a cycle start operation is performed until the
time that M02 or M30 is commanded and the CNC is reset. Even if the
eonmand for the same group is given a number of times in one process, the
counter increase stays at one.
(Note l) I^lhen having executed M02 or 1130 with life specified by the frequency of
use, input the External Reset (ERS) signal to the CNC.
(Note 2) l"lax. f requency of the tool lif e i-s 9999 .
a)
When
-62-
r.,1ri:,; ::;i
r*':
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M, B
FUNCTIONS)
when a move command and M or B codes are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and M or B function commands.
ii) Executing M and B function commands upon completion of move command
execut ion,
(Example) Nl G0l c91X50.0Y-50.0 M05; (Spindte srop)
Move command and

spindle stop command
L\
tl
F
(i)
Sequence (i)
The spindle stops at

the end of move
command execution.
s0 ---l
Sequence
(ii)
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specification. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
11.1
Miscellaneous Function (M Function)
Itlhen a 3-digit f igure is specif ied f ollowing address M, a 3-digir BCD code
signal and a strobe signal are transnitted. These signals .ru ,rs.d for 9N/OFF
control of a rnachine function. One M code can be specified in one block.
Selection of M codes for functions varies with the rnachine tool builder.
t
The following M codes indicate special meaning.
1) M02, M30: End of program
i) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary fnr rooi qfrr-
tion of NC commands from tape to memory.

ii) cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with
the machine tool builder. )
iii) The NC tape is turned to the beginning of the program.
2) t"tOO: Program stop
Cyc1e operatj,on is stopped after a block containing !100 is executed. When
the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as
in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by actlatlng
the cNC. (This differs wirh rhe machine tool builder.)
3) M0t: Optional stop
simi lrrlrr tn |r{QQ, cycle operation is stopped after a block containins M0 I is
executed- This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the
machi-ne control panel has been pressed.
4) MgA: Calling of subprogram
This code is used to call a subprogram. See section 12.4.1 (2) for details.
5) M99: End of subprogram
This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution returns control
fn
LO +!'a
tne ..^-:-.
mal-n -Program. See the subprogram control section for details.
(Section 12.4.r (2))
(Note l) The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read inro rhe inpur
buffer register, if present. Similarly, t\ro M codes which do not
buffer the next block can be set by parameters (No.0lll, 0l12). Refer
Eo the machi-ne tool builderts instruction manual for these M codes.
63
(Note 2) The code and strobe signals are not sent to the machine tool- side for
the M98, M99.
(Note 3) Except for M98, M99, all M codes are processed by 'the nachine too1, but
they are not done by the CNC side. Refer to the machine tool builder's
instruction manual for details.
11.2 Auxiliary Functions
Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 3-digit or

5-digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding indexing
differs between machlne tool bullders.
-64-
$
ltr
t.
-il.
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A program is composed
(i) TaPe Start
(ii) Leader
(i11) Program Start
(iv) Program Section
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
of the following sections:
Comment
Program End
Tape End
1) A nain program on a taPe
Program -
Section
I
I
hogIam Start
Comment
(if necessary)
Main Program End
Tape End
(Note 1) lI02 can be used instead of M30 at the end of the maln progran.
(Note 2) Wtren in IS0 code, LF is used for ;, while in EIA code, CR is used.
2)
One subprogram on
tape
t'""o"t
\l*Tape Start
*f{- f;ffff
Program Start
Program
Section
-L
ffi
-L-l
Tape End
A subprogram must be used after being entered into the part program
memory
area.
:
a
L
:.
:r.-:il
"'ii*
-55-
-, r.Jlit-fJ;,
,+ $p,iil
3) one main progran
and a number
of
subprograms on
taDe
Main Program
(if necessary, insert aJ6frrnent
sectlon in the proper section.)

Program Start
Subprogram
ubprogram End
Tape End
A program including subprograms on

into the part program memory area.
4) A number
tape must be used after
of programs on a tape
Program Section
Tape Start
+-
Program Start
Program Section
Program Section
-66-
Comn:ent
being entered
Program
Section
Tape End
Program End
A program number must be put at the first block of each main program section
or subprogram section.
A prograur number is a four-digit number following address 0. (lrlhen in ISO,:
can be also used instead of O. )
Program numbers are not necessarily given. See Secti"on 12. 4'.2 f or details.
0r001c0Ixr2
300.
g-
Prog:am
Number
12.1 Tape Start
Start must be punched at the top of the paper tape by using the following code. This section is necessary to stop rewinding the tape when used with a
Tape Reader with Reels. This section may be omifted when the Eape is used with
a Tape Reader without Reels.
The Tape
EIA
ISO
Tape Start (Rewind Stop)
ER
12.2
Meani-ng
Leader Section and Lable Skip
Information punched before the first LF (for IS0 code) or CR (for EIA code) on a
paper tape is called the Leader Section. Normally, the CNC is set to the Label
Skip condition when turning the power on or resetting and this section of paper
tape is loaded on a PPR. The PPR reads but skips this section (by the Label
Skip function). Generally, a labe1 for a tape is punched in this section.
Since no parity check is performed on the skipped leader section, any combination of codes other than LF and cR may be punched in this section.
(Note) The 1abe1 skip function is used to ignore all information up to the first
EOB code.
12.3
Program Start
Punching the following code immediately after the end of the Leader section (at
the top of the first block of a program) indicates the start of a program. This
code is necessary to release the LabeL skip function.
EIA
ISO
t, It
L.T
I'feaning
Program Start
-61 -
12.4
Program Section
The part of the paPer tape punched between the Program Start and program
End
code (except the Cortment section explained in Section 12.5) is called the
Program Section. Information specifying tool travel and machine ON/6FF function
is punched in this section. This section is cal1ed the significant section and
is different from the non-si-gnificant section which includes the Leader and
Conrment Section.
A program section is composed of a number of blocks. A block is partitioned

into a number of words, and the end of a block is identified by an End of Block
Code (LF in ISO code and CR in EIA code).
l--
u,""u
(Note 1) TV check (vertical parity check)

A parity check is performed in the vertical direction of a b1ock, and
alarm 002 is generated if the block is found to contain an odd number
of characters (between a code j-rnmediately following an EOB and the next
EOB). The TV check is not performed for a part of tape which is read
but skipped by the Label Skip function, but the Command Section between
rr (f
' and tr) I' ig checked f or the total number of characters in each
block. The TV check function can be specified Valid/Invalid through
the IIDI keyboard. (See Section Il.3 in Chaprer III.)
(tlote Z) In program examples in this manual,; is used instead of the End of
Block code (LF for IS0 and CR for EIA), but the proper EOB code LF
(IS0) or CR (EIA) must be used in actual programming.
12.4.1 Main program and sub program
1) Main program
A program is divided into a main program and subprogram: Norma1ly, the NC
operates according to the main program, but when a comnand calling a
subprogram is encountered in the main program, control is passed to the
subprogram. When a corunand indicating to return to the main prograp is
encountered in the subprogram, control is returned to the main program.
-68-
F'
$t
Main program
Information
Subprogam
Information
Information 2
Information 2
'Fg[o.w m rnrormaRon
tn lne sll rDfOqfam--
Information n
lnfolmation n + I
Retun to main program
A total of 125 main programs and subprograms may be stored in the NC nemory,
and the CNC uses one of these main programs to move the CNC machine tool.
cNc
Program
#r a>
/
.7
@
I
#n2
Program
Refer to III 9. 2 for how to register programs.
l
E<'
tu
-69-
?l Subprograms
When a program contains certain fixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns, these sequences or patterns may be entered into memory as a subprogran
to sinplify programming.
The subprogram can be ca11ed in AUTO mode. A subprogram can call another
subprogram.
hthen the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one loop subprogram ca11. Thus, two loop subprograrn call can be executed as shown below.
However, four loop subprogram call can be executed using custom macro.
Main program
program
Sub
Sub propgam
010001
I
I
I
I
r{98P]000;
M98P1 000;
r!{98P3000:
{oop nesting
2Loop nesting
A call command can call a subprogram repeatedly

A call command can specify
up to 999 repeations of a subprogram.
a) Preparation of subprogram
A subprogram is prepared in the following format:
O(:)XXXX; Subprogram number
Subprograrn
Mqa.
At the top of subprogram, a subprogram No. identifying the subprogram is

specified after "0" (EIA) or ":" (IS0). Specify M99 at the end of a subprogram. Subprogram end command 'rM99rt need not be sneeified in a block by
itself.
(Example) X M99 ;
For how to enter subprograms into memory, see Chapter III-9.1.1
(Note t) For compatibility of the CNC tape with other devices, "i{xxxx" is also
used as a subprogram No. instead of 0(:).
A sequence number under N is registered as a subprogram number.
b) Subprogram e.xecution
A subprogram is executed when cal1ed by the main program or another
subprogram.
A subprogram call has the following format:
-L5-
M98P00000000
Subprogram number
Number of times the subprogram
is to be repeated.
the repetition times is omitted, the subprogram is repeated once.
(Example) t'tggPS1002;
This command is read "Ca11 the subprogram (subprogram number 1002) five
When
times.tt
The subprogram catl command

specified in the same b1ock.
(M9BP
- 70 -
) and a move command can
be
ffi.
*:.:
4.
&
;{.
(Example) X1000 M9BP 1200;
In thls example, the subprogram (subprogram

completing movement in the X-axis direction.
(Example )
The execution sequence
follows:
of a main
Main program
NOOI
N0020--_-_-;
number 1200)
program which
calls a
is ca1led after
subprogram
is
as
Subprogram
o10I0;
}t1020
N1030 _;
N0030M98P21010;
N0040 --------;
N0050M98P1010;
N0060 ---------;
N1040
Ni050
N1060
M99;
k4ren the subprogram is ca11ed by another -subprogrann,

same sequence as shown in the above example.
(Note 1) M98 and M99 signals are not issued to the machine
it is executed in the
tool.
(Note 2) If the subprogram number specified by address P can not be found, an

alarm (PS078) is displayed.
(Note 3) The subprogram call command "M9BP
;" cannot be input frorn the
MDI, In this case, prepare the maitr-f,Efr"m in EDIT mode as follows:
Oxxxx;
M98P
xxrx;
M02;
Then execute it in the AUTO rnode.

c) Notes on subprogram control
The following special specifications can be used to control subprogram
executi-on.
i)
a sequence nunber is specified in address P of the last block of a

subprogram, control does not return to the block after the block in
which the subprogram \./as called, but rather to the block with the
sequence number specified in address P. However, this is only effect
tive in memory operation.
The processing time for return to the specifi-ed block is considerably
longer than that for normal return.
When
Ilain program
N0010
___a
N0020
N0030 _____1
N0040M98P1010;
N0050 _____;\
N0060
N0070
ii)
---x---
Subprograrn
01010 t-i
N1020
N1030
N1040
N I05O
Nr.060
N1070M99P0070;
If the M99 command is executed in the main program, control returns to

the start of the main program. For example, a " ll"l99;" block is j-nserted in the proper position of Ehe main program and the optional
block skip is off' M99 is executed, and control returns to the start of
the main program and the program is executed again.
rf the optional block skip is turned on, "/1499;" is omitted and control
is passed to the next block.
If "/M99Pn;" has been inserted, control does not return to the start,
but returns to the block whose sequence number is ttntt. The processing
time for return to sequence number n is lonqer than return to the
start.
- 7t -
N0010
N0020
N0030
N0040 -;
N0050
N0060
/N0070M99P0030;
N0080
Optional block
skip OFF
iii)
Optional block
skip ON
N00901'102; ;
It is possible to execute a subprogram from the start by specifying a
search for it from the IDr keyboard as well as the main program.
(Refer to III 10.4 and 10.9 for the search operation).
In this case' if the M99 command is executed, control returns to the
top of the subprogram and execution is repeated. IfttMggPn;" is executed, control returns to the block whose sequence number is rrnrr and
execution ls repeated.
In the above operation, if you want to stop execution, insert "fl'1021"
or the "/M30;" at the appropriate position. Lrhen the optional block
skip swi-tch is turned off, the above cornmand is executed and the program 1s terminated. In the example be1ow, execution will continue
while the optional block skip i-s on and will stop when the optional
block skip is turned off.
Nl 040
N1050
Nr060
/Nr070
M02;
N1080 M99 P1050;

12.4.2 Program number
This control can store program in itfs memory.

A 4-digit program number following address O is used to differentiate
graru from another.
O
one Dro-
trtrDD
Program number
Address
011r1...
(l-9999, Leading zero suppression)
..M02; I O2222
.....M30;
Progran I1 Il
Program 2222
M02; or M30; means the end of a main program.

M99; means the end of a subprogram.
05555.
....
M99;
Subrogram 5555
(Note 1) In ISO code, colon (:) can be used instead of O.

(Note 2) A block with an optional block skip code such as /uoz3, /M30; or /ugg:
is not regarded as the end of a program.
72
(Note 3) When lhe program number is not specified at the st.art of the program,
the first sequence number (N...) in that program is regarded as the
program number. However, N0 is not used as the program number.
(Note 4) When nej-ther program number nor sequence number are specified, a program number must be specified from the CRT/IDI when the program is
registered.
(Note 5) When a taPe contains more than one program, an EOB code j-s unnecessary
before the second and subsequent programs. However, when a preceding
program ends with ER (EIA code) or % (IS0 code) r 3o EOB code is
necessary at the head of a program. This is because of the 1abel skip
f eature .
4.\ ru
rnnnn
n
u/
Duure cases, program numbers
----L^-^
9000-9899
are reservEd and cannot be
\L\uLE
used by users.
/rr^+^
12.4.3
Sequence number and block
A prograu is composed of several commands.

One command is ca11ed a block.
One block is separated from another block with an end of block code.
manual uses ; as the end of block code.
!-
nro"r.
Brock
-f-
(Note l) The end of block code is
CR
--l
l-
Block
in EIA code and LF in ISO code.
A 4-digit sequence number can be specified (I - 9999) following address N at the

head of a block. The order of sequence numbers is arbitrary and need not be
consecutive. Sequence numbers can be specified in all blocks or only in blocks
requiring them.
It is recornmended that sequence numbers be specified sequentially at important
points such as when a tool is changed and a ne\^r tool is used.
(Noce i) Sequence number N0 should not be used for compatibility with other NC
equ]-Pmenc.
(Note 2) Because program number 0 is invalid,

program number must not be 0.
12.4.4 Optional block skip
When a slash followed
a secuence numDer reqarceo as
by a number (/n n = I - 9) is specified at the beginning

of a block and the optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panel is
set ON, the block with ln corresponding to switch number n is ignored in the
tape or memory operation.
When the optional block skip switch n is set OFF, the block with ln is valid.
Thoror^ro rha nperstor can sklp a block with /n at his discretion. L in / I may
be omitted.
- t? _
following range is ignored when the optional block skip switch is

; /2Nl23G0lX4. ....; N7856
The
lr
l-
Range ignored
Example:
0N.
Nr00XI00;
/2Nl0lZi00;
/213Nr02x200;
/3N1032200;
In the above example, the blocks of NlOl and NI02 when switch No.2 is ON,
the blocks of Nl02 and Nl03 when switch No.3 is ON, are skipped.
(Note
1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 5)
(Note 6)
(Note 7)
and
A slash (/) must be specified at the start of a block. If it is placed

elsewhere in the block, the information from the slash (l) to the EOB
code is ignored, r^rhile information before the slash (l) is ef fective.
\tlhen the optional block skip switch is ON, TH and TV checks are
performed for skipped portions, as when the switch is OFF.
The optional block skip is identified when the information is read into
Lhe buffer storage from the tape or memory. I^lhen a block preceded by a
slash has been read into the buffer, it is not ignored even if the
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is turned on.
This function is also effective during a sequence number search.
When storing the program in memory, this function is ineffective.
A
block with a slash (/) is also stored in the memory regardless of the
position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.
When punchi$g out the program from memory, the program is punched out
regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.
Some of the optional block skip switches (l to 9) may not be used on
Ask the machine tool manufacturer how many
some machine tools.
srîitches can be used.

(Note 8) If more than one optional block skip code is specified in a block for
the system with additional optional block skip function, I in /l cannot

be omitted.
Please specify /1 under Ehe above condition.
(Example)
Error
Gooxlo.o;
-m
Correct
--7TTz cooXro.
o:
12.4.5 Word and address

A block is composed
of one or more words. A word 1s composed of an address

followed by a number as i-s shown below. (An algebraic sign (+ or -) may be
added before the numerical va1ue.)
i 000
''t
Address
Numerical value
Word
The address is a letter which indicates the meanins of the numerical value
following the address.
Addresses and their meanings are shown below.
Some addresses may vary 1n meaning depending on preparatory functions specified
in the program.
&
fiL
,:
1,.+.
I
74
Function
Address
: (ISO)
Program number
Meaning
/o(nre)
Program number
Sequence number
Sequence number
Preparatory function
Mot.ion mode (Linear, arc, etc.)
Dimension word
xrY ,z,ArB,
Coordinate axis motion
Arc radius, corner
I, J,K
command
Coordinate values of arc center,

chamfering
Feed function
Feedrate, thread lead
Spindle speed function
Spindle
Tool function
.F
Tool number, tool offset number
ON/OFF
Index of table, etc.
Designation of offset
Miscellaneous function
Offset nunber
PY
Dwe1l
speed
control on the machine t,ool
number
Dwell time
Program number
Designation of the subprogram number
Repetitive count
Repetitive count in subprogram
designation
Parameter
Parameters in canned cvcles
'Q'R
For example, the following block is cornposed of words:

N
Sequence----r-heparatory
number
function
Dimension
rvord
-_-f_
Feed
Spindle Tool
function function function
Miscellaneous
iunction
In the next Process sheet example, one line represents a b1ock. And one frame
in a block is a word.
-75-
Progran
name
-Note
Test Program
Proglam number
o(:)
x1 96. 0
Da
te
'85.10.10
Programmer
zooz
Y3
15. 0
\
I
(Note )
End
of block code (;) is
CR
in EIA code or LF in ISO code.
#r
B
F.'
Sri
12.4.6
Basic addresses and command value range
The basic addresses and command value range are listed in Table L2.4.6. Note
that these figures give the maximum numerical liurit, not the mechanical limit of
the CNC machine tool. Under CNC control, the tool rnay traverse up to 10 m (in
millimeter input) along the X axi-s, but actually travelling distance may be
lirnited to 2 m for the specific machine tool. Sirnilarly, CNC control may permit
a maximum cutting feed of 25 m/min., but the CNC machine tool may be limited to
3 m/min. The manual issued by the machine tool manufacturer should be closely
consulted' in addition to this rnanual when programming to ensure that the actual
limitations of the specific machine tool are not exceeded.
Table 12.4.6 Basic address and command value range
Funct ion
Program number
Input in
Address
:
(IS0)
(ErA)
Sequence number
Increment system l/10
I, J,
9999
- 9999
0-99
L-
9999
R,
0-99
+99999.999
nrn
+9999.9999 inch
+9999.9999
mnr
+999.99999 inch
K,
Feed per minute
Increment systern l/10
L-
X, Y, Z, Q,
9999
Preparatory function
Dimension word
Input in inch
mm
100,000
mm/min
t2,000
mn/rnin
Feed per revolution
0.0i rim/
5m.00
rev
0.0r -
400.00
inch/min
0.01 - 480.00
inch/min
0.0001
9.9999
inch/rev
Spindle speed function
0-
Tool functions
0-99
0-99
Miscellaneous functions
0-99
0-99
Dwell
o-
Increment system l/10
o-
Designation of sequence
number, number of
ranafil-innc
0ffset
number
2nd miscellaneous function
r-
- l7 -
0-
99999.999
sec.
9999.9999
sec.
o-
9999999
| -
0-
0-
999999
9999
99999.999
sec.
9999.9999
qoa
l-200
II
B
9999
9999999
l-200
o-
999999
12.5 Comment
Section
The information punched between the control out and the cont.rol in codes shown
below is all considered as a comment and is skipped . Since a TH check is not
performed, a heading, cofi[nents, and indications for the operator can be punched
by combining any code of arbitrary holes. The TV check is oerformed on the
conment section.
EIA
Meaning
ISO
nrrf!
(efarf
\eLur
2-4-5x
Cnntrnl
z-+- I ^
Control in (end of
nf
vr
nnmmontLvrLsrre!rLl
'\
comment)
* Indicates the hole combination for the EIA code.

Channei
Channel 5
Channel 4
oo
o o
Channel 4
Channel
Channei 2
a\
v
o o o
-)
o o oo
a)
Control In
Control Out
(MEASURE
Nl00
1G0
lx
WORK.........)
LF
LF
LF
LF
LF
tape is read into memory, for memory-controlled operation, the

is read into memory. However, codes not listed in Appendix 7
are ignored and are not read into memory. When daEa in the memory is punched
out, information in the Comment Section is also punched out. The Comment Sec+i
,r't ^*1 ^-'ed on the program screen. However, codes ignored when read-in
^.. i!>^ urDPr4J
Lfurr
punched nor displayed on the CRT screen.
neither
are
During a memory-controlled operation in memory command mode, the comment section
in memory is ignored and operation is executed.
(ExarnpIe) Used as heading
When a command
comment section
)N 110
F1000cR(
Significant section
u
c
(Exarnple) In IS0 code

N1000c00x.
l^'
Name of the tape, etc
Signficant section
(Note l) The rewind stop code (Z or ER) cannot be used in the comment section.
Reading this code resets the CNC.
(Note 2) When a connent section is in the middle of a Program section and is
long, movement is interrupted for a long time. Therefore, insert
corment sections in a place where movement can be interrupted or a
place specifying no movement.
- 18 -
(Note 3) The length of the conment sectj-on is unlimited.

(Note 4) When the eontrol out code does not come first and only the control in
code is read in, it is ignored.
(Note 5) The TV check for the comment section can be disabled by sp eci fy ing
paramerer TVC. (Data No. 0000)
12.6
Program End
The end of a program is indicated by punching the following code at the end of
the Program Section.
EIA
T.
Meaning
SO
I'1O2CR
I'1O2LF
Program End
M3OCR
M3OLF
Program End and Rewind
M99CR
M99LF
Subprogram End
the End of Program is sensed during the execution of a programr the CNC
unit terminates the execution of the program and enters a reset state. In case
of M30CR or I'130LF, the program is returned to its beginning (in l'femory Courmand
rrL^-L.e
Wrrgrl
Ltr
subprogram. end code is sensed in a subprogram, control is
IIUUE,/ .
-^r^\
returned to the program which called the subprogram. (Whether or not the tape
is rewound by exeeution of I'130 depends on the machine tool.)
When
12.7 Tape End

The end of a tape is indicated by punching the code below immediately following
the Program End of the last program on a tape.
t
EIA
Meaning
ISO
Tape
ER
End
(Note) If M02 and M30 are not at the end of the program section, and ER (EIA) or
Z (IS0) is about to be executed, the CNC enters the reset state.
12.8 Tape Format
The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as tape
format.
12.9
Tape Codes
Eit,her the EIA or the IS0 code can be used as tape codes
code is distinguished with the first end of block code.
Appendix l.
fn
The input program

See Tape Codes in
13.
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
13.1
Canned Cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89)
A canned cycle siruplifies the program by using a single block with a G code to
specify the nachining operations usually specifleci in several blocks.
Table 13.1 lists canned cycles.
Table
G code
Drilling
(-Z direction)
c73
Intermittent
13.'l
Canned cycles
Operation at the
bottom of a hole
feed
c74
G76
Dwel1 + Spindle
Feed
CW
Oriented spindle
Feed
top
Re trac t ion
(+Z direcrion)
Rapid traverse
High-speed peck
drilling cycle
Feed
Left-hand tapping
cycle
Rapid traverse
Fine boring cycle

Pos
c80
c8l
Applicat ion
z,e
Cancel
Feed
Rapid traverse
pla
Drilling cyc1e,
sp_s!_ !r:llling
cycle
c82
c83
Rapid traverse
Dwe1l
Feed
Intermittent
Rapid traverse
feed
c84
Feed
Dwell + Spindle
Drilling
cycle,
(3)
Tapping cycle
Feed
Boring cycle
Feed
c86
Feed
Spindle stop
Rapid traverse
Boring cycle
c87
Feed
Spindle
Rapid t.raverse
Back boring cycle
c88
Feed
Dwell + spindle
Manua
Boring cycle
c89
Feed
Generally,
below.
Operation I
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Operation 5
Operation 6
Dwe1l
Boring cycle
Feed
canned cycle consists of a'sequence of six operations as shom
Positioning of axes X and y (including also another

Rapid traverse up to point R
Hole machining
Operation at the bottom of a hole
Rapid traverse up to the initial
-80-
point
(l)
Peck driIllng
cycle
Feed
top
eac
(2)
c85
Ih"
co111-1T,!erlnc
cycle
CCW
CW
seL
rvi c'l
F
Operation
Initial point
I
2 *l
Operation
I
I
Point
l+
Operation 6
I
I
9
I
Operation
3-l
l*
Operation 5
I
I I
I
--
-+
Rapid traverse
Feed
/
Operation 4
Fig. 13.1 (a) Canned cycle operation
:..
:.'
t
*i
f:
Positioning is performed on the xY plane and hole rnachining is performed on the

Z axis' Positloning and hole urachining cannot be perfoimed
than this
plane and this axis combination. Canned cycle indifferent other
to
plane
the
selection G command.
These canned cycle operatio5rsr. to be more stri.ct, consj.st of these
three modes,
each of which are specified in a particular modal G code, as shom below.
(1) Data formar
J c9O Absolute.
I C91 Incremenral
(2) Return point leve1 G98 Inirial point 1evel
{
,
I c99 R poinr level
(3) Drilling
node
c73
c74
c76
c80
.9t
See Table 13.1
c89
(Note) The initial level means the absolute value

of the Z-axls
the tine of
changing fron the canned cycle cancel mode into the canned aL
cycle mode.
- 8t -
a) Fig. 13.1 (b) shows how to specify data according to the rnode (C90 or
G90
G9I)
G91
v____*"
I
z=o
I Rl
-|ts-T1
!ll
PoinrR"ll
lir
Point Z
-r
r.in'n-
tit
O-
Poirt
llt
*L--i
Absoiute
Fig. 13.1
Incremental
(b)
Absolute and incremental programming
the tool is to be returned to point R or to the initial level is

specified according to G98 or G99. This is shown in Fig. 13.1 (c).
When the
Use G99 for the first dril1ing, and use G98 for the last drilling.
canned cycle is to be repeated by K in G98,mode, tool is returned to the
initial leve1 from the first time drilling.
In the G99 mode, the initial 1evel does not change even when drilling is
performed.
r
b) Whether
G98
V---
Initial
Initial
,z
level
-*o/ rlrl
rl
rl
Ir
lr
ll
t!
ll
sz/
level
Point R
level
llo'
Initial level return
Fig. 13.1
(c)
Point R level return
lnitial level and point R level
c) The drilling data can be specified following G73/G74/c76/G81 to c89 and a

single block can be formed.
This command permits the data to be stored in the control unit as a modal
value.
The machining data in a canned cycle D specified as shom below:
G
[tr
+{f
lll.--.
I
II
Drilling
r.
.\'
."
I
- Hole position data
mode
-82-
-Dritlingdata
LNumber of
repeat s
llrl
lllno
m^dp
Hole positlon ;;;;' rxl
[[
See Table 13.1
Specifies the hole position by an increnental or

absolute value. The path and feed rate are the
same as G00 pcsitioning.
Drilling data
Specifies the distance fron point R to the bottom
of the hole in Fig. 13.1 (a) with an increnental
value or the position of the hole bottom with an
absolute value. The feed rate is specified in the
F code in operation 3.
In operatJon 5, it becomes the rapid traverse rate
or the feed rate specified in the F code, accordlng
to the drilling mode.
Specifies the d.j stance frorn the initial 1eve1 to
polnt R 1eve1 in Fig, 13.1 (a) with an absolute
value. The feeC rate i-s the rapid traverse rate in
operatlon 2 and 6.
Specifies each cut-in value with G73 and GB3 or the
shift value with G76 and G87. (Always speclfled
with an increnrental value.)
Specifies the dwe11 time at the botton of the hole.
The relationship betrveen the time and the specified
value is the same as for G04.
F ...
Specifies the feed rate;
K ...
Number of
Specifies the number of repeats for a series cf
repea t s
operation 1 to 6. When K is not specifled, K = 1
is assumed.
When K = 0 is specified, the drllling
data is
sinply stored, and drilling ls not performed.
Since the drilling node (GID remains unchanged untl1 another drilling node
is speci-fied or the canned cycle is cancelled with a G code, j-t must not be
speclfied any blocks when the same drilling mode continues. G80 and the 0l
group G codes are used to cancel a canned cycle. Once the drilling data has
been specified in the canned cycle, it is retained until it is changed or the
canned cycle is cancelled. Therefore, all requlred drilllng data shal1 be
specified when the canned cycle is started and only data to be changed sha11
be specified during the cycle.
The number of repeats K shall be specifled only when operation $ust be repeated. Data K is not retalned. The feed rate specified with the F code ls
retained even if the canned cycle ls cancelled.
When the system is reset during the canned cycle, the drilling mode, drllllng
data, hole position data and repetition count are deleteC.
An example of the above data retention and deletion ls shown below.
I.YJ
C
x
coo
@ G8IX
Mo3;
Y-Z-_R-F-KIn the beglnning, Z, R,

values. Drilling
c81
c82x
_;
and
; .....
F speclfy
necessary
ls repeated K times according to
. Slnce the drllling mode and drllling data are the

same as those specif ied in O , G8 l, Z _, R _,
and F
can be ornltted. The hole posltion moves
only f6T Y _ and drilling is performed only once
accordi.ng
K-;
to
G8l.
Fole posltlon moves only for X _ from O and

the hole is drilled according to G82 with Z, R, and
F speclfled ln @ and the drilling data P speclfled in @. Thls Ls repeated K times,
ThE
-83-
/;\
\)-/
G80
G85
G89
Mq.
L LJ
Drilling is not performed.

cept F) is cancelled.
All drilling data (ex-
RP
Since drilling data is cancelled in O, Z arrd, R

must be respeci.fied. Since F is the same as F
specified j.n O, it can be onitted. p is noc
required in this block, but it is stored.
Performs drilling which differs only for the Z
value with @ by moving the hole position only for
Ox
X.
O colx
Performs drilling according to G89 by using the

specified i1 O , R and P speeified in @, and
specified @ as drilling daia.
The drl11j-ng mode and a1l drilling

are deleted.
data (excepr
F)
d) Repeat of canned cycle

When holes are repeatedly drilled at equal j-ntervals in the same canned
cycle, the number of repeats can be specified by using address K.
The maximum value of K is 9999.
K is effective only for the specifled block.
(b<aurple)
machining position
Present
I
First
machining position
G81 X
K5F
_;
the first drilling positi-on for an incremental

_ specifies
-it
f
is specif ied for an absolute cornmand (c90), a hole is
repeatedly drilled at the salne position.
The canned cycle automatic
deceleration time constant is automatically switched to the rapid traverse or
feed tirne constant according to the feed used for each operation. At the end
point; the tool decelerates and moves on to the next sequence. However, when
return frorn the bottom of the hole to the R 1evel is performed at the rapid
traverse rate with G98 (initial 1evel return) (for example, G8I), the tool
does not decelerate, but inmediately returns to the initial
level at the
rapid traverse rate.
cofrand- (egi)]f
Each hole machining operation is detailed below.
-84-
1)
G73 (High-speed peck drilling
cycle)
3
i
G73 (G99)
G73',(G98)
:':
.e
u_*,
Initial point
iJ
Point R
I
I
I
I
I
I
+
i,
{}
I
I
:"t
.:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\l
Ir
The
Point Z
retraction is set by a paranelgr --_(No. 0531). Sinc-e rhe Z-axis direction

ai;pbsaf'-?nd p'ermlts a very small
int"TmiiiEnr--Itad simplifies
retraction value to be set in "trip

deep hole dr1lling, efficient machining is
performed. Retraction is performed at the rapid traverse rate.
2)
c74 (Left-handed tapping cycle)

c74
(c98)
c74 (c99)
Spindle
i ,/'"*
tr@
*''.
I
| |
ol
O\
:
j
!
E
Point
Rapid
traverE
Feed
spindre
cw
At the bottom of the hole, the splndle rotates clockwise and left-handed
tapping perforroed.
(Note) During left-handed tapping speclfied in G74, rhe feed rare override ls
i-gnored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return
operation, even if a feed hold is applied.
-6)-
3)
G76
(fine boring
cYcle)
G76
)l
(G98)
G76 (c99)
Spindle C\!
"'*F1
Initial
pornt
Point R
Point Z
l+
Point Z
Shift amount
oss
Oriented Spindle Stop
Shift (rapid traverse)
Since a spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the
spindl.e retracts after shifting i-n the direction opposite to the cutter
direction, high precision and efficient boring is performed without scratching the workpiece surface.
(Note) The shift value is specified by Q. The Q value is always a positive
value. If a negative value is specified, the sign is ignored. For
the shift directionr dny of +X, -X, *Y and -Y is selected by setting
parameter (data No. 0002). The Q value is modal in the canned cycle.
Since it is also used as the cut-in value for G73 and G83, specify it
carefully.
-86-
/+)
G80 Canned cycle cancel

The canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G81 to
GB9) is cancelled and normal operation is subsequently performed. The points R and Z are aI'so cancelled.
(That is, R = 0 ar,d Z = 0 for the incremental command.) other drilling data
is also cancelled.
5) c8l (drilling cycle' spot boring cycle)

\ U6I
G81 (c99)
'\ ./
n
v______*?
Imtial
polnt
Point R
:.Glr.-,
1t
ll
llll
o
Point Z
Point Z
---*Rapid
travelse
feed
6) c82 (drilling
cycle, counter boring cycle)

cbz icgal
___---*
G82 (G99)
Initial
?
pornt
tilr
Poirt R
'@
Point Z
llll
lr
,'Jr"{
-Cutting
Point R
Point Z
6--
D well
This is the same as G81. Dwell (specified by the P code) is performed at Eire
bottom of the hole and the spindle is raised. Dwell at the bottom of the
hole improves the hole depth precision in blind hole dri1ling.
i) c83 (Peck drilllng
cYcle)
c83 (c98)
r:
tl
c83 (c99)
r:
|./
ll
Initial
point
v-----?
lts
Tql
-t
cf It i li tt
of-"-i-llT
qT- ----iJ-T
A-
o>
qlT-:-
^TYI
At
r-
Point Z
G83
_;
The coromand above specifies the peck drilling cycle. a is the cut-i.n value
each time and specify with an incremental value. When the second and subsequent cut-in is performed, rapid traverse- is switched to feed by d nn (or
inch) before the position where cut-in is performed. The specified Q value
must always be positive. If a negative value is specified, the FlEn*is

lgnored. The d value is set by parameter (data No. 0532).
8) c84 (tapping cycle)

G84 (Ge9)
G84 (G98)
'
r:
V----+
o
I
v____+o
Initial
t:""'
tG). spinare cw
Ii/
li
li'-17
tl
ll
I ,snittar" c*
i@/
ll
po.,z
O-- rni*.*
*'-'*
il Pottz
$- rn"u," ".rn
tl
RaPid traverse
Feed
The spindie is reversed at the bottom of the hole and the tapping cycle ls
perrontreo
(Note) During tapping specified in G84, the feed rate override is ignglad,;tnd
the cycle does.-not _s:9-p-_""!i!_,the-snd.-o-f the reTTrrfrEeTefi-on, .even lf
feed hold is applled.
-88-
+-rr.
9) cB5 (boring cycle)
0____*"
..-9
I
I
I
il
il
ti
I
I
I
I
ll
This is the
hole.
to
same as C84,
but the spindle
i,s
not reversed at the bottom of .the
10) c86 (boring cycle)
r:
U
,
1l
snndtec$
',*
-9
I
I
I
I
I
Rapid traverse
Feed
This ls the same as Ggl, but the spindle

stops at the bottom .of the holes
and is retracted at the rapid traverse
rate.
:.
:
*
F
3:
s
a
G:
G.
G
*-
_89_
1l)
G87 (boring cycle/back boring cycle)

G87 (G99)
11 @s5)f=1
/L--=6 =+ I
/ + tti
Spindle CW
t
,,=:
!l
+ |
vlt
^\Y:Yi
lr<-
Initial
point
pointZ
Rated traverse
Point R
\Spindte CW
Shift
After the tool is positioned along the X and Y axes, the spindle stoPs at
the orientation position. The spindle i-s then shifted in the direction
opposite to the tool and is positioned at the botton of the hole (Point R)
at the rapid traverse rate. At this position, the tool returns only for the
shift value and the spindle rotates clockwise. Machining is performed up to
the point Z in the positive direction of the Z axis. At this position, the
splndle again stops at the orientation position and shifts in the direction
opposiEe to the tool and the tool is withdrawn from the hole. After the
tool returns to the initial point, it returns only for the shift value. The
spindle rotates clockwise and the tool moves according to the command of the
next b1ock. The-shift value and direct.ion are the same as those for G76.
(Direction setti;g is common to both G76 and G87.)
L2)
c88 (boring cycle)
I
I
spindle cw
,..'
SPindle CW
II
I
Point R
I
{
Poht z
'...-(D
spindle stop
after drvell
o-
Spirdle stop
after dwell
Rapid iraverse
Feed
Manual feed
-90-
#.
Sr
E,5
t:) c89 (boring cycle)

G89 (G98)
c89 (c99)
9,
Initial
i!rl
I
I
ll
rl
IIr
Point R
ll
Ir
tltl
6',
II
PontZ
rDl
same
Point Z
(P)
uweil
This is the
Point R
as G85, but dwe1l is performed at the bottorn of Ehe ho1e.
14) Rigid mode

To set the rigid mode, specify M29s*J^**1 before command of tappi_ng cycle and
reverse tapping cycle.
By this operation, the spindle stops, the rigid mod.e Dr signal turns on, and the
rigid mode j-s set for the. tapping cycle or reverse tapping cycle which iÎS
commanded
next.
is called a rigid tapping prepare auxiliary function. The rigid tapping

Prepare auxiliary functj-on code can be changed to another M-code by setting the
corresPonding value in the parameter 0256, However, 1429 is used fhroughout thi-s
manual to make the description consistent.
Specify GBO; to reset the rigid mode. The rigid mode can also be reset by the
another canned cycle G-code or the group 01G code, that ls, the commands that
clear the tapping cycle.
The rigid mode DI signal is turned off by this rigid mode reset conmand.
Irrhen the rigid tapping is ended by the rigid mode reset command, the spindle
stops and the S-code goes to the state with S0 specified.
The ri-gid mode can also be reset by the reset operation (reset button, external
reset). However, note that the canned cycle mode is not reset bv the reset
l'129
operation.
I
I
I
M2qS**XX.t
G7 4
-]
/c84X-Y Z._R-P-F-K-
XY
_____t
XY
Rigid
mode
G80;
Precautions on
camrnand
a) F /5***x is a screw
b) 5T-*** nusg be lower
Otherwise, p/S alarm
for the alarm No.)
c) F must be lower
(piraureter No. 527) .
lead.
than the value set in the parameter (No. 0617).

occurs in the G f] f] block. (Refer to Section 5
Ehan the cutting feed rate upper
Otherwise, P/S alarm (011) occurs.
91
limit
value
d)
Don't specify S and axis motion berween M29 and G ! !.

Donr t specify 1429 during tapping cyc1e. p/S afarrn occurs in both
e)
Donrt speeify S in the block immediately after rhe block of c | [
cases.
and
GBO.
cycle specifications)
(Note 1) The spindle must be rotated by the miscellaneous function (M code)
before a canned cycle is specified.
M?.
Spindle CW
(NoEes on canned
n
r-1 t-]|
v I ll
Co
....,
UU
Spindle stop
Nfq.
rrec
fl n
Incorrect
block.
(1.13
or
M4 must
be specif ied before this
(Note 2) If the block contains X, Y, Z, or R data, drilling is perforned in

canned cycle mode. If the block does not contain the X, Y, Z, and R
data, drilling is not performed. However, when G04X ; is specified,

drilling is nct performed even if X is soecified
c00 x _;
G81X
(Drilling is not perforned)

(Dri11ing is not performed. Value F is updated.)
v-.
(Dri11ing is not performed. ) (Onfy the miscellaneous
function is executed.)
(Drilling is not performed. Drilling data P is not
G04P _;
changed by c04P. )
(Note 3) Specify drilling data Q, P in the block where drilling is performed.
In other words, specify it in the block for which the X, Y, Z, or R,
axis data is specified. This data is not stored as modal data if
specified in a block where drilling is not performed.
(Note 4) When the canned cycle (G74, GB4, G86) which performs the rotational
control of the spindle is used and drilling rrrith a short distance
between the hole .positions (X, Y) or the initial level to the R point
Ievel is short, the spindle may not reach the normal rotation before it
enters the cutting operation (-Z) of the ho1e.
When this occurs, a time lag musc be provided by inserting a dwe11
commarld (G04) between each drilling
operation. In this case, without
specifying the number of repeats with K, prograrn as shovm be1ow.
t
E.
-92-
Drvell is applied anC waits for the nornrrl

spindle rotation.
*o{_-*,
Tl-
til
ltJ
GOOM :
GB6X
Y
Z
F
R
:
GOa P ];
is perforrned, but drilling
-(Dwell
XY:
(Dwell is performed, but drilling
G04 P
;
XY:
aais performed, but drilling
-tlwell
j -t
is not performed)
is not performed)
is not performed)
This may not have to be considered, depending on the machine tool.

Refer to the machine tool builderts instrucEion manual
(Note 5) As previously mentioned, a canned cycle may also be cancelled with G00
to G03 (group 0l G code). This cancel is performed when G00 to c03 is
(i/ indicates 0 to 3,
read if it is specified in the same block as G
indicates the canned cycle code):
EI' G
X
P
F
Y
Z
R
K
Q
;
(The canned
i-s perfo?rned.)"y"t.
GG#XYZROPFK:
y a*""-is perforred as specified
(t"tovement alon[-the x
in G//, R, P, Q and K ""d
are ignored and F is stored.)
(Note 6) When a miscellaneous function is specified in the same block as a
canned cycle command, the M code and MF signals are sent at Ehe first
positioning operati-on (operation l). The controlr waits for the finish
signal (FIN) aE the end of positioning before starting the next drilling operation. When the number of repeats (K) is specified, the M
code and MF signals are senL only the first time.
(Note 7) The tool offset commands (G45 or G48) are ignored in canned cycle mode.
(Note 8) When tool length offset (G43, G44, G49) is specified in canned cycle
mode, offset is applied when the tool is positioned to poinE R (operation 2).
(Note
9)
Operator precautions
a) Single block
a canned cycle is performed in the single block mode, the control stops at the end of operation l, 2, and 6, as shown in Fig.
f3.l (a). Therefore, it must be started three times to dri1l one
ho1e. The feed hold lamp lights at the end of operations I and 2.
When the number of repeats is left at the end of operation 6, the
system stops \,iith feed hold state, and when not, the system stops in
stop state.
D) feed nord
When a feed hold is applied between operations 3 to 5 in canned
cycle G74 or GB4, the feed hold lamp imrnediately lights, but the
control continues to operate up to operation 6 and stops. If a feed
hold is applied again during operation 6, it immediaEely stops.
c) Override
The feed rate override is assumed to be 100% during the operation of
canned cycle G74 or G84.
When
F
+
ie
=
-93-
Program exampl-e using
tool length offset
ffi
and a canned eycle
ffi
Reference point
ffi
r
F:-i
Ft*
[.:
F.r,'
I
I
3t:
E.:
t#6
T-
,lYi
| +r'
/+.
ffi
/T\ #10
il
/t\ #9
t_
I
tr
H
l/1ru
Drilling of a 10 mm diameter hole

Drilling of a 2O uun diameter hole
Boring of a 95 rnn diameter hole (depth 50 rnrn)
ll 7*19
/lll t
13
Retract position
Z
l-x
Initial level
F
F.
F
E
Tll
/--s
tl
tl
rF=
_T__
fF=
Fr__-__J
T-T-
L_u
Ti5
-n -E
i-U Ln
Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.1l, *190.0

is set in offset
+150.0 is set in offset No.3l.
-94-
No.
l5,
and
F
ft
Program example
,
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Coordinate setting at reference poinr

N002 G90 G00 2250.0
T11 M6;
Tool change
Initial level, tool length offset
N003 G43 ZO Hll;
Spindle start
N004 S30 M3;
N005 G99 G8l X400.0
Y-350.0 2-153.0
R-97.0 Fl20;
Positioning, then /11 drilling
Positioning, then /i2 drilling and point R level return
N006 Y-550.0;
N007 G98 Y-750.0;
Positioning, then //3 drilling and initial level return
Positioning, then /14 drilling and point R'level return
N008 G99 XI200.0;
Positioning, then ii5 drilling and point R leve1 return
N009 Y-550.0;
Positioning, then //6 drilling and j-nitial 1eve1 return
N010 G98 Y-350.0;
NOil G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop
N0l2 G49 2250.0 T15
M6;
Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N013 G43 ZO H15;
N014 S20 M3;
Spindle start
N0l5 c99 G82 X550.0
Y-450.0 Z-130.0
R-97.0 P300 F70; Positioni-ng, then /i7 drilling, point R 1evel return
Positioning, then /18 drilling, initial leve1 return
N016 G98 Y-650.0;
Positioning, then ii9 drilling, poJ.nt R level return
N017 G99 X1050.0;
Positioning, then /i10 dri11ing, initial level return
N018 G98 Y-450.0;
N0l9 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop
N020 c49 2250.0 T3l
M6;
Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N02i c43 Z0 H31;
N022 StO M3;
Spindle start
N023 cB5 c99 x800.0
Y-350.0 Z-t53.0
R47.0 F50;
N024 G91 Y-200.0 K2;
N025 G28 X0 Y0 M5;
N026 G49 Z0;
N027 M0;
Positioning, then /ll1 drilling, point R leve1 return

Positioning then i/12, 13 drilling, point R 1eve1 return
Reference point return, spindle stop
Tool length offset cancel
Program stop
of repeats is specifled by K in G98 and G99, the tool

returns to the initial level (G9B) or point R level (G99) from the first
(Note) When the number

hole.
13.2 External Motion Function (G80, G81)

G81
Thi;
]P
an external motion function signal to be sent to

CNC every time the positioning to IP is completed
thi e _qiô^^-.on:'l i s used to perform operations such as clamplng, drilling,
".ur*t"a--Lnables
machine
tool side from the
punching and cycles on the machine tool side.
the
and
and
eionel
ic sent every positioning until
it is cancelled with a G80 and G
-.;
code in group 0i command. The external motion signal is not sent during execution of block that does not contain neither X nor Y. Parameter (No. 0011,
MCF) determines whether G8l ls used as an external operation function or as a
canned cycle.
Thie
;
*.
t
G:
5,
-95-
14. COMPENSATION
FUNCTION
14.1 Tool Length Offset (G43, c44, c49)

14.1.1 Tool length offset A
By the command of G43 \
G44J9
.z
or
G43 r
,r
trq 4
The position of the terminal point of the movement command in the Z axis can be
shifted + or - by as much as the value set in the offset memory. This function
can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during
progranming and the actual tool length of the tool used when the work is
performed into the offset memory. It is now possible to apply compensation
without changing the program. Assign the offset direction with a G43 or G44,
and designate the offset amount that has been set in the offseE memorv with an H
code.
l) Direction of offset
C43 + side offset
C44 - side offset
rrrr drrJ
LdDE
of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount thag has
been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and
in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of tlne Z
axis movement command. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes
the terminal point.
When the movement cornmagl for the Z axis was omitted, it is taken in the same
way as:
.1, 1
uaJ
^,
tr.+
1 cqt znu
J
vl
LUvLL
and the tool moves by the offset amount in the * direction in G43 and in the
- direction in G44.
G43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the same
group is programmed.
2) Assignment of offset amount
ÊE^^+. number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the
ADDrErr
^^î^- Vr!JCL
nffcar mamnr\7 is added to or subtracted froro the programmed command value for
tlr.re Z axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 - H200. However, there
are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for cutter
compensati-on.
The offset amount may be set in the offset memory through rhe CRT/I,IDI panel.
TL^
^t
-^--^
rrrs lerr6e
wr
values that can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
mm
Offset
amount
input
o - +999.999
'in^1'
rrrLrr
mm
fi-^,,+
rrPu L
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. It iS

irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset value.
?\ Cancelling tool length compensation
To cancel the offset, couunand a G49 or assign offset H00. L^,rlren H00 or G49 is
commanded, the cancelling acti-on is taken immediately.
-96-
:k;
F:
3j
&'
ry.'
Dr.
f,.
't
/\
.+
of tool length compensation

(No. l, 2 and 3 borings)
Example
+
a-
";l
/t
I
'-----vT-r
-\{
i-- I v--
I
i;
-,6
,--'I -1
z\i\G|
\9
-rr
-\/ a
\t)
-
+Y
1...
t\
+z
= -4.0 (Offser amounr)

N1c91 c00 xl20.0 Y80.0;
N2 c43 2-32.0 HOl;
H01
N3 c01
z-2I.0
e
/t\
;\
\,
F1000;
N4 c04 P2000;
N5 c00 22t.0;
/?\
(,
N6 X30.0 Z-50.0;
N7 c01 Z-4t.0;
N8
GOO
@
@
@
Z4L.O;
N9 X50.0 Y30.0;
N10 cOt 2-25.0;
NIl c04 P2000;
rn
K_v
N12 c00 257.0 H00;
rfa
Ni3 X-200.0 Y-60.0;

Nl4 M02;
(Note 1) When the offset amount 1s changed due to a change of the offset
number, the offset value changes to the new offset amount, the new
offset amount is not added to the old offset amount.
HOI
... Offset anounr 20.0
H02
... Offset anount 30.0
c90 c43 2100.0 H0t; ...
Z vtLLL go ro 120.0
c90 c43 2100.0 H02; ...
Z witl go to 130.0
t
tt
-97-
14.1.2 Tool length offset
ci7) ^,^\
ci8l
GIgj
:i;l
b'+'+., Y
]'
or
GITl
Grsl
nrr\
::ll H
Glgj u'+'+J
The end point of the move command in Z, Y, or X axj-s can be shifted + or - by as
much as the value set i-n the offset memory by the above command. The offset
axis is specified by Gl7, GI8, or Gl9, and offset direction is specified by G43
or G44. The offset, amount that has been set in the offset memory is designated
by an H code.
1) Offset axis
The axis being vertical to the plane specified by Gl 7 , GI8, or Gl 9 is
designated as offset axis.
Plane selection
Offset axis
^11
Z axis
c18
Y axis
c19
X axis
The tool offset irtwo or more axes can be commanded bv two or more blocks as
shown below.
(Exarnple) 0ffset 1 n X and Y axes.
G19 G43 H
Offset in X axis
,
GI8 G43 H
Offset in Y axis (Offset in X and Y axes is
,
performed)
2) Direction of offset
* side offsec
G43
G44
- side offset
In any case of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount that has
been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and
in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of the
specified axis movement coumand. The coordinate value after the calculation
becomes the terminal point.
When the movement command for the specified axis was omitted. 1t is taken in
the same way as,
GI7'l c6?t Z0l

crsi ."'++)
:;;l Y0f
GlgJ
xo,J
and it moves by the offset amount in the + direction in G43 and 1n the
- direction in G44.
G 43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the
same group is programmed.
Assignment of offset amount
Assign offset number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the
offset memory is added to or subtracted from the programmed command value for
the specified axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 to H200.
However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for
cutter compensation.
The offset amount rnay be set in the offset memory through The CRT/I'DI panel.
The range of values t.hat can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
-98-
mm
0ffsec
input
0 - +999.999
amount
inch input
mm
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0.

impossible to set H00 to any other offset value.
It is
4) Cancelling tool length compensation

To cancel the offset, command a G49 or assign offset H00. In t.he case of
offset in two or more axes, the offset in all axes is cancelled by G49
command and the offset in the axis specifled by plane selection G code is
cancelled by H00
The canceLling action 1s taken immediately after G49 or H00 is comrnanded.
(Note l) Tool length offset A and B can be selected by the parameter No. 0003
TT T-D
(Note 2) In the case of the offset in three axes, if t.he of f set is cancelled
by G49 code, the P/S alarm 015 is generated. Cancel the offset by
usinq G49 and H00.
14.2 Cutter Compensation
B {G39
G42\
14.2.1 Cutter compensation function
Thic ffinnfinn nolssits the tool to be offSet by the tool radius value given, that
is, to pass through the offset path. Thls offset command is specified by a
G-code function on CNC tape or on the MDI unit.
The offset amount (tool radius
previously
value) shall
be stored in the memory correspondingly to the H code
via the MDI unit. This memory is called the Offset memory, and it can be stored
maximum 200 kinds of offset value.
Offset number is specified by the H code. H code is modal.
The G functions related to this offset are as in Table 14.2.L.
a
Table
G code
c39
G42
G functions related to cutter compensation
Group
Frrnction
00
Corner offset circular interpolation
Cutter comDensatlon cancel
G40
L:4 I
14.2.'l
07
Cutter compensation left side

Cutter compensation right side
If G4L ox G42 is specified, the equipment. is said to be in the offset model if

G40, in the cancel mode. When the power is turned on, it is in the cancel mode.
These cutter comDensation modes are not affected by the non-modal G function
(c39).
G4L and G42 belong to group 07. These codes are specified mixedly with C00,
GOl, G02 and G03, and cooperate with each other to define a mode related to tool
al
movement (Offset).
The program sha11 always terminate
with the cancel
;,
E
-99-
mode.
14.2.2 Offset amount (H codel
The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to max. 200 offsets.
(However, they are 200 offsets in total for tool length offset and cutter
compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the
H code commanded on the program, and shall be set via the CRT/l-DI. (For
details, refer to item III I0. I. l).
The range of values in which the offseE amount can be set is as followsl
mm
Offset
amount
input
0 - +999.999 mn
inch input
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0.

irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
Ir is
In Fig. 14.2.3, in order to cut a work shaped as lndicated by A with an R-radius

too1, the path for the center of the tool to pass through must be the figure B
which is separate R fron the figure A. The tool- being separate some distance
like this, is called offset. That is, the figure B is the path which is offset
R frorn the figure A.
The offset vector is a 2-dimensional vector equivalent in size to a specified
offset amount, and this value is kept stored in the control unit, and its
direction is rewritten from moment to moment as the tool moves. This offset
vector (cal1ed simply vector later) is, in order to know how much offset is to
be made i-n the directirn of a tool, etc., created in the control unit, and is
used to calculate a path offset by the tool radius from a given figure.
This vector always belongs to and follows the tool as it advances, and it is
very important in programming to know the behavior of the vector.
As shown in Fig. L4.2.3 the vector is usually at right angles with Ehe direction
in which tool advances, and faces toward the tool- center as seen from the work.
Fis. 14.2.3 Offset and vector
14.2.4 Plane selection and vector
Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by Gl7, GIB and GI9,
(C codes for,plane selection.) This plane is called the offset plane. For
instance, when the XY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
carried out using (X, Y) in the program tape and the vector is eomputed. The
coordinate values of an axis which is not in the offset plane are not subject to
the offset, and the command values programmed is used as it is.
In the sequel, what vector is created, what offset calculation is made, by an
offset command, will be discussed on assumption that an XY plane is selected.
This discussion applies also when another plane is selected. The offset vector
is cleared by reset.
-r00-
&
&
g:
$a
14.2.5 Corner offset circular interpolation (G39)

Y_
The G39X _
; or c39
I
J
; in c0l, c\Z or c03 mode
pernits eieiuiing offset circular iit.rpof"tion wittt the tool radius at a
eorner. A new vector is created to the left (G4i) or to the right (G42) looking
toward (X, Y) from the end point at right angles therewith, and the tool moves
along the arc from the polnt of the old vector toward that of the new vector.
(X, Y) is expressed in a value according to the G90/G9L respectively. (I, J) 1s
expressed in an increment.al value from the end point.
New
(X, Y)
or (I, J)
Gr_ ___
center path
,Tool
1T
ord
vecto/
tl
New vector
*(*,")
or (r. J)
Fig. 14.2.5
t\
,'ha- Tool
center path
Old vector
\\
(a)
In case of G41
Fig. 14.2.5
(b)
In case of G42
This command can be given in offset mode, that is, only when G4l or G42 has
Whether the arc is to turn clockwise or
already been specified.
counterclockwise, is defined by G4I or G42, respectlvely. This command is not
moda1, and executes circular interpolation, whatever the G function of group 01
nay be. The G function of group 01 remains even through this conmand is
specified.
14.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40)
The command G40X
i:
;:
Y
; in G00 or G01 specifies each axis to move
straightly from tnlpo-int o}-tn. old vector on the start point toward the end
point in G01 mode and eaeh axis to move at rapid traverse in G00 mode. This
command speeifies the eguipment to enter from the cutter compensation mode into
the cancel mode.
=i
Tool center path
:J
*-
Old vector
Start point
{g':
::
+
i
I
When
moves
only
G4O; is specified, and X

Y
is not specified, the tool
the old vector amount in the opp-E3Fe diffion.
**
ri
*.
*t
-rot-
14.2.7 Cutter compensation left (G41)

I) Case of c00, cOl
ThecommandG4lX
specifies a
new vG-r t6JF"."iFat@i-t
anffi with the direction
of
(I, J) on the end point, and the tool center moves toward the point of the
new vector from that of the o1d vector on the start point.
(I, J) is expressed in an incremental value from the end point, and is
significant only as a direction, and its amount is arbitrary.
center
patl
New vector
\
Start
point
(I , J)
programmed path
In case the old vector is zero, this command specifies the equipment to enter
from the cancel mode into the cutter compensation mode. At this time, the
offset number is specified bv the H code.
New vector
Start poinl
Tool center path
(x
*o(r.J)
Programmed path
or J is omitted, (I, J) is assumed to be the same as (X, Y). That is,

Y
the conrnand G4 I X
; specifies a new vector at right angles with
(x, Y) to be creatEdlIII
New vector
rY Yl
Programmed path
Old
vector
Start point
If, however, G00 is specified, each axis moves independently at. the rapid
traverse rate.
2) Case of c02, G03
'1'
The commald
;
G02(c03)X
specifies a tteffitorE-be
cEl-ea to the left looking toward the direction
in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end
point, and the tool center to move along t,he arc advancing from the point of
the old vector on the arc starE point toward that of the new vector. This
is, however, established on assumption the old vector is created correctly.
The offset vector is created toward the arc center or opposite direction
agalnst the arc eenter.
-102-
*:
fe
Tool center path

vector
(X,Y)
New vector
(X,Y)
Tool center path
Progammed path
R
Old vector
Start point
14.2.8 Cutter compensation right (G42)
G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offsec ro the right of work looking
toward the direction i.n which the tool advanees. That is, the vector created by
G42 is toward the direction opposite to that created by G41. Except for this,
Ehe o.ffset method is quite the same as in the case of G4L.
1) Case of G00, c01
G42XYIJ
P$,J)
I
Programmed path
/t/'-
x
I
New vectot
t
$
G42X
New vector
Start point
Tool center path
Old vector
In the case of
Eraverse rate.
G00,
however, each axis
-r03-
moves
independently at the rapid
z) Case
of c02,
G03
G42X
Programmed path
(x,Y)
New vector
New vector
Tool center path
-_\R
Start point
Programmed path
Old vector
Tool center path
Example 14.2.8(a)
Y axis
I
I
-xoi,
Unit:
mm
c91 c17 c41 c01 X15.00{y25.00 Ft80 H05;

c39 135.00 J15.00;
x35.00 Yl5.00;
G39 r25.00 J-20.00;
x25 .00 Y-20.00;
c39 15.00 J-25.00;
G03 X25.00 Y-20.50 R25.50; (Ineremental programming)
Example 14.2.8(b)
Tool center path
Programmed path
Y axis
**,
Unit:
mm
c9r c17 c41 c01 x50.00 y50.00 F150 H06;

c02 x96.57 Y-40.00 R56.57;
G01 Y-40.00; (Incremental- prograraming)
14.2.9 General notes on offset
1) Specification of the offset number

The offset 4umber ls specified by the H code, and can be specified anywhere
before the flrst
ehange from the offset cancel mode to the cutter
compensation mode. Also, once speclfled, the offset number does not need to
be specified agaLn, unless lt has to be changed'
-104-
from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode

A move command at the time of change from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode, must be positioning (G00) or linear interpolation
(G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used.
Change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode
A move command at the time of change from the cutter compensation mode to the
offset cancel mode, must be positioning (G00) or li-near interpolation (G0l).
The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used.
Switch between cutter compensation left and cutter compensation right
The offset direction is switched from left to right, or frorn right to left
generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be s\,/itched not through it
only i-n positioning (G00) or linear interpolarion (G0l).
In this case, the tool path is as showl be1ow.
2) Change
4)
Newvector 2$'t)
/' / -/ --
Tool center
path
New vector
(X, Y)
Tool center path
(Generally not
straight)
Programmed path
Old vector
vector
c41
GOOG42X Y
c42
GOlG41X
Switch of offset direction

I
5)
Change
of the offset
amount
The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in the offset
caneel mode' but can be changed in the offset mode only in positioning (G00)
or linear interpolation (G01).
Tool center
pa*r
New vector
Nerv vector
Programmed path
Programmed path
,/
,t6
GO1X _Y_H05;
(H0s irdicates new

offset number)
Old vector
OId vector
Change of the offset amount
6) Positive/negative offset amount. and tool center path

If the offset amount is made negative (-), it is equal that G41 and G42 are
replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool
center is passing around the outside of the work it will pass around the
inside thereof, and vise versa.
D^l1^,.i-^
: ^
rur-tuwru6 rrgiur
shows one example. Generally speaking, the offset amount
ehall lro nrnol4mmed to be posi_tive (+). When a tool path is programmed as in
(a) if the offset amount is made negative (-), the tool center moves as in
(b),' and vise versa.
-105-
(b) Tool center path
(a) Tool center pa*t
Tool center path made in accordance with positive or negative value of tool offset
For a cornered figure (involved in corner circular interpolation) in general,

the offset amount naturally cannot be made negative (-) to cut the inside.
In order to cut the inside corner of a cornered figure, an arc with an apPropriate radius must be lnserted there to provide smooth cutting.
7) If the tool length offset is commanded during cutter compensation, the offset
amount of cutter compensation is also regarded to have been changed.
14.2,10 Programexample
axis
t
I
I
X axis
Unit: mm
Zero point
c9l cr7 coo c4r
@ G}I Z-25.00
Y2o.oo rio8;
(H08 is a tool offset number, and the

cutter radius value should be stored in the
memory corresponding to this number).
F100;
o Y40.00 F250;
@ c39 r40 .00
/:\
\) x40.00
J.20
.00
Y20.00;
G39 r40.00;
@
@
@
@
c02 x40.00 Y-40.00 R40.00;

x-20.00 Y-20.00 R20.00;
c01 x-60.00;
G00 Z-25.00;
c40 Y-20.00 Ia02;
-106-
;'. ., .'
14.3 Cutter
Compensation C (G40
G42l
14.3.1 Cutter compensation function
In the figure below, in order to cut a workpiece indicated as A with an R-radius

tool, the path for the center of the tool must be the B which is separated R
distance from the A. The tool being separated some distance like this is called
offset. By the cutter compensation function, the tool path being separated some
distance (name1y, offset) is computed.
Therefore, the workpiece shape ls programmed with the cutter compensation node
by a programmer, and in machining, if the cutter radius (offset amounts) is
measured and set to Ehe CNC, the tool path is offset (path B) regardless of the
program.
Offset and Vector
14.3.2 Offset amount (H code)
The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to 200 offsets.
(However,
they are 200 offsets in total with tool length compensation.) The offset amount
depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the program,
and is set via the CRT/MDI.
.
The range of values in which the offset amount can be set is as follows;
mm
Offset
amount
inch input
input
0 - +999.999
rnn
0 - +99.9999 inch
The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0.

impossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
Ir is
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the amount
assigned by H code. It is calculated inside the control unit, and its dj-rection
is up-dated in accordance with the progress of Ehe tool in each block. This
offset vector (hereinafter called veetor) is produced insi.de the control unit in
order to find out how much the tool motion should be offset, and is used to comPute a path offset from the programmed path by the tool radius. The offset
vector is deleted by reset.
This vector always follows the tool as its progress, and it is very important,
when making a program, to understand the siatus oi the vector. Read Ehe following description carefully to understand how the vector is generated.
_, 1^l
"na is carried out in the plane determined by

Eion
Gl7, Glg and Gl9,
igo; plane selection.) This plane is ca1led the offset plane. For
Iwhen the xY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
6ut usitg (X, Y) )t (I, J) in the program tape and rhe vector is comThe coordinate values of an axis not in the offset plane are not subject
lf.lEli;"'offset, and the command values for that axis on the program tape are used
aa theY are.
in stmuttaneous
axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is
comPensated.
The offset Plane must be changed dur:ing the offset cancel mode. If it is performed during the offset mode, an alarm (No. 37) is displayed and the machine is
s topped.
G code
Offset plane
Gl7
X-Y plane
GI8
Z-X plane
GI9
Y-Z plane
14.3.5 G40, G41 and G42
Using G40' G4l and G42, the deletion and generation of cutter compensation
vectors is commanded. They are commanded simultaneously with G00, G01, GOz or
G03 to define a mode qhich determines the amount and direction of offsec
vectors, and the direction of tool motion.
G code
c40
Function
Cutter compensation cancel

Cutter compensation left
G42
Cutter compensation right
A G4l or G42
command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and a G40
causes the equipment to enter the cancel node.
The offset procedure, for example, is explained in the next figure.
The block Q) is called the start-up. In this block, the offset cancel mode is
changed to the offset mode (G41). At the end point of thls block, the tool
center is translated by the cutter radius in the direction being vertlcal to the
next block path (from Pl to P2). The cutter conopensation value ls specified by
H07, namely the offset nurbber is 7, and G41 means the cutter compens"li-otr 1eft.
->
After being startiup, when the workpiece shape is programmed as PI + p2
P8 + p9 + Pl, the cutter compensation is performed automatically.
command
In the block (! , the cutter returns to the start_ point by corornanding G40
(of f set cancel) . At the end point of the block @-, the cutter center is
translated vertically to the prograrnmed path (from P9 to pl).
At the end of the program, the G40 (offset cancel) must be commanded.
-108-
program of cutter compensation C

Example of
cr (700,
1300)
Ps(900,11s0)
P4(s00,11s0)
c3
(-l
c2 (1sso , 1sso)
s0
izso , soo)P3
(4so eoo)
'
(1
r0\
\:/
(^/
"l
ls0 , s50)
Unit: mm
/'(\
Y a-ris
a7\
tol
art poin
G92 XO YO ZO;
rn
\v Nl c90 c17 c00 c41 H07 X250.0
/l
\:/ N2 cOl Y900.0 F150;
o
/;\
\v
/:\
\)
In advance, the offset

amount must be set with
the offset number 07.
Y550.0
N3 X450.0;
N4 c03 X500.0 Yr1s0.0 R650.0;

N5 c02 X900.0 R-250.0;
@ N6 c03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0;

(, N7 cOi xl150.0;
@ N8 Y550.0;
N9 X700.0 Y650.0;
@ NlO x 250.0 Y550.0;

@ Nll c00 G40 x0 Y0;
109
*"i$fj
14.3.6 Details of cutter
compensation C
In thls item, the details of the cutter compensation C ls explained.

i) Cancel mode
At the beginning when power is applied the control is ln the cancel mode.
In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center
coincides wlth the progralnmed path. The cancel mode (c40) should
programmed before the end of a program.
I{hen the program ends in the offset mode, positioning cannot be rnade to
terninal point of the program, and the tool position will be separated f
the terminal position by the vector value.
2) Start up
In the cancel mode, when a block which sacisfies a1I of the following co
tions is executed, the equipment enters the offset mode, this is called
start up bloek.
a) G4I or G42 has been commanded. Or, it has already been commandedr a11d
centrol enters the G4l or G42 mode.
b) The offset number for cutter compensation 1s not H00.
c) A nrove in any of the axes (I, J, K are excluded) in the offset plane
been cornmanded, and its commanded move is not 0.
In the start up block, arc commands (G02' G03) are not a1lowed, as the al
(No. 3i) is generated and the tool stops. At start up, two blocks are
After the first block is read and executed, the next block enters the cu
compensation buffer (which cannot be indicated).
In the ueantime, in the case of single block mode, two blocks are read
the mrrchine stops after the first block execution.
There.qfter,2 blocks are read in advance normally, lnside the CNC, there
three blocks, the block under execution, and the next two blocks which
entered into buffcr.
(\'ote\ The meanlng of trinner-sidet' and of ttouter-sidet' encountered later
as follows:
An angle of intersection created by two bloclcs of move commands,
referred to as ttinner-sidett, when over 180o and as ttouter sidett '
0" to 180", as measured at the workpiece side.
Inner side
Workpiece side
Progtammed
180"
Ou:er .side
hoglammed path
0"S a < 180"
-110-
a)
When
going around an inside corner (180"
i) Linear + Linear
s0)
ii) Linear + Arc
Programmed path
path
/t
goes around the outside of

(90" Sct5IB0").
Tool path in start up or cancel has two types
ed by paraneter SUPM (Data No. 0016).
->
Linear
Programmed path
Tool center path
b) When the tool
Type A i) Linear
.\
\\
Hereafter, in the figures

1 S means a single block stop poinr
{ L indicates a straight line.
t C indicates an arc.
corner
rnd
R.
dL
and
an obtuse angle
they are select-
fi) Linear + Arc
Programmed paih
Tool center path

Tool center path
Type
i) Linear + Linear
Programmed
parh
ii) Linear -) Arc
II
Programmed
/ ll
;3/.[_
/\.
'r
(Note) The intersection is the

point where two offset
paths calculated by continuous two blocks are
intersected.
In tersectlon
III
Tool center path
Programmed path
c)
Llhen going around
the outside of
Ilp" A i) Linear
an
acute angle (a < 90.)
ii) Iinear -) Arc
Programmed path
Tool center path
Type B i) Linear + Linear
.,
Progr'immed paih
Tool center path
the tool goes around the outside linear + linear

at an
less than I degree, compensation is performed as
follows.
When
Tool center path

t.
anl r \ \ Less than
Programmed path
deg.
LTz
acuce angle
*
E.
{'
1
i
In offset mode
In the offset mode, offset ls performed correctly, if non-positioning commands such as auxiliary functions or dwell would not be prograrutred in two or
more successive blocks. Otherwise overcuttlng or undercutting wi1l,occur.
Offset plane must not be changed during offset mode. Otherwise an alaru is
displaved and the tool stoDs.
3)
a)
When
going around the inside (a > 180')
i) Linear + Linear
ii) Linear + Arc
Programmed path
L Tool center
,,S
Intersecting
,/
/ L Point
iii)
path
Arc + Linear
,r lr,r"rr..rir)r\
t t,
/ LPont
\
,'-
Programmedpath
iv) Arc -) Arc
Programmed path
/S
Tool center path
lntcrcaa+in-
Ct..
point
Plogrammed
Tool center path
fc
I
I
v) Straight line to straight line in the case in which it goes around at

a narror{ angle (less than 1o) and the offset vector becames abnorrnally
1arge.
Progranrmed
Also in case of arc to straight 1ine, stralght

the reader should infer 1n the same procedure.
- lI3 -
to arc,
b)
when going around an
outside corner at an obtuse angle (90 < c < Ig0o)
i) Linear + Linear
ii) Linear + Arc
r{.____
i-i
t"l
Tool center path
Intersecting Tool )enter
polnt
iii)
Arc + Linear
iv) Arc + Arc
lntr$ecting
pornt
lqteriecting
point
path
Tool mer path
T,
\
C"
ho$ammed path
'Iooi center path
-IT4-
- - -.r+!'.,r
c)
going an outside corner ac an acute angle

i)Linear + Li.near
ii) Linear + Arc
L4ren
Programmed path
t.r,
Tool center path
Programmed path
Tool center path
iii)
Arc + Linear
iv) Arc + Arc
Programmed path
Tool center path
d) Exceptional cases
i) The end point of arc is not oq the arc
Imaginary
-\
Programmed
End oi arc
Lead
arc\
\l
\ \ \,i
u.S
,.\'
{ô'
If there is an arc, lead-in line

as shown, assume an imaginary
circle which passes through the
arc end point and is concen-trical
to the arc, and draw vectors for
comp ensa t ion , on th e as s ump t i-on
that the cutter compensation has
been carried out for
the
imaginary circle. As a result, a
path for the cutter center, is
established, which is differenr
from the
path
compensa t ed
according to the program that
regards the arc lead-in l-ine as a
straight 1ine.
Similarly consider a case of
2Ta-A?.
- ll5 -
,:+siF..
'_' ;1a:
' lil: rl'-;i
ii')
There is no inner intersecting point
\\rhen the
In regard to the left figure, the

intersecting point of the arcs is
present on the offset path if the
offset value is smaIl, but it may
disappear if the offset value is
quite large. In this case, alarm
(No. 33) occurs at the end point
of the preceding block, and Ehe
tool will stop.
Concerning the left figure, there
is an intersecting point P of Ehe
offset paths for the arcs A and
B, if the offset value is smal1,
but the intersecting point cannot
be found if the offset value is
quite 1arge.
Al.n alarm occutes

annd the tool stops
off \EL
amount is lar
When the offsel amo
small
Progranrmed
parh
iii)
fn. centel
.of t he arc B
The center
of the arc A
The center of the arc is identical with the start Doint or end Doint
If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end
point, Alarm No. 38 is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end
point of the preceding block.
(G4I
F
rnode)
N5 c01 X1000;
N6 GO2 XIOOO IO JO;
N7 c03 Y-1000 J-1000;
An alarm is generated
and the tool stoPs
Tool center path
Programmed
4) Offset cancel
In the offset mode, vrhen a block which satisfies any one of the following
conditions is executed, the equipment enters the cutter compensation cancel
mode, and the action of this block is ca11ed the offset cancel.
a) G40 has been commanded.
b) H00 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter compensation.
Lhen performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not
available. -'If a circular arc is commanded, an alarm (No. 34) is generated
and the tool stops.
In the offset cancel, the control executes the instructions in that block and
the block in the cutter compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of
a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and
stoPS. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed
without reading the next block.
Then the control is in the cancel mode, and norma11y, the btock to be
executed. next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is not
read into the buffer for cutter compensation-
116
a)
When
going around an inside corner (o > 180")
i) Linear + I.inear
ii) Arc + Linear
Programmed path
o,l0
/(\
Programmed
Tool center
path
b)
When
path
going around an outside corner at an obtuse angle (90" <0<
Type A i) Linear + Linear
Programmed path
(o{ 2)
Ig0')
ii) Arc + Linear
/L
Tool center path

L
Programmed
path
Type B i) Linear + Linear
Tool center path
ii) Arc + Linear
o40
Programmed path
/L
Programmed
..t C
path
,/
,f
Tool center path
- I17 -
Intersection
c)
When
going around
outside corner at an acute angle (q

< 90,)
i) Linear + Linear
ii) Arc -> Linear
an
path
Programmed Tooi center
path
i) Linear
Programmed
path
Linear
ii) Arc
->
path
Linear
Tool center path
the tool goes around the outside linear +

li.near at
less than I degree, compensation
is performed as fo11ows. an acute angle
d) L4ren
Tool celrter path

Programmed
parJr
Less than 1 deg.
- ll8 -
.:i'
F.
F
))
of offset dlrection in the offset mode

The offset direction is decided by G codes (c41 and G42) for cutter
pensation and the sign of offset amount as follows.
Change
(inolo
--t=\
com-
nf nffcor
amOUnt
G code
G4l
Left side offset
Right side offset
\r4 L
Right side offset
Left side offset
fn a special case, the offset direction may be changed

However, the change is not available i-n the start up
following it. When the offset direction is changed, the
and outside disappears to become common for all cases.
the following example i-s assumed to be positive.
i) Linear + Lj-near
in the offset mode.

block and the block
conception of inside
The offset amount in
ii) Linear + Arc
/
Programmed path
Programmed
path
Tool center
Path
iii)
Arc + J,inear
iv) Arc + Arc
Tool center path
- il9 -
v) Llhen an intersection
is not obtained if offset is normally
performed._
and
intersection with the offset Path is not required, the vector

normal to block B Ls created at the start point of block B.
i) Linear + Linear
G42, if
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
Programmed
path
Tool center
Path c'
ii) Linear + Arc
L --'
Programmed path
-120-
iii)
Arc + Arc
Block A
(G42)
(G42)
rl
/\
An arc whose end
point is not on
the alc.
^-
w./
Progtammed
path
TooI center
path
\
Center
iv)
the length of tool center path becomes more than a circle because
of cutter comDensation
@Stnopossibi1ityofgeneratingtheabovesituation. However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J, and K the above situation can oecur.
When
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
(G42)
/D
In this case, the cutter
p\
L'
N5 c02 c9l x5000 Y-7000;

N6 c4l c02 J-5000;
N7 G42 G01 X5000 Y7000:
compensation is not performed with more than one
circle circumference: an
arc is formed from Pl to
P2 as shown. (Depending
on the circumstances, an
alarm may be displayed due
ttlnterference
to
the
Check" described 1ater. )
To execute a circle with
more than one ci.rcumf erence, the circle must be
specified in segments.
121
6)
Tennporary
offset
cancel
rf the commands below are speclfied in the offset mode, a temporary offset
cancel is actuated and thereafter the system will restore the offset mode
automatically.
Refer to 14.3.6(4) Offser cancel and 14.3.6(2) Starr-up, for detalls of these
operati-ons.
a)
automatic return to reference point

If G28 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at
the intermediate point, and the offset mode will be automaticallv restored
after the reference point is reached.
If the offset vector remains at the reference point return in such a case
as the current position being the intermediate point, the CNC makes it to
zero for each axis of which reference point return was completed.
G2B
28
lntermediate point
-5
(G42 G00)
s
Reference point
F
b) G29 automatic return from reference point

It G29 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at
the intermediate point r ard the offset mode will be restored
automatically fron the subsequent block.
When cornmanded inmrediately
after
G28
lntermediate poinl
-t
(G42 G00)
Reference point
-122-
$
A
When cornmanded
not irnmediately after
G28
lntermediate point
7)
Cutter compensation G code in the offset mode

The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in
the previous block, irrespective of rnachining on inner or outer wall, by
commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42) in the offset mode,
independently.
If this code is specified in a clrcular command, correct circular motion will
not be obtained.
When the direction of offset is expected to reverse by the command of cutter
compensation G code (G41, G42), refer to (5).
Linear + Linear
G42 mode)
f
+--I
Arc + Linear
(G42 mode)
,/c-ts
-L23-
8) Comrand for tenporary cancelling offset vector

During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programrning) is conrnanded,
the offset vector js teuporarlly cancelled and thereafter offset node is
automaticallY restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from
the intersectirrg point to the coumanded point where offseE vector 1s
canceled. Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the
intersecting point.
Tool center path
S (Intersection)
t-4'
-/\
(In!ersection)
/-\
'
I\
-t\
)'-
--r
/t
\ssl-
G92 block
N7
(G4l
rnode)
N5 G9I G01 X 30O Y7000;

N6
X-3000 Y6000;
N7 G92 X 1000 Y2000;
N8 G90 G01 X 4000 Y8000;
(lJote)
SS
indicates the polnt where the tool stops twlce ln the single block
mode.
9) A block without tool ncvement

The followlng blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks , the tool will
not move even if cutter radius.compensatlon is effected.
.. o..
O M05;
S2I;
. ....
A
() G04 XiO000;
Pol xloo;
@ clo
(cI7)
Z,2000; ..
O
M code outpur
S code output
Dr.'ell
@ Geo;
@ cel XO;
C code only
offset varue serring

not includea
in the offset plane.
Move cornmand
Move
-r24-
distance is zero.
No movement
Move distance
ls zero.
at start-up
If a block withouL tool novenent is
vector is not produced.
a) When commanded
commanded
at start-up, the offset

G40 c91
N6 X1000.0 Y1000.0;
N7 G4I XO;
N8 Y-1000.0;
N9 Yi000.0 x-:1000.0;
b) When cornmanded in offset
mode
a single block without tool movement is commanded ln the offset mode,

vector
and tool center path are the same as those when the block is
the
not connanded. (Refer to item (3) Offset node) This block is executed at
the single block stop point.
When
N6 c91 X100.0 Y200.0;

N7 c04 X100.0;
N8 Xl00.0;
-t25-
However, when the move distance is zeto, even if the block is commanded
singly, tool motion becomes the same as that when more than one block of
without tool movement are commanded, which will be described subsequently.
N6 c91 xl000 Y2000;

N7 XO;
NB XlOOO;
Two blocks without tool movement should not be commanded consecutively.

If comrnanded, a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block, so over-
cutting may result.
N7 Nq..
(Note 4)
N9
N6 c91 x100.0 Y200.0

N7 S21;
N8 G04 X1.0;
N9 Xl00.0;
\
\
Blocks N7 and N8
/N6
(Note)
SSS means
are executed here.
that tool stops three times by single block operation.
-126-
+'
t!-
&,
P.
fi
*Y.
c)
I^lhen commanded together with offset cancel

When a block without tool movement is comrnanded
together with an offset

cancel' a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in
a direction normal to tool motion in the earlier b1ock, the Vector is
cancelled in the next move command.
N7
N6 c91 Xr00.0 Y100.0;

N7 G4O;
N8 X100-0 Y0;
l0) When a block contains aG40andI

plane
i)
included in the offset
of the previous block ls G4L or G42

In this case the CNC assumes that the movement frorn the end point of
previous block in the direction of (I, J or K) has been commanded.
When
the
mode
E (x,y)
Tool comes here
by G40 block.
(I, J)
Center of tool goes

to X in (G42) block.
Programmed path
(G 42)
N1 tu4z mode)
N2 b.+ ul\
^.J.,
-t27-
the
In this case, note that the CNC obtalns an intersection of the tool
irrespective of whether inner or outer wal1 machinlng ls specified.
_/ _/
-.
x-/
a+c\
--/ --/
--\ -
path
Tool center path
--
mmed path
-\
--tt\
-\
-
CAz
_r_
(l,J)
an i.ntersection is not obtainabJ-e, the tool comes to the posltion

normal to the previous block at the end of the previous b1ock.
When
-_
Tool center path
Programmed path
0, J)
128
11) When the length of the tool center path becomes more than a clrcle.
,1,/
:r
,P2
Programmed
(G41)
N5 c01 G91 X10000;

N6 c02 J-6000;
N7 c40 c01 x5000 Y5000 r_100J_lo0;
In the above case' the tool center path does not go around a circle but
moves only from point PI to p2 along an arc.
According to under some ci-rcumstance, an alarm may be generated by the
interference check described 1ater. (if lt is ddsired to move a tool
around a circle, a circle must be conrnanded with partitions.)
ll) Corner
movement
When two or more
vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves

linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner
movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isnrt
performed and the latter vector is ignored.
This vector is ignored,
if avx< aV limit,
avy<av limit
-129-
If AVx<AVlimit and AVycAVlimit, the latter vector is ignored. The AVIimit

is set in advance by parameter No. 0557, CRCDL.
If Ehese vectors do not coi-ncide, a move is generated to turn around the
corner. This move belongs to the latter block.
This move belongs to block N7,
thus, the feed rate is equal to
that in block N7
If the block N7 is G00 mode, the
tool is moved at the rapid traverse
rate, while if it is G01, G02, G03,
the tool is moved at the cutting
feed rate.
the path of the next block is semicircular or Eore, the

function is not performed.
The reason for thia j-s as follows:
However, if
P2
/-,
P3,P4
above
P5
N4
\
\
N5
N6
N7
N8
c4l c91 cOi
x1500 Y2000;
x1500 Y2000;
G02 J-6000;
c01 xl500 Y-2000;
G40 Xl500 Y-2000;
)
Tool
center path
l\/
\-/\--
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as f ollor+s:

P0 + Pl + P2 + P3 + (Circ1e) + P4 + P5 +P6+P7
But if the dlstance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the polnt
ignored.. Therefore, the tool path is as follows:
P0 + Pl -> P2 + P4 + P5 + P6 -> P7
Nanely, circle cutting by the block N6 1s ignored.
-130-
P3
1C
-s;
:,
*i:'
j
12) Interference check

Tool overcutting is called rinterferencet. The interference check funetion
checks for tool overcutting i-n advance. However, all interference can not
be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if
overcutting does not occur.
a) Reference conditions for interference
The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path. (From 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths).
rn addition to the above condition, the angle between the sLart point
and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that
between the start point and end point on the prograffred path in
ci-rcular rnachining. (More than lB0 degrees)
Example
t::
g'
of condition O
,:i
Programmed
path
The directions of these two
paths are quite different
;?;
(180" to each other)
Tool nose center path
Programmed path
The dtections of these two paths ale
quite different (180" to each other)
1f
Example
of condition @
/
Tool center
oath ,/- -
Programmed
Path
,,/
t.'
f
,/"ou
\
I
Center
(c41)
N5 c01 c9l x8000 Y2000 HOi;
N6 c02
X3200 Y-r600 r-2000 J-8000 H02;
N7 cOl
x2000 Y-5000;
(Offset value corresponding to H01 : r-1 = 2000)
(Offset value corresponding to H02 : t2 - 6000)
In the above example, the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant.
But after cutter compensation, the arc is placed in the four quadrants.
b) Correction of interference in advance
O Removal of the vector causing the interference
When cutter radj-us compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and
vectors Vl, YZ, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5 , V6, V7 and
V6 between B and C are produced, the nearest veccors are checked
first.
If interference occurs, they are ignored. But if the vectors
to be i-gnored Cue to interference are the last vectors at the corner,
they cbnnot be ignored.
Interference check
between vectors V6 and Vc -- Interfere
V4 and V5 are ignored
Check
between V3 and
VU
Interference
Check
Ignored
Interference Ignored
Interfere
Cannot be lgnored
If, whl1e checking, a vector wlth no interference is detected, subsequent vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular movement, a
Ij-near movement 1s produced
if the vectors are interfered.
-
between V2 and V7
Check between V 1 and Ve
-132-
Exarnp
le
The tool Floves li-nearlv
I)
c--/
Tool nose
center path
Programmed
path
(Example 2)
, V6: Interference
Y2,Y1 Interference
V1 , Vs: No interfere
V3
If the tool is stopped by

single block operation at
block A, the tool center
moves to Vr.
V4, V5 : Interference
\ I
or O2
The tool moves linearly as fo11 ows:

T'ooI path: V r +VZ+V7+
Vg
vl
v2
su,
L
!l
v6,
I'if---
Tool nose
\C
center path
Programmed path
If the tool is stopped by

single block operatj.on at
block A, the tool center
moves to Va.
Then puttiig the operatlon
into start moves t.he tool
to \,7_ or V^.
/d
or o:
-133-
V2, V7 : No interfere
@ If the interference occurs after correction O , the tool is
stopped
wi-th an alarm.
If the interference occurs after correction O or if there are only
one pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors
interfere, the alarm (No.41) is displayed and the tool is stopped
jmmediately after execution of the preceding block. (If the block is
executed by the single block operatj-on, the tool is stopped at the end
of the block.)
Tool nose center path
Stopped
v2, v5
Interference
v1,v6:
Interference
After ignoring vectors V, and V5 because of interference, interference

also occurs between vectors V1 and V6. The alarm is displayed and the
tool is stopped.
c)
interference is supposed though there is no actual interference

Several examples will be given.
(!) Depression which is smaller than the offset value
When
Tool center path
Stop
Programmed path
There'is no actual interference, but since the di-rection programmed in

block B is opposite to that of the path after cutter compensatlon the
tool stops and an alarm is displayed.
-134-
O Groove which is smaller than the offset value

Programme<1
path
Tool center path
Stop
I
Like O,
l3) Input
command
the direction is reverse in block

fron
B.
MDI
Compensation is not performed for conmands input from the MDI.

However, when automatic operation using the NC tape composed of absolute
commands is temporarily stopped by the single block function, l'{DI operation
is performed, then automatic operation starts agains, the tool path is as

follows:
In this case, the vectors at the start point of the next block are translated and the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks.
Therefore, from point Pc, compensation is accurately performed.
V.
D2
"t, (
Programmed path in
absolute command
NTDI
operaLlon
VB
\'
/
;\
When points Po, Po and P" are programmed j-n an absolute command, the tool is
stopped by thb single block function after executing the block from P^ to
Pp and the tool is moved by MDI operation. Vectors V-, and V-. âre
t?anslated to V'-, and V'-^ and offset vectors are recal3illated fBi the
vectors V^,
ana 4,t^ betweenbflock p--p^ and p^-p*.
t"lrr""
lr3"tto, Vo, is not scalucutatef, afain, compensation is accuHowever,
rately performed from po{n-t P".
I
) Manual operat i.on

For manual operation during the cutter compensatlon, refer to item III-4.5.
135
15) If the tool leneth compensation is executed during cutter compensation, the
compensatlon amJunt of the cutter is regarded to be changed.
16) General precautions on offset
a) Offset value command
The offset value is cornmanded by a H code which specifies an offset value
number.
Once eomnanded,
a H code rematns valld until another H code is commanded

or cleared.
In addltion to specifying the offset value for cutter compensation, the H
code ls also used to command offset value for tool offset.
b) Changing the offset value
In general, the offset value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when
changing tools. If the offset value is changed in offset mode, the
vector at the end point of the block is calculated for the new offset
value.
Calculated from offset

value in block 6.
Calculated from offset

value in block 7.
c) Positive/negative offset amount and tool center path

If the offset amount is negative (-), distribution is made for a figure
in which G4Irs and G42's are all replaced with each other on the process
sheet. Consequently, if the tool eenter is passing around the outsj-de of
the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vise versa.
The figure below shows one example. Generally,'the offset amount is
programmed to be positive (+).
When a tool path is programned as in (a), if the offset amount is rnade
negative (-), the tool center moves as j-n (b), and rrise versa. Consequently, the same tape permits cutting both male and female shapes, and
any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset
amount. (applicable if start-up and cancel is A type).
Tool center path
(a)
Tool center path
136
d) Overcutting by cutter compensation

i) Machining an inside corner at a radius smaller than the cutter radius
hthen the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because
the inner offsetting of the cutter: will result in overcdttings, an
alarm is generated and the NC stops at the start of the block. In
single block operation, the overcutting is generated because the tool
is stopped after the block execution.
Tool center path
An alarm is Senerated
and the operation stops
Programmed path
An alarm is generated
and the operation stops here
in single block operation.
'
If the NC does not stop,

overcuttlng occurs.
ii) Machining a groove smaller than the tool radius

Since the cutter compensation forces the path of the center of the
tool to move in the reverse of the prograromed direction, overcutting
will result.
In this case an alarm is generated and the NC dtops at the start of
the block.
An alarm is generated and
the operation stops.
Tool center path
Programmed
{
Z*\
Overcu!ring if the operation

rvould not stop.
137
iii)
When machining a step smaller than the tool radius

When machlning of the step is commanded by circular
machlning in the
a
step
smaller
case of a program containing
than the tool radius, the
path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to
the programmed dj-rection. In this case, the first vector is ignored,
and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single
block operation is stopped at this point. If the machining is not in
the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued. If the step
is of linear, no alarru wil1.be generated and cut correctly. However
uncut part will remain.
Linear movemenl
End point of single biock
Tool center path
Prosrammed path
Circular
-.
CEntor of circular machining
The fust vector is ignored
An overcutting will result if the first vector is not isnored
iv) Ttre start up and the movement in Z axts on the cutter compensation C
It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z
axi-s after the cutter compensation is effected at some distance from
the workpiece at the start of the machining.
In the case above, if it is desired to divide the uotj-on along the Z
axi-s into rapid trave.rse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below.
Nl c9t c00 c41 x50000 Y50000 Hl;
N3 G01 2-30000 Fi;
N6
Yi00000 F2;
N6: Offset mode
In the program example above, when

executing block Nl, blocks N3 and
N6 are also entered into the buffer
storager arrd by the relationship
amon thero the correct compensati-on
is performed as in the figure to
the rieht.
138
Move command
in Z axis.
Start up
Then, if the block N3 (move comrnand

in Z axis) is divided as follows:
I
Nl c9l c00 c4l
N3
x50000 Y50000
Z-25000i --r
N5 cOl 2-5000 Fl:r
N6
Y100000 F2;
Hl;
N3, N5; lvlove

command in Z ads.
As there are two move command blocks not included in the selected
plane and the block N6 cannot be entered into the buffer storage, the
tool center path is calculated by the information of NI in the fi-gure
above. That is, the offset vector is not calculated in start up and
the overcutting may result.
The above example should be modified as follow:
The move command in the same direction as that of the move command
after the motion in Z axis should be programmsd.
Nl c9l c00 c41 x50000 Y40000 Hl;
N2 Y10000;
N3 2-25000;
N5 cOl 2-5000 FI;
N6 Yi00000 F2;
N6
(The direction of the move command

N2 is the same as that of N6.)
/N2
N3, N5
lvlove command
in Z axts
executing the block Nl, the blocks N2 and N3 are entered into the
buffer storage and the correct comDensation is performed by the relationship between Nl and N2.
When
- rJ'-{ -
14.4
Changing of Tool Offset Amount (programmable data input) (G10)
The offsec amount, which are used in tool length offset and cutter compensation,
can be set by G10 command in programming. The command format. is as follows.
G1OP
R
t
P: OffseT number
R: 0ffset amount
The offset amount is absolute or incremental depending on the G90 or
respectively
14.5
G9l
Scaling (G50, c51)
Scaling is commanded to figures specified by machining programs. To specify

scaling, effectuate it by setting parameter (No.36 SCLX, Y, Z) first.
G51r
J _K_P_;
IrJ,F-S.afing
cettter x,v,Z coordinate values
(Specify the absolute posirion)
: Scale factor (Least input increment: 0.00I or 0.00001 ....
P
parameter selection (No. 36 SCR))
By this command, the subsequent move command is scaled by the scale factor
specified by P, starting with the point specified by I,J,K as the scaling
center.
This scaling mode is cancelled by G50.

G50 : Scaling mode cancel command
G51 : Scaling mode com:nand
The scale factor can be specified within the following range:
0.0000f - 9.99999 or 0S0L * 999.999 times
Pa
P3
\.Po'
l-T
Pe'
l,'t1t: -l-
,/ P!'
P2'- --
Pl - P4 : Figures of machining program

PIr - P4': Figures after scaling
: Scaling center
Po
If P is not specified, the scaling factor preset by the I{DI & CRT is applicable.
If I,J,K are omitted, the G51 comrnand point serves as the scaling center.
This scaling is not applicable to the offset quantities such as cutter
compensation amount, tool length compensati-on amount, tool offset amount, and
others.
-140-
---\
l12 scalng
L)l
(Note l) Specify G51 in an independent block. Cancel G5I by G50 without fail
after scaling.
(Note 2) The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
(Note 3) If a setting value is employed as a scale factor r^rithout specifying P,
the setting value at G5l courmand time is employed as the scale factor,
and a change of this value by another command, if anlr is noL
effective.
(Note 4) Whether the scaling function is effective or not, it can be set by a

n'rtmprer for each axis. The scaling function always becomes effecti-ve
for the clrcular radius coruoand R in the G5l mode, irrespecti-ve of
these parameters.
(Note 5) Scaling is not effective for manual operation, but is effeeLive for
the tape, memory, or MDI operations.
(Note 6) Scaling is not applicable to the followi-ng movement in case of the
canned cycle Z-axj-s movement
* Cutting depth Q and return relief of deep hole cycle (G83, G73).
x X, Y shift quantity in fine boring (c76) and back boring (c87).
(Note 7) Specify G27, G28, G29, c30, and G92 in G50 mode wiChout fail.
(Note 8) If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as
a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In
chis a case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and
therefore, it may affect the cutter movement by cutter compensation C.
14.6 Coordinate System Rotation (c68, Gj9]_.

A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible,
for example, to modify a program using a rotation command when a workpiece has
been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position on the machine.
Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the
posi-tions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length
of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling
it after rotation.
- l4i -
Center
of
rotation
t
,i
14.6.1 Command format
Icl7 ]
cl8 |
RR
c68
G19.'
o,B: Designate two axes among X, Y and Z (coordinate value of rotational

center) rhar correspond to cI7, Gl8 and Gf9. (G90/G9l mode 1s
effective.)
Angle of rotation ('r+rr is the CCW direction.

Comnand with an
absolute value. An incremental value can also be comnanded by the
setting of a parameter. (No. 4i RIN))
After this command is specified, the subsequent cosmands are rotated by the
angle specified with R around the point designated with cr and B. Command the
angle of rotatj.on within the range of -360,000<R5360,000 in 0.001 deg.
increment.
,/
(a,0)
-r42-
The rotation plane depends on the plane (G17, Gl8, Gl9) selected when G68 is
designated. Gl7, GIB or Gl9 is not required to be designated in the same block
as G6B.
When o and B are omitted, the position where G68 is commanded is Set as the
center of rotation.
As for the incremental commands up to an absolute position command' following a
G68 cornmand, it is assumed that the rotary center were not specified (the point
where G68 was commanded is the center of rotation).
When R is omitted, the value set to parameter is regarded as the angle.
The coordinate system rotatj-on is cancelled by G69;
G69 may be designated in the same block as the other commands.
Tool offset, such as cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or tool
offset, is performed after t.he coordinate sysLem is rotated fo? the command
p
rogram.
As for the incremental position commands designated between the G68 block and a
block with an absolute comnand; it is regarded that the center of rotation is
not designated (that is, it is regarded that the point where G68 was designated
is the center of rotation).
(Note l) When a value with a decimal point is designated for R, the position of
the decimal point becomes the unit of angle.
(Note 2) If a movement command is specified with G69, the following lncremental
command does not move the tool in the incremental motion.
(Exarnple I )
Nl c92 X-5000 Y-5000 G69 G17;

N2 c68 G90 X7000 Y3000 R60.000;
N3 c90 GOl x0 Y0 F200;
a/-\
comnd s desrtsnated in the \l

blk rm parenlhcsis)
/
\
(c9r xs000 Y5000)
N4 G91 X10000;
N5 G02 Y10000 R10000;
N6 G03 X-10000 r-5000 J-5000;
N7 G0r Y-10000;
N8 c69 c90 x-5000 Y-5000 M02;
Tuol palh whn rhe incremnrdt
.\
Origimlly programm.d
tool palh
60. \
{
a
Center
0f
.otalion
(7000,3000)
(-5000, -5000)
(Note 3)
Do not change the plane selection in the

G19 in the G69.mode).
-I43-
G68
mode (command
Gl7, G18 or
14.6.2 Relationship to other functions

l) Cutter ComPensation C
IE is possible to specify G68 and G69 wit.hin cutter compensation

rotation plane must coi.ncide with the plane of cutter comDensation C.
C.
The
(Exarnple 2)
NI G92 XO YO G69 GOI;

N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 Fi000
N3 G68 R-30000;
N4 G9 I X2000;
N5 G03 Y1000 r-1000 J500:
N6 G01 X-2000;
N7 Y-1000;
N8 c69 G40 c90 X0 Y0 M30:
H01
\*)r-
hogrammed shape before

coordinate s),stem rotation
Programmed shape after

coordinate system rotation
(0, 0)
Tool path
2) Coordinate system rotation in the scaling mode.

If a coordinate system rotation corrmand is executed in the scaling mode (G51
mode), the coordinate value (cl,B) of the rotat.ion center will also be scaled,
but not the rotation angle (R). When a move eouuland is issued, the scaling
i e annl i od first and then the coordinates are rotated.
Therefore, the
commands must be specified in the order shown below for programming.
(Example
1)
G5f . .. . . .; (Scaling node)

a:t . . . ...; (Coordinate system rotation
G69 ......;
G50 ......;
0N)
(.Coordinate system rotation QFf):

(Scaling mode cancel)
A coordinate'system rotation command (G68) should not be issued in cutter

comPensation C mode (G41, G42) on scaling mode (G51). The coordinate system
rotation command should always be specified prior to setting the cutter
compensation C mode.
-r44-
i@
Repetitive Commands
It is possible to store one Program as a subprogram and recall the subprogram
by changing the angIe.
(Exaurple 4) Setting the parameter RIN (No. 4I ) to I
G92 X0 Y0 G69 Gi7:
GOl F200 H01;
M98 P2100;
I"198 P072200 L7;
c00 c90 x0 Y0 M30;
2200 G68 X0 Y0
c9o M98 P2r00;
c9l
R45.0;
MqQ.
2100 G90 c01 c42 x0 Y-10.0;
.r42 Y-10.0;
x7.07r Y-7.071;
x4
G40;
M99;
(
I
When offset is
not applied
I
{
\l
\_-_
l___
f-
_ _J
S$b-!loSB$r
-146-
wn.n offset
awned
is
(Example 2)
(
Cut
G51
c68
ter compensation cancel)

..; (Scaling mode)
..; (Coordinate system rotation
uar
..; (Cutter compensation
0N)
C)
(Example 3)
G92XOYO;
c5 1X3000Y1500P500;
c68x2000Y I 000R45000 ;
c01x4000Y1000.
Y1000;
X-2000;
Y-i000;
x2000;
When only coordinate system
rotation is applied.
When scaling and coordinate

system rotation are applied.
-r7-z'B'
- -1
/l
When
only scaling
is applied.
' A cutting
-145-
program
Actual motion
Motion without
skip signal
Skip signal is
input here.
\\4'
t'
\t-//
(3oo,1oo)
1"
\//
L<:- - u',
100
200
300
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom nacro because they are stored in the custom mrcro system variable
#5061 to /15064, as follows:
#5061
. X axis coordinate value
1t5062 . Y axis coordlnate value
115063 . Z axls coordinate value
115064
4th axis coordinate value
The skip functlon can be used when the movement distance is not known as in
the standard-size feed in grinders.
Refer to the manualg published by the machine tool bullder.
(Note 1) If G3t comnand is issued while cutter compensation C is applied, an
alarm is displayed. Cancel the cutter compensation with the G40 command before the G31 comrnand is specified.
(Note 2) Dry run, override and automatlc acceleration/deceleration are in_
effective for skip function. However, it is possible to make effective
them by parameter setting (SKPF, parameter No. 0015)
-r4B-
15. MEASUREMENT
FUNCTTONS
15.1 Skip Function (G31)
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move followi-ng the G3 I

command' like GOl. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of
this command, executlon of the comrnand is interrupted and the next block is
executed. G3l is a one-shot command and is effective onJ-y in the block in which
it is specified. The motion after the input of the skip signal depends on
whether the next block is an incremental or absolute command.
l) When the next block is an incremental command:
The motj.on in the next block is performed incrementally from the position at
which it is interrupted by the skip signal.
(Example) C31C9lXI00.0F100;
Y 50.0;
Actuai motion
Skip signal is
5
Motion without
0.0
skip signal
\ \ .\
-=\2)
100.0
--
the next bl-ock is an absolute command with only one axis specified:
The specified axis moves to the commanded position. The axi-s which was not
specified remains at the position when the skip signal is input.
When
(Example)
c31c90X200.0Fr00;
YI
00.0;
Actual motion
Motion without
skip signal
Skip signal is
irput
here.
A
3)
lihen the next block

The tool moves to
signal is input.
(lixample)
6x = zoo.or
is an absolute cornmand with t\^'o axes specif ied:

the posiEion specified by next block even if the skip
C31C90X200.0F100;
x300.0Y100.0;
-r47-
16,1 Custom Macro
Command
The custom macro command is the command to call the custom macro body.
Custom macro or subprogram can be called by the following commands.
16.1.1 M98 (Sinsle call)
Command format is as follows:
M98P_;
t- Called macro body program No.
With the above command, the macro body specified by P is called
16.1
.2
Subprogram call using M code
The subprogram can be called using M code set in parameter.

N G X ... M98 P<pt;
iiitEa-of
commanding as above , the same operat ion can be commanded using
following command:
N_G_X_...
M.mt;
The correspondence of M code <m> which calls subplogram and the program number
<P> (09001 - 09003) of the called subprogram shall be set by paramerers (tlo.
0240 UMMCDI - No . 0242 UMI'ICD3)
ffi5p"Cram
caff , E -maiirnuru of 3 among M03 - I'1255, except M30 and t"l code
which does not buffer (parameter No. 0035,'0036 MBUFI, MBUF2) can be used.
(Note l) Sirnilarly to M98, signal MF and I"1 code are not output.
(Note 2) Delivery of argument is not possible.
(Note 3) Subprogram call M code used in the subprogram which is called by M or
code does not,executes subprogram call but as an ordinal M code.
16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code
When parameter (No. 0040 TMCR) is set beforehand, subprogram (09000) can be
called using T code.
T<t>;
N G X
the above command resul-ts in the same operation of command of the following 2
blocks
i/I49 = <t> i
N_G_X_...
M9B P9000;
The T code <t> is stored in a
common
variable
/10149_as
j1"_:ryIsrrl.
(Note 1) It is not possible to command with a same block as that. of subprogram

call using I'1 code.
(Note 2) Subprogram call T code used in the subprogram which is called by M or T
code does not executds subprogram call but as an ordinal T code.
16.1.4 G66 (Modal call)
The command format
is as follows:
G66P :
L Called.macro body program No.
The above command selects the macr.o modal call mode for NC. In other words,
every time each block subsequent to the above command is executed, the macro
designated by P is called. A1so, an argument can be designated by a block
subsequent Eo the above command. For this argument, refer to 16.1.3. The macro
modal call mode is cancelted by the command below.
G67 ;
r50 -
s
re,.
Gt
Gr
&:.
*g
1
&
g
16.
CUSTOM MACRO A
il
ti
Request
Machine tools builders are requested to attach your custom macro program tape
or program list to the CNC unit without fai1.
If. it is necessary to replace part program. storage memory due to a failure,
FANUC sert'icemen or end users operators in charge of maintenance should know
the contents of custom ruacro for the purp-o-56-oTElTiring the trouble immedi-
li
i
:
ately.
A function covering a group of instructions is stored in menory lhe same as a

subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instructiori, so that only
the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This
group of registered instructions is ca11ed a "custom macro bodytl_ and the representativeinstructionisca11eda''cuStom'""'ffiThecustommacro
body may simply be cal1ed a macro. And the custom nacro instruction may be
ca11ed a macro eall command.
Custom macro body
A group of instructions
for a certain function
Custom macro
instruction
Programmers need only remember representative macrg i.pslructiong

to remember all the instructions in a euEEom-EEEi6-6oty
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that [yg!Se?
can be
used in the custom macro body, .$!'Ei?ITin$ can be performed on-EiiaLles and
actual values\ can be asslgned to cne vartabl-es in custom macro instructions.
'1
-r49-
Table 16.1.5
Variable
number
(value)
(b)
correspondence between group number of G code and variabre

numbers
Variable number
(flag)
G code group
Remarks
number
#8030
#8130
00
One shot and others
#803
#8131
01
G00, G0l, c02, c03
#8032
tt8t32
o2
Gl7, cl8, cig
#803
#8133
03
c90,
#8035
#8135
05
G94
#803 6
#8136
06
c20,
#8037
#8137
o7
G40, G4l,
#8038
#8i38
08
G43, G44, c4g
#8039
#8
r39
09
c73, G74, G76, c80
#8040
#8 140
t0
coR
vtvt
coa
v//
#804 r
"?18141
l1
G66,
G67
#8045
#8 145
I5
G6I, G62, c63,
8046
tt8L46
16
c68,
c9
G2
I
G42
c8g
G64
c69
//8I00rs variables are flags to indicaEe whetehr an argument has been speci f ied
or not every call. These variables are I if an argument is specified, and 0 if
no argumenE is specified.
#8000's variables show a specified value, if an argument is specified. However,
they become as specified below, j-f no argument is specified.
i) Reference in NC command
The address itself is neglected.
2) Reference in macro command (G65 block)
This value is undefined. Use it after confirming 8f00's numbers.
If plural G codes are specified a arguments in the same block, a value is input
to variables in each group as shovrn in Table L6.1 .2 (b). In rhis case, /18010 is
the smallest group nuuber out of the numbers specified at a time. No value can
institute into //8100's and 8000f s variables.
-L52-
16.1.5 Argument specification
An argument means an actual value given to a variable employed in a salled

dll
V.
can be specified at all addresses employable'in this CNC
llldLr
5u
^- 4!^-^"ment
except for 0. The format of argument specification is f-he same as in normal CNC
command. The llmitation at each address as a normal CNC command, such as
decimal point, sign, maximum number of digits, etc., is also applicable t.o the
format. The following table indicates the correspondence between argument
specification addresses and variable numbers.
Table 16.1.5
Variable
number
(a)
Correspondence between addresses and variable numbers
Vari.able
number
(flag)
Address
#8004
#8104
#800s
#8105
#8006
#8 106
#800
#8 109
-f
#80 r0
#8i10
#80rr
#8llt
#8013
#81
l3
#80r4
#8r14
#80r6
#8rl6
#8017
#81i7
#8018
#8IIB
#8019
#8rl9
#8020
#8120
{t8024
tt8l24
#80 25
#8125
8026
{t8r26
(value)
tf
- l5l -
Remarks
16.22 Kind of variables

Variables are sort.ed into
conmon vari-ab1es
and system
variable_s according to
variab1enumbers,andtheiram;,,d"h'...i:.'"romeachother.
1) Common variable //100 to ilt49 and //SO0 to ii 531
Common variables are cornmon to main programs and each macro
called from these
main programs. That is, i/i in a macro is equal to /li in another macro.
Common variables //L00 co--_il_I49 are cleared when the power is turned off, and
reset to "0" jusr after por6Fw66 turned on. Cbninon v-arial tEslSOO ro rI53l
clea:9{,= _:ygl
2)
"jg_,r'-otunchanged
51'stem variable
_ i{"."._poy_er
is turned ,- of f ,-- and - thJii--vaiu-eF:-ena-in
The system variables are defined as variables whose appllcati-ons remain

f ixed
a) Tool of f set amounr #L - 1199, IIZOOO - llZ2OO
The offset amount can be known by reading system variable //l to ll99 values
for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by substituting
them into system variables llL to 1199. Among these offset numbers I to 99,
those which are not used as offset amounts can be treated as hold tvDe
cofftron variables (#500 to ilS:t) .
The system variables il200L to ll22O0 correspond to the tool offset numbers
1 to 200. They can be read and substituted as the same as /ll to 1199.
b) Inrerface inpur signals i/1000 to /ll0I5, llLo3z
Interface input signals can be known, by reading system variables //1000 to
#1015 for reading interface signals.
zrs 2r4
DI
UI
2r2
":
I5 UI14 UI13 UI I2 UI1
#1014
#1015
r1o 29 28
2rr
1
2l
26 25 24 23 22 2l
UIlO UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1
zo
UIC
| #ror2 I #roio liiroos llrrooo lltrdoa l+rooz llrr 000
1013
i/1009
10
Input signal
#L007
/l
l00s
1003
/i1001
Variable value
Contact closed
Contact opened
By readi.ng system variable lt1032, all the lnput signals can be read at
once.
l5
tt'L032: L /t(i000
-f t)
x I^1
i=0
(Note I) No .r"1rl. can be substituted into system bariables #1000 to llL032.

(Note 2) System variables #1000 ro i/tOt5 can be <iisplayed by diagnostic
f
(Note 3)
uncti-on.
DGNOS No. i10 UlO to Ul7

DGNOS No. lll
Ul8 to Ul5
System variables i/1000 to llLO32 can be used only when FANUC
is comblned.
-154-
PMC
ss
3
16.2 Custom Macro
Body
]n the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary ala command
variables, calculation, and branch command can be used.
The custom macro body starts from the program No. which irunediately follows 0
and ends at M99.
c6EoT-.
G90c00x/r 10 r
c65H82
,
,
De^ê^..
r
rl^
Calculation
command
CNC command
using variables
rvSr4ur
Branch
rrv.
command
End of custom Eacro

Fig.
16.2 Construction of the custom macro body
16.2.1 Variables
Instead of dj,rectly providing a numeral to an address in the macro, a variable

can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying the
calculated variable when calling t,he macro or when executj-ng the macro itself.
Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable numbers.
I ) How te-exol:ss--lari-ablesVariables are exPressed by variable numbers following /l as shor^m below.
ll_i (i = l, 2, 3, 4
...... )
(Exarnple) !!5, tJQ-- #199:2) How to quote variables
A numeral following an address can be repraced by a variable.
Assume that <Address> //i or <Address> - /li is programmed, and it means that
the variable value or its complement serves as the tommand value of the
address.
(Example)
: ]'i-fl?3:: il:i::::: :H: ;:;,;';":"Hilfi":n;il"11'li,J I'i,0.
. "G it139" indicates that G3 was commanded when /1130 = 3.

When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as
tt//ill00tt, for example, but expressed astt//9100". That is, rrgtr
rr.*t to ttlftj
indicates the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be
rep laced.
(Example) If*/i 10O--=_._!_Q5- and /1105 = -500 , "Xi/9100" indicates that X-500 r^ras
commanded, and "X-/19100" indicaCes that X500 \4ras conrmandJ.".
g"
(Note 1) No variable can be quoted at address 0 and N. Neither 0#100 nor N//120
can be programured.
(trtote 2) IT-Is not possible to command a value exceeding the maxi-mum comnand
value set in each address. When #30 = I20, M/130 has exceeded the
maximum command value.
3)
to display and set a variable value

Tt is possible to display a variable value on the
variable value to a variable by MDI key.
How
-r53-
CRT screen
or set
of necessary parts, number of machined parts

It is possible to read and substitute the number of necessary parts
number of machined parts by use of system variables.
e) Number
Kind
System
and
variable
Number
of machined parts
#390I
Number
of necessarv parts
#3902
(Note l) Do not substitute a negative value.

f
) I'Iodel inf ormation /f400L - #4120

It is possible to know the current values of modal information (modal
command given ti11 irnmediately preceding block) by reading values of
system variables #4001 - li4120.
Variab Ies
Model information
#400 r
G code (group 01)

G code (group 02)
G code (group 03)
114002
#4003
#4022
tt4L09
lf
4t13
tt4rt4
{t4IL5
tt4t19
ll4t20
G code (group 22)
F code
M code
Sequence No.
Program No.
S code
T code
(Note l) The unit will be the one being used when .the
command
is given.
C) Position information //5001 to /15083

The position information can be known by reading system variables ii500I to
#5083. The unit of position information is.0.001 mm in metric input and
0.000I inch in inch input.
156
c) Interf ace ourpur signals //t tOO to /l lll5, #t132, #I133

A value can be substituted into system variables
sending the interface signals.
2r5 214 213 212 2Lt I 10
DO
J0l5 uo14 uol
u0l2
u01
28 27 26 25 24
29
I)
to u0l5)
i5
I|LL3Z
= L
can
/11106
{trro7
I 109
Variable value
(uoo
I /il104 |
#1 105
#1 1
.,
23
l5 for
1n
2' 2'
2"
u01 uoc
#1102
#r103
#rro
111101
Output signal
Contact closed
Contact
opened
value into system variable Itll32, all

be sent out. at once.
#(1100 -tr-)xz
to
uol0 uo9 uo8 u07 u06 u05 u04 uo3 u02
llLLr4 | llrrl2 I /t1110 l/tl108 I
By substituting
#1100
output signals
Î
r-v
32 interface signals
to
(UO100
U0131) can be sent out by
#II33 at
once.
^n
JU
#ii33= r il(24*vi)
i=0
Vi = 0 when
Vl = 1 when
-z3L
UO (100+i) is LOW.
UO (100+i) is HIGH.
(Note 4) If
any other number than '0' or ' I ' is subsEituted into system
variables #1100 to /ll1l5, it is treated as 'l'.
(Note 5) It is possible to read the values of sysrem variables /llt00 ro /lll33.
(Note 6) System variables /lll00 to #1115 and #1133 can be displayed by
diagnostic function.
DGNOS No. 126 UOO to UO7
No. 127 U08 to UOl5
No. 196 U0100 ro u0107 No. 197 u0108 ro U0ll5
No. I98 U0116 ro U0123 No. 199 UOl24 ro UOl3l
(Note 7) System variables #1f00 to llll3z can be used only when FANUC PMC is
combined.
d) Clock inf ormation /i 301I , ll3Ol2

It is possible to know the year,
mont.h, day, hour, minute, and second by
reading system variables #3011, ll30L2.

Kind
Year, Month,
When i-t is May 20,

#30 I 2 = 19870520,
#3Alz
Second
L98l 4: 17 5"
It30L2
variable
#3011
Day
Hour, Minute,
(Example)
System
PM
16r705
-155-
(Meaning) i/i
(Exanple) p/l100
P#
i00
P# IOO
P# 100
P# 100
(Note
I)
(Examp
le)
(Note 2)
ttj @ #k
I
Operator
Q#l0l
Speci f ied
Hm)
Rii 102
Q/i l0 r
Q-100
RI5
#r00
R/i 102
# 100
Qr 20
R-50
100
R/i i 02
/r
I00
Q-# l0
100
= //l0I
= //l0l
= -100
= 120
t02
I5
l!r02
+
+
+
en
-JU
= -/1101
tno2
No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meanlng

of each vaLue is the same as that designated without decimal point when
quoted in each address.
/1100 = i0
X#100
0.01 mm (metric input)
Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree, and the least
input increment is 1/1000 degree.
(Example) 100
(Note 3) H code
0,1"
specified by G65 does not affect any selection of offset
amount
Table of macro i nstru ctions
G code
H code
Definition
Function
inition,
lti = lli
substitution
H0l
Def
HO2
Addition
tl
H03
Sub
tt
H04
Produc
tt
H05
ni.,iî^-,,'
uLv L>LwLL2/
ili=i/jx/lk
HII
Logical
{t1
il
Hl2
Logical product
#i = #j.AND.
tl
HI3
Exclusive
Iti = llj
H21
Snrrrro
ll
H22
Absolute value
#i = {tE
//i = I/rjl
tl
H23
Remainder
#i = #j - rrunc (//j///k) x
trunc: Discard fractions
tl
ili=#j+i/k
li]-=#J-ilk
tract ion
lli=lll+tlk
sum
0R
rnnl-
= tij .0R. #k
/lk
.xOR. #k
less than I
tl
tl
tl
tl
H24
Conversion from BCD to binarl
/li = BrN (//j)
H25
Converslon from binarv to
/ii =
nzo
Cornbined
divislon
multiplic
aLion /
BCD
BDC
(#j)
lli=(#ix#j)+/ik
H27
Combined square
root I
*i = frjz-a16r
H28
.^-L-'*^r
uurlutLlcu
root
tli='fr42-1;pz
>Yuot
-158-
llk
Q\/cl-pm
rl ev-"'
variab
#500
Re:d'ino
Position information
1e
while moving
Rl ne k end nni nl- n^q'i f i nn nf
X axis (ABSI0)
Block end point position of
115002
Possible
Not considered.
Position of tool
nose (program command position)
Impossible
Considered.
Y awi q
#500
#5004

4th axis
It502L
tf 5022
X axis coordinate position

Y axis coordinate posi.tion
#5023
{t5024
Z axis coordinate position

4th axis coordinate oosition
{t5041
Present position of X axis
#506
I frnnccl
Skip signal position of

X axis
Y axis
Skip si-gnal position of
#5062
#50 63
tf
h I a
Position of tool
raFaranaa
nnini
as ABSOLUTE
indication at POS)
(Same
Possible
Considered.
Position of tool
roforanno
Value of cutter compensation

Value of tool length
compensation (X axis)
compensation (Y axis)
compensation (Z axis)
#508 0
{t5082
#508
Considered.
nninf

4th axis
5064
#508
nninl-
(Machine coordinate)
Present position of Y axis

Present position of Z axis
Present position of 4th axis
#5043
{ts044
Position of tool
roForanoo
(ABS0r)
tt5042
Cutter and tool

length compensation
Possible
It is not possible to substitute any value into system variabtes /lS00l

ro /15083.
(Note o\ When the skip signal doesn't turn on, the skip signal position is the
end point of that block.
(Note !.)
16.2.3 Macro instructions (G65)
Generar I orm
G65 Hm e/i
m
tti
ltj
Itk
i qili
n/ik;
Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99.

Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded.
Variable name I to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
-r57-
h) Exclusive 0R /fi
G6s H13
(Ex.)
= //j .xoR. #k
P#i Q/ij Rifk;
c65 Hl3 P#l0l Q/i102 R#103; (#I0l = ttroT .XOR. #i03)
r) Square root /ii = /#j

G65 H21 P/l j. Q//j;
(Ex.) c6s H21 p/ll0r Q/i102; (#l0r = /#ro2)
j)
nUsolute value
(Ex.)
/i
i = l#j
G65 H22 P/li Q/13;

G65 H22 p//10r Q//102;
(//l0r = l+rozl
k) Remainder lli- = ltj - trunc (/lj///k) x i/k trunc: Discard fractions less than
(Ex.)
c6s H23 P/li Q/ij Rilk;
G65 H23 P//101 Q//102 R//103;
(//r0r = llt02 - rrunc(lfLOzlltrO3) x ilr03)
BCD to binary /li =

G65 H24 P/lr. Q/li;
G65 H24 p//l0l Q//102; (iil0r
BIN (//j)
f) Conversion from
(Ex.)
= BrN (#102))
BCD i/i = BCD (#j)

P#i Q#j;
c65 H2s p//r01 Q//r02; (/ir0r = BCD (#102))
m) Conversion from binary to
(Ex.)
G65 H25
n) Conbined multiplication/division (/li x i/j) + //k

G6s H26 e;[i Qili ni/k;
(Ex.) G65 H26 p/lr0l Q#r02 R/i103; (//10r = (#101 x /i102) +
o) combined square roor I lli = {iliT +-tl?
G65 H27 P#i Q/ij R#k;
(Ex. )
G65 H27 pill0l Q#102 R/i 103; (#101
n)
rt
1l
Combined square root 2 11i = /142 - 1S1rz

G65 H2B r/ll Q//5 ni/k;
(Ex. )
c65 H28 p//r01 Q//102 R//103; (/i 101
= ltltoZ2 +
/1103)
1lLO32
= /llL022 - llLnz
Sine //i = //j . SIN (i/k) (degree unir)

c65 H3r P#i q/li n/lk;
(Ex.) G65 H31 p//r0r Q//r02 R//r03; (#r0L = llro2
SrN (#103))
r) Cosine lti = lli

(Ex.
J)
Tangent
(Ex.)
COS (#k) (degree unit)

G65 H32 e//i qi/t n//r;
c65 H32 p//r01 Q/i 102 R//103; (/lr0r
= llr02 cos
TAN (//k) (degree unit)

cps H33 P//r Q/ii Ri/k;
G65 H33 p/ii0r Q#102 R//103; (//l0r =
(#103) )
lli = ltj
#ro2
TAN (#103))
r) Arctangenr lti = ATAN (#j/#k) (degree unit)

c65 H34 p//i Q/lj n/lk; (0"</li<360")
(rx.;
(Note
(Note
(Note
c65 H34 p/ll0l Q//102 R#103;
(#l0r = ArAN (llLozllll03))
1) Angle in (q) to (t) must be indicated by degree and the least f rrPu L
increment is l/1000 degree.
2) If .either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation was not indicated, i-ts value is calculated as t0t.
3) A11 figures below decimal point are truncated if each arithmetic result
includes decimal point.
160
._."_*4$ry
U LUUE
H code
Function
Definitlon
c65
H3l
Sine
tr
H32
Co
H33
Tangent
ttj-
tl
H34
Arctangent
/ii = ArAN (tti/#k)
tl
H80
Unconditional divergence
G0T0n
H8i
Conditional divereence
IF i/j = llk,
H82
Conditional divergence
rF #j + lfk, Go TO n
H83
Conditional di.vergence 3
rF
H84
rF #j < llk, G0 TO n
H85
rF /ij z /ik,
GO TO n
H86
IF /ij : /lk,
G0 T0 n
H99
P/S alarm occurrence
It
tl
!l
It
sine
I) Variable arithmetic
lli = ,'Jlli
crN
/ilr,\
ultl
\rrN/
tli = ,,J
ll:
(il1,\
nnc
vvu
vN/,
= ltj .
TAN (//k)
GO TO n
//j > {lk, Go ro n
P/S alarrn number 500 +

oecurrence
command
a,, uer].n]-c1on ancl substitution of variable lli = #i

c65 HOl P//i Q/ij;
(Ex. )
c65 H0l p/tl0l Q1005; (/i 101 = 1005)
c6s H01 P#101 Q//r10; (//101 = #110)
c65 H01 p//101 Q_/i 112; (li 101 = _#LLz)
b) Addirion //i = #j + ttk

.
c6s H02 P//i Q/tj R//k;
(Ex. )
c6s H02 pitlol Q/ir02 R15; (#101 = #L02 + 15)
-:-'
c) Subtracrion //i = /li - +t<
c6s H03 r/tt q//i n/tk;
(Ex.
c65 H03 p//r01 Q#102 R//103;
d) Product i/i = #j x
(Ex.)
r = #102 -
#103)
(//l0l = #ro2 x
/1103)
(//10
#k
c65 H04 r/ti Q//5 n/ik;

c6s H04 p#101 Q#102 R/t103;
e) Division /ii = /li + iik

c65 H05 Pili Q/tj R//k;
(Ex.
f) Logical
(Ex. )
c6s H05 pii r0r Q#102 R#103; (i/101 = #r02 + i/r03)

surn
c6s
c65
/fi = //j .0R. #k

Hll P/ti q//i n//k;
Hr r p/ll0l Q//102 R//103;
(/t101 = #r02 .oR. #i03)
g) Logical product lti = lli .AND. #k

c65 H12 P#i Q#j R//k;
(Ex. )
c65 Hl2 p#l0l Q#102 R#103; (ttl01 = #to2 .AND.
-i59-
#103)
2)
Control command
a) Unconditional branch
G65 HBO Pn; n: Sequence number
(Ex. )
c65 H80 PI20; (Diverge ro Nl20)
b)
Conditional divergence I ilj EQ. #k (=)

G65 H81 Pn Q/lj n/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H8l Pr000 Q/ll0l R/ti02;
/lI0l = llt02, go ro N1000
#t0l I lll02, go ro nexr
Conditional divergence 2 //j . NE . #k (l)
(Ex.)
c65 H82 Pn Q//j R/lk; n: Sequence number

c6s H82 P1000 Qillol R//102;
IIIOL + llT02, go ro Nt000
lll0l = lllo2, go ro nexr
d) Conditi-onal divergence 3 ilj

cT //k (>)
c65 H83 Pn Qilj n/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H83 Pr000 Qllr0l R//102;
/1101 > ltLO2, go ro N1000
#
I01 < ltLO2, go to nexr
Conditional divergence 4 /lj LT /lk (<)

_q05--H9-4 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: Sequence number
(Ex.) c6s H84 P1000 Q#lOi n/1102;
#i0I < llL02, go ro N1000
#101 Z llL02, go ro nexr
L)
Conditional divergence 5 /ij cE /ik (>)

c65 H85 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: SequencE number
(Ex. )
c6s H8s P1000 Qi/101 R//i02;
//f 0l Z tlI02, go ro N1000
//101 < lll02, go ro nexr
C) Conditional divergence 6 /13 LE . #k (<)

G65 H86
(Ex.
fn
Ql/5
h) P/S alarur occurrence

c65 H99 Pi; i:
(Ex. )
(Note
n/tt; n:
SequencE number
c65 H86 P1000 Q//iOl R//102;

/1101 S lfloz, go ro N1000
# l0 i > ltI}z, go ro nexr
Alarm No. +500
G65 H99 PI5;
P/S alarrn 515 occurrence
If positive numbers were designated as sequence numbers at branch

designations, they are searched forward first and then, backward. If
negative numbers were designated, they are searched backward first and
then, forward.
(Note 2) Sequence number can also be designated by variables.
(Example) c65 H8l P#100 Q#l0l R//102;
When conditions are satisfied, processing branches to the block having
the sequence number designated with #100.
I)
- 16l -
16.2.4 Notes on custom macro

l) How to input "//"
key is depressed af ter address G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S,

T, P or Q, i/ code is input.
2) It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the I'IDI mode. However,
address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation.
3) Addresses H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after
G65. Address 0 and N only are writable before G65.
4) Single block
Generaliy, the macro instruction block does nor stop even if single block
stop is turned on. However, by setting parameter SBKM of parameter No. 0011,
it is possible to make single block effective.
This is used for macro
testing.
5) Variable values can be taken within a range of -232 to 232-t, but they are
not displayed correctly, except for -99999999 to 99999999. If they exceed
the above range, they are displayed as *ti*?k****.
6) it is possible to nest subprograms up to four tj-mes.
7) Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the operati,on results with decirnal numbers, the figures below decinal point truncated,
if an arithmetic result contains a fractj-on part.
Particularly be carful with the arithmetic sequence, accordingly.
(Ex.) When /1100 = 35, /ll0l = I0, lllo2 = 5 the followlngs results.
//110 = /1100 + /lI0l (= 3)
#l1l = #110 x #102 (= 15)
llr20 = i/100 x /i I02 (: I75)
ItL2I = //120 + /i101 (= tl)
/tI11 = 15 ard lf L2I = 17
8) The execution time of macro instruction differs according to varj-ous conditions (for example, if the axis is under movement or not). It may be several
when l#l
Eens msec. on an average.
9) When a custom macro is loaded from a paper tape in the EIA code, '&' code is
treated as t'//tt, because there is in no "//t' code in the EIA code.
-162-
Examples of Custom Macro
$.3.1 Bolt hole circle

Drill n pieces of, holes
Y o) at the center of a circle.
Set ref erence Point -(X-0,
rtn?r
on the circumference of the circle having radius (r),
squally divlded.. bY
Jiartittg with angle (a).
Reference
point (X6, Ye)
(n- I )th
hole
Present position
Yn : Coordinate values at the reference point of bolt hole circle.

X,,,
U: Radius
r
: Starting angle
a
n
: Number of holes
I
The following variables are used:
#500
X coordinate value at reference point (Xo)
ii 50r
Y coordinate value at reference point (Yn)
{t502
Radius (r)
#503Starting angle (a)
Itso4
Number of holes (n)
However, when n > 0, counterclockwise (n pieces)
when n < 3, clockwise (-n pieces)
The following are used as r.rorks in custom macro:
#f00 : Counter showing the drilling of the i-th hole in progress (i)
Last value of counter (= l"ll (ie)
#10r
Angle of the i-th circle (ei)
ItLO2
X axis value of rhe i-ch hole (Xi)
#t03
Y axis value of the l-th hole (ti)
It LOA
U
-163-
Custom macro
o90
t0;
instructions are
programmed
N100 c65 HOr P//100 Q0:

c6s H22 P/t101 Qitsoa;
N200 G65 H04 P//102 Q//100 R360000;
G65 H05 PllLO2 Q/i 102 R/i504;
G65 H02 Plfr}z Q#s03 Rillo2 i
G65 H32 P//103 Qll502 R/1r02;
c6s Ho2 P/1103 Q/1500 Ri/r03;
c65 H31 P/1r04 Q/1s02 R/1i02;
c6s H02 Pillo4 Q/1s01 R#104 t
G90 H00 x#r03 Y/1104;
M10;
c6s H02 P# 100 Q// 100 Rl ;

c6s H84 P-200 Q#100 R/li0r;
as follows:
{-n
I_U
ie = l"l
I
I
I
)
'l
)
.360o x
tJ].=at-
Xi=Xo*rCOS (ei)
Yi=Yo+rSIN(0i)
Positioning to the i-t.h hole
Output of hole machining M code
r -
lr
l-
Wheni<ie,branches
ie pieces of holes
to N200 to dri1l
M99;
The program to call thls custom macro, for example, will

o00
r0;
G65 H01 P#500 Q100000;

G65 HOl P#50I Q-200000;
c65 HOI Plt502 Q100000;
G65 Hol P/1503 Q20000 i
c65 H01 P//504 Q12;
c92 X0 Y0
lI98 P9010'
;0"
;6f
be
as
follows:
Xn = 100 nrm
Yo = -200 mm
r = 100 nm
a=
20"
Counrerelockwise (n = t2)
Z0
Custom rnacro
.r
call
M02;
to i/504 can also be set by MDI operation.

rn this case, blocks with G65 of the above program are not
i1500
necessary
16.3.2 Pocket machining
A pocket milling cycle to machine the area illustrated below can be programmed
by custom macro. Area cutting is done with a certain depth and another area
cutting is done after the tool is cut-in along the Z axis.
Rapid traverse
FeedrateSxe
Feed r3le e or f
(e : Z direction
f : XY plane)
Starting point (x, y)
z
I
I
---r-I
I
I
I
"l
-164-
lil
lii
Respect ive variables mean as follows:

X axis absolute coordinate value
#500
at left lower part of pocket,

starting point (x).
#50 I
Y axls absoluLe coordinate value at left lower part of pocket,
starting point (V).
11502
Z point absolute coordinate value (z)
R point absolute coordinate value (r)
#503
quantity at one time (q), positive number
Cutting
lls04
/150s
Length of X axis direction in area (i), positive number
Length of Y axis direction in area (j), posltive number
{t506
11507
Finishing margin (k)
#s08
tZ when machining width is set to cutter diameter x tZ
TooI radius (d)
# 509
#s l0
Feed rate in XY plane (f)
#51 r
Feed rate in Z axis (e)
Tool is fed at a rate of 8 x e until it reaehes I mm before the starting point
of cutting.
/1100 to i1113: Used as a work for calculations.
Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows:
09020;
c6s H02 P#100 Q#s09 R/1507;

c65 H04 PltLO2 Q#509 R2;
c65 H26 Pllro2 Q#508 R100;
c6s H02 PllLO2 Qi/102 Rl;
c65 H02 P#103 Q/1s00 R//100;
c65 H02 PllLO4 Q//s01 R//r00;
c6s H02 P//10s Q//s00 R//505;
c65 H02 P//105 Q//10s Riir00;
c6s H02 P/1r06 Q//s01 R//506;
c6s H03 P#106 Qil106 R/i100;
c6s H02 PitLOT Qilso2 R/1507;
c 90 c00 x/l 103 Yil i 04 ;
z{1503;
c65 H0l P//108 Q//503;
N 100 c6s H03 P# 108 Q# 108 Rit5 04 ;
c65 H85 P110 Q#108 Ri/107;
c6s H01 P#108 Qi/107;
Nl10 c0l zllIoS F/t511;
xlll0s F//510;
c65 H01 P#109 Ql;
N 120 G6s H04 P# I 10 Q# 109 R/l 102 ;
c65 H02 P/tl l0 Q/t110 R//r04;
c6s H86 Pr 30 Q# r l0 Ril i 06 ;
c6s H01 P#1 t0 Q// r06 ;
N 130 Y/l l 10;
c65 H23 Pil I I I Qil109 R2 ;
G65 H8l Pt40 Q#l ir R0;
x//r03;
c65 H80 P150;
N 140 xi/ 105 ;
Nl50 c65 n02 P#i09 Q#109 Rr;
c6s H84 P-120 Q#l r0 R/l106;
c00 zll503;
x// 103 Yil r 04 ;
c6s H86 P200 Q//108 u/107;
c65 Ho2 PlltL2 Q/lr08 Rl000;
c6s H04 P#t 13 Q//s l r R8;
c0l zllLr2 Filrl3;
c65 H80 P-100;
N200
M99;
-165-
16.3.3 Interface signal

Read signed BCD 3
Structure of DI
digirs by address swirching ln
zr5 zr4 2r3 2L2 zrl zlo z9 28
Used for
other
27
//100.
26 25 24 23
22
ign
Purpose
-
Data send signal
Structure of
DO
zB 27 26
25
Used for
purPose
instructions are
prograrnraed
c65
HT2
c65
H01
N20
c65
H8l P10
Address
Q//10r3
Address (7) send

Address send signal
00 Q-/1100; I
HI2 Pltrr3z Q//1132
ON
I^/aiting for data send

BCD 3 digits read
Conversion into binary number
Addition of sign
R0;
P#r00 Q//r032 R4095;

c65 H24 P//r00 Q//100;
c65 H8l P20 Q/11012 R0; l
MQQ.
20
as follows:
G65 H12 PllLr32 Q/11132 R480;

G65 HIl PllLr32 Q/11 132 R23;
N10
G65
2r
Address send signal
Custom macro
09 I 00;
24 23 22
P// r
R495;
-166-
Address send signal
OFF
16.3.4 Shearing machine
I
I
X axis
+ _---
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cutter
Workpiece
(r)
(o)
First margin
{t502
(Ax)
Shearing width
#503
(B)
margin for grasping workpiece
lf )u4
Distance from reference point Eo cutter (h)
Custom mac ro instructions are programmed as follows:
#
500
#50
Width of workpiece
091 10;
c65 H03 P#100 Q#s00 R//50i;

N10 c65 H03 P#r01 Q//s04 R/l t00;
c90 G00 x#l0l
M?n.
c65
uo)
H03
H85
P#100
P-10
Q#
100
Q#r00
n/i502 ;
n/i
503;
M99;
0-n
//r00
X axis positioning
Cutting command
ilr00 -A{
IF #100 : B, c0
TO N10
The macro call program, for example, will be as follows:

00009; (i1500 to ii504 are set by l"lDI operation.)
G92
M98
XO;
P9110;
rr v t
Mo?.
16.3.5 Program examples
Conversion from cartesian coordinate system (X-Y-Z) into cylindrical

system (r-e-Z).
r = tQr +l;20 = arcEan (y/x) (-180" < e < 180')
-167-
coordinate
Common
variable
=X
ll5o2 = Y
//505 = r
//506 = e
i1501
{1507
employed:
Sequence number at the

/1120 = I,trork
#Ilo, //Ill, llrr2,

01000
c66
G90;
P8000;
Nlr00 c92 X0 Y0 z0;

N1200 s2000 M03 T02;
NI300 G00;
NI400 xl00.0 Y100.0;
N1500 x200.0 Y-200.0;
N1600 x0
Y-I00.0;
call
cOmrnand
Absolute
command
08000 is called every block

Coordinate system setting
in
(X, Y, Z) = (0, 0, 0) Point

(r, e, Z) = (0,90.000,0)
(X, Y) = (100.0, 100.0)

(r, e) = (141.42I, 45.000)
(X, Y) = (200.0, -200.0)
(r, e) = (282.842, -45.000)

(X, Y) = (0, -100.0)
(r, ) - (100.0, -90.000)
N2000 c04 P1000;
hrell I
N8000 G67 i
N9000 M02;
Modal
sec.
call
lm.0
-168-
node cancel
nodal cal,1 rnode.
poinr
point
poinr
16.4
Pattern Data Input Function
This function is provided to enable users to make CNC programrning by taking

numerj.c data (patcern data) only out of a drawing and setting thesd numerical
values from CRT/MDI panel without any need of programming using an existing NC
language.
With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can freely prepare a
hole machining cycle (boring cycle, tapping cycle, or the like), for example, by
utilizing the custom macro function, and load the hole machining cycle lnto the
program memory.
f) This cycle is designated as pattern names like BORI, TAP3, DRL2, ....
An operator can select a desired pattern out of the menu of pattern names
being displayed on CRT
2) A cycle should be prepared by using variables (pattern data) which are
specified by the operator.
The operator can identify these variables as depth, return relief, feed'
blank, and other pattern data names. The operator gives values (pattern
data) to these names.
16.4.1 Pattern menu display
ffi sl'l t"y again after selecting an offset or custom macro variable
screen by depressing the m
k"y, Ehe following pattern menu screen is
Pr*'rl
When depressing
IJFS
displayed
: HOLE PATTERN
1. BOI-T FLE
2. GRID
3. LIIE NFE.E
4. TNPPII
5. DRILLII.G
5. EmIfS
?. PMGT
8. PEG<
FNJ
>.
OtW NLw
tESl
1O. BrcK
SELECT =
title
HOLE PATTERN
Menu
BOLT HOLE
Pattern
name
EIT
An optional character string

l2 characters.
l0 characters.
1S
settable within
1S
settable within
The machine tool builder should program the character strings of menu title and
pattern name by the custom macro, and load it into the program memory as a
subprogram of program number "9500".
l) Macro instruction to describe the menu title
Menu title
ci cz t3 c+ cs ce cl cg cg cto cii
Cl, CZ ....
ctz
CtZ : Characters of menu t.it.le (L2 characters)
-169-
l'lacro i-nstruction
c65
H90
p
TJ
H90P p Q q R
UJNKi
: Specifies the menu ri_11e
: Assuure a, and a, be the codes of characters C, and C^,
L
Z'
P=atx1O3+a,
p CCO OOO
-L
a, of character c.
Code a, of character C
Code
See 16.7.3
for character
codes.
or.lO aO be the codes of characters C, and C4,

q=a3xl0-*aO
Assume a. and a. be the codes of characters c. and c.,
)?b56
r="5x10-+aU
Assume rr rld a, be the codes of characters C, and C'
t=^7x10"*a,
Assume ao and a.,.., be the
t"t coqes
codes or
of cnaracters
characters cg
C^ ttd
and L10'
C
, =;";";r-;.t'0^"A=".*l f.,' and
0" rhe codes of characrers c.. and'"12'
n
"'",
rr
?
^.
t="lrxl0'*Î2
Assume
(Example) Assume that
the rnenu title is "HOLE PATTERN", and the

instruction is given as follows.
c6s H90 Po72 079 Q076 069 R032 080 1065 084 J0B4 o0g K082
078
HOLEL_IP
ATTERN
For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item i6.8.3.
instruction to clescribe pattern

Pattern name
2) Macro
ct
t3
'z
cl' c2 ""
to
name
tg tg tto
'4
'l
cto
Characters of pattern nane (10 characters)
L1acro ins truct ion
G65 Ii91 P n a
qRrI
iJiK
H91
Specifies the pattern name
n
Specif ies the menu number of pattern name (n = I to I0)
Assume a,
Y
., be the codes of characters C., and C,r,
"lO
'q=atxl0-*a,
r
Assume aa and ar, be

Jâ
the codes of characters C, and CO,
.=t3xl0-+aO
f
Assurne
a_ and a)?b
be
the codes of characters C, and CU,
be
the codes of characters C7
t=u5xi0-+aU
Assume a_ and
t?d
a^
j=arxlo-'+au
Assume
"g
"rd
Cg,
uld r b. the codes of characters Cg rrd Cl0,

l0
k="9x10"*r,,0
170
macro
;
(Example) Assume that the pattern name of menu No. I is "BOLT HOLE", and the
macro instructlon ls glven by;
G65 H9t pl Q066 079 R076 084 1032 072 JO79 076 K069 032 t
BOLTLJHO
LEL-l
(Note) If a part of characters are not specified by P, Q, R, I, J or K which
designace character strings, but they are omitEed, the characters (two
characters) at that part are regarded as space characters.
3) Pattern number selection

Enter a desired pattern number by keying operation from the pattern nenu
as fo11ows, for example.
CRT
Etr
The selected pattern number is set to system variable "//5900". The custou
macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program
(external program number search) with an external signal and then, referring
to system variable #5900 by the program.
4)
Menu title:
09500;
Example of custom mrcro to describe pattern names
Nl c65 H90
P072 079 Q076 059 R032 080

1065 084 J084 069 K082 078;
N2 c65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084
T032 072 J079 076 K069 032:
N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068;
N4 c65 H9l P3 Q076 073 R078 069
1032 065 J078 071 K076 069;
Ns c65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080
1073 078 J071 032;
N6 C65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076
T076 473 J078 071;
N7 c65 H91 P6 Q066 079 R082 073
1078 07 1;
N8 c65 H91 P7 Q0B0 079 R067 07s
1069 084;
N9 c65 H9i P8 Q080 069 RO67 075;
N10 c65 H9i P9 Q084 069 R083 084;
Nit c65 H91 PrO Q066 065 R067 075;
Nl2
HOLE PATTERN
i.
2.
171
GRID
3. LINE
ANGLE
4. TAPPING
5. DRILLING
I
M99;
BOLT HOLE
6.
BORING
7.
8.
POCKET
PECK
TEST
IO.
BACK
16.4.2 Pattern data display

When
a pattern
is selected, necessary pattern data are displayed
menu
t.,FRIABLE
}.tr.
qf'ENT
*E[LT Fg-E
Y
5A3 RADILF
5er s. $E56 l{-E. l.
%a
g7g
5@ KlJll.l
01@ N1@
DnTC
t*HE
5@ Tm-541 KIJIN
CIRCLET
SET
DATA TO
UR.
r',5@-585.
6
6
MTUL PCEITIO{ (RELCTII.,E)
x
z
f.5. W=
@.w
@.w
PRTTERN
@.m
S
6T
MDI
: Pattern data title

BOLT HOLE
TOOL
is
settable within
12
l-s
settable within
10
characters.
: Variabl.e name
....
characters.
*BCLT HOLE CIRCLE* : Comnent statemelit
A comment of an optional character string can be
displayed up to 12 characters/line, and B lines.
The machine tool bui,Lder should program t.he character strings of pattern data
titler pattern name, and variable name by utilizing the custom macro A, and load
them into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500 * pattern
number" (O9501 - 09510).
1) I'lacro instruction to describe patlerrr data title
Pattern data title
ct cz t:
ts
"4
cLz'
" r' c2 ""

Ilacro instructic.rn
G65
H92
Y
Hq?pn
t6
te
tto tr t 9n
"t
'g
Characters of nenu title (12 characters)
qRr
t'
JjKk;
Specifies the uenrr title

Assume a, @rlu a, be the codes of characters C, and Cr,
I
p = al
10" +
^z
Assune
.lU
a
be the codes of characiers C, and CO,
",
O
q = a^ x10-*aO
J
Assurne a anC a be the codes of characters C and C
6'
5 ? 6
5
r
axI0-*a,
.)
D
Assume a_ and a^ be the codes of characters C_ anci C^,
8'
t
7 ^ B
-:-^
t - o7 xI0r+aU
r o and a ]n be the codes of character" Cg ,nd CI0,

t.\
Assume
x 10" *.10
i-^
J*O
Assume
11
and a
*;- L2be the
codes of characters C
and C
1r "^'- "12'
x l0'* a,^
LL
For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item 16.8.3.
IN
-'
-
^
dr
172
(Example) Assume that the pattern data

title 1s ,,BOLT HOLE", and the maero
instruction is given by;
c6s Hez t99_q gp Q076 084 R032 072 r07s 076
J06e
-f ! 032 ,
B
o
L
L__,- H
r
o
f
i-_lL2) Macro instruction to describe varlable name
Variable
t,
name
t,
t, au ,-, ag a,
',C2...- Cl0
'o t Variable
Cl'
a,.
name (10 characters)
Macro instruction
G65H93P n
He3
n
r r
e
: sp.lfri!" tllGri"rfGur"
Specifies the varlable number (n = 500 to 531)

Assune al and a" be the codes of characters C,
âL
and
c2'
codes
of characters C,
and
c4'
cod.es
of characters C,
and
c6'
codes
of characters C, and C'
9=arx10"*a,
Assume a" and a, be the
J?4
t="3x10"*aO
Assume a. and a - be the
)?6
t="5x10"*aU
Assume a, and a. be the
lÔ
j=a7*IOJ+au
", "10."10 b" the eodes of characters cn "rd cl0,

k="9x10-*"10
Assume that the variable name of variable No.
503 is ,,RA_Drusr,,
the macro instruction is given by;
p503
Assune
(Example)
c65 H93
(Note)
{l
Q082 065 R068 OZS rb8s 083
-R--T- -D-T
varlable names are designated by 32 co 'non varlables

are not cleared by turning off power supply.
Macro instructlon to descrlbe a

One comnent line
/1500
aro art
Characters string of one
c6sH94_p_LQ q R r
H94 : Specifies the couunenT
p
: Assume .lO a, be rhe
",
p=alx10-*a,
T2
comment
Line (12 characters)
JjKk;
codes of characters C, and C,,
Assume
a. and
J^r1
q=a3xl0"*aO
, be the codes of characters C, and
CO,
Assume a_ and
a- be the codes of characters C, and
CU,
j
k
).b
r=.5x10'*aU
Assume
Assume
- lt53I which
comment
a,. ,, a, ,o a, a6 ,, aa an
CI, C2.... CIZ,

Macro instructlon
.,
"lO a, be rhe codes of characters C, and CU,
,=^7x10-*a,
: Assume g
.
" "lO ,0 b. the codes of character" C9 "rd Cl0,
i="9x10r*"10
tr,
""X.r,
1=rlrxl0-*^12
and
bu the codes
-173-
of characters cll
"nd
cl2,
A comment can be displayed by 8 lines. The comment consists of the lst line
to Sth line in the programmed sequence of G65H94
(Example) Assume that the corunent is "*BOLT HOLE", and the macro instruction
is given bY;
c65 H94 p042 066 Q079 076 R084 032 T072 079 J076 069 ;
*BOLTL_]HOLE
of the prerrious CRT
Example
macro
4)
of custom
o95Or;
Nl
c65 H92 P066 079 Q076 084 R032 072
ro79 076 J069 032:
N2 c65 H93 P500 Q084 079 R079 076;

N3 c65 H93 P501 Q07s 073 R074 085
1078 032 J088 032:
N4 c65 H93 P502 0075 073 R074 085
1078 032 J089 032;
N5 c65 H93 P503 O0B2 065 R068 073
r085 083;
N6 c65 H93 P504 Q083 046 R032 065
r07B 07 I J076 n?, .
N7 G65 H93 P5 05 Q07 2 079 R076 069
r083 032 J07 8 079 K046 032;
N8 G65 H94;
N9 c65 H94 PO42 066 Q079 076 R084 032
IO72 079 J076 069; ..
NlO G65 H94 R032 067 1073 AB2 J067 076
K069 042;
Nll c65 H94 P083 069 Q084 032 R080 065
1084 084 J069 092 K078 032;
N12 c65 H94 P068 06s Q084 065 R032 084
1079 032 J086 065 K082 n/,e.
NI3 G65 H94 P078 079 Q046 0s3 R048 048
1045 053 J048 053 K046 0321'
N14 I'199;
r74 -
VAR:
BOLT HOLE
/1500 TOOL
/1501 KIJUN X
#502 KIJUN
#503 MNIUS
#504
S.
ANGL
#505 HOLES
Coroment
*BgLT
NO
instruction
H6LE
CIRCLE*
SET PATTERN
DATA NO VAR.
No. 500 -
505
16.4.3 Character.to-codes correspondence table
Character
Code
Character
Comment
065
066
067
068
069
070
IJ
F
G
07r
072
057
032
033
034
035
036
Exclanation mark
Quotation mark
037
Percent
038
039
040
Ampersand
1f
077
N
P
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
T]
085
086
087
088
089
090
048
049
050
J
a
w
X
Y
Z
055
056
Conrmgnl
054
073
074
075
076
Code
)
&
041
042
043
044
045
046
o47
058
059
060
061
062
?
063
064
091
051
052
053
093
094
09s
175
092
Space
Sharp
Dollar
svmbol
ApostroDhe
Left parenthesis
Right parenthesis
Asterlsk
PIus sign
Comma
Minus sign
Period
Slash
CoIon
Semi-co1on
Left angle bracket

Sign of equalitv
Right angle bracket
Question mark
Commercial at mark
left square bracket
Yen syrnbol
Right square bracket
Underline
Subprograms employed in pattern data input function
Functlon
Subprogram No.
o9500
Speclfies character string of pattern data menu display
o9s0 I
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to

pattern number 1.
09502

Dattern number 2.
o9503

pattern number 3.
o9504

pattern number 4.
o9505

pattern number 5.
o9506

pattern number 6.
o9507

Dattern number 7.
o9508

pattern number 8.
o9509
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding

pattern number 9.
o9510

Dattern number 10.
Macro instruction employed in pattern data input function
G code
Function
H code
c65
H90
Specified menu title
c65
H91
Specifies pattern
G65
H92
Specifies pattern data title
c65
H93
Specifies variable
c65
H94
Specifies
name
name
comment
System variable employed in pattern data input function
Svstem variable
Meanlngs
"\.,1*.:
,,]:ts_i. :
#5900
Pattern number selected by user
r,.1,,. $i.l'
176
EO
17-
CUSTOM MACRO
Request:
Machine tools builders: You are requested to attach your custom macro
program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fail.
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory due to a failure,
FANUC servicemen or end user operators in charge of maintenance should know
the contents of your custom macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble
immediately.
A function covering a group of instructions is stored i.n memory.'the same as a

subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instruction, so that only
the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This
group of registered instructions is ca1led a trcustom macro body" and the
representative instruction is called a ttcustom macro instructionrr. The custom
macro body rnay siurply be called a macro. And the custom macro instruction may
be ca11ed a macro call command.
A group of instructions
for a certain function
Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions

to remember all the instructions ln a custom macro body.
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that variables can be
used in the custom macro body, operations can be performed on variables and
actual values can be assigned to the variables ln custom macro instructions.
r77 -
G55P9011A101s:
X=l
I
Z = 4:
()
I
I
l
i
)/'
Calls custom macro body 9011

and defines variables =1 and
#4 10 and 5 respectively.
Variables ;1 and #4 can be

used instead of the unknotsn
traverse distance.
This enables the user to improve the CNC performance by themselves. Custom
macro bodies may be cprovided by the machine tool builder, but they can be
created by users, EOO.
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be rnade easily'.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programned and registered,
the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting function.
Programmers can use the bolt hole circle functj.on by using the following command
only:
c65P Pr.R t A o B B
r
Macro number
Radius
k ;
"
of Em-hole
circle
li
Start angle
Angle between
Number
circles
of circles
-r78-
Address of the argument assignment I
Variable ln custom macro
body
#19
T
#20
#21
#22
In
1t
zJ
#24
I
#25
#26
b) Argument assignment II
ABCIJKIJ
In addition to the fact that arguments can be
addresses A, B, and
C, a maximum of ten sets of arguments can be -ssigGE--in
set for addresses I, J and K.
When several numbers are assigned in the same address, they must be assigned
in the determined sequence.
Addresses not requj-red can be omitted.
Addresses assigned jn argument assignment II and the number of the variable
used in the macro corresDond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment II
Variable in user macro

lt L
1rL
1tJ
r1
Jt
tt5
Kt
#o
l^
tf/
,z
tt8
Kz
#9
#t0
tfll
K^
#12
lf L)
-4
-r80-
bodv
17.1
Macro Call Command (Custom Macro Command)
A macro can be called from a single block, or modally from each block in the
call mode
Note) A macro call command cannot be specified in the MDI rnode.
17 .1.1 Simple calls
When the following command is executed, the custom macro body identified by P
(program number) is ca11ed.
G65 P(ptogr"*
f(it.r.tio"
ti*"") <argument assignment>;
""*b"r)to transfer arguments
When it is necessary
to a custom macro body, the argument
is specified by <argument assignment>. The followlng tTr/o types'of <argument
asslgnment> can be specified.

The argument menti-oned here is the actual
numerical value assigned to a variable.
(Note) G65 must be specified before arguments in the G65 block. The negative
sign and the decimal point can be used regardless of addresses in
<argument assignment>.
a) Argurnent assignment I
A-B-q
...
.z
An argument can be assigned for all addresses except G, L, N, 0, and P.

Assignment need not be made in alphabetical order. Specification is made
according to word address format. Addresses not required may be omitted.
However, when I, J, and K are used, assignment must be made in the
alphabetical order.
pAn
UdU.
I
K
valid
T
B_A__q
.....J
!
. .. . . if -,.^-l
trv4rlu .' 'l
Addresses assigned in argument assignment I and the number of the variable in
custom macro body correspond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment I
Variable in qustom macro

4r
lt L
B
1tJ
L
D
#8
tt9
#11
I
lft
ltO
flJ
ttLT
//
r79 -
18
body
(Example)
G65AI
.082.0r-3.014 .0D5.0Pi000;
;l?iT":-]-
It). )
{t3:
ll4 z-3
i/5:
#6
tl7 :
)bt{
5.0
In this example, even if arguments I4.0 and D5.0 are specified to variable
ll7 , rhe latter is effective.
17 .1.2 Modal call
The macro call mode can be specified by executing the followlng command.
G66P program number L repetitive count <argument assignment>;
The <argument assignment> is the same as for a simple call. The macro call mode
can be cancelled by executing the following command;
G67 ;
(Note
rn a G66 block, G66 rnust be specified before any arguments. Decimal

points and signs can be used in the arguments.
G66 and G67 should rnake a pair in the same program.
1)
(Note 2)
During the macro call mode, the specified macro call instruction is called
every tj-me a motion command is executed..
(Example l) Drilling Cyele
At each positioning-point, the drilling cycle is operated.
Auxiliary
function
X move
Flow of program
ll
ll
1l
1l
ll
lr
li
ll
Ir
Dwell
uoo P9082R(R
X
point)X(Z point)X(Dwell);
The drilling
cycle is performed at each

the motion block in this region.
G67 ;
Macro is
o 9082 t
as follows.
GOO Z
//tB;
GOI
GO4
#26;
#24:
GOO
Z- lROUND
Mqq.
Dwell
[/ilBl
(In case of incremental programming)
+ ROUND
ttt26));
182
end
of
Address
of the
argument assignment
II
Variable in user macro
body
ttr4
t4
It
1f
Jl1 /
#1r)
{ttt
J.
#18
T.
#L9
ll2A
b
o
K.
JI.
lILL
Tl
1I
Jl
tt L)
K.t
tt24
Iât
ll2s
J^
It26
Jlaa
LL
o
6
I^9
#28
J9
#29
K^
#30
rto
)l.
'IJI
Jto
ttJZ
Kto
#33
Suffixes I to l0 of I, J and K indicate the sequence of the assigned set.

Coexistence of argument assignment I and II
No alarm is generated even if arguments of both assignment I and II are
specified in the same block with a G65 command.
If an argument of type I and an argument of type II are specified to the same
variable, the argument specified later is effective.
-181 -
'17.1.5 Subprogram call with M code
An M code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.
NGXY
That is, instead of
M98PAAAA;
tE;E-r ow i n g s i*pTJ-c o*tnf,T-tcan be specified.

N
G
X
....
Y
,*^-1^.,^'1
^^
As f or ltg8, tt* 'i""Effiiort *^ro urDproJeq
vrr
the
M codes are not transmit.ted.
1
program check screen, but I"IF and
The correspondence between the calling M code xx and the program number AAAA of
the ealled subprogram must be set as a parameter.
Up to three 11 codes can be used for a subprogram call.
hrhen these M codes are specif ied in a macro called wit.h a G code or in a
subprogram called with an M code or a T code, the subprogram is not ca1led, but
these M codes are treated as ordinary M codes. Set the following parameters.
FI
M code used to call subprogram: 9001
i."f
M code used to call subprogras:1" 9002
F-t
M code used
to ."ff subprogram:
9003
17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code
A T code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.
,rffi--
" .....T
t; is equivalent to the foltowing two blocks.
N
G
X
Z
M98P9OOO;
r-coae t ir ETea-lT
.n argument in comnon variable 1ll4g. The T code is
displayed on the program check screen, but TF and T codes are not. transmitted.
When this T code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a
subprogram called with an M or T code the subprogram is not called; buE this T
code is treated as ordinary T code.
Set. the following parameter.
0
When parameter
code.
No. 0040,
TMCR
TLICR
= 1, a subprogram is called in a block with a
17.1.7 Difference between M98 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body
a) G65 can include arguments; I,198 cannot.
calt)
b) ItgA is used to branch to a subprogram after executing a command other than M,

P or L in the block; G65 is used to branch only.
c) When a I'198 b'lock includes an address other than O, N, P and L, execution of
the block stops as single block stop, a G65 block does not.
d) COS changes the level of local variable; M98 does nor. That. is, /ll specified
before G65 is one thing and /lI in the calling cusrom macro body is another.
iil specified before M98 is the same as /i I in the calling subprogram.
e). Up to four G65 calls, includ.ing G66, can be made in addition, M9B cal1s can
be made up to eight calls rogether with calls by G65 and G66.
r84 -
!,.,':j
?r.
17.1.3 Macro call using G codes
A G code can be set by a parameter to call

specifying N_G65PAAAA <argument assignment
can be used.
macro. That is, instead of

the following simple command
Gxx<argument. assignment> ;
correspondence
between the calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of
The
the called macro must be set. as a parameter.
-\ calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of a called macro are set in a
parameter.
Up to ten G01 to G255 commands can be used to call macros. G00, G65 to G67
cannot be used. In case of macro call by G code, the P code does not indicate a
program number but an argument. The P code is stored in lfL6 as an argument.
These G codes cannot be specified in a macro called with a G code. These G
codes cannot be specified in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code.
Set the following parameters.
Data No.
G code used to call macro: 9010
G code used to call macro: 90il
G code used to call macro: 9019

17.1.4 Custom rnacro call with M code
Macro can be ca11ed with an M code set by a parameter, namely, the following
a
command:
N
G65 PAAAA <argument assignment>1
ifQ-nivalent to the following -ommand:
N_
M X X <argument assignment>;
Coordinate with t.he M code X X which executes macro calling and the macro
program No. AAAA accessed with a parameter. I'IF and M codes are not issued the
same as to call the subprogram with an 1"1 code.
When this ll code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a
subprograrn called with an M or T code, the macro is not called; but this M code
is treated as ordinary M code.
Up to l0 codes of l10l - M97 can be used to call macro. Set the following
parameEers.
M code
to call macro:
9020
!1 code
to call macro:
9021
l{ code to call macro:
9029
(Note) These
ln{ codes are different

from usual M codes and theY must be commanded
at the star t of a block (just after the sequence No., if there is).
- lB3 -
Macro
(Level I )
Main program
Macro
(Level 2)
Macro
(Level 3)
o--
G65P
G65P
G65P
G65P
M99
Local rariable
(Level 0)
(Leve1 1)
Macro
(Level 4)
M99
(Level 2)
(Level 4)
l) The main program is provided with ill to /133 local variables (leve1 0).
2) When the macro (leve1 1) is called with G65, etc., the local variable
(level 0) of the main program is stored, and llI to #33 local variables
(level 1) for lihe macro (1evel l) are prepared. Argument transfer is
possible for this purpose. (This also applies to (3) below).
3) The loca1 variables (level I, 2,3) are stored each time the macros (leve1
2,3,4) are ca11ed, and new local variables (level 2,3,4) are prepared.
4) When the operation returns from each macro with M99, the local varlables
(1evel 0, l, 2,3) stored in (2) and (3) are set in the same conditions as
when they were stored.
17.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodv
17.2.'l
Custom macro tiody format
The format of a custom macro body is the same as that of a subprogram as
shown
belorv.
(Prograrn Number);
Commands
(Variables, arithmecic
operation and control
'' instruction can be
sPsLrr
rcu.
,l
Mqq.
LL,2
Program numbers are determined as follows:

1) Or - 08999
for programs that can be freely registered, cancelled and
2) 09020
edited.
-.09899
for programs that cannot be registered, cancelled or edited

without setting a parameter
-iB6-
n'i!k;i
.8 Multiplex calls
l) Multiplex ca11s
Similarly to a subprogram ca11ed from another subprogram, a macro can be
called from another macro
The multiplicity
should be less than or equal to four including simple and
modal calls.
2) Multiplex modal calls
In modal calls, the specified macro is called each time a motion command is
executed. When several modal macros are specified, the next macro is ca1led
each time a motion command in the first macro is executed. Macros are
successively called from those assigned later.
17.1
(Example 1)
G66 P9i00;
z 10000; (1-r)
G66 P9200;
z i5000 t (L-2)
G67;
G67;
z-zsooo; (l-3)
P9200 cancelled
P9100 cancelled
9100;
X 5000; (2-L)
Mao.
9200;
z 6000; (3-i)
z 7000; (3-2)
MAO.
Sequence of execution (A block vrithout a motion command is omitted in
this chart.
(1
(Note )
1)
)
ft -?\
A rnodal macro is not called after (l-3),

mode.
which is not in macro call
3) Custom macro level and local variable

l^lhen a macro is called with G65, G66, or a G code which calls a macro, the
level of t.he macro increases by one. As a result, the 1evel of the local
variable also increases by one. Namely, t.he relationship between the macro
call and loeal variable is as follows.
-185-
3) Undefined variables
The value of a variable whi,ch has not yet been defined is called <vacant>.
Variable #0 is used for a variable that is always <vacant>.
An undefined variable has the following naEure:
'a) Quotation
When an undefined variable is quoted , the address itself is also ignored.
//l = <vacant>
When
//l = 0
When
c90x1002/l l
c90x1002/l l
c90x100
G90X10020
b) Operation
<vacant> is the same as 0 except when replaced by <vacant>.

i4'hgn
#l = <vacant>
When/il=0
tl2=lll
ll2=#r
I
/12=<vacant>
It2=0
ll2=lllx5
ll2=lll*'5
*zlo
I
112=0
ll2={lI+lll
llZ=lll+ttt
It2=0
1t2=0
c) Conditional expressions
<vacant> differs from 0 only for EQ and
When
/il = <vacant>
ill
NE.
When
ill = 0
#1 EQ
EQ #0
I
/10
Established
Not established
#lNEO
#lNEO
Established
Not established
#i cE /i0
#l
cE
#0
Established
Established
/ll cr 0
ill
Not established
Not established
d) Display and setting variable values

Variable values can be displayed on the
also be set in the MDT mode.
-lB8-
cT
CRT screen.
Variable values
can
gariables can be used j.n a custom macro body. Also arithmetic instructions
control instructions are commandable.
Actual values for variables are specified with a macro call command.
and
17.2.2 Variables
Variables can be used in the macro instead of numerical data. The user can
assign any value (within the allowed range) to them. Using variables allow
custom macros to become much more flexible than the conventional sub-routines.
Several variables can be used, and each variable is identified by a variable
number.
1) Varlable expressions
A
variable is composed of the code /i and a

//l(i=L,2,3 ,4.....)
number as shown belovi.
(Example I ) lt5
tf
Lo9
#1005
The following format can also be used where numbers are replaced bv <Formula>
(Example
il [<Forrnula> I
2) # t#1001
#[#1001-ll
# ltt6l 2l
Variable lli explained hereafter can always be replaced with variable
ll
[<Forrnula> ]
Quotation variables
The numerical value following an address can be replaced with a variable.
<address>i/i or <address>-ili indicates that the value of the variable or its
complement is substituted for the command value of the address.
3) F#33
If /133 = 1.5, ir is rhe same as FI.5.
Z-ltl8
If i/18 = 20.0, ir is rhe same as 2-20.0.
c#130
If //130 = 3.0, ir is rhe same as G3.
a) using a variable with addresses/,:, o and N is prohibited, (i.e.,:1127 or
N/f I cannot be used).
The value of n(n =l to 9) in an optional block skip/n cannot be used as a
(Exarnple
variable.
A variable number cannot be replaced by a variable. when 5 in tls is
replaced with #30, it does nor become llll3O but ii t#301.
The value of a variable cannot exceed the maximum set for each address.
For example, when #140 = 120, M// 140 exceeds the maximum (an l"t code must be
less than 99).
d) When a variable is used for address data, its value is rounded to the
significant digit.
e) By using <Formula>, as explained later, a numerical value following the
address can also be replaced with <Formula>. <address> [<Formula>] or
<address>-[<formula>] indicates that the value of the <formula> or its
complement is substituted for the command value of the address.
Note that a constant with no decimal point used between brackets is
assumed to have a decimal point at its end.
h\
(Example
4) xI li24+ltl8*c0s t/lr 1
z-l
#18+1t261
-187-
List'of
Variable
#1000
#1015, llro32
System Variables
Variable
number
Dr
/lli00 - llllt5, lltr32, #1133
D0
number
#5041
#506I
- {i5064 Skip signal position
115044 Work coordinates
#2000 - 112200 Tool compensation value
/l50Bl - #5083 TooL compensation
#3000
#510i - #5I04 Servo deviation
Llacro alarm
1f2500
l/3001
, lf3}02
#3003
, 113004 Cycle operation control
#3005
//301
Clock
Setting
it2600
(Y axis)
112606 Work
offset
value
Work
offset value
112806 Work
offset value
lf27O0
- #2706
#2800
(Z axis)
1 - #3AL2 Clocktnf ormation
#3901
- 112506 Work of f set value
(X axis)
(4th axis)
- #3902 Number of parts
/1400f - #4L20 I1odal information
il500l - /15004 Block end position

lf5A2l - t|5024 Machine coordinates
a) Inrerface signals /1f000 ro /ll0f5 and tlL032, /i1100 ro /lir55 and llLl32,
/ill33
T--..+
IrrPuL
^-i ^'.^1
-rStrdr
The status of the interface input q'i on: I i q dof orm'i

values of the system variables /I1000 to /f I0l5 , li1032.
190
narl
hrr
rorrl
i no
the
.;.i,..:4,
17.2.3
TYPes of variables
Variables are classified into local variables, conmon variables and system
variables, depending on the variable number. Usage and properties are different
for each EyPe of variable
l) Local variable lll to il33
The local variable is a variable local1y used in the macro. That is, a local
variable /li used in the macro and called at one point in time, is different
from iii used in the macro (whether it is t.he same macro or not) ca11ed at
another point in time. Accordingly, when macro B is called from macro A, as
in a multiplex call, a local variable used in macro A is not destroyed by
beins rrsed in macro B.
A local variable is used for an argument transfer. For inforfnation on the
correspondence to the argument address. A local variabie without a
transferred argument i-s vacant in its initial status and'can be used freely.
2)
variable #100 - #L99, /1500 - //53i

Just as a local variable is used locally in the macro, a comnon variable is
in common use throughout the main program, throughout each subprograrn called
from the main program, and throughout each macro. That is, llL used in a
certain macro is the same as /ii used in another macro. Accordingly, the calculated value of a conmon variable lti in a certain macro can be used in
Common
another macro.
The use of common variables is not specially determi-ned in the system.
can be used freely.
3) System variables
Use of a system variable is fixed in the system.
-rB9-
They
Output signal
Interface output signals can be issued by assigning values to

variables #1100 to /11115, Itrr32, #1133.
variable
System
#1101
tf
2\
2;
2;
26
2;
2;
2;
2in
2;;
2;;
4
llrr04
r05
#1i06
#rr07
#IIO8
#i109
I
I
#1110
#i111
#1
I
I
IIt2
#1113
#rl I4
#1ir5
System
,0,
2;
I
I
ILo2
#r r03
tf
Interface
output signal
Point
#1r00
2;;
2::
2::
z')
II
variable Point
r6
u00
I I JJ
32
u100
Value of variable
uoooo
uo00r
uo002
uo003
u0004
U0005
rj0006
u0007
u0008
u0009
uoOr0
u001 r
uoor2
uool3
uoot4
uoor5
Interface
output signal
lt1 i'1.')
'T
system
uols
- uol3l
Output signal
Contact closed
Contact open
(HIGH)
(LOW)
t6 and 32 points output signals can be issued at one time by assigning

value to the system variable /llt32 and #1 133,
tq
/1111?
= j tI
#f
" L"ll0o+il
xZL
l-v-n
an
JU
-
râ
* Vi) - 2-' * VrrrrJJ = L tz
JI
r-w
Jlrraa
When
When
UO[100+il
is Low,
Vi=0
UOIi00+i] is High, Vi=l
-r92-
System varj-able
Po
I
I
I
# 1000
//r00r
#1002
#1003
#1004
#1005
// r
I
I
)"
-q
#10i4
I
I
I
I
i/1015
l0r3
variable
t032
ong
^
)Lv
-t
Ur009
)rz?
-t
rTTnr?
ITTor o
2:: uroll
1
2::
2r,
2^'
laJ
Point
urOi3
UrO14
ur015
Interface
input signal
UIO
lo
Value of variable
a:
ur001
ur002
ur003
ur004
ur00s
ur006
ur007
rTT
2:
#r0r0
#i0l I
tf t0L2
2;
2;
2;,
2;
2;
2;
2;
006
System
'1
#1007
#1008
#1009
Interface
input signal
o rTr nnn
?
inL
UI15
Input signal
I
Contact closed
ConEac! open
(HIGH)
(LOW)
Since the variable value read is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system,
t.he unit system must be considered in preparing a macro.
The readlng system variable 1t'1032 is used to read 16 points lnput signals
at one time.
15
:
li
1032 = I
/l
j
[1000+i] *2'
t-u
'j.
i;
a!
System
variables i/1000 to /lt0t5, llL032 cannor be used as a lefr side
i-n a calculation
command.
i;
d
F
q.
&
191
rerm
b) Tool offset amounr ll2o00 to ll22o0

The tool offset amount can be determined by reading the value of the
system variable ll200l to ll22o0. The offset values can also be modified by
assigning a value to the system variable //1.
System variable numbers for tool offset amounr
memory c and compensation numbers are uo to 200)
(rn case of
Offset
number
Variable
lt2001
{t2002
1f
199
200
20.03
2199
{t2200
tf
(Note) The value of variable number /i2000 is only used to read the value.
value is alwavs 0.
c)
The
System variables for work zero point offset values tt2500 - 112906
By reading the values of system variables ll25OO - ll29O6, work zero point
offset values are determined.
By assigning va,lues to these variables, work zero point offset values can
be chansed.
Axis
Work zero point offset value
External work compensation

G54 (Work coordinate system l)
#25.0r
G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)
112506
External work compensat.ion

#2600
G59 (Work coordinare system 6)
*zZoo

#27 00
G59 (Work coordinare system 6)
lf 27
4rh

G54 (Work coordinare system
variable
lt2500
ti260l
lt2t 0I
06
ll2800
1)
G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)
-194-
System
#280
{t2806
No.
-;r;ts;:#
The last values of the system variable #1100 to #Ill5, ltLl32 and #if33
issued are stored as 1.0 or 0.0.
(llote) When a value other than I.0 or 0.0 is assigned to //1100 ro //1115,
<vacant> is assumed as 0 and values other than <vacant>,and 0 are
assumed as l. A value under 0.00000001 is indefinite.
(Example l)
1) llacro used to read three digits of BCD data with a sign by address
switching.
Structure of DI
zLs 2r4
Used
2r3
for
e2E 21 26 2s 24
2ro
Stgn
23 22
10r
102
2L
100
other purposes
Structure -of
DO
2E
Not used
27
26
Used
2"
24
for
23
2'
22
20
Address
other putpose
Macro call cornnand

c65P9100D (address);
The custom macro body
is specified as follor.rs:
09 IOO;
llll32=lll132 AND 496 oRllT t

c65P9101T60;
/i 100=BIN llt1032 AND 4095l ,
rF[/l10r2EQ 0] coro9r00;
/l r00=-il r00;
Address feed out

Timer macro
Reading in of 3-digit BCD data
Sign
a
N9 100M99;
2) Read eight types of signed 6-digit BCD data (three digits to the left
of the decimal point and. three digits t.o the right of the decimal
point) by address switching in #101.
Machine tool composition
When D0 2 = O, three digits to the right of the decimal point
? - l. r I three digits to the left of the decimal point
When DO 2- to 2- = 000, data No.l
001, data No.2
11
Macro call
, data tlo. 8
command
c65P9l0lD (data number) ;

The custom macro body is specified as follows:
09101 ;
c65P9l00D I lt7*2+I) i
/f
l0l=/l100;
x2] ;
L)r=lf r0 l+/r r00/ l 000 ;
c6 5P 9 l00D I lt7
#
1199;
-193-
Drill cycle (For incremental

(Equivalent to G8l)
(Example 3)
llacro call
programming)
command
c65 P9081 L (Repetition time) R (R point) W (Z-point);

0908 r ;
#3003=l;
c00w /llB;
G0lIÎ i/23
c00w-[RouND[#r8] + ROUND
/t3003=0;
The single block stoP is not

executed. #18 corresponds to
R and ll23 corresponds to W.
llt23)l;
Mqq.
(Note) The state of //3003 is cleared by resetting.

g) Feed hold, feed rate override, and exact stop check suppression specified
in /13004
hllaen the following values are assigned to the system variable /l 3004, feed
hold and feed rate override are suppressed for subsequent blockq and the
exact stop check is not performed. Pressing the feed hold button during
execution
of a block for which feed hold has been suppressed:
/a\ Executes feed hold at the start of the first block outside the
A-)
suppression range (when the button is kept pushed).
Lights the feed hold lamp, and does not execute feed hold at t.his
(,
point, but at the end of the first block outside the suppression
range, (when the button is pushed and released).
#
3004
U
! eed nolcl
Feed rate override
Exact stop check
0
0
0
0
l
0:
F'f f o n t i rra
L:Yv'
V.
Suppressed
(Note) The state of {i3004 is cleared by resetting.
-196-
.iil
d) Alarm #3000
hlhen detecting an error in the macro, an alarm can be generated. When an
alarm number is specified in the system variabte /i3000, the alarm lamp is
turned on and the alarm status is entered after the proceeding block is
processed.
/l 3000=n (ALARI
MES
SAGE) ;
(05n<99), an alarm No.=500+n

An alarm message of less than 26 characters can be specified in the
section between control-out and control-in.
e) Clock #300I , 1t3002
The clock time can be determined by reading the values of the system
variables #3001 , 113002. The time can be preset by assignirfg a value to
the system variable.
Kind
System
variable Unit time
At the time of
Counting
Power-on
Clock
/i
3001
msec
Reset to
Clock
lf
3002
hour
Same
Always
as at the time
of power-off.
The accuracy of each clock is within 16 msec. Clock
While STL signalis on.

1
overflows at 65536
msec.
(Example 2)
Timer
I'licro call command
G65P9l0l T (Awaiting time) msec;
This macro may be specified as follows:
09I01;
/f 3001 = 0;
wHrLE[#300r LE ll2OlD0l;
:
:
Initial setting
Wait for the prescribed. length of time
ENDI;
MOO.
LLJ
+l
The suppression of the single block stop and the wait for the auxiliary
function end signal.
lrrhen the following values are assigned to the system variable #3003, the
single block st.op function is suppressed and execution advances from one
block to the next without awaiting the end signal (FIN) of auxiliary
functions (S, T, 1"1 and B). When the end signal is not awaited, the
distribuEion end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. Be careful not to
specify a subsequent auxiliary function without awaiting the end signal.
#3003
Single block stop
Auxiliary function end signal
Not suppressed
Awaited
Suppressed
Av/aited
Not suppressed
Not awaited
Suppres
Not awaited
ed
-i95-
"
?'.:
{I
'd
.{
1l
I
{
j
:
Sv
stern variab
#400
Modal information
of preceding block
le
G code (group 0l)
114022
G code (group 22)
{t4L02
B code
F code
H code
#4 109
#4i11
lt4Lt3
ll4LL4
tt4LI5
tf
lt
M code
Sequence number
Program number
4It9
4t20
code
code
f) Positional information /15001 to ii5106

Positional information can be determined by reading the system variables
#500i to #5016. The unit of posit.ional inf ormation is inxn or inches
depending on the input system.
System variables 1i5001 to /15106 cannot be used as the left-hand-side term
of an arithmet.ic command.
System variable
#500
{t5002
#5003
#5004
lf
502r
#5022
{t5023
#5024
1i5025
it5026
Its04r
5042
5043
i|5044
{t5045
t!5046
tf
lf
#506
lf 5Ub. Z
#506 3
{t5064
Reading in
Positional information
during movement
X axis block end coordinate

Y axis block end coordinate
Z axis block end coordinate
4th axis block end coordinate
(ABSI0)
(ABSI0)
(ABSI0)
(ABSI0)
X axis present coordinate

Y axis present coordinate
Z axis present coordinate
4th axis present coordinate
(ABSMT)
(ABSMT)
(ABSMT)
(ABSI'{T)
X axis present coordinate

Y axis present coordinate
Z axis present coordinate
(ABS0T)
X axis skip signal position

Y axis skip signal position
Z axis skip signal position
(ABSKP)
(ABSKP)
4th axis skip signal position
r98 -
Possib
le
Impossib 1e
(PI"IC)
(PMC)
(ABS0T)
(ABS0T)
(PMC)
(PMC)
(PMC)
(ABSKP)
(ABSKP)
Impo s sib 1e
Possib
le
ii.
h) Variable corresponding ro the serring #3005

By substitution of system variable /13005 by a value, the setting data can
be set.
07
SEQ
06
05
15
03
ISO
INCH
ABS
REVX
REVY
TVON
ISO
INCI{
ABS
SEQ
04
X axis mirror
Y axis mirror
02
TVON
0l
00
REVY
REVY
image
image
TV check
Changeover of code system ISO/EIA
Changeover of input unit system inch input/uun input
Changeover of absolute/incremental command
Automatic insertion of sequence No.
L4
13
12
lr
10
09
IAPEF
REV4
08
REV4 4th axis mirror image

TAPEF t0/11 /L2 Tape format conversion
al
Clock information ii3011, /13012

It is possible to know the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second by
reading system variables il30i1, ll30l2.
System variables
Kind
Year, Month,
#30rr
Day
Hour, Minute,
ll3roz
Second
(Exanple) When it is May 20, 1987 4:17 5" PM

1t3}l2 = 19870520, #30I2 = I6L105
of parts, //3901 , 113902

It. is possible to know the count value by reading the
J) Number
//390r and //3902.
system variables
Also it is possible to change the count value of parts by substituting the

system variables.
Svstem variables
Kind
Number
of machined Darts
#390
Number
of necessary parts
{t3902
(Note 1) Do not substitute a negative value.
k) Modal inf orrnation i14001 ro 114120

Modal commands specified up to the preceding block can be determined by
reading t.he values of the system variables #400f to ltl+I20. The unit
specified is effective.
-t97-
(Exaurple 4)
The tool moves to a point appropriate to the machine tool (xp, yp, zp
distant from a reference point) through a programmed intermediate point;
and after processing a sequence of operations, returns to the original
point.
Macro call command
G65 P9300 X(Intermediate point)Y(Intermediate point)Z (Intermediate
point) ;
09300;
ill=//5001;
ttZ=tt5002:'
//3=/i 5003;
G00 z1126;
xll24 \1125;
G04; (Move is interrupted to read ll502l
G9 I x Ixp-//502i lY Iyp-i|5022]zlzp-115023)
to
/i5023)
./
:
,ntocessr.ng/
x#24 Yltzs zlt26;

x#L \lt2z
uil
"
!t2..
J,
Mqq.
... . ,
17.2.4 Arithmetic
commands
A variety of arithmetic operations can be performed on variables. An arithmetic

command must be specified the same as in general arithrnetic expressions.
/li=<Formula>
<Formula>, the right-hand-side of an arithrnetic command is a combination of
constants, variables, functions and operators. A constant can be used instead
of li i and #k. A const.ant without a decimal point used in <Formula> is
considered to have a d.ecimal point at the end.
l) Definiti-on and substitution of variables
lli=tl
2) Addition arithmetic
ili=il j+#k
lli=#i-#k
Iti=lll OR /lk
lli=llj XOR /ik
3) Multiplication arithmetic
llj-=ll
jxtlk
ll.l=lfi llfk
tti=lti AND #k
4) Functions
i=srN
#i=cos
li
[/ij
j
/i i=TAN Iil j
[ /l
ili=Rreni#j l/ t#kl
i/i=sQRr[/lj]
/li=ABS [//j
/li=BrN
[#
/li=Rcnfrli
//i=RouND I /lj I
/li=FIX
[ /l
jI
#i=FUP
[,/l
Definj-tion, subst.itution
Sum
Subrracrion
surn (ar every bir of 32 bits)

Exclusive 0R (ar every bir of 32 birs)
Logical
Product
Quotient
Logical producr (at every bir of 32 bits)

Sine (degree unit)
Cosine (degree unit)
Tangent (degree unit)
Arct.angent (degree unit)
Square root
Absolute value
Conversion from BCD to BIN
Conversion from BIN to BCD
Rounding off
Discard fractions less than I

Add i for fractions less than
-200-
,$,iffi#
System
variable
#508 r
{t5082
#5083
#5I01
ll5LOz
#5103
#5104
Abbreviation
Meaning
Coordinate
-J
LEU
Reading in
Positional inf ormation
during
movement
lst axis Tool offset value

2nd axis Tool offset value
3rd axis tool offset value
Impos
X axis servo position deviation

Y axis servo position deviation
Z axis servo position deviation
4th axis servo position deviation
Irnpossib 1e
ABSIO
ABSl'17
ABSOT
sib le
ABSKP
End point
Command
Couunand
coordinate
of the preceding
block
present
coordinate
Position
PresenE
where skip
coordinate
signal has
turned on in
the G3l block
Work coordinate
system
Machine
tlork
coordinate
Work
coordinate
sysEem
sysEem
sysEem
coordinate
Tool offset
Not considered
Considered
Considered
Considered
Tool length
Tool top
position
Tool standard
point
Tool standard
point
Tool standard
point
of f set
Cutter
comPen-
sation
(Note 1) The tool length offset amount is not the amount. in effect just
before the block is executed; it is the amount for the current
block.
(Note 2) The block end point (ABSI0) of the skip (c31) is the position where
the skip signal has turned on or the end point of the block if the
skip signal has not turned on.
-199-
t) Prgcision
Always consider the precision of a custom macro function used for Preparation
of programs.
a) Data format
Numeric data handled by a custom macro is in a floating decimal point
format as follows:
F.
"
1"1* 2
where M: l-bit sign + 31-bit binary data
E: l-bit sign + 7-bit binary data
b) Operational precision
An operation executed once generates the following error. These errors
are accumulat.ed with each repeated oDeration.
Average error
Operation format
a =
I.))
b^"c
.
X IU^-10
q.oo x ru -10
a = b/c
^-./vd-fu
i.24 x l0-q-
a=b*c
a=b-c
2.
^ l0
,IU-
Maximum
error
rU -10
1+.OO
1.86 x l0-g-
5.32 x I0-I0
5.0 x 10-q-
I.U X IU -R
a=
1.8 x 10-6-
3.6xI0" -6
b/c
(note) Function
TAN
Relative error
e
3.73 x l0-q-
a=SINb b=COSb
ATAN
Type of error
mln.
(;,:)
Absolute error
degrees
perforrns SIN/COS.
precision
a) Addition and subtraction
Note that when absolute values are used subtractively iloaddition or
subtraction, the relative error cannot be held under l0 ". For example,
suppose that the real values of /iI and JlZ are as follows.
ttr = 98765432L0123.456
ll2 = 9876543211711 .777
Performing operation ll2 - /ll does not produce
8) Notes on decreased
tlz-lll=67654.321,'
since the custom macro has a precision of only eight decimal digits, the
values of /fl and ll2 have a precision as lcw as approximately
tir = 987 6543200000.000
liT
respectively. (The internal values differ
=.9876543300000.000,
somewhat from the above values because they are binary numbers.)
Consequently,
ll2 - lll = 100000.000

which generates a large error.
-202-
to use function ROUND

1) If function ROUND is employed in an arithmetic operation command or in an
IF or WHILE conditional expression, the figure in function ROUND is
rounded off (counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disrdgarding
the rest) as is ordinary data with a decimal point.
How
Example)
i/r=RouNDlr.2345l;
/ll becornes 1.0.
rF[#1 LE ROUNDlllZll G0r0 l0;
ROUND [//2 ] is 4. 0 it
ltz is 3 . 567 .
2) If function ROUND is employed in a command to an address, it is rounded
off to the least input increment of the address.
l
Ytmn
c0lx IRouNl [//r I I ;

If /ll is 1.4567 and the least input increment of X is 0.001, this
block becomes c01 Xl.45L.
In this example, the conmand is the same as GOI X /l1; command.
Function ROUND in an address command is used rnainly in the following
case.
(Exarnple)
Program to move incrementally by /11 and ll2 oni-y and then return to
the starting point

Nt //1 = I.2345i
N2 tlz = 2.3456;
N3 c01 X ill F100; : X moves 1.235.
N4X//2;
: Xmoves2.346.
N5 X -lll].+ll2l;
: X moves -3.58, since #l + llL is 3.5g01.
Since I.235 + 2.346 = 3.581, the progr.oo d6e" not return to thE-starting
point by N5.
Assume N5 X- IROUND Iii I ] + ROUND tll2ll ;
It becomes egual to N5 X-[1.235+2.346]; and the program returns ro rhe
starting point.
I
5) Combination of arithmetic operations
The above arithmetic operations and functions can be combined. The order of
priority in an arithmetic operation is function, multiplication arithmetic
then addition arithmetic.
/ii=//j+/lk*srN llltl
\[xampre L )
fF
__-4\_
\:-/
_rt\_
\7
Sequence of
,4\
_-_-\1/--
arithmetic operations
6) Uoaifi,cation of arithmetic sequence using

A portion to be assigned priority in an ari-thmetic sequence can be enclosed
in t l.
t I can be nested up to five times (including t ] used j-n functions).

(Example 2)
//i=sru t t tiij+litl*//!,+//rnl*/lnl (Three f o1d nesting)
(r)
{?)
/^
\J/
v
Sequence of
arthimetic operation
- 201 -
(Lxampre l)
tn
ttI20=I;
NI WHILE #T2O LE
N2 WHrLE //30
IO
EQI
DO 1;
Repeated ten
times
DO2;
Repeated while
variab le //30= I
N3END 2;
llL20=ltl20+l
N4END
(Note
1)
Notes on
OO
I;
REPEAT ptograrnming.
r,ru"a be specified before
END m.
END 1;
(No)
nn l.
D0 m and END m must correspond to each other in one program.
DO
(No)
DO
END
I;
DO
F\TN
1.
(No)
END 1;
-204-
b) Logical operation
EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and
subtraction. Therefore, be careful of errors. To determine whether or
'
not //l and ll2 are equal in the above, for example,
rF ltr EQ ll2
is not always evaluated correctly. When the error is evaluated as in
IF ABS IIL _ II2 LT 5OOOO
and the difference between /i I and tl2 f.a1-1s within the range error, both
values must be considered equal.
c) Trigonometric functions
Absolute_Frrors occur in trigonometric functions; but, since they are not
under l0 " be careful of integration or division after using'a
trigonometric function.
17.2.5 Control commands
The program flow can be controlled by using the following commands.
1) D;{ergence (G0T0)
tiJ IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTOn
the next operation is
When <condltional expression> is satisfied,
executed in the block with the sequence number n in the same program.
Sequence number n can be replaced by a variable or <Formul-a> .
When the condition is not satisfied, the control proceeds to the next
b
1ock.
IF [<condltional expression>] can also be omitted; and when it is, the

control passes to block n unconditionally.
The following expressions can be used for <conditional expression>.
#j EQ#k
#j NE iik
#i cr /lk
#j LT /ik
/li cE i/k
#j LE ltk
<Formula> can be used instead of lli and /lk, and a variable or <Formula>
can be used instead of n.
(Note l) In the block with the sequence number "n" which will be executed after
a GOTO n command, the sequence number must be at the top of the block.
Branching in the reverse direction takes more time than that in the
forward direction.
2) IteraEion
WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m (m = L,2,3)
END
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks DO m to END m are

repeatedly executed, That is, Ehe condition of DO m block ls examined and
when the <conditional expression> is satisfied, control passes to the next
block. But when it is not satisfied, the block after END m is executed.
WHILE [<conditional expression>] can also be omitted 'as with IF, and if
omitted, blocks from D0 m to END m are executed eternally.
WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m and END m must be used as a pair.
Identification number m identifies this pair.
-203-
DO
ranges cannot be intersected.

:
no l.
DO
?.
-- -,
(No)
FNtn I!t .
F\]n
LL| v
L ,
A branch can be made from inside to outside a
nn t.
.f
coTn qnnn.
'vvv,
.
F\tn
(yes)
1
rt
N9000.....;
-206-
D0
range.
(?)
The
same
iden
if ica t ion number can
be
used many times.
no r.
tr'I\in r
(Yoe\
no r.
[i\u I;
DO
statement can
nn r.
nn ?.
Dn ?.
\ tcD/
END 3;
,c,t\U I;
trNn r.
be
nested up to three times.
Custom macro bodies or subprograms can be

range. D0 statements can be nested up to
custom macro body or in the subprogram.
arar t
c65. . .
(Yes)
G66.....;
(Yes)
G67.....;
(Yes)
FNIN
!L!U
called from inside a D0

three times more in the
1
I .
nn t.
MOa
rrlv.....
(Yes)
END 1;
17.2.6 Macro and CNC statements
The following blocks are called macro statement.s.
i) Operation command (block including=)

ii) Control command (block including G0T0, DO or END)
iii) Macro call'command (block including G65, G66, G67 or G codes calling macro)
The following blocks have the same features as the macro statements:
i) A subprogram call block (a block including subprogram call comrnand by M98,
M, or T code) which does not include any conmand address oEher than O, N, P
and L..
ii) g block which includes !'199 but does not include anv command address other
than 0, N, p and L.
-208-
A branch cannot be made from outside to insj_de a D0 range.
GOTO 9000;
D0
1;
(No)
N9000.....;
FI\IN
1.
nn 1.
N9000.....;
(No)
END
I;
GOTO
9000;
207
(Example 3)
N lXl 000;
N2i/ t0= 100;
N3Y I 000;
N4/11 100= 1 ;
N5/i l=
l0;
N6X- 1000;
Block currently executed
I'tacro statement
Firs t
alreadv executed
statement
I'lacro statement executed
Iulacro statement executed
Second CNC statement
CNC
Execution of
macro stalement
Execution of
CNC statemcnt
When the second CNC statement after the block currently executed is
the no-movement b1ock, macro statements up to that and next to the
second cNC statement (i.e. the no-movement block) aft.er the block
currentlv executed are executed.
(Exarnple 4)
N lXi 000;
Bfock currently executed
N2//10=100;
Macro statement already executed
N3Y 1000;
N4/iIr00=1;
N5//l=I0; N6Z IOOO;
NTilli0l=1;
u8il2=20;
N9X-i000;
Execution of
macro statement
First CNC statement

Macro statement executed
Macro st.atement executed
Second CNC sEatement (no-movement block)
Third CNC statement
N4
N5
Execution of
CNC statemenr
(b)
When the firsr- CNC statement after the block currently executed
no-movement block, the macro stat.emenE is not executed.
(Example 5)
N lY 1000;
N2ilI100=l;
ll3/i l= i0;
N421000;
N5/l1l0l=l;
N6i/2=20;
N7X-1000;
Ilacro statement already executed

Ilacro statement already executed
First CNC statement (no-movement block)
Macro statement execuEed
l'lacro statement executed
Second CNC staternent
Exccution of
CNC sratenrcnt
-210-
is the
Blocks other than macro statements are sometimes referred Eo as CNC statements.
The nacro stat.ement differs from the CNC statement, in the following points:
i) In the normal single block mode, the single block stop does not occur.
(See item (3), Chapter 8)
ii) The macro sEatement. is not regarded as the no movement block in the cutter
iii)
compensation c.
The time of execution differs.
iii) j-s described below in further detaj-l.
a) The macro statement existing next to the block which does not buffer the
next one (b1ock of non-buffering M code, or G3l block) is executed after
that block is executed.
(Example l)
NlXt000M00;
Block currently execut.ed
N2i/1100=l;
Macro statement
Execution
of macro statement
Execution of
CNC statement
b) llacro statement existing next to the block buffering the next one.
i) When not in cutter compensation C mode
When the current. block starts to be executed, the nexE nacro
statement is imnediately executed. The macro statement up to the
next CNC statement is executed.
(Exarnple 2)
N1G0 1X1000;
N2/il i00=1;
N3i/ l= l0;
N4X2000;

Macro stat.ement executed
Next
CNC
statement
Execution of
macro statement
Execution of
CNC statement
ii)
When
(a)
in cutter compensation
C mode
the first CNC statement next to the block currently execut.ed is

noc the no-movement block (block containing no movement command in
the cutter compensation plan).
When
rT)
\j.,/
When t,he second CNC sEatement i-s
not the no-movement block.

CNC statement. next to the block
The macro statement, after the first

currently executed, is executed.
-209-
A block including a macro call command (G65, G66, G67), arithmetic command
and control command is not stopped even by single block operation.
The following parameter setting executes a single block stop for commands
other than macro call commands. This function is used for testins a custom
*^^-^
ulo!!v
L^l-,
uugy.
SBK}I
single stop is done in every macro stalement.

A block in which a macro statement has executed a single block stop, is
assumed to have no movement in the cuEter compensation mode. Sometimes
incorrect compensation is performed. (This case is handled the same as it is
for a movement amount of 0 although a move has been speci,fied.)
L+) Optional block sklp
l, appearing in the uiddle of <expression>(right-hand-side of an arithmetic
formula, or j-n
), is treated as division, and not an optional block skip.
s) Operation in EDIT urode
The fo11o\,ring settings can be used to protect registered custom macro bodies
and subprograms from accidental destruction.
When SBI(M=I,
(Setting operation is effective)

to I specifies that custom macro bodies or subprograms wich
program numbers 9000 to 9999 cannot be cancelled, and edited.
However, this affeets Ehe deletion of al1 programs during turning on.
Setting
PRG9
Reset
I^lhen a cleared
status is produced by a reset, all local variables and eommon

variables ill00 to if 149 become <vacant>.
System variables //1000 x ll Ll32 are not cleared.
Call condition and D0 condition are cleared by reset.
However a cleared status cannot be produced by the parameter (No. 040, LOCC,
EMC).
7)
Display j-n PROGMM RESTART page

The M and T code" rrqerl fnr errhnrsgl4m calllng are not displayed like
8) Feed hold
M98.
Macro statement execution stops at the end of the biock by turning on feed
hold. (It also stops by resetting or by alarm generation).
9) Other llmitations
a) Usable variables
//0, llL to /i33, #100 to tll49 , #500 to /1531, sysrem variables.
h) V:1id veriable values

Ilaximum value +10+ /
v/
Minimum value TtO-29
c) Constant value-rralid in
<FormuIa>
.value +99999999
Minimum value +0.0000001
Decj-mal point can be used
I'laximum
'
Precls].on
Eight-digit decimal number
e) I'tacro nesting
,t\
v) Arithmat-ir --i
Maximum of four
f) Iteration identification number
1to3
g) Nesti-ng of
Llaximum of five
h) Subprogram nesting
Eight (Subprogram call and macro call)
-2r2-
17.2.7
Codes and words used in custom macro
The following code can be used in the program

codes used in conventional programs.
1) rso
*t
'i
;,
*-
of the
cust.om macro
in addition to
*I
:.
Meaning
::
ll
+.
*
o
z)
OO
o
o
0
0
nl
UJ
0
0
oo
oo
f!
Character
0
0
o
o
0
0
o
0
tl
1l
.*
0
o
ErA
Meaning
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Character
(Data No. 0053)

(Dara No. 0054)
(Dara No. 0044)
(Dara No. 0042)
(Dara No. 0043)
0, the same code 0 as in the program number, must be used. The hole pattern
ll, + and = in EIA code must be set as parameters (Data No.
for .
0042 Eo 0044, 0053, 0054). Ilowever, the character with no punched hole
eannot be used. Note that alphabetic characters can be used, but when used
as /1, they are not used in their proper sense.
Special words used in custorn macro are:
.
OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, ANd LE.
AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE,
i
1
s
DO,
END
17.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body

:
I
i
A custom macro body is similar to a subprogram; it is registered and edited in

the same \îay as a subprogram.
The memory used to register custom macro bodies is included in the storage
capacity of the CNC.
17.4 Limitations
r) MDI operation
Macro call and subprogram call command cannot be specified in MDI mode.
However, if I'IDI operation B function i.s provided, subprogram call command can
be performed.
2) Sequence number search
in the custom macro body cannot be searched for.

Single block
A block, other than one including a macro call command, arithmetic command,
or control command, can be executed as a single block stop even when in the
Sequence numbers
1)
macro.
E
i;
- 2rl -
18.3 Key Position

The location of keys is shown in the figure below.
trtrtrtrtr
tr trETE tr
B-4rh-D
+l
trMMMM
18.4
1
L/
Each Address Restrictions
\ rf
rha nffeol No. is commanded by address D, the modal value of H is also

rewritten. (Distj-nqs use of addresses D and H cannot be done.)
18.5 Setting of Setting
Parameters
The format conversion can be set by setting parameters.

By setting the page as " (SETTING 2)" and by rewriting of "TAPEF", it becones
follows:
TAPEF =
Ot
as
Format conversion v41id

Format conversion invalid.
02000 N0130
PARAMETER
(SETTTNG 2)
PWE :O
_TAPEF = 0
No.
TAPEF
(0:
DISABLE
I:
ENABLE)
MDI
18.6
Cautions of each Function
1) Subprogeram call
To call .61 srrlrnrnorom i f a command of more than 4 digits is used for
designati."
*". (address P), the last 4 digits become the
";"i;"""
subprogram No.
and"lfot"*t"*
if the times of repetitive calling (address L) is not
specified, the tj-mes of repetition becomes one.
.
-214-
18.
10/11 TAPE FORMAT
operation of the progran registered by 10/ll tape format is possible for

rhe following funcEions with setting of the seEting parameters.
a) Cutter compensation (G40, G4l, G42)
Memory
b)
c)
Subprogram call (UlAl

Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80
18.1 Difference
G89)
Points of Tape Format
Difference of tape format between 0/00 and 10/11 is shovm in TabIe below.
F
i
IO/II
Function
rGl7.
Cutter comDensation
rG40r
r Gl7
D-;
ictsir ic+ri
LG42)
L
(One
call
of X, Y, Z or 4th)
D: Offset
M98
No.
P_r_
rG73r X
iCllrt, Z
ic76i 0-
rG8lr
F
I'
l-
R_
pL
111: Times of repetive call

pppp: Subprogram No.
G73-r
ttGT4tl
1G76
i cgr
RP.n
L.Atl
LG89I
G19
P: (One of X, Y, Z or 4th)
H: 0ffset No.
rlt
n.
M98 P 1l1pppp ;
P: Subprogram No.
L: Times of repetitive call
Canned cvcle
r rG40r
H-;
icrair ic+ti
LG42)
G19
P:
Subprogram
OM
L:
&
K: Tirnes of repetition
Times of repetition
18.2
t
Address and Range of Command Values
which could not be used for 0/00 series can be used by format
conversion. In this case, even if format conversion is set, restriction of 0/00
format is applied to the range of conaand values being used for the basic
address, and if a value out of the 0/00 fornat range is registered, a P/S alarm
is generated.
Added basic addresses and their range of command values are mentioned in Table
below. 0ther addresses will have the same specification as address in 0/00
series.
Some addresses
Function
Times of repet.ition
0ffset
Address
L
No.
t
e
ii
-2r3-
rnm
input
I - 9999
0-999
ineh input
l - 9999
0-999
III
OPERATION
iii)
Manual handle feed (See Section III-4.4)

By rotatlng the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance correspondlng to the degree of handle rotation.
?\ Toor movement by prograrni-ng
- Automatic operation (see Sect ion III-5)
Program
Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the ereated program. It includes memory and MDI operations.
i) Memory operatiorf
Memory
Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory, the machine can be run
according to the program instructions. This operation is cal1ed memory
operat ion.
2IB -
F
I
1.
INTRODUCTION
1)
Manual operation
a) Manual reference point return (See Sectlon III-4.1)
The LNC machine tool has a position used to deternine the machlne posi-
tion.
This position is called the reference point, where the tool is replaced or
the coordinates are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned onr the
tool is moved to the reference polnt.
Manual reference point return is to move the tool to the reference point
using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator's pane1.
Op"r"tor's panei
ooo
Orrl
|
oo
ooo
The tool can be moved to the reference point also with program cornnands.
This operation is called automatlc reference polnt return. (See Section
rr-6.
b)
I)
Tool movernent by manual operatlon

Using operatorrs panel switchesr pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the
tool can be noved along each axis.
a
Operator's panel
ooo oo
'i
Manual
handle
Orrr
oorrr
ooo
Work
j
a
The tool can be moved 1n the followlng ways:

i) Manual conrinuous feed (See Secrfoi ffi-+.2)
The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.
ii) Step feed (See Sectlon III-4.3)
The tool lDoves by the predetermlned dlstance each tlne a pushbutton ls
pressed.
-217-
ii) Start and stop (See Section III-5.5)

Cycle start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
reset
Program
Program
stop
end
Stop caused
by program
PressLng the cycle start pushbutton eauses automatic operation to start.

By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses
or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command
in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. trrlhen
one process machining ls completed, aulomatic operation stops.
iii) Handle interruption

Tool
r--.1
I
I
Workpiece
Depth of
manual
handle
feed
While automatic operation is being executed,

tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle.
-220-
Depth-ofcut specified
by the program
&
a
g
1i) I,IDI operation
MDI operation
After the program is entered, as an eornrnand group, from the I"IDI keyboard,
the nachine can be run according to the program. Thls operatlon is called
MDI operation.
3) Automatic operation
1) Program selection (See Secrion III_5.2.I)
Data format in
0 1001
memory
Program number
Work-l program
I
M30
0 1002
Program number
Program number
search
Work-2 program
Automatlc
operation
M30
0 1003
Program number
I.lork-3 program
select the program used for the work. ordinarlly, one program is prepared
for one work. rf two or more progra*s are in me'ory, select the progran
to be used, by searchlng the progra' number (Sectron rrr-10.4).
-2t9-
Single block (See Sectlon III-6.7)
ili)
w
Cycle
Tool
(.r/,/
r,/,4
(/^
t,/ ,/ )
lLz-t
Stop
Stop
When the c]'cle start

pushbutton is pressed, the
tool executes one operation
then stops. By pressing the
cycle start again, the tool

cxecutes the
ne\t operation then
stops. The program
is
checked
in this manner.
Single block
b)
How to view the posicion display change without running

i) M,achine lock (Sef Sections III-6. I and III-6.2)
the machine
ll*rT
w.zt
(//)
CRT/TTDI
V7j tool
V)
VA
Change caused by
machine movemcnt
The tool remains stoppcd, and only the posi'

rional displays of the axes change.
Machine lock
ii) Auxiliary function lock

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode
during the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off' etc.) are disabled.
r-i:,'i=T
::,:l:
4) Program test
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It

checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This
check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the
position display change (without running the machine).
a) Check by running
i) Dry run (See Section III-6.6)
Remove the work, check only

movement of the tool.
Select the tool movement rate
using the dial on the operator's
panel.
i'l----- --
It
|t;
-- -- -L I --__ _ _t: L'
Drv run
ii)
Feed rate overrlde
Feed rate specified by program:
Adjust the rate value smaller
50 mm/min.
than
that specificd
Program.
Feed rate after feed rate override:
l0
mm/min.
Overside is 20%
Feed rate overrlde
-221-
by
the
i)
Off
set value
(See ,sectlon
III-10.1.
Tool compcnsation
number I
Tool compensation
number 2
Screen
Tool compensation
Keys
number
CNC memory
tool has the tool dimension

(length, dianeter).
When a workpiece is machlned,
the tool movement route depends
on the tool dlmensions.
The
By setting tool dimension data

in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes
that perrnit any grol to cut the
work shape specified by the
program. Tool dinension data
is cal-led the offset value.
lrl
-] | |r
I i
-224-
orir.t
value of
the 2nd tool
5)
Parr program editing (See secti-on III-9)

After a created program is once reglstered in memory, it
modlfied from the CRT/MDI panel.
can be correct.ed or
Program correction
or modification
Program registmtion
Nl
T/MDI
N2.
h
{}
NC tape (program)
PPR
This operation can

6)
be
Data display/setting
executed using the part program storage/edit function.

( See
Section III-10.)
Data setting
display
Screen
CRTi
Keys
Data
NTDI
CNC memory
Data stored i-n

sc
reen.
NC
menory can be displayed and corrected via the
-223-
CRT/MDI
ii) Displaylng and setting parameters (See Sectlon III-10.4)
Parameters
Rapid traverse rate

Positional control system
Screen
Reference point return sYstem

Backlash compensation data
KeYs
Pitch error compensation data
CNC memory
Machine
operation
functions have versatllity ln order to take actlon in characteristics of varlous machines. For example, CNC can specify the following:
The
CNC
I ) Ra,gld-l:la;zerse-rat-e--of=each, axis
2) Whether incre.qe_ilE-sy-stem is based on metric system or lnch system.
3) How ro ser @Avg -'
Data to make the above speclfication is called pardmeters. (See Sectlon
III-10.4) Parameters differ dependlng on machine tool.
-225-
iii)
Displaying and setting operatorrs setting data (See Section III-I0.2)
Setting data
Mîrror image machining on/
olt
Screen
setttng
Keys
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Machine
operation
Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator rn operation. This data causes urachine characteristics to change.
The above data is called setting data.
iv) Data protection key (See Section III-I0.6)
Operator's panel
Data
protection
key
CRT/MDI
Program
Offset value
Parameters
Setting data
CNC memory
A key called the data protection key can be defined. rr is used to prevent the program, offsetr pararneters, setting daEa, etc. from being
registered, set, modified, or deleted erroneously.
-226-
Display
i) Prograrn display (See Section III-1
I . 1. )
Active program
number
Program.tontent
The cursor indicates

the currently executed
location.
Program contents
01
002
01 046
01057 01245 01556....

02006 02567 03456...,
Program list
of the currently active program are displayed.

In addition, the programs scheduled next and the'program list are dis-
The contents
played.
ii) Current position display
"l
ir
ti.,
ll'
+x
(See Sectlon
III-11.3)
I x OOOO @O
I Y oo@ ooo
I z OO@ OOO
I
Work coordinate
CRT screen
system
The current posit,ion of the tool ls displayed

The distance from the current position to the
displayed.
with the coordinate values.

target position can also be
iii)
Alarm display (See Section IIL-11. s)

is displayed at bottom, pressing the
message, as in the photo below.
the
alarm
displays
button
l-ALAffil
When an alarm occurs and ALARM
AJqRI
iSSISE
518
SA
O.ER TRA\jEL
OUER TRFIJEL
:
:
I'W
+X
+Z
iv) Parts count display

When this option is selected, two types of run time
are displayed on the screen.
ACTLH- POSITIOq CRBSOLUTE)
a2@@@ NATSA
x
Y
z
RLN
-1,2.54@
-42.5@A
@.a@@
rrF *r-
.r.,-ETT,Sfl
r;-ir;ln;tffit
-228-
*.J
and
number of parts
.'. .'i::{
v) Graphic display (See Section III-12.5)
Display on the
Display on the
XZ plane
YZ plane
Display on the
Three dimensional display
XY pla4e
Programmsd tool movement can be displayed on

1) XY plane
2) Yz plane
3) XZ plane
4) Three dimensional display
229
"tr'
-
the follcfuing planes:
.,--l-..:
B)
Data output (See Section III-12)

Tape reader
Portable tape read et
FANUC PPR
/A\
V
Paper tape
Memory
ITANUC cassettc and

cassette adapter
Reader/puncher
interlace
Floppl,disk
Automatic programming
system
The program, offset, parameters, etc. input in NC memory can be output to

paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a
medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.
-;:.'Ir-.
'
1.:
:,.
'-;'1.--.:
-230-
2.
OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2.1 CRT/MDl
Panel
The CRT/|'lDI panel consists
following illustration.
l)
CRT/MDI
panel for
of a
CRT
display (9"
amber) and keyboard
as in the
0-I1B
CRT character display (9")
Data input key
Reset key
EAEEE
EEE
EtrEB
tilEtr
trBE
Program
edit key
Input key
@BOONME
Page
change key
Function key
Start/output key
Cursor
moYe key
2) Full
key
Reset keY
Data input key

I
Program
edit key
POftR
l,*l
lo*'
rtrtr
rtr
EMMBBMH
Cursor move key
Page change
trEtrE
@tr@E
Function key
key
23r -
Input key
Start/output key
2.1.1 MDI
keyboard
Table
No.
2.1.1 MDI keyboard functions ('l12)

Func t
Name
ions
( 1)
RESET key
Pr:ess this key to reset the CNC, to cancel

an alarm, elc.
(2)
START key
Press this key to start the IIDI conmands, or

to start the automatic operation cycle.
Since this key's operating method differs
according to the machine tools, refer to the
rnachine tool builderts operation manual.
(3)
Address and numerical key
Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
(4)
INPUT key
When an address or a numerical key is

pressed, the alphabet or the numeral is
input once to the key input buffer, and it
is displayed on the CRT screen. To set the
data input to the key input buffer in the
offset register, etc., press the INPUT key.
Thls key is equivalent to rhe INPUT key of
the soft keys, so the same results can be
obtained by pressing either of them.
(5)
Cancel (CAN) key
Press this key to delete the last character

or symbol input to the key input buffer.
The contents of the key input buffer are
displayed on the CRT screen. When the address key or the, numerical key is pressed
next, the position where the alphabet or the
numeral is inserted next is indicated by
rt lt
lflnen the cancel (CAN) key is pressedr the
character immediately before the rr rr is
cancelled.
Example:
I,Jhen
the key in ut buffer displays >N00lxl0002 and rhe cancel

key is pr ssed, Z is cancelled and >NO0ITIOOO is dis-
(CAN)
played.
(6)
Cursor shift keys
There are two kinds of cursor shift key

described be1ow.
* : This key is used to shift the cursor a
short distance in the forward direction.
t : This key is used to shift the cursor a
short distance in the reverse direction.
a')a
LJL
Table
No.
(7)
2.1.1 MDI keyboard function (2/2)
Functions
Name
Two kinds of page changeover keys ar: de-
Page changeover key
scribed be1ow.
+ : This key is used to changeover the page
on the CRT screen in the forward direction.
i : This key is used to changeover the page
on the CRT screen in the teverse direction.
(8)
Soft keys (option)
The soft keys have various functions '

according to the Applications.
The soft key functions are displayed at the
bottom of the CRT screen.
Left-end soft key [< I :
This key is used in order to exit to
the initial stats (condition when the
function button is depressed when each
feature has been operated vla soft
keys.
Right-end soft key Dl :

This key is used when operate functions
which have nor yet been displayed.
2.1.2 Function buttons
Function buttons indicate
large items like
chapters in a document.
Indicates the current position.
Conducts the following:
lTffid-l
Setting and display of offset value, setting and display of variable.
I opsnr
In EDIT mode ... edits and displays the program in the

In MDI mode ... inputs and displays the MDI data
In automatic operation ... displays command value.
memory
@
t-otrR--l
ALARM
GRAPH
Setting and display of parameter
and
dlsplay of diagnostic
Alarm nurnber display and setting and display

pane1.
daEa.
of soflware operatort
Graphic function.
Several pages are inciuded in the chapter selected wlth each function button.
The page is selected with PAGE button.
(Note) The data displayed on the screen disappears when one of the function
buttons and the lffil
key are pressed. Thereafter, when either function
button is pressed, the corresponding screen is dlsplayed again. When the
unit is not used with the povrer turned on for long time, turn off the
screen. This ls effective to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.
-233-
2.2
Machine Operator,s panel
The operatorrs panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the
different tools. Operations of a typical operator t s panel are explained as
shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bv the machine
tool builder.
ra
v
/A
((
.\j/
)'i
Si^'-'f
roL&sTEpFr:Fr)
v(o66
\/ v \r'
FEED
+?
,#,'JRu
HOLI)
o
OFF
""2
,ffi \r'*"^""6
+x +\'
I
o,''
\ltll 1,n,, lt ri
ON
(N)
-
\z/
\)l7N \)Z
DR'Rt
'?'J!"!i,"
rHIiH{it*
((\l
\r/
r
rFF
,.-=\
nN z'
\)/
MACHINE
LOCK
AMOUNT
,/
i
dlD)
dlD\
\tll'
.t,,. o \lIeY
o-\
FEEDRATE
OVERIDE
JOG FEEDRATE
m/mm
Fig.2,2 An illustration for operator,s
-234-
HA\DLE
STEP FEED
IOO
""(N"'i
-,,0.
,*vlR,, *,.,,
ovERRtDE
panel
r:ro
N,
v
HANDIE AXIS
I /-1\
xloo
/rN-\
\\\/
r"TJil3.',?*
Table
2.2
Element functions
Function
Name
Cycle start button
By selecting an execution program then pressing this pushbutton, automat ic operation is started . During automatic
operation, the lamp inclicating automat ic operation is on.
l'eed hold button
hlhen
Mode selection
but ton
Select a mode, depending on the operation type.
Rapi-d traverse
By pressing this pushbutton, the tool is fed rapidly.
Jog & step feed
By pressing this button, manual continuous or sEep feed

is executed.
Handle
By rotating the handle, the tool is rotated in the corresponding direction.
Single block
By placing the single block switch in Ehe 0N position,

automatic operation is executed by one block.
Optional block skip

switch
By placing this switch in the 0N position, the optional

block skip is executed.
h rrr
".J
Bv placing this switch in the 0N posiEion, the dry run is

executed.
rr rn
this pushbutton is pressed drrring automatic operation, the tool decelerates then stops.
Reference point
return
By placing this switch in the Oll position, reference

point return is executed.
Rapid traverse
override
Lhen the rapid traverse override is to be executed, this
Step feed amount
This element selects the
Emergency stop
Bv pressing this button, the machine is stopped emergently.
Lock selection
Selects display or machine Lock.
llanual
hhen manual operation is to intervene during automatic

operat j-on, this elemen! selects the amount of movement by
manual operati-on be set in the absolute register or not
ab
solute
Feed rate override
element selects the amounE of override.

amounE
of one steo of steo feed.
Selects the amount of override for automatic or
opera t ion.
Jog feed rate
Selects the manual continuous feed rate.
Handle axis
Sel-ects the axis moved bv the manual handle.
Handle multiplying
During manual handle feed, select the multlplier

moving amount per step.
selection
selectlon
-235-
manual
of the
2.3
Tape Reader
Portable tape reader j-s used for the tape reader'

2.3.1
t)
Portable taPe reader
Name
and description of each section

A
Tape
6.
reader
Grips
3.
opera.tlon
swrtcn
Capstan
,1
r sourcell
Light 1| t[
lll
2.
Optical
reader part
Metal ll lil
fittingA ll lll
Twinderll lil
)3.".,
lock
fl] ,111_
1- Cable stored
p a11
i _
l-ll
I
ll
lj
l:
.l ,
_-]---r
,lr
ii
13.
Readeri
puncher
interface
lll
10.
Lowering
Photo
Iock
amplifier
Iever
5. Tape
box
Fig.
Tabte
2.3.1
2.3.1
Name of each section
Descriptions {or each part (1/4)
Functi-ons
Light Sources
for
An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted
each channJl and for ihe feed hole (9 diodes
A built-in Stop Shoe functions
in total).
to decelerate the taPe.
The light source is attracted to the optical
reader by a magnet so that the tape will be
held in the eorrect position. Thls unit can

be opened upward, by turning the tape reader
control switch to the RELEASE position (this
turns off the magnet).
Optical
Reader
Capstan Roller
Reads data punched on the tape ' through a

glass wlndow. Dust or scratches on the
glass window can result in reading errors'
Keep this window cLean-
Controls the feeding of tape as specified

the control unit.
-zJo-
by
Table
No.
4.
2.3.1 Descriptions for
Functions
Name
Tape Reader Control Switch
each part (214l.
A 3-position switch used to control the
Tape
Reader.
RELEASE
AUTO
...
The tape is allowed to be free,
or used to open the light

or
source.
When loading
this
unloadi-ng the l tape,
position is selectbd.
The tape is set to fixed
position by the Stop Shoe. The
feed and stop of the tape is
controlled by commands from the
Control Unit.
During
a
taPe-controlled
operation or data input from
tape, the Light Source must be
closed and this position must be
selected.
MANUAL
The tape can be fed in the

If
forward reading direction.
another position is selected,
the tape feed is stopped.
Tape Box
A Tape Box is located below the Tape Reader.

A belt used to draw out a paper tape is
located inside the box. The paper tape can
easily be pulled out using this belt.
6.
Grips
For carrylng the portable tape reader.
7.
I^linder
Used to supply or rewind tape.
-237-
Table
2.3.1
Descriptions for each part (3/4)
Functions
Metal fitting
Push
To remove rewound tape, decrease the

internal diarneter by pushing the fastener as
shown in the above figure.
Cover lock
While the tape reader is being carried,

sure to keep the cover under this lock.
Lowering lock lever
I^lhen the tape reader is raised, the latch

mechanism secures the reader. As a result,
be
the tape reader is not lowered. The latch

is locked with this lock lever. Thus, the
latch is not released by raising the tape
reader with the grips.
I{hile the tape reader is kept under the
1ock, the lever remains horizontal. When
storing the tape reader, release the lock by
pressing this lever.
Then, raise the reader wlth the grips, and
release the latch.
After the latch is released, the tape reader
can be stored in the tape box.
After storage, secure the tape reader wlth
the cover lock.
-238-
Tabf e
No.
2.3.1
Descriptions for each part (4141
Functions
Name
ll
Cable storage block
The power and signal cables

The cable length is I.5 ro.
1')
Photoamplifler
Tape reader photoamplifier.
'I ?
Reader/puncher interface
adapter
200 VAC z 5 YDC power supply

puncher interface adapter pCB.
are rolled
up.
+ reader/
2) Tape reader handling

a) Preparations
(1) Remove the cover lock (9). Raise the tape reader with rhe grips (6)
until a click is heard. Then, lower the tape reader. At this t1me,
the tape reader is viewed and seeured. Check that the lowering lock
lever (10) is horizontal.
@ Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage box (Il).
Connect the signal cable and the poner cable to NC's reader/puncher
interface port and power source, respectively.
b) Tape loading
Set_ the Tape Reader swirch to rhe RELEASE position.
IP
(, Lift the Light Source Uni-t, and insert an Nc tape between the gap.
The tape must be posltioned as shown in the figure, when viewed
looking downward.
Feed hole
<\__ -----l
Direction of tape feeding
the tape until the top of the tape goes past the capstan roller.
!y1rcheck that the NC rape is correctry pbsllionei by the Tape Guide.
(q) Lower the Light
Source.
(6) Turn the switch to the AUTO position.
}x
\1-i Suspend the top and rear-end of the tape in the Tape Box.
c) Un1 oading the NC tape
(i)
Turn the switch to the RELEASE position.
X
(2) Lift the Light Source and remove
the tape.
/1\
Lower the Light Source.
(41
d) Sto rage
rr ) Store
(2) Press
the cables into the cable box (11).

the lowering lock lever (r0) dor,mward at both sldes.
(, Raise the taBe reader wlth the grips (6) (ratch
release operation).
Then, lower it.
(A
setfing the cover lock (g), carry the tape reader with the grlps
t!!"t
(6).
-239_
2.3.2
Note for handling tape reader
1) Precautions on tape loading

When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to
read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO
code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within rhe tape, from
which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC
tape should be set as shown in the figure below.
(
Ir
tt
|l.-...'----.-'...---* lhe program which should he read

|
Set the tape so that this section

is under the glass
window.
Actually, the end of block code (;) is

in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
CR
2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable

Don't disconnect or connect CNC +-) tape reader connection cable (signal
cable) without turning off the CNC and tape reader po!/er supply when using a
separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of
CNC controller nay be broken. Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply
before dj-sconnecting or connecting the connection cable, accordingly.
2.4
FANUC Cassette BllB2lF1
Data can be stored in afcassette with bubble memory (Bl/82).
be input from this

interface.
cassette co the NC. The interface
NC data can also

is reader/puncher
FANUC CASSETTE
CASSETTE ADAPTOR
NC connecting
connector
Fio^f
l-"-.
In the case FANUC cassette B1 or 82
See the FANUC CASSETTE Operatorrs Manual (B-53484E) for rhe FANUC CASSETTE operat ion.
See Chapter III-12 in this rnanual for data input/output operation from and to
FANUC cassette.
-240-
2.5 FANUC
PPR
An I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and prlnter in'one systep.
Interface is reader/puncher interface.
Printer
Reel unit
tape punch
Paper tape reader
Switch unit
FANUC PPR
Paper tape reader read speed

Paper tape punch punching speed
Printer characters per line

Printlng
See the
speed
FANUC
PPR
150 ch/sec or more

50 ch/sec
40 ch. (dot lnpact method)
1.2 line/sec
Operator?s Manual (B-54584E)
for the
FANUC PPR
Operatlon.
3.
POWER ON/OFF
1)
Turning on the power

q2 check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal.
lD Turn on the power according to the instruction manual of the machine tool
builder.
that some data is being displayed on the

a Check
q!) Check that the fan motor is rotating.
CRT
screen.
pressing the POWER ON k.y, do not touch any other CRT/l-DI panel
Ja -^+
ts^"^L
keys. Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed t uv
llvL
LvuLll
keys
are
them. Some
used for the maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.
NOTE: When
z) Tur ning off the power

ri\ Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's
panel
/;\ Check that all movable blocks of the NC machine tool is stoppi.ng.
(3)
If I/O devices such as the tape punch unit are connected to the NC rnav
chine too1, turn off the power to these devices.
e)
Contlnue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds.
>.<
(q
Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to
the machine.
)
j
I
-242-
,*
'd
t
5
't,
-:';tj
:.i:,i:;.t
4.
4.1
,t-
MANUAL OPERATION
Manual Reference Point Return
Ser the
MODE SELECT
swirch to Ehe
JOG
position.
MDI
@ Turn on the REFERENCE
POINT
switch.
RETURN
OFF
ON
REFERENCE POINT RETURN Switch
Jog Feed
to reference polnt dlrection by each axis
Keep this switch on until

th,e reference point is reached.
The tool Boves along the selected axis to the decelerated point
rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference point at the FL at the
speed.
A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse
moti.on.
-243-
@ fn" machine stops at the reference point lighring the
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLETION LED.
/A/n\/A\
Yl\/_Y
REFERENCE POINT RDTURN

COMPLETION LED
(Note
Once the
REFERENCE POINT RETURN COI.IPLETION LED light s at the

completion of reference point return, the tool does not move
unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN swirch is rurned off.
(Note 2) The REFERENCE P0rNT RETIIRN COMPLETToN LED is extinguished by
either of the following operations:
(i) Moving from the reference point.
(ii) Entering an emergency stop state.
(Note 3) For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to reEurn
the tool to reference point, refer to the manual issued by the
machine tool builder.
1)
4.2
Manual Continuous Feed
The
machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows.

Set the MODE SELECT sr^ritch to the JOG position.
MDI
o"'o
\'rEP/HANDLE
{ {N
uo,,
lS1,o"
@ S"t."t the axis ro be moved.
A\
A
A
V V V
+X
-X
/A
(())
+Z
+Y
_Z
/A
/A V
-Y
\r'
\\
))
The selected axis moves in its direction.
(Note i) rf 3 axes are selected simultaneously by three swi-tches, I axis

selected at first only moves because Manual operation is allowed
for one axis at a time.
(Note 2) when the mode is switched to the JOG mode while po\rer is oD, axis
will not move even 1f it has already been selected. Axis selection
must be performed again.
-244-
@ Select JoG feedrate
{^frtl\
.\ \t'Jy I,,uo
JOG
FEEDRATE
mm/min
Feedrate
Position on rotarv switch
Metric input
Inch input
mrn/min
inch/nin
)n
0. 08
1t
0. t2
5.0
n,
7.9
0.3
12.6
0.5
20
0.8
32
r+
t
?
F
3
1.2
50
2.0
79
3.0
10
t26
5.0
lt
200
8.0
L2
320
l2
t.3
500
20
t4
790
30
l5
L260
50
i
I
a
"{
:
i
t
*
$
(Note 1) The feedrate error (about +3%) affects on the feedrate in the table
above.
-245-
@ Rapid traverse
To execute the rapld traverse by manual mode, push RAPID

too.
TRAVERSE
button
.RAPID TRAVERSE
It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse

while this button is pushed.
(Note 1) Feedrate, time constant and rnethod of automatic acceleration/
deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in
prograrmed
command
4.3 STEP Feed
/;\
u, Set MODE SELECT switch ro
STEp
posirion.
MDI
STEP
feed is available for the machine without manual pulse generator.
Select the desired amount of
movement.
x1000
x10000
xr0
x100000
XT
Input system
l\|
Millimeter input
0.
Inch input
0.000I inch
xl0
001
rnm
0.01
xl00
run
0.001 inch
0.1
x1000
rnn
rnm
0.01 inch
0.
I inch
'i
-246-
:9
lt:
3
@ Select the axis
the switch is pressed once, the axis Eoves by the anount speclfied in
lts direction.
Then when the switch ls pressed after releasLng it once, the axis moves by
the specified amount.
Wtren
(Note 1) The feed rate is the same as the jog feed rate.
(Note 2) The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse over-
rlde is effecttwe during rapid traverse.
4.4 Manual Handle Feed
feed rate can be adjusted precisely by usLng the manual pulse generator.
ri)
s./ Set the MODE SELECT swltch to the IIANDLE position.
The
Awo
//
----l-t-
srep/HaNor-e
..*( @),""
O Select an axis.
i'
t
I
tt
F
-247-
O Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.
/A
v
a
clockwise rotation
counterclockrrise rotation
(The
* direction
direction
direction varies with the machine tool builder.)
Movernent amount
In some cases, thejperatorrs panel is provided with the following
switch. xl0 nultiplies the movement amount.by l0;x100 by 100.
selector
xl0
X100 (Note 2)
Handle Multiplier
Movement amount
Input
per degree
XI
xl0
x100
Metrlc input
0.00I nn
0.01 nn
0.1
Inch input
0.0001 inch
0.0O1 inch
0.01 inch
system
nsl
(Note 1) 9!6"1 amount may be usecl depending on machine tool.

(Note 2) rf the handre is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there ls a difference between the handle rotation amourrt and the machine Ioovement
distance.
(Note 3) Rotating the handle too fast when X100 is selected moves the
tool
or table at a rate as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden
stop gives the machine tool a shock.
-248-
4.5
Manual Absolute ON and OFF
Ihis switch selects whether the amount of manual movement is to be added to the
absolute value.
1) Wtren the switch is ON.
Yaxis
Xaxis
The coordinate values change by the amount

2) When
the switch is
of
manual operation.
OFF.
x2
x1
The coordinate values do not change.

(Exanple 1) Suppose the next tape comands
:
G0lc90xr00. 0Y100.
0F0 10;
x200.0YI50.0
a)
x300.0Y200.0
Wtren
block @ has been
Y-axls +100.0) at the
;
;
executed after nanual oDeration

end of movement of block O:
Manual
r2o.o,2oo.o)
opetation-
Qzo.o '250.0)
200.0 , 150.0 )
When manual absolute switch is ON

( 1 00.0 , 100.0 )
-249-
(X-axis +20.0'
b)
l.then the feed hold button is pressed while block

@ is being executed,
manual operation (y-axls +75.0) is performed, and che
cycle start button
is pressed and released.
( 200.0 ,225.0)
[{anual absolute switch ON
( 150.0 , 200.0 )
Manual operation
+
(
1ioo.o,2oo.o)
200.0 , r s0.0 )
( 1s0.0 , 125.0 )
c)
the feed hold button is pressed while block

is being execured,
manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) i_s performedr the @
iontrol unit is reset
with the RESET button, and block @ is read again.
I'ltren
(300.0,275.0)
( 200.0 ,
(l
sos ,200.0
225.0)
.-\ -e_
Manual absolute srvitch OFF

lr{anual absolute srvitch ON
Manual operation
(
( 1s0.0
( r 00.0 , 100.0
,I
200.0 , l 50.0 )
2s.0 )
-250-
300.0 , 200.0 )
Fd, axls
When
there is only one axis in the following
cornmand,
returns.
only the
-ri
conmanded
Nlc0 1c90x100. 0Yl 00.0F500;
N2 X200.0;
N3 Yl50.0;
?
I
I
Manual absolute switch ON
Manual absolute switch
OFF
e) When the following' commands are incremental conmands, operati-on is the

same as when the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set to OFF.
(Note 1) The followlng occurs when manual operation
compensatlon.
1)
ls performed during cutter
Tfre I{ANUAI ABSOLUTE swl-tch ts OFF and cutter compensatlon is being performed.
Afteilnanual operatlon ls performed with the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ln the
OFF position durLng cutter compensatlon, autonattc operation is restarted
then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed
if nanual novement had not been performed. The anount of separati;n eguals
to the amount that was performed nanually.
""'ot
oo"r"rrol
Cutter center path
-251-
" ,.t:il
.- l.-+T;i*
2) The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON and cutter compensation is being performed.

Operation of the machine upon return to automatlc operation after manuaL
intervention with the manual absolute switch in the 0N position during execution with an absolute command Program in the cutter compensation rnode will
be described. The vector, the remalning part of the current block and the
beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel the amount of manual movemenL performed is included in the calculations of the vectors of the two
blocks subsequent to the current block. This also applies when manual operat ion is performed during cornering.
a) During block executj-on
(Exarnple 1)
vaz
VO
,/l
t,
a\
VBl
-/1vc2
\--r6
,/,
Pp
\
\
Absolute command program Path
VBl'
Tool center path
-(\
\
\rn
)\
'\l'I '\
Tool center path before manual operation
(\
.'i-t'I
Manual operation
\/
PH'
-252-
that the feed hold was applied at. point Pr. whlle moving from p^ to
of prograrmed path P^ , Po, and P^ and that th6 tool was manually ntved
td PHr. The block end^polfrt Po moVes to the point Po'by the amount of
nanudl movement, and vectors V-i and V-^ at P- also mo'7e to V-,t e.nd V-^t.
Vectors V.' and V", between tff6 next tfso blo"cks Po - t,- anf,!,- - prrofre
discarded "alnd new "vbctors V^r t and V^"t (V..rt = Y ni in t'he examlle aSove)
are produced from the relaUton betwE'en Po*'- P""?nd Pn - Pn. However,
since Vor t is not a newly calculated vecflor, co"rrect olfset "ls not performed trf block Pr' - PC. 0ffset is correctly performed after PC.
Assume
i
Po
t'
(Example 2)
l'B2
lrBl
\..
t''cz
\,-'
t"\
--\
vB2'..t
/\\
/\
vBl
i.\.Y
r. _==\41
\
,,.
\YB\
*
(r
'.
/,
Y.-.--
Absolute command program path
\\\\\
tt\
a\
\\
\\
\
_t
Tool
\
)
center puth t
l'A2
ru\,i
VAI
\
Manual operation
t.
l/rt
V,aZ'
Pn'
V.A.
F
E.
ft
-253-
l'
This is an example when manual operation is performed during cutter compensation cornering. VAZt, VBlr' and Vg2t are vectors moved in parallel
wlth V62' VBl and Vg2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors
are calculated from VCt and YCZ. Then correct cutter compensation is
performed for the blocks following Pc.
b) Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated
single block stop.
l'B2
by
VCl
VBl
Manual
operation
Vn
t'
,/
\/"
vst'
/4
Absolute command program path
Tool center path
vectors Vg1 and vg2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation
Subsequent processing is the same as case a) described above.
An MDI operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation.
The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
-254-
5.
AUTOMATIC OPEBATION
5.1
Operation Mode
5.1.1 Memory operation
Load the program to the memory (III-9)

Select the program to be operated
Set the node selector to the AUTO posltion
MDI
Awo'/--r---.-\
,o,,(
@ Press the cycle start button.
srpp/rHNor_s
),""
Cycle start tamp lights
/A
@
Cycle start
hltren
pressed, automatic operat.ion beglns and the cycle start larnp lights.
5.1.2 MDI operation

One command block can
be entered frour the CRT/UDI panel- for execution.
1) For example, X10.5 Y200.5;

a) Set the mode select switch to
ouro-
MDI mod.e.
/--]\
srEp/HANDLE
/ ,4)t \-
uo,,\
b)
Push rhe l-pRocRAlt
il\
\tt"y
^t
I burton.
-255-
1,o"
c)
Push PAGE button
to display a screen with llDr at the top left.

PROGRFT'I
0'rDI )
(|'{]DA_)
|W
tr
GAR
G1? P
G96 A
G94 H
G21 N
GzlAS
BI9
GBA
GE
?
Are.
I'IDI
d) p""h
nl, H, H, E'"0 E
push tt'tFEFl
keys
in this order.
button. The dara, xlO. 5 , is inpur and displayed.

lrf you are aware of an error in _the keyed-in number before pushing the
fTNryil buttonr push the [CAil but,ion and key in rhe correcr number
again. If notice an error after ttre I fnFUfl button is pushed, key in rhe
data again from the beginnins.
rTr rtr Fl -l-0-l "[ I . t-s-r kevs in this order.
f) e""nl i
s
s
e)
I' L.l'
p)
o/
l'
I'
I
1_3l'"dl ; I
rnstr l-rllFuT-l key. The dara, y200.5 is input and displayed.
If you pushed $tong number keys, correct the operation following the
instruction described above.
I
PRSRtr'1
0,'rDI)
X
Y
(F0m_)
LS.WB
M.ffi
TW
GMR
GT? P
G96 e
GgI
E1
t'l
G4A S
G49 T
B8
9=
Rm.
I{D I
h) p"sn l-sranr-l burton.

Push the cycle start button on the machine operator's panel (depending
the machine tool).
-256-
on
2) canceling Y200.5 of XI0.5 Y200.5; before pressing tn" I-SfAnfl button (cycle
D
+L4r
^' F
L
r rlVrr/
''
UUL
^- \
L.
u",
a)' Push the lTl
tY
and the [El,.N]

buttons in this order.
"r,a l-rllpJTl
h) Prrsh the I S1'ART I brriton or the evcl e sf erf button on the machine opeI
rator t s pane1.
(Note) Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data again.
5.1.3 MDI operation-B
Wlth the MDI operati.on - B specification, it is possible to prepare a program

and execute it similarly to usual registration program, in che MDI mode.
l) Program preparation
If the I'IDI program screen is selected, display of the format below is
PROGRAM
(}DI)
00010
shown.
N0010
00000
(MODAL)
c00
c17
F
R
c90
G2t
G94 c40
1000 P
Q
G49
c80
c98
G67
H
M03
G54
G64
5300
T0i01
ADRS
I'IDI
CURRNT
Tho nrnor'- No. t'00000tt is automatically inserted. Thereafter, prepare the

program to be executed by operation similar to normal program editing.
Insertion, modification, deletion of word

star! search, etc.
Since a prepared program is noE deleted by a reset operationr perform the
operation of Note 3) to delete the program.
Word search, address searchr program
Note 1) Operation on the regi-stered program is not possible.

(Registration, deletion, punch, comparison, etc.)
Note 2) The length of a program which can be prepared is limited to one page of
a CRT screen.
In the above case' the longest program is 6 lines with specification of
the Parameter (No. 0028 MMDL), if the mode is switched to Ehar of no
modal information display, up to t0 lines of program can be prepared.
If the number of lines of program exceeds the limir, Z(ER) will
disappear and insertion and modification operation will
become
impossible.
Note 3) To erase all the prepared program, operate O "DELETE".
L)
2) Program execution
(mr1
00000 c00 xr00.0
I'103 i
c01
2L20.0 F500;
P9010 ;
M98
20.0 ;
c00
00010 N00r0
PROGRAM
Y200.0;
o/
(I'IODAL)
GOO G9O GzT

c17
G94 G40
F
1000 P
G49
c80
G9B
G67
H
M03
G54
G64
s300
r0r01
ADRS
MDI
CURRNT
Set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermedi.ate point
is possible. )
Push "START" key or Cycle Start button on the operatorrs panel. By tiris
action, the prepared program will start. When the program end (M02, M30) or
ER(%) is executed, the prepared prograrn will be automatically erased and the
operation will endr.
By command of M99, return to the head of the prepared program is performed.
3) Cautions
a) Programs registered in the program tnemory can be called as subprogram. In
thi-s case, the nest of subprogram is up to 2-loops combined with automatic
operation (AUTO) program. (If a custom macro option is provided, up to
4-loops combined is possible.)
b) If the custom macro option is provided, even in the MDI mode, custom macro
program preparation and execution is possible.
However, macro call is not possible.
c) A program to be prepared in the MDI mode uses program memory vacant area.
If there is no vacancy in the program memory, program preparation in the
MDI mode is not possible.
d) Programs prepared in the MDI urode will be erased in the following cases:
i) In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed.
ii) In AUTO mode, if memory operation is perforned.
iii) In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed.
iv) Background editing is performed.
e) The editing operation during the stop of MDI operation will start from
Ehe cursor position which makes start, but not from the current cursor
Dosltion.
-258-
d
rif
5.2
i
r)
Starting Automatic OPeration

I',1emo
5.3
ry operation
Select AUTO mode.
Select execution program.
Press cycle start button on the machine operatorts
pane1.
Executing Automatic Operation
Afr er automatic operation is started, the following are executed:

A one-block command is read from the specified program.
(2) The block command is decoded.
at The command execution is started.
The command in the next block is read.
('>< Buffering is executed. That is, the cornmand is decoded to allow irnmediate
e
6
executi-on.
@ Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the nexE

block can be started. This is because buffering has been executed.
I{ereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the st.eps @ to
5.4
a;\
\v'
Stopping Automatic OPeration
There are two means to stop the automatic operaLion. One is to command a stop
command in a program where the exeeution is to be stopped (See 5.4.1 - 5.4.3)
and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate
button on the operator's panel (See 5.4.4 and, 5.4.5).
5.4.1
Program stop (M00)
Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the
program is stopped, all exlst.ing modal information remains unchanged as in
single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted
by specifying an
|
NC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
5.4.2 Optionat stop (M01)
Similarly to M00, cycle operat,ion is stopped af ter a block containing I"10 1 is

executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the
machine operatorts panel is set to 0N.
5.4.3
Program end (M02, M30)
l) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory.
2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the
machine tool builder.)
3) OnIy M30
The control is rewound to Ehe start of the program in memory operation.
(This differs with the machine tool builder. Some machines indicate rewind
with M02.)
-259&,
5.4.4 Feed hold

When Feed Hold
button on the operatorrs panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time.
I Press the feed hold button.
Fecd hold lamp lighrs
Ileed hold button
I{hen pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cyc.le start lamp turns off.
Turns off
t()l
Cycle start
At
i)
ij-)
iii)
5.4.5
this tine,
tF
Feeding stops if the tool is moving.

Dwell execut.ion stops, if executing.
l'1, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be rnade to the reseE
state by using RESET key on the CRT/IDI panel or e*ternal reset signal.
5.5
'i
!iat
il
l!
fi
Program Re-start
This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be re-started when a tool is

'broken down or when it is desired to re-start machining operation after a day
off, and re-starts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used
as a high-speed tape check function.
I) When a tool is damaged (P tYPe):
a) Press "Feed Hold" to escape the too1, and replace it with a new one.
I'iodify the offset amount if it varies.
b) Turn the program re-start switch on the machine operation panel 0N.
c) Press t'PRGRI'I" to display the present program.
d) Find -the program head. Press "RESET".
,
During memory bperation, select ttAUTOtt mode, and press o t.
e) Press P "Sequence No." +, and search t.he block with Sequence No. to be
re-starEed. When the same sequence No. appears many times, for examplet
when the subprogram is accessed several times in searching Sequence No. in
the subprogram, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in
upper 4 digits, and specify Sequence No. in lower 4 digits as illustrated
below.
P.r
2 3 4 0 r 2
Frequency Sequence
No.
-260-
When the block is the first
time, the upper 4 digits can be onitted.

Furtherr the leading zero can be ornitted except Sequence No. when the
frequency is specified.
f) After completion of block search, the CRT screen is changed to the progran
re-start screen.
GA IM1B
RESTffiT
6tL @ gls
cDESTtMTIfi) I'fls a1a
@r9 gv 6 w u4
x L@.m
65wgnwffi
Y Ln.w
d7? @. w2 @. gLs
z L@.@
A&.444 UA 955 ...
A
A.W
(DlSTFr.tCE TO @) ..r r.. r..
2 x L@.w
3 Y Lg3.@L r gLgL @.
s w
4Z
e,@.
8...."
A.@
1A
FR@Ffi
t**''-l t""*".l I '*'-l
l"**l
**l
(DESTINATION) shows the position where the machining operation is re-started.

(DISTANCE T0 G0) shows the distance between the current tool position and the
machining re-start posi-tion. The figure at the left side of the axis name
shows the order (parameter settj-ng) described later when the tool moves to
the re-start posit.iotr.
M..... Shows M-code commanded recently 35 tirnes in the past.
Shows M-code commanded recently 2 tiures in the past.
T.....
S ..... Shows S-code command in the last.
B' . . . . . Shows B-code command in the 1ast.
Display the most previously commanded code in the head. Each code is cleared
with the program re-start command and the cycle stalt command in reset condi-
tions.
g) Turn the program re-start switch OFF.
At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 c0)
flickers.
h) Check the screen, and if M, S, T or B code should be output, select the
MDI rnode, and output M, S, T or B code from MDI. Each code in this case
is not displayed on the program re-start screen.
During
memory operationr select "AUTO" mode, and check that the distance
i)
of (DISTANCE T0 GO) is correct, and that the tool does not hit against the
work and others. If it is about to collide with an obstacle, move the
tool manually to the location where it does not collide, then press '?Cyc1e
Start" button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start
position in the dry run mode by one axis in the order set to the parameters (No. 0124 to OI27), thus re-starting machi.ning operation in succes-
2)
sion.
re-starting machining operation after the following cases (Q type)

polrer is turned OFF once
the emergency stop buEton is depressed once
the coordinate system is changed after auEomatic operatj-on is previously stopped
For example; I When G92 was set from MDI
2 When the coordinate system was shifted
3 When the automatic coordinate sysEem was set by the reference point return
4 When the coordinate system was nodified by "RESET".
When
i)
ii)
iii)
When
When
When
/h
a)
When power
is turned 0N or emergency stop is released, perform all necessary operati-ons at that time, including the reference point return. (See
Notes )
b) Move the tool manually to the program starting point (machining start
point), and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the same conditions as at the machining start.
c) lf necessary, set and modify the offset amount.
d) Turn the program re-start SW on the machine operation panel ON.
e) Press "PRGRM" to display the program.
hhen it is not the specified one, search the specified program.
f ) Find the program head. Press t'RESETtt. Du::ing memory operation, select
t'AUTOtt mode, and press o t.
C) Press Q t'Sequence No.t' +, and search a block with Sequence No. to be
re-started. When the same sequence No. appears many times, specify the
frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify
Sequency No. in lower 4 digits.
h) Upon completion of block searching, the display on the CRT screen is
+^
^L^'.^^l
cnangeo
Eo tne program re-start screen.
i) Turn the program re-start switch OFF.
At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 G0)
blinks.
j) Check the screen, and select the MDI mode if there are M, S, T or B codes
to be specified, and output M, S, T, or B codes from MDI. In this case,
each code is not displayed on the program re-start screen.
k) During memory operation, return the operation mode to ttAUTO" mode, check
that the distance (DISTANCE TO GO) i-s correct, and thar the tool does not
Ljr
rrI L d6qrrlD
'^''r-^t a fork and others when moving to the machining re-start position. If it is likely to hit against an obstacle, move the tool manually
to the position where it does not collide, then press the cycle start
button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position
in the dry run mode by one axj-s in the order preset to the parameters (No.
0124 to 0127).
(Note l) Under the following conditions, the program re-starting of P type is
not executed.
i) l{hen no autornatic operation is performed after power ON.
ii) When no automatic operation is performed after releasing the
iii)
emergency stop.
Lhen no automatic operation is performed after the coordinate
system is set, modified or shifted (the external work zero point
offset amount is changed).

P/S alarm (No. 9l) for i), ii) above or after releasing P/S alarm
(No. 94 ro 97)
P/S alarm (No. 94) irtleen the coordinate system is set
P/S alarm (No. 95) When the coordinate system is shifted
P/S alarm (I{o. 96) When the coordinate system is changed
The blocks to which the tool can be correctly returned by the P
type program startup are those for which coordinate system is set
and modified just before the machining operation is interrupted.
(Note 2) When the tool moves to the machining restart position by one axis with
type P or Q,lt is possible to stop the tool each at a single block
,after completion of single axis operation. However, it is imposiible
to intervene IDI there.
l'Ianua1 operation is possible there, but the already returned axis does
nof move by the returning operation.
(Nntp
?'\
-t , T)rrrinr
----..g searching operation, the tool will not return to a correct
machining re-start position if the conditions of input signal and
offset amount, etc. are made idential to those for machining. Even
with the single block switch 0N, searching operation is continued.
-262-
{
*
Il
*.
(Note
4)
(Noce 5)
(Note 6)
(Note
7)
"Feed Hold" is applied during searching or when re-setting operation is performed during searching or after searching, re-start Ehe
program re-start operation frorn the beginning
However, after search completion, resetting operation in the MDI node
is according to the parameter No. 045: CLER.
When the program re-start SI^l is 0N, the cycle start is ignored.
Perform manual operation with "Manual Absolutett ON before and after
the machining.
As a rule, the t.oo1 cannot be returned to a correct posit |on under the
following conditions.
i) When the tool is operated manually with "Manual Absolute" OFF.
ii) when the tool is operared wich the machine ro6t and Z-axis
Lrrhen
ignored.
(Note 8)
(Note 9)
(Note
10)
iii) When the mirror image is used.

iv) When the coordinate system is noE set at the beginning of a
program in the incremental mode.
v) I,rhen manual operation is performed in the course of axis movement for returni-ng operati-on.
Vi) When the machine lock is released after directing the program
re-start under machine lock conditions.
vii) When the program re-start is commanded for a block between the
block for skip cutting and subsequent. absolute command b1ock.
viii) When the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted after
completion of searching operation.
However, for (3) above, resetting operation is possible in P type for
the ON-OFF switched blocks. At this time, maintain the mirror image
signal in the same conditions as during inEerruption. rn any case, it
should be noted that no alarm is produced.
When no specified block is found, P/S alarro (No. 60) occurs.
When a move conmand is given with MDI before axis movement afcer completion of seareh operation, P/S alarn (No. 99) is produced.
"RSTR" flashes at the lowermosE part of the CRT. display screen until
Ehe last axi-s completes returning after the program re-starE is commanded.
(Note I l) When the 4th axis is a rotary axis, the reference point return direction is rr-rr, and G28, G30 or subsequent incremental couunand is given
just before a block for which re-start is commanded, the absolute
position of 4th axis may deviate 360 degrees.
(Note l2) When an absolute pulse coder is provided, no operation for reference
poi-nt return is requi-red when poTrer is turned ON or emergency stop is
released.
5.6 Manual Handle Interruption

The movement by manual operation of handle can be done by overlapping it wiEh
the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operat.ion mode.
5.6.1 Handle interrupt oPeration
The handle interrupti-on can be done by rotating the manual pulse generator under
the following conditions.

l) Mode
Other than HANDLE and TEACH IN HANDLE mode. (Norrnal handle feed is done in
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode, if the manual pulse generator is effective. )
2) Operating condition
Operating conditions other than machine lock and interlock.
3) Handle interrupt axis selection signal
Llhen Ehe handle interrupt axis selection signal (HIX, Y, Z) is turned on in
the axis to which the handle incerrupc is attempEed. (The FANUC PMC is required for inputting this signat.)
-263-
$
a
x
5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt

l) Move amount
The move amount by handle Interrupt is determined by the manual Pulse

generator scale and the handle feed magnification (xl, xl0, x100). Since the
interrupted move 1s not accelerated/decelerated, xl00 magnification is not
selectable.
The move amount per scale at xl magnification is 0.001 nur (mrn output) or
0.0001 inch (inch output).
(Note) This move amount is 0.001 mrTr (nm input) or 0.0001 inch (inch input) in
t:
manual handle feed.
This move amount is overlapped with the move amount by the automatic operation in the automatic operatj-on mode.
2) Relation with various signals
The following table indicates the relation between various sienals and the
movement by handle interrupt.
Relation
u r6.rdr
l-fachine lock
Machi-ne tool does

turns on.
Interlock
Machine tool does not move when this sienal
not
move when
this sisnal
turns on.
Mirror
3)
image
Interrupt functions on the plus direction by

plus direction command, even if this signal
turns on.
Relation with various posirion display

The following table shows the relation between various position disolav data
and the movenent by handle interruDt.
Display
Relation
Absolute coordinate value
Interrupt pulses are not added.
Relative coordinate value
Interrupt pulses are not
Maehine coordinate value
Interrlrpt pulses are added.
added.
4) Display of move amount by handle lnterrupt

If the handle interrupt function is provided, one page of position display
screen is added, and the move amount by the handle interrupt is displaved on
*t^
l, +L -^-^
LrlE aLrI
PdEE.
The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently on the handle interrupt move anount display page.
a) Handle interrupt move amount in i-nput unit systeur (rNpur uNrr)
b) Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system (OUTpUT UNIT)
c) Position in relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
{
.r.
-264-
:5i
E
5
?
d) Residual move amount
(DISTANCE TO GO)
HANDLE INTERRUPTION
02000 N0150
(INPUT UNIT)
(OUTPUT IJNIT)
x 25.400
Y
0.000
z -10.000
(DISTANCE TO GO)
x
5.9706
Y -13.4680
z
0.0000
x r.0000
Y 0.0000
z -0.3937
(RELATIVE)
x 10.2468
Y -5.9713
z 2.3358
BUF AUTO
The handle interrupt move amount ls cleared r"rhen the low speed reference
point return ends every axis.
5.6.3
High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis
l[hen the lnput unit and output unit are different from each other, the machlne
coordinate value (MACHINE) does not always become 0 when the high-speed
reference point return (G28) i-s executed on the axis in which the handle
interrupt move amount is not 0. However, the reference polnt return end signal
is output even ln such a case. (The devtation of the nachine coordinate value
is maximum 2 pulses when the high-speed reference point return ends.)
If the handle interrupt ls done during the reference polnt return, lt is possible that the reference point return end signal ls output, even if the nachine
tool does not return to the correct reference point yet.
-265-
6.
TEST OPERATION
6.1
AllAxes Machine Lock
the switch is set to the MACHINE LOCK position, move conmand pulses are
suppressed. Consequently, the position dlsplay is updated as specified by the
program, but the tool does not move.
This function is used to check a program.
When
OFF
DISPLAY LOCK
MACHINE LOCK
Display Iock/machine lock switch
(Note 1) When a G27, G28 or G30 command ls specified, the tool does not go to
the reference point and the REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED does
noE go on.
(Note 2) The M, S, T and 2nd auxl-liary function (B) are executed.
6.2
Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
the switch is set to 0N position, the axis does not move during manual/
automatlc operation.,r
Position display updat.es as if the axis were moving.
When
SINGLE BLOCK
Machine lock on each axis (Z-axis)
6.3 Auxiliary Function
Lock
the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operatorts
panel, M, S, T and B function operations are locked.
This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch.
(Note) M00, Mol, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed, even if the switch is on.
When
-266-
6.4
Feedrate Override
With this dlal, it ls posslble to overri-de the feedrate designatdd by the program.
Feed Rate Override dial
Feed Rate Override dial
An override of 0 to l50Z can be applied.

(Note 1) In some machines, thi.s switch is common to the jog feedrate switch.
6.5
Rapid Traverse Override
The rapid traverse override switch of lO0"A, 502, 25il and, Fo is provided. When
the rapid traverse rate is 10 n/min and this dial ls set to 50y", actual rate
becomes 5 n/nin, t'Fo" is a constant value specified by the mnchine tool_ builder.
Thls function is available in the following movements.

t) Rapid traverse by G00
2) Rapid traverse durlng canned cycle.
3) Rapld traverse in G27 and G28.
4) Manual rapld traverse.
5) Rapid traverse in manual reference point return.
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
6.6
Dry Run
If thls sv/irch is set to ON in the Cycle Operatlon, the feed rate specified
the progran is ignored and becomes as follows:
by
OFF
DRY RUN switch
Rapid traverse burton
Prograu
Conrmand
ON/Opf'
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse button
0N
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse button
OFF
JOG
(Note
l) This
RDRN
feed rare (Note
Cuttlng feed
I'Iax.
1)
JOG
JOG
feed rate
feed rate
speed can be ser to the rapid traverse rate by settlng paraneter

No. 0001.
-267-
6.7 Single Block

This function stops the machine after executing one block of the program.
t) Set the single block switch to ON.
OFF
Single block
block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If

the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the
execution is stopped again.
One
(Note 1) For G28 and G30, the single block function is effective at an lntermediate point
(Note 2) I! a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of O,
@, and (0 shown below. When rhe single block function is
eFfective a-points O or @, the feed hold lamp lights.
F-------
t!)
+?
(D
G)l
,A
I'
- .-
/A
Rapid traverse
.'-..-..-..-------.-...* Feed
(Note 3) Single block stop is not performed in blocks conraining M98P_; M99;
and G65. However, single block stop is even perforrned in a block
with M9BP or M99 command, if the block contains an address other
than O, Nir P.
-268-
7.
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.1 Emergency Stop
If
you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operatorts panel, the rnaghins
stops in a movement.
movement
EMERGENCY STOP
This button ls locked when pressed. Although it varles wlth the machlne tool
builder, the button can usuaily be unlocked b-y twisting Lt.
(Note 1) EI"IERGENCY sroP interrupts the current to the motor.
(Note 2) Causes cjf trouble must be removed before the button ls released.
7.2 Overtavel
the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the nachine tool linit
switch' or when lt enters , the stored stroke linit inhlbltion area spectfled by
the setting data or the program, an OVER TRAVEL ls dl.splayed and the tool slows
down and stoPs. In this case, press the reset button to reset the alarrn after
moving the tool to the 'safety directlon by manual operation. For detalls on
operation, refer to the operatorfs manual of the machine tool bullder.
When
-269-
8. WHEN ALARM 4RlsEs*

Check the following items i-f normal operation cannot be done.
1) h''hen error code is displayed on the CRT
If an error code is displayed, refer to APPENDIX 9 "List of Error Codes" to

check the cause of the error. If the error number ranges frorn 000 t'o 128,
the error is related to the program or setEing data. Correct the program or
the setting data.
2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT
There are cases in which the system is executing some process and it seems
like the machine operation is stopping. Refer to Maintenance Volume,
Section 2.4 rrCNC slatus display".
3) Refer to Maintenance Volume, Chapter 2 "Troubleshootingrr.
-2lo-
$ ttt.tt '
9.
PART PROGRAM STORAGE
9.1 Preparation
&
EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation
The following preparatlon is necessary for the part program storage and edltlng
operation.
l) Set the reader/puncher.
2) Set the data on reader/puncher. (See il.3)
3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY).
Some system doesntt provide this key.
4) Set the operation mode to EDIT rnode.
5) Press the PROGRAM key and display the program.
g.2
Registering Program
to Memory
R\
f\U)
Registering with MDI key

\
l) Select EDIT mode.
\
2) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
3) Key in address 0.
4) Key in the prograrn No.
5) Push the [-ttqsRT I key.
With the above procedure, the program No. is registered to the memory. Thereafter, key in respective words of the program and press the [fnS-nT I key to
register them.
9.2.1
9.2.2 Registering from NC tape

1) Se1ect EDIT or AUTO uode.
2) Set the NC tape on the tape reader.

3) Push the PRGRM button.
4) lJhen there is no program No. on the NC tape or when the program No. is to be
changed, input a program No. (This is unnecessary if there is a program No.
on the tape and lt is not to be changed.)
i) Key in address 0.
ii) Key ln the program No.
5) Push l-Nut I key.
9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory
(B)
0222
M30;
n?1?1
Mn?.
rrv4,
Proceed in the same \ray as registerlng the NC tape to the memory.

Data is read up to ER, and many programs are registered.
Program No. is set as follows:
l) When the program No. is not set from MDI.
a) The value of O (N of the first block when there is no O) ls set as the
program No.
b) When a program having no 0 nor N appears on the NC tape, a value obtained
by adding I to the previous program No. is set as the program No.
2) When the program No. is set from MDI before the NC tape is registered.
The value of 0 on the tape is ignored, and the set value ls set as the program No. The subsequent program Nos. are set by sequentially adding l.
27r
9.4 Program
trrlhen
Number Search
there are
many programs
in the memoryr one of them can be searched.

or97
.-
Program No.
is searched.
1) Method t
a) Select EDIT or AUTO node.
b) Push the PRGRIi button.
c) X.ey in address 0.
d) Key in the program No. to be searched.
CURSOR
. r---'button.
e)' Push
l+l
f) When searching is over, the program No.searctred is indicated at the right
top of the CRT screen.
2) Method 2
a) Select EDIT or AUTO mode.
b) Push the PRGRM button.
c) Key in address O.
CURSOR
button. If it is kept pushed in the EDIT mode, the regi-stered

programs dre disglayed sequentially.
(Note) After displaying all program Nos. registered, the display returns to the
first one.
3) l,Iethod 3
a) Select AUTO inode.
b) Reset the machi-ne.
c) Set the signal for selecting the program No. on the machine si-de at 01 to
15. (For details, see the instruction manual of the machine tool
builder. )
d) Push the cycle start button.
The program No. (0001 to 0015) correspondlng to the signal on the machine
side is searched, and automatic operation starts.
(Note 1) The program No. is not searched when the signal on the machine side is
d)
Push
1fr"
lnnl
(Note 2) Alarm No. 59 is indicated if the program corresponding to the signal
the rnachine side is not registered in the memory.

(Note 3) In the reset condition, the cycle operation larnp is off.
instructi-on manual of the machine tool builder.)
on
(See the
zAr
9.5 Deleting a Program f \1 \
\v/
To delete a prolram registered in memory.
t) Set the mode select swltch to EDIT.

3) Key in the program number and push the I
keyed in number will be deleted.
272
DELET
I button.
The program with the
9.6
(9)
Deleting All Programs
all programs registered in memory.

l) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
To delete
2) Press the PRGRM button.

3) Kev in address O.
a) xey in I:1, lTl, [-tl, l-tl,
.gi
t'1
and
Fl
and push
the t DELEr 1 button.
;Punching a Program
To punch out a regi-stered program in the memory

l) Make the Eape punch unit ready.
2) Set the punch code by setting parameter
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Set the mode select switch to EDIT.

Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
Key in O.
Key in the program number.
button, and the program with the keyed number will
Push the l-ffiTl

punched out.
ER
Program
Q)t
be
ER
t (z)
3 feet of feed holes
(Note 1) The space code for the TV check is automatically punched.

(Note 2) Trro CRs are punched after LF in ISO code.
LF
CR
CR
3) If the feed of 3 feet is too 1ong, push the TeAil button to stop
ing feed holes nidway.
(Note 4) pushing the I RESETI iutton stops punching.
(Note
9.8 Punching All Programs

To punch out all the registered programs in the memory.
l) Make the tape punch unit ready.
2) Set the push code by setting parameter.
3) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.

4) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
5) Key in the address 0.
27_1
punch-
6) Key in
Fl, [-tl, l-e l, l-tl, l-tl,
and l-srARr
lbutton
I foot of
spaces
Program
- -
Program
Fp.
/o/\
\/o)
rogram
rogram
I foot of spaces
(Note) The order of punehed programs is irregular.
9.9
Sequence Number Search
Sequence Number Search finds a sequence number halfway in a program and it is

usually used to start or restart the program at the block of that sequence
number. A block or blocks skipped during the search does not influence the NC;
the coordinate values, M, S, T or G code, etc. in skipped blocks do not change
the coordlnate values and nodal values of the NC. So specify necessary M, S, T
or G code, coordinate system setting, etc., in the first block at which the
program is to be star$ed or restarted with the Sequence Number Search. The
block searched for by sequence number search is usually at a break point in
Ehe processlng. If it is desired to search and start a block during process,
examine the condition of the nachine tool and NC and specify M, S, T and G code,
coordinate system setting, etc. from the MDI as required.
ol1
11
02222 . ,. N4030
...
Object sequence
number
Searched from its

beginning (only
within the program)
Selected
program
number
1\
Sequence number search for a program in

a) Set the mode select srvirch to AUTO.
b) Push PRGR-II button.
274
menory
03333 ....
I,II'
\/")
c) Select the program number to which the sequence number to be searched for
belongs.
Program selected
Range searched
to d) when the program contalns the sequence number; Otherwise,

execute Program Number Search to select a program number to whlch the
Proceed
sequence number belongs.
d) Key in N.
e) Key 1n the sequence number to be searched for.
. CURSOR .button.
f) Push the
61
lYl
g) The sequence number searched will be displayed top right on the
(Note
the search is completed.
CRT when
Coordinate values and modal data are not altered during a search.
Specify these data from the MDI after the search ends as requlred.
(Note 2) During a search, the following items are checked.
o Optional block Sktp
' P/S Alarm Check (Alarur No. 003 to 010)
(Note 3) M98Pxx:o<(subprogram call) is not executed during a search. Searching
for a sequence number within a subprogram called frou a currently
selected program in AUTO mode generates alano No. 060.
1)
Subprograu
01234
05678
M98 P5678
N8888
In the above example, searchlng for N8888 generates an alarm.

9.10
Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape
Turn on the protect k"y, execute the same operation as the registration of NC
taPe lnto memory, and the reglstered progran and NC tape will be co1lated.
1) Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO).
2) Lock the protect key.
3) Load the program tape to be collated into the t.ape reader.
4) Push PRGRM button to display the program directory screen.
5) Push fINPUfl burron.
6) When the tape contalns several programs, collation ls performed rrntil ER (7")
is encountered.
275
(Note I) A rnismatch during collation generates rhe alarm (p/s No. 79).
(Note 2) If'the above operation is executed wi th the protect key released, the
program will be registered into the memoryi the prograrn will not be
co 1lated.
:.'
'1
j
+
:
9.11
Insertion, Changing and Deleting the Word
,.1
This function is used to modify a program in memory.

I) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
2) Push the pRGRM key.
3) Select a program. When it has been selected, proceed to (a); otherwise,
perform a Program Number Search.
4) Search for the hrord to be modified. A scan or a word search can be used.
5) Modify, i-nsert, or delete the word.
(Note 1) Words and editing unit
A word includes an address and the number following it.
But in user
macros, the concept of a word is not clear. Consequently, "editing
unit" is used. This is the object of modification and deletion in one
operation. One scan causes the cursor to indicate the beginning of the
editing unit. In insertion, data is inserted after the editing unlt.
Definition of editing unit
I) From one address to the next address exclusive.
2) The address is an alphabetic charaeter, IF, WI{ILE, GOTO, END DO, =,
or; (EOB).
According to this definition, a word is also one editing unit. The
word referred to in the following explanation on editing should
strictly dle termed the editing unit.
(Note 2) It is not allowable to conEinue a program again after changing,
inserting, or deleti-ng data to the program while temporari.ly suspending
the machi-ning by single block stop, feed ho1e, etc. during the execution of the program, otherr,rise the program is not always executed
correctly as specified by the program data being displayed on CRT after
the continuance of rnachining.
If it is desired to change memory data by parE program editing, change
them under the reset condition, or perform a reset operation after
editing without fail, before executing the program.
F
.*
?:
{.L
11
*aE
.
*
:
t
9.11.1 Word search

1) Word scan
CURSOR
a)\ N
rusn tnef+
I
Nl 234X1
'tcey
3 S I 2 ; N5 67 8M03
00 . Ozl250
tr TTEE E
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor
displayed below the address character of a selected word.
It:
276
.
o) vusn cne
CURSOR
I-T_l
burron
N1234X100
. 0z L250;
S5
6;
N56 7BM0
E tilEE
'-1-
=-J
The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; trrie cursor is displayed below the address character of a selected word.
(Example)
Scanned here.
PRGRFT4
CEEffi t
lllz34 X1n.6 ZIm
s12 ;
FE6?t I'[l3 ;
ffiB N123
t
YPP. t
r--l
c/
Keep pusnlng cne
CURSOR
.
or the
EDIT
CURSOR
r-;t
key to make a continuous search.

[Fl
. PAGE key ro display the following page
d) Push the|-+_l
and search the first
of word the page.

PAGE
e)-lf'Push the r:*l
key to display the preceding page and search the first
word of that page
f)
Keep pushing
.n" ffi
tvtt+
o. ffi
key ro display one page afrer anorher.
-217 -
2)
Word search
A specified word is searched for from the current position in the
forward
direct ion.
. 0ZI
Nl 234Xi00
Currently searched
word (word indicated
by the cursor)
250 ; S I 2 ;N5 67 8M03
SI2 to be searched for

Search dlrectlon
a) Kev in address S.
. f-t]
b) Key an I H
I ano I F l.
.l ..
(Note i) Keying in only SI does not execute a search for Sl2.
(Note 2) Keying in 59 does not execute a search for S09. Key in S09 to search
for S09. "0" of S09 cannot be omitted.
CURSOR 1---- -!n\
k"y starts the search. The cursor is displayed
..." -il"
! uolrrrr6 rhv,/ Prrchino
below S in SL2 at the end of the searctr.
Til
I
rf pushing the PlslR 1"r, the search starts

3)
Search
for
backward.
addresses only
A specified address is searched for from the current position in the forward
direction.
N1234XI 00. Oz 1250; s t 2; N567I M03

Current searched
-word (word indicated by the
cursor)
M03
to
be searched
for
in address M.
CPT9 key starts the search. The cursor is displayed below
Pushing
-l+l1ir"
M aE the end of the search.
. CURSOR key, the search starts backward.
If pushing the
;:-1"
a) Key
4) Returning the cursor to the head of a program

O
I 1 0'0
0 0 0 I X L 2 . 3 4 3 Z I 5 . 6 7.; c 0 I X I 2
Head of
program
5;
Current searched
word (word l-ndIcated by the
cursor
*
i
(r
-218-
::
..{
't
a)
Merhod I
Press th" I ngSET I key when the EDIT mode is selected and E.he program
screen is selected. f,he program will be displayed from its head after
completing the heading.
b) Method 2
c)
Execute a Program Number Seareh.

Method 3
Set the mode select s\^rirch ro
a Push
d Key the0. PRGRM keY.
()
in
Push the
g.11.2 lnserting r*rorU
AUTO
or
EDIT.
u"r.
ffi*
( I )
\u/
T15
Nl 2 34xl
to be inserted
00 . O21250;
S1 2 ; N5 57 8M03
To be searched for
1)
Search for or scan the word immediately before the insertion location
in T (an address to be inserted.)
2) Key
l-r I . l-tl
Keyinlrlandl.
r:r
4)
LJ-l'
ru"tt I rllsFill tey.

PRMRtrl
Wt
NI23/ xLn.A
s12 :
W
Zlm
t66?Er 1tr3 ;
j422. ,
N}1.
EDIT
Before Insertion
-279-
NL?5/.
PRmRFf1
Wj
N1234 X1uB.6
s12
t'66'Ul
j@.,
z
ttt3
0ffi8
Zrm Tl5
N123
EDIT
After Insertion
By a push on "INPUT" k"y instead of ttINSRT" continuous words can be inserted
according to the setting of parameter (No. 18, EDTB=1). However, finally,
press ttrNSRTtt or t'EOBtt key.
(Example)
Key
i" col t iNpurl xI23. t rNpurl y4s6. t iwuil
Y456.F100; can be inserted at a time.
Froo
Iroal'
cotxt23.
(Note) The last word qE a block can be inserted as follows:

lTlt1 (instead
tTtil
Key in zt00
of
2100 [ rNSRr lt
r.gj lrtlsnnrl. rhe resulr is
l;6; |
the same. )
/(d\
9.11.3 Changinsaword (
\u/\t
)
N1234Xl
00 . Ozl 250T 15 ; S I 2
To be changed to Ml5
1) Search forlscan the word to be changed.

2) Key in the address to be changed. In the above exarirple, key in address
3) Key in data. ( [l
)
4) Push IETER I ;"P
N123
4x I
00
. oz L 2 5OEJJ; s I 2 ;
Modified program
-280-
M.
9.11.4 Deleting .
*rrd (
8)
UI
Nl 234X1 00 . 0zI250T
21250
l) Search for/scan the
word
2) Push the l-onrEr I butron.
I 2;
to be deleted
to be deleted.
after deletion
Program
9.11.5 Deletins up to an EOB
I 5;
a\
D)
Current sea rched word

(word indic ated by
the cursor)
N
23
4l
x I 0 0 . 0 z L 2 S 0 r I s M r 3 ;l s I Z ;
deleted
ffi1
Pushing the I flR I and the I DELET I key deletes up to an EOB and causes rhe cursor
l_"* I
to move to below the address character of the next word.
e.11.6 Detetins arcars
( 8 )
\u/
The area from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified sequence number is deleted.
Current searched word
(word indicared by
the cursor)
N2233 to be keyed in
I
N1234M10;M15xl0
0;
Tt2;N2233'S12;
Area to be deleted
1) Key in address N.
2) Key in, 2, 2.3, and 3 in this example.
3) Push the l-5ftEt I key. The program up ro the N2233 block is deleted.
cursor moves to the address next Eo the deleted block.
281
The
P,n
I
'j
i'g.lZ
\__
i,)l
Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
By setting the setting pgI3*9!9f_ffe;i-9:
to automatically
I
" it is possible
insert a sequence No. to each block-when programming
via the MDI keyboard in
EDIT mode.
When EOB is keyed in and ttren [-ttqSRtl key is pressed, the sum of the current
sequence No. and Ehe incremental value (value set to SEQINC of parameter No.
0550) is automaticalty stored in the memorv.

I) Set the setting parameter S-EQ to I.\
z) >erecE. trIJrt mooe.

3) Push I PRGRM I key.
5) Key in the initial value of N, e.g. 10.
6) r,-,sh [-JNsRtl key.
7) Insert each word of the dat.a in one bIock.
lti-l
8) Key i" I l.i" l.
4\
) Push [_]N$!J key. EOB is stored in the memory . In case 2 is set at the
incremental value parameter, Nl2 is inserted to the next line and indicated.
PRmRFT'1
Wt
NlBG92nYAnt
cEtulS
twrz
ul2
EDIT
(Note
(Note
9.13
N12 is desired qgt lo be inserted in the next block in the example

above, push tft" FELET-l key ro delet Nl2.
If Nl00 is desired to be inserted to the next block instead of Nl2 in
the example above, key in N100 and push fgf,fgRl key. Wirh rhis, Nl00
is registered, and the initial value is changed to 100.
l) If
Background Editing
This function permits background editing regardless of mode selection and CNC
nnn.lirinnc (in automat.ic operatlon or not, etc.). No alarm which takes place
during background editing affects foreground operation. Conversely, background
editing is not'affected by an alarm in foreground.
-282-
9.13.1 Registration from MDI
l) A push on the soft
key "BG-EDT't
after pushing El
". the right side on the
editing screen.
program screen displays the background
PPO@fr1
B.i-EDIT
Eqêq NZZgq
Ql,{=.
FiUT|]
,-*.1;\[;"lf-_-][_-lE;;1
2) Specify a program to be edited.
a) When generating a program:
01234 trNSERl-], f or example
b) When edi ting th.e existing program:
0L234
[TER-fl, for
example
3) Program edit
The program editing is' the same as with the foreground program editing operation. Graphic conversational programming can also be carried out in the
same manner as with the foreground program editing operation.
PRmRFf4
BG-EDIT
W.t
AAAA2 NAZZA
xB YA AA t
r@ W xLA6. YtW. t
l.EB @1 ZLA. FtA.s ,
N16 G92
Mg Y1g.
rB T61S1
f'133
r'5 t'114 ;
Y7AWXAY8,
t@;
ADRS.
NUTO
4) Background edit end

It is necessary to save a program completely edited in background into the
foreground program
memory.
r3-d:END-l
':1i4::..j
5:
-283-
--
1.
9.13.2 Registration from
CNC taPe
Registration operation is the same as rÎith the foreground editing operation

method, but in this operation, the Program is registered to the background
editing area. The background edit end is required to register the program into
the foreground program qemory like the back ground editing operatj,on.
t) l-01 TProg;mNolf INPUf-l or [-rNpurl : It is registered from CNC Tape.
2) [BG-ENp ]
9.13.3 CNC tape punch
CNC tape is punched
in the same procedure as in the foreground operation. As

function
is concerned, it is possible to punch out a program belng
far as this
foreground
as we11.
selected in
No.l
Prosr"'
l-srenrl : The specified program is punched out.
OE I
The whole program is punched out.
[=;te3l l-sreRrl
@
(Note
In background editing, it is possible to edit programs other than a

program being selected in foreground. If an attempt is made to edlt a
program being selected in foreground, BP/S alarm (140) occurs. On the
contrary, if an attempt is made to select a program being edited in
background, in foreground (program number search and program access by
external signal), P/S alarms (059, 078) occur in foreground.
(Note ,\ No program can be input/output by the external start signal (MINP) or
by the I/O device external control during the background editing.
(Note J) For the background alarm, a P/S alarm similar to one which is seen
during foreground program editing occurs; however, "BP/S" is displayed
on the data rinput line of the background edit screen in order to
discriminate between background and foreground alarms.
This alarm is reset, automatically by editing operation (some input
1)
operation) .
background editing is carried out, a vacant area (not used) may be
present in the program memory. This area cannot be used as program
memory as it is.
Therefore, it is necessary to compress program memory
in order to eliminate such a vacant area. This program memory
compressing operation can be performed by a push on the soft k.y
ttC0NDNS" or ttRESETt' on the foreground program direcEory screen.
(Note 5) During background editing, all programs cannot be erased.
(Note 4)
9.14
When
Menu Programming
To assist programming in EDIT mode, the following menu is displayed on the CRT.
1) When G is keyed in, the G code menu is indicated on the lower half of the CRT
s creen.
2) htren a G code selected from the menu in (t) is input, the standard format of
the one block corresponding to the G code is indicated.
For example, when G is keyed in after inserting N102, the G code menu dD
shown below. is indicated on the CRT.
-284-
PROGRtrI'1
8L% ,
N10G92ruYAz3t
r@ W xlw. Y-fi.
NPB
NWI38
bFa
./
Gffi : POSITiSIIi
: 1i1.g1A 1P1.
: CIRCLLAR IH_. ClJ
: CIRCLL-CR IH-. Ccl.t
@4 : DITELL
G81
FA2
<O)
GA3
l.r_t'1.
<O>
G
ilt
after G04 can be sequenrially indicared by pushing rhe lTl

ot l-+l k"y.
For example, when selecting G0l, key in 0 and l, and rhen prr"n rlrsnr-l
I
but ton.
At this time, G01 is inserted to the memory as shown below, and the standard
format of the G01 block is indicated on the CRT screen.
The G code menus
PRIERFI1
UI@ t
N1BG92}Y8zlJt
f@ GPB XLW. Y-9.
fa6 861
X(Z,Y)_
4re.
@1
ffitffi
l2B3
tl_ s_ T_
EDIT
Insertion of
x
one
_ l-IffiTl,
block is cornpleted by keying in as follows:

I
-rr^nm
III\JKI
Ir -I
l-NsnT-],
TltrnDl
I
PRmRFr.l
ffi7n
Btn t
N1BG92reYAZIjt
FeA GA Xtn. Y-fi. t
fBa Ga1 >@. Y-&. FW M ;
N48
EDIT
-285-
12248
lvu
'.)^'^'
..g.q.-Program Loading by TEACH lN Mode
,n" rEACH IN JOG mode and the rEACH IN

If the prtyu."t-op;;;;;;;;l
are added. In these modes, the machine position obtained by the
manual operation is stored in the memory as a program position and a program can
be created. The words other than X, Y and Z (O, N, G, R, I, J, K, F, H, II , S,
T, P, Q, and EOB) can be stored in the memory in the same way as that conducted
in the EDIT mode.
l) Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode.
2) Move the machine co che required positi.on.
3) Push the PRGRM key.
4) Enter the address ,X.*
5) Push the [-rllsnf Lt ey,-F.r, the machine position along the X axis is stored in
the rnemcif!.
X10.521 Absolute position (for metric input)
Xl052l Content stored in the program
[-E-l
6) Push ril
|IIi; I, I INSRT | | I I and I fNSnf I tey, then the machine position along the
Y and Z axes is stored in the memory.
HANDLE mode
Note 1) After entering the address X, 'I or Z, enter a numerical value and push
I INSRT I key, then the value entered is added to the machine position.
This is used to correct the machine position through key entry.
Note 2) The coordinate value registered in this way will be an absolute coordinate value. Enter G90 (Absolute programming) at the beginning of the
program.
{r
Note 3) The command to be entered before and after machine position shall be
by the same operation as that conducted in the EDIT mode before
' entered
and after registering the machine position, respect.ively.
f t tn
Note 4) Insert the EOB ( l;6; | ), the block registration completes.
Example) 01234 Ni G92 X Y Z ; ... Point P0
N2 c00 c96-x-v-;
... Point Pl
N3 cOl Z_Fm;
...
- . . Point P2
N4 1402:
P0 0-----
{P
t^
I
I
t
I
I
I
rz
The program of the above examplezis stored in the following procedure.

I) Set the setting parameter "SEQt'to I (For the incremental value parameter,
t'It' is assumed. )
2) Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode.
3) Make positioning at P0 by the manual pulse generator.
4) Push the PRGRI'I button.
5) Enter the address O, numeric value 1234, and push tftu l-fllSnfl t"y. Then the
program number OI234 is stored in the memory
6) Enter the address N, numeric value l, and push the I INSRT I key. The sequence
number I is stored in the memory as the initial
value of the automatic
insertion.
:l
i
ii
'*
*
:#
-286-
E
s
7) Enter the address G, numeric value 92, and push tn" Fllffl
tey. Then the
G92 is stored in the memory.
8) Enter the address X, and push tn" f-iGiill t"y.
__lEnter the address y, l-rNSRTl, address Z and push rhe I l;l I u"r.
Then the machine position at p0 is stored in rhe memoiyl9) After the step (8), the EOB is inserred and inpur of rhe block AL234 Nl G92
X Y Z ; completes.
10) ny ttre step (g), NZ is stored in the memory by the sequence number automatic
insertion function.
ll) Make positioning at Pl by rhe manual pulse generat.or.
12) Enter the address G, numeric value 00, IINSRTI k.y, addrels__lQr_ numeric
^ r--=:----------value 90,
I rxsnt I key, address X, ENSRI_I k"y, address Z, ana I i;i I in this
sequence so that the 2nd block N2 G00 G90 X
i3)
memory.
lEUpl
; is stored in the
N3 is stored in the memory afrer srep (12).

14) Make positioni,ng at P2.
15) Enter the address G, numeric valg1Ol, I lusnEl k"y, address Z, I rtqsnr I tuy,
-T1]]'l|
address F, numeric value 300, l;i; I in this sequence so that the 3rd block
llvul
N3 G01 Z---F300; is stored in rhe uemory.
16) Then the N4 is stored in the memory. Enter address l'I, numerie 02 and
to store the final block N4 M02; in the memory. With lhis, registration of
the program example is .completed.
The contents of the program can also be checked in the TEACH IN mode with the
same operation as in the EDIT mode.
PRIERF}T
CRELATILE)
x
3.ffi
Y 23.T23
z 4.fi
OIZU
OLZU
(AESO-UTE)
x
Y
z
69 XtWY8ZIZzffi,
f Gm Gg >gEP5 Y2Tf8 t
fS m1 Z-fr FW t
t.]4l'@i
N1
Are.
Tlt{D
-287-
3.ffi
-a.ffi
rW
23.723
9.16
Conversational Programming with Graphic Function
9.16.1
Programming
l) Depress the PRGRM function button. The screen will be displayed shown as
follows if the other program has not. been entered.
If the other program has already been entered, the currentlY selected
program will be displayed on the screen wi th the usual format.
W
PRGAI1
IAM
OT
EDIT
Fis.9.16.1 (a)
2) After inputting address O and the program number of the newly registered
program for entry, depress the EOB key. When desired to entry the program of
program No. 10, forFinstance, depress the EOB key after inputting 0, 1, 0 by
key operations. A new program is then entered.
3) L{.hen depressing the soft key "IAP" on the screen of Fig. 9.16.1 (a), G code
menu shown as following in Fig. 9.f6.1 (b) is displayed on the screen.
wla vm
PRIERFI1
Gffi :
POSITIONING
GP1 : LINEAR IPI-.

G@ : CIrctLtrR IPL.
GA3 : CIRGIAR tPL. CO!
B4 : U,ELL
G16 : CFFSET \JALLE SETTII'G
61? : X/ Pt-$E
G18 : Z< PLSE
Gi9 : YZ PIAE
PB : IFrchl
@1 : I,ETRIC
@11 : REF. POINT RETLRN CtEg<
nm'
C1,J
<o)
<0)
<C)
EDIT
Fig. 9.16.1 (b)
(b), input G code corresponds to the function

4) On the screen of Fig.9.I6.I
one desires to program, by key operations. When desiring positioning, for
instance, the G code menu shows G 00, so input G 00 by key operations.
If functions desired for programming are not displayed on t.he screen,
depress the Page Key I-+l and then allow to display the next G code menu.
Repeat this operation ti11 the function desired for programming appears.
If the function desired to program is not G code, leave it without key
operationb.
After Ehat, when depressing the soft key "I,IENU", a detailed screen of the G
code inpuE by key operations is displayed. An example of the detailed
-288-
screen of G00 is shown in t.he following Fig. 9.16. I (c).

When inputting anything by key operation, the detailed screen
standard format is displayed. (See following Fig. e.16. i (d) )
PROGRFT'I
WrA tWB
Gm : POSITIONIT
c@GG6
x
L@. Y
56.
_z
-H
OFFSET NO,
t1
,'
(x,
,'
Y,:,
the
WL 122ffi
PRMRff
STCNMRD
of
FORT'IAT
-GGGG
XY
HF
R14
JI
1/
B/'
JK
P8
E.'-'-rlnn
EDIT
Fig. 9.16.1 (c)
Fi9.9.16.1 (d)
(c) or (d), allow to travel

5) In the detailed screens of examples Fig.9.l6.i
the cursor ti11 obtaining required data while depressing the cursor key.
During this time, the address in the figure corresponding to data shown by
Input numeric data by depressing numeral keys,
the cursor will flicker.
depress the INPUT key after completing to inputting one piece of data.
Then, the inputting of one piece of data is completed. By repeating these
operations, input all data required for the G code. (See following
Fle.9.16.r (e))
PRIERNT
GZI : POSITISIING
WGGG
x
L@. Y
z
H
l1
OFFSE
WBLA
54.
ISLA
<x,Y,z,
f NO.
>
r' "
J.
7/
B
ull
E'B{,lnf-_.1
Fi9.9.16.1 (e)
b)
?\
With screen 9.16.1 (e), depress the INSERT key. Thenr orr block of data has
(b) is
registered in the program nemory. G code menu in Fig.9.16.I
displayed on the screen, and another block of data is permitted to 'be
entered, so repeat the operations from (4).
After the registration of all programs is completed, depress the leftmost
The programs that have been registered are then displayed on
soft-key S]
the screen, converted into the conventional format. Depress the RESET key
to return the programs to the program head.
-289-
:,1?ff
9.16.2 Confirmation of
program
1) Depress the PRGRM function key. Search the program for which confirmation is
desired by using the MDI key. (Depress the cursor key l-+l after inputting
address 0 and the program number which you desire.) The program is displayed
on the screen in the usual format. (See following Fig. 9.16.2 (a))
PROGRRh
WLA t
frtw eaa xraa. Yffi.
tffi t"t?.2 ;
owlg tW
:
gI
EDIT
Fis.9.16.2
2)
(a)
After allowing the cursor to travel till the heading of the block for which
confirmation is desired on the interactive conversation type screen, depress
the soft key rrIAPrr, and then contents of its block are displayed by changing
them onto the inte;:,active conversation type screen. (See following Fig.
e.16.2 (b))
When contents of a block are displayed on the interactive conversarion type
screen, eontents of its next block can be displayed on the interactive type
screen by depressing the Page Key | * | (for instance) on the screen of Fig.
9.16.2 (b). Besides, by depressing the Page Key | + I as the same, contents of
one block before can be also displayed on the int.eractive conversation type
screen.
F@r4
ffi : POSITIOTIING
G G
ffi-6
z
H
11
5,'
OFFSET
wlg rwm
<x,Y,z,
.r'
NO.
z'
J/
B/
ull
Fis.9.16.2 (b)
9.16.3 Editing of
program
While displaying the contents of the one blockr s program on the interactive
conversation type screen, their contents can be edited.
Editing of the program with the usual format was executed by one word units,
including basic insertion, replacement and deletion. On the oEher hand, on the
interactive conversation type screen, they are all edited by one block uniE.
-290-
Replacement of block
Allow contents of the block desired to replace to be displayed interactive

conversatj-on type screen. After allowing the cursor to traveI till
the
heading of the block one desires to replace on the usual format screen, this
can be executed by depressing the soft keyttIAP"; or from the beginning, by
depressing the soft key rrIAPrr and bringing up the display of the interactive
conversation type screen, and then repeating to depress Page Keys l-t-l or Fl.
When replacing data, except G code which will be a headline, input new data
by depressing the INPUT key after allowing the cursor to travel to the data
required by using the cursor key and inputting a numerical value by
depressing the numerical keys on Ehe interactj-ve conversation type screen.
When replacing the G code itself which becomes the headline, depress the
soft k.y "G.MENU", then the G code menu is displayed. Accordingly, select
the G code required and input its numerical value by operation keys. For
instance, when replacement is required to t.he feedrate, the G code menu
shows G0l, so input 0i by k"y operation. After that, when depressing the
soft key "MENU", the detailed screen of G codes that are already input will
aPPeare.
Accordingly, refer to 9.16.1 (l) and input dara.

When having completed the above replacing operations, depress the ALTER key.
By this operation, one block of the program can be replaced just as it is.
,\ Insertion of Block
Allow to display the block just before the section desired to insert a new
block by using the Page Key on the interactive conversation type screen. On
the usual format screen allow the cursor to travel till just before the
section desired to insert a new block by using t.he Page Key or Cursor Key.
After allowing to display the G code menu by depressing the soft key
"c.MENU", refer to item 9.f6.l (4) and 9.16.1 (5), and inpur data of a new
block. When completed the above inputt.ing operations for the data of one
block, depress the INSERT key.
By this operation, data of one block is inserted just as it is.
?) Deletion of a Block
I
A1low contents of the block for which deletion is desired to display. After
that, by depressing the DELET key, contents of the block displayed in
deleted from the program memory.
On the screen, the contents of the next block is displayed with Ehe
interactive conversation tyDe screen.
9.17
Number
Number
9.18
of Registered Programs
of registered
programs:
125 programs
Part Program Storage Length
i) Part program sEorage length

Part program storage length
?\
(Standard; 63 programs)
Lo / 20 / 40 / 80
I r20 / 320 n.
can
be seleeted
No. of offset pairs

231641991200 pairs
-29r-
from
the
followine:
9.19 Editing
Operation Using Full Keys
The following operations have been allowed by full keys:
1) Editing of custom macro B

2) I'lodification and insertion of numeric value only. (However, deletion
search cannot be made.)
3) Several words and blocks can be edited simultaneously. (However, the
of characters edited should be within 32.)
Note) Set the STDP of parameter No. 0014 to 0.
and
number
A program is edited when the program protection of EDIT mode has being cancelled
in the same way as in normal editing. But the following points differ.
a) Shift key
Press thettSHIFTttkey once to change the key i-nput cursor, which appears next
to the key input data, from norm"t tt.tt tottntt. In this status, press the key
with symbols or characters marked on the lower right corner of key top to
a11ow those symbols and characters to be input.
Input one character to a1low the key input cursor to return to normaltt<tt.
Also, the key input cursor can ret.urn to the normal tt.tt by pressing the shift
key again after pressing it once.
b) Cancel key
Press t.he eancel key I'CANrr once to delete one character in the key lnput
area.
If the key input cursor is shifted, namelytt<tt, one character is deleted and
the shift status is cancelled at the same time. (The key input cursor
returns to the normal tt.tt.)
c) Deletion, changej-and insertion of prograrn
When the custom macro which has already been input is editedr the cursor can
be moved to the position where only t.he following characters and symbols are
located:
I) Address
2> // of top of left side of substitute statement
3) /, (,=,
4) Top characters of IF, WHILE, GOTO, and DO

One blank character is set before characters and symbols above on the CRT
screen. A program is deleted, changed, and inserted with the area fron the
above cursor position to Ehe position one character before the next cursor
position being one unit.
Example: Position of cursor
N00I xr-//100
?Ft =
Tzt
5oo7 12 ]x .r2til31 ;
N003 x-sQRr t#313 x ltt4
i-itz z+r :
NOOS 7S = 1 +1 - /t10 ;
rr itlT Ne 0l coror0 ;
wHrLE ufz LE 5l DOl ;
Ttzooo + +2) = +7 * To ;
Noo+
+ rll
Itz=#2+I;
lnoT
-292-
Note 1) The cursor does not stop

Example)
( XI00. Y100.)
within
parentheses.
ThE-cursor does not stop at these posidions.

However, when the parentheses are not a pair, the cursor moves as
following:
in
the
Cursor forward
LTo' jto9-tti"
Cursor backr"rard
( x100. Y100.
- T---:f-
Note
2) The cursor position
.rrr"or does not stoD here.
,ihe cursor srops here.
uay be changed by rnodifying programs.
nodifying rhe 2200 ia Xt00 z:200g using the 100,'ALTER" key,

the XI00200 is obrained
I{owever, there is no change in the following case;
when insertion is made using the 100 ttINS'r key at the 2200 of
X100 2200 ; , XL00 7200 f 001 resulrs.
Never perform this procedures at the program number.
Example) By
d) Abbreviation of words of custom macro B

When the words of custom macro B are changed and inserted, the top
characters or more can be used instead of the whole word.
two
Namely,
c0 SQ BI R0 -
wD
XO
\ÎI{ILE,
XOR,
cos,
SQRT,
BIN,
ROUND,
TA AB FI EN -
WH
AN
WI{rLE,
AND,
TAN,
ABS,
FIX,
GO
S] -
GOTO
SIN
- ATAN
BC - BCD
FT] - FUP
AT
END
Exaurple) Keying in WI{ [AB [/|2]LERO I#3ll is rhe same as rhar of WHILE
[/lzl LE ROUND t#31 l. A1so, rhe program is indicared in rhis
IABS
manner.
e) Control out/in
Comments can be
wri-tten in programs.
0 SERIES) ;
Example) O000i (FANUC
Note l) The words of macro cannot be abbreviat,ed. However, do not input them
by dividing them into two or more sectors since they rnay be converted.
Note 2) The ttOtt, tt tt can also be input. Hotrever, cautions must be taken when
inputting them by dividing thern into two or more sectors.
Note 3) No period can be input af ter the rort and rtNrr even within the
parent.heses ( ) .
f
-293-
10.
10.
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Offset Amount
10,1.1 Setting and display of tool offset values (function t eyr lottretl)
Parameter IOF (No. 0001) selects absolute input and incremental lnput.
I) Input of absolute offset value.
a) Push [oFsgTl tey. (For the soft key, press the soft key lorrsEfll when the
other screen is displayed.)
b) Push a PAGE button to display the requlred page where the requlred offset
number is given.
W }'W
FFSET
Fn. mTA
mTA
ttr.
ffi
A-W
LA.W
_ffir
Atg ta.effi
w
-L.ZzB
a.w
af. -n-w
n3
g.em
a.w
atz
w
n.w
813
ffi
A.W
a.m
a14
re
8.2ffi
6.m
Bls
w7
a-?ffi
g.w
aL6
m
0.828
MTLFI- POSITIO.{ (RELRTIL)
x
a.w
Y s-m
s.w
l.O. Wl
=
I'IDI
c) Move the cursorto the offset number to be changed.

Method I
Continuously
the
push
CURSOR
key.
The
cursor will
move in seguence.
CURSOR
Movine the
Page.
Method
Key in
[Tl
l+l
cursor beyond the
page changes the screen to the next
and
offset
number,.and press the
l-rNFilfl tey.
d) Input the offset value (input with decimal point is also possible) with
the data input keys.
e) rush [-tNPuT I key.- The offset value is input and indicated.
(Exanple) I,"hen 15.4 is input for offset No. 25.
W |W
FFSET
h0.
mTA
mrA
t'tr.
g.w
!5.M
ar?
Jffi
m
A.W
8.W
a1B
@7
A.m
s-wB
619
@
a-m
a.wB
w
@
6.WB
A.?n
at
a3a
a.zffi
6.w
@.
a-m
431
a3
z.nB
g.w
632. a-m
w4
(RELATILE)
rcTLH- PGITISI
Y 8.w
x
s.w
g.w
z
htr. m=
MDI
-294-
2) Input of incremental offset value

Input an increase or decrease value of the offset value
a) Shift the cursor to the position of the offset number to be changed.
(Same as l)-c))
b) Input the incremental value (input with declmal point is al-so posslble)
with the data input keys.
c) Push t INPUT-I button. ih" ittcremental value is input, and the offset value
corresponding to the sum of the incremental value and the current offset
value is indicated. This value indicated is the new offset value.
(Exarnple) Offset value currently set
z 5.678
Value input (incremental value) :' 1.5
New off set value
z 7.178 (= 5.678 + 1.5.t
(Note) When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the neht
offset value does not become effective immediately. It becomes effectlve
after the H code specifying the offset No. corresponding to it is designated.
1O.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: lFFRAfvtl)
t) Set the mode select switch to
MDI.
MDI
STEP/HANDLE
key.
2) Push
3) Push
PAGE
button to display the setting parameter.

@mt@B
PFRFT'ETER
(SETTII.G 1)
=6
-FEu(
RELn/
A
=
TIIN = O
IS[l = I
(6:EIA
IlGl = A (g:l'tl
l/o =g
r.o. RE\x
lsu )
Ir.0{)
4) Push a CURSOR key and move the cursor to the iten to be changed.
5) Input I or 0 according to the following description.
a) REVX
Setting X axis mirror image
I : X axis mirror image 0N
0 : X axis mirror irnage OFF
b) REVY
Setting Y axis mirror image
I : Y axis mirror irnage ON
0 : Y axis mirror irnage OFF
-295-
'
-}.'.\
-(Note) If X and Y axis mi.rror images become effective, the X and Y axis movement
directi,on in AtlTO mode is opposed.
However, the movement direction in manual operation or the movement {
direction between the reference point and the intermediate point in auto- i'{{
matic reference point return are not opposed.
i
-1
c)
d)
TVON
TV check when registering a program from a paper tape into a memory.

1 : Perform TV check
0 : No TV check
rso
Setting code, IS0 or EIA, when punching a program in the memory onto
nrnar
e)
{
1
l-tna
I : IS0 code output

0 : EIA code output
INCH
Setting a program input unit, i-nch or metric system

1 : Inch
0 : Metric
f) L/o
- Setting reader/puncher device for prograrn input/output with reader/puncher
/' interf ace.
Select a device of a channel I set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and
STEP2 (parametaer No. 0002) and BMTED (parameter N0. 0552) .
Select a device of a channel 1 set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STP2
(parameter No. 0013) and BMTE1 (parameter No. 0553) .
Select a device of a channel 2 set by parameGrs NFED, and STEP2
(paramet6,er No. 0050) and BRATE2 (parameter N0. 0250).
SeIect a device of a channel 2 set by parameters NFED, and STEP2
(parameter No. 0051) and BMTE3 (parameter No. 0251).
g) ABS
c.-.l+nL'i-^
between absolute and incremental comrnands in MDI mode.
owrLgrrarrS
I : Absolute command
0 : Incremental command
h) sEQ
Qarrino eequence number insert.ion automatically when registering a program in the memory using the keys on the MDI panel. (See section
III-14. ll for details)
I : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
0 : Does not perform aulomatic sequence number insertion.
i) Setting the tape format of l0/il series conversion.
I : Tape format is converted.
0 : Tape format is not converted.
6) Push I INPUT I key. Each paramerer is set and displayed.
-296-
15. MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION

15.1 Outline
The amount of machine movement according to the stress other than motor driving
power in servo off condition is reflected to various coordinate system of CNC
control unit.
In CNC control unit, the nachine movement is followed up as if move conmand r{ere
com-anded. So, when the servo po\^rer is turned on, the uachine position and the
NC coordinate system value match each other.
So, by using this function, it is possible to move the machine by hand using the
mechanical handle. For this function, PMC is required.
15.2 Follow-up
DGN.
Signal *FLWU
No.
*FLWU
0104
*FLWU
I
0
Not follow up in servo off condition

Fcllow up in servo off condition
This signal becomes effective when the system is provided with the mechanical
handle function (optlon) and PMC.
When the circuits for signals SVFX - SVFZ are closed, the servo off (No current
flows to servo motors) condition is set. Since the positioning control does not
function under thiF condltion, an error is produced when the machine tool moves.
For thls deflection arnount processlng, the following remedles are selectable
according to whether the clrcuit for signal *FLWU i.s open or closed.
o When the circuit for signal *FLWU is closed;
No follow-up function is alive.
The servo error amount ls recorded on the error counter. In this case, the
machine tool moves to cancel this error when the circuit for servo-off slgnal
has been reset to be open.
o When the clrcuit for signal *FLWU is open;.
The fo11ow-up function is a1lve
The present posltlon of the control unlt is changed to reset the error counter
to zero, assumlng that the command has been applied by the moving amount of
the machine tool.
In this case, the machine tool remalns devlated even after the circuit fot
servo-off signal ls reset to be open. However, since the present position of
the control unit changes ln correspondence to the rnachine tool position, the
machine moves to the correct position when the absolute cormand is applied
next.
No
15.3
follow-up functlons durLng the
emergency stop
or servo alarm.
Input'Signal
0
DGN.
No.
SVFZ
0105
svFx, Y,
zo
XrYorZaxls
X,YorZaxls
-330-
SVFY
SVFX
servo is turned off.

servo ls turned on.
14.2.3 Tool path drawing
1) Depress the soft key lmFfl after depressing the function

the following will be displayed on Ehe CRT screen.
key
GRAPH/AIIX
wt rcnLz
xY a.m
g.w
z a.w
BT
flJTO
2) The following machine movement are drawing by starting
the automatic
operation.
Note 1) Since the graphic drawing is done when coordinate value is renewed
during automatic oPeration, etc., it is necessary t.o start the program
by automatic operation. When necessary to execute only drawing,
'
therefore, select the machine lock
mode.
Note 2) rn case the feed rate is high, drawing may not be executed correetly,
decrease the speed by dry-running, etc. to execute drawing.
Note 3) When the aut.omatic operation is started under reset condition, the
program is executed after deleting the previous drawing automatically.
Note 4) When necessary to display a part of the progran, search the display
start block by the sequence No. search, and set the sequence No. of the
end block to the PROGRAI'I STOP N of the graphic parameler before starting
I
the program under continuous operation mode.
-329-
14.2.2 Details of graphic parameter
1) AXES
2)
. Set the plane to plot.
AXES=0Select(1)
AXES = 1 Select (2).
AXES = 4 SelecrJ5).
The rotating angle (horizontal , vertical) for isometric di.spaly of 5 and 6
is fixed at 45" in both cases.
RANGET (uax.
(MrN.
xJ=
l=
),
)(=
l=
Set the maximum value/ninimum value of graphic range desired to display

the screen.
o Setting range: 0 - +9999999 (unit: 0.001 nm or 0.0001 inch)
In this case, the value of MAX needs to be greater than that of MIN.
Set the graphic ruagnification
3) SCALE
(unit: 0'01
0 - ioooo0
o
100000 (unit:
range:
0.01 tine)
Setting
4) cRT
on
.ENTER
[=
|=
/,=
Set the coordinate value on the work coordinate system at graphic center.
Llhen MAX and MIN of MNGE are set, the values will be set automatically
once drawing is executed.
s)
.t
PROGRAI"I STOP
Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partially
The value is cancelled automatically once drar.ring is executed.
dispaly.
6) AUTO ERASE
1. Erase .the oldest drawing automatically when the automatic operation is

started under reset condition
0. Not erase automaticallv.
*
-328-
Example
Gc (=30mmJ0mm)
Graphic origin
When the corninand

dashed line (---).
Graphic origin = work coordinate
of
ls given, the graphic point ls

The tool path is shor.m with broken line for rapid feed
G92
cutting feed.
moved
and
as
origh
shown by the
with full line for
14.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter

14.2.1 Setting procedure of graphic parameter
Various parameters need to be pre-set for plotting.

These parameters can be set under any mode.
l) When the funcrion butron l@E-7ffi]
is depressed, Ehe
parameter setting screen is displayed.
In case the screen ls not displayed, depress the soft key
the screen is displayed.
I
following graphic
FGlffil, by
which
PNRfl'ETER
92ffi2. NO',$
AXES
4
-ts
(XY 4, YT- t, ZY=z, )C=3, )C/Z-:4, Z{y=S)
R$GE
ct'p<. )
x= 115@F
rWS
(NIN. )
RFI.GE
)F
AY=
ab
SCFLE
K=
n
GRTFHIC
GRFFHIC CENTER
X=
5?5m
PRTERFI1
fl.JTO
Y=
ST(P IF
ERffiE F
mF8
g'
1
P=
t'oI
oT
2) Depress the CURSOR [L

[Tl t" move the cursor
3) After keying in the nun r-ir data, depress ttre
4)
to t,he desired posirion.

by which the graphic
lffil,
parameter is set.
Perform the above steps 2) and 3) repeatedly to set all graphic parameters.
-327 -
As shom in the example of the above flgure, the maximum drawing range will be
the area of approx. 144 nrn (wldth) x 108 mn (length).
In case the range to draw ls greater than the maxlmum drawing range, the drawlng
magnification is used.
The drawing ruagnificatl-on is 0.01 to 100.00 times, which is usually determined
as follows;
o Drawing rnagnificatLon = Drawing magnification (H),
or drawing rnagnificatlons
(V), whichever is smaller
o Drawing magnification H
(length on program to horlzontal dlrection axis)
o Drawing magnification V = o/
= R/(length on program to vertical direction axis)
c : 144 nrn
B: 288mn
The drawing magnification is always based on the center of screen.
Gc: Center of screen
magnification
Program
Gc
After magnification
In case the tool path will not exist near the center of screen, enlarging the
screen will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the drawing range.
To avoid such cases, the following four graphic parameters are prepared t
(range: X MAX.)
" RANGE x (MAx.)
(range: X MIN.)
"O RANGE x (MIN. )
(MAX.
(
MNGE Y
range : Y llAX. )
)
(range: Y IIIN. )
" MNGE Y (MIN. )
O RANGE z (MAX.
( range :
Z I'{AX. )
)
(range: Z IIIN. )
" MNGE Z (MIN. )
With the above parameters, the center of screen (Gex, Gcz) can be calcuLated as
follows;
Gcx=X(MAX.)+X(MIN.)
Gcz=Z(MAX.)+Z(MIN.)
The value will be 0.001 rnm or 0.0001 in. depending upon the input unit.
The graphic origin and graphic center point will not be changed even if the work
coordinate origirr is changed.
In other words, the work coordLnate origin is always consistent with the
graphic origin.
-326-
14. GRAPHIC
14.1
FUNCTION
Drarruing Range
It is possible to draw the prograrmed tool path on the 9-inch cRT screen, which
to check the progress of machining, while observing the path
makes it possible
on the screen.
rn addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.

Tool path drawing is possible on six coordinate sysEems.
The size
of drawing screen will be as follows;
Gc: Center of screen
t
I
54 mm
72nm
?2 mm
54 mm
I
I
-325-
Selection key PRGRAM
Software key LIB

OR
Software key PRGRAM
Library screen
Software key FLOPPY

OR
Software key PRGRM

OR
Software key FLOPPY
Software key
READ
.Software key
PUNCH
Software key
DELETE
Software key
SRHFIL
Software key
RET
-324-
3) Delete
Press the soft key "DELETE".
The cursor indicates
File
No.
DELETE
FILE
Input File No
e
(?)
Press the soft key "EXEC".

Delete the file with File No. designated by FILE NO.
After execution, subsequent files are shifted up one by one.
4) File search
Press the soft. key "SRHFIL". The cursor indicates File No.
SEARCII
FILE NO. = I
NUM.
EDIT
First,
Ent,er File No.

Press the soft key
the file
ttEXECrr.
designated by FILE N0. is displayed at the head of the
screen.
13.7.3 Other precautions
t) "CAN + INPUT"
of FILE NO. and PROGRAI'{ NO. becomes blank.

2) The left-end soft key when the soft key is indicating "EXECt' is a return
key, which returns to the display screen of screen fornat No. I or No. 2.
3) Shift the screen from the directory display screen to other screens, and
press the function key "PROGRAM": a normal program screen is selected.
4) The device type shall be a floppy cassette.
Set parameter channel 1to No.0.0038 (RSCI,ID = 0), DEVFL = 1).
Set paramerer channel 2 ro No. 0.0038 (RSCMD2 = 0, DEVFL2 = l).
5) For the numeral input ln the data input area with FILE N0. AND PROGRAM NO. '
only lower 4 digits become valid.
Example: l{hen file No. = L2345678 is entered, 5678 is an actual data as Flle
No.
6) When an improper data is entered into FILE NO. AND PROGRAM N0., an alarm
(P/S 71, P/S 86) is produced. -9999 and -9998 of FILE N0. becone invalid.
7) Program read . with KEY (edit protect) signal OFF corresponds to program
check.
8) The parameter is input and output on the parameter screen in the same
manner as usual. Ilowever, the output file naue is reglstered as
''PARAMETER''.
9) The offset is input and output on the offset screen in the same manner as
usual. However, the output file name is registered as "OFFSETi'.
l0) Enter 0 in FILE No. and PROGMM No. "1" is displayed.
1l) On the program screen (not exclusively for the floppy cassette), no program
can be selected autonatlcally for punching, and the program is punched at
At this time, the designated prograrn No.
, the last of registered file.
becomes a file name. (The file name for 0 to 9999 is registered as "ALL
PRGMM". )
-323-
(Example)
FLOPPY A
Means Itcontinuerl
Means ttlasttt
(No.):
L (No.):
No.
:
No. of floppy disks
13.7.2 File input/output

1) Input (Read)
Press soft key
"READ". The cursor indicates FILE

indicates File No. previously cued.
NO.
At this time, FILE
NO.
READ
_FILE NO, = I
PROGMM
NO.
NI]M.
EDIT
2)
Deslgnate Filesl{o. to IIFILE NO. tt.

Press the soft key "EXEC". At this time, input program No., program
can be replaced and read.
After execution, File No. is I up automatically.
Output (Punch)
Press the soft key "pUNCH". The cursor displays Program No.
No.
PIJNCH
_FILE NO. =
PROGRAM
NO.
NIJM.
EDIT
Input
Program
Press the sof
No. Program No. turns into the file

t key t'EXEC".
name.
At this time, if no File No. is entered, punch a program at the last of the
registered file
rf F1le No. is entered, the program is punched at File No. designated.
However, i-f File No. already in use is designated, subsequent files are
deleted and .File Name is registered as ttFCA3".
when all programs are punched in one fi1e, input -9gg9 to program No.
-322-
Screen format No.
DIRECTORY (rLoPPY)
NO.
FILE NAME
0001.
0002.
0003.
0004.
0005.
0006.
0007.
0008.
0009.
(METER)
20.5
40.7
32.2
7.5
PARAl"lETER
OFFSET
ALL. PROGMM
00002
00003
00004
o0010
o0020
o0030
t0.2
2.6
4.9
11.8
5.5
EDIT
SRHFIL
5) In screen format No. I or No. 2, when other soft keys than

depressed, the display is as shown in screen format No. 3.
Example: I{hen
the soft key
Screen format No.
"RLAD|'
is
6.
7.
8.
9.
FILE
00001 N0001
(METER) VOL.
NAME
20.5
40.7
32.2
PARAMETER
OFFSET
ALL.
are
depressed:
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
NO.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
"PROGR.M,t
PROGRAM
'
7.5
00002
00003
00004
10.2
2.6
4.9
1r .8
OOOIO
00020
00030
.5
C01
READ
_FILE NO.
=I
PROGRAM
NO.
NIIM.
N0.
FILE
NAME
(METER)
VOL.
Indicates File No.

Indicates the file name.
The file capaclLy is converted to a paper tape for display. It can
also be expressed in t'(FEET) ", using setting parameter (fnCU=t1.
Indicates the status when the file has a multivolume.
321
Slide the write-protect key

in the dbection indicated
by the arrow.
Fig. 13.6.3
13.7 Floppy Cassette Directory
(b)
Write-protect key for FANUC CASSETTE
Display
This function displays the directory of floppy cassette for file

outpuE
input
and
13.7:1 Display
The directory is displayed in the edit and background edit nodes. Following
the display operation.,_
1) Display a normal pfogram screen.
2) Press the soft key "FLOppy" or selector key "pRoGRAM" twice.
3) Screen format No. I is displayed.
1S
Screen format No. I
0000r
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
NO.
FILE
NA},IE
(I,TETER) vol,.
N0001
4) Here, press.the page key: screen format No. 2 is displayed.
-320-
il
for cassette
Note 2) When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request
cassette
the
after
reset
but
replacement, the CNC is not reset at once,
has been rePlaced.
13.5.2
Cassette adaptor lamp conditions
The red and green lamps of the

1) Red laurp lights
Writable: This larnp lights
protect slide of
2) Green lanP lights
Readable: This lanp lights
3) Red larnp flickers
Write in progress
4) Green lamP flickers
5)
6)
cassette adaptor lndicate operating conditions.

when cassette is inserted after setting the write
cassette uPward
(RECORD
side).
when cassette is inserted.
Read or searching of file head in Progress

Red and green lamps alternatety flicker
cassette is not lnsert.ed, or cassett,e exchange request
Red and green lamps concurrently flickers
File deletion in Progress
Note
is in progress.
l) Atl alarms occurred in the cassette adaptor are displayed as
alano
No. 86.
13.6.3 Write'Protest ksy
The cassette is provided with a write-protect key in order to Protect data

written in the cassette when data is input, when file deletion is performed,
etc.
I) Writable
Slide the write-protect key Ln the direction indieated by the arrorr (see
diagraro). Data can not be written in the cassette'
Fig. 13.6.3
(a)
Write-protect kev for FANUC CASSiTTE 81/82
r:
-319-
13.4.2 Offset data input
The following operation enabl-es offset data input from the cassette to the
1)
Z)
3)
4)
CNC.
Selecr the EDIT mode.

Select the of f set screen by pressing I-brSET-l tey.
Operate as same as program input operation.
The input offset data will be displayed on the screen in the form of offset
value input by prograrnming (GI0), after completion of input operation.
R
GIOP
:
5) Select che ofGt data display screen and check that. the offset dara has been
correctly set.
13.4.3 CNC parameter input
Thg following operation enables
CNC
parameters input from the cassette to the
CNC.
l)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Press the. EMERGENCY STOP butron on the machine side.

Select the paramerer screen by pressing l-pAffi.l t.y.
Set the setting data P\ÎE to 1. Alarm PSI0O is displayed ar rhis rime.
Operate as same as program input operation.
NC parameters are input to the memory for NC parameter by this operation.
Normally, alarm PS000 will activate after completion of paramet.er reading.
6) Set the serring dara pWE to 0.
7) Turn on the NC power over again if alaru ps00o activates.
8) Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
13.5 File Deletion

The file
in the cassette
1) Select EDIT node. -
can
be deleted as follows:
2) Push I-PRGRI,I l.
3) Turn off the protect key r@\
\ lt ).
5) Key in file No. I to 9999 to be deleted.
6) Push ttre l-sffiTl tey.
With this operation, the k-th file input in (5) is deleted.
Note I) After the k-rh file is deleted, file Nos. k+l to n change to Nos. k to
n-I.
Before deletion
After deletion
t to (k-r)
I to (k-1)
k
Deleted
(k+1) ro
k ro (n-l )
Note 2) Deletion is possible only when the write protect key of the cassette is
set to the upper posirion (RECORD side).
13.6
Precautions
13.6.1 Request for cassette replacement

lîhen one file has been entered
over two cassettes, the red and. green lamps on

the adaptor fla'sh alternately on completion of data input/output between the
first cassetce and the CNC, prornpting cassette replacement. In this case, take
Ehe first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place.
Then, data input/output will continue autoroatical-Iy.
Cassette replacement is pronpted when the second cassette is required during
file search-out, data input/output between the CNC and the cassette, or fil-e
deletion.
Note I) Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptorr oo special
operation is required. The CNC will inrerrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserLed into the adaptor.
i
:{
-318-
13.3.2 Offset data output
The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette.
i
l) Select the EDIT mode.
2) Select the tool offset data display sereen by pressing OFSET key.
3) Press the START key.
4) Specify file search-out when required.
For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.3.3 CNC parameter output
The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette.
I) Select the EDIT mode.
2) Specify file search-out when required.
3) Select the parameter display screen by PARAM key.
4) Press che START key.
For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.4 Data Input Operation

Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette to the
CNC.
13.4.1 CNC program input
A program can be input fron the cassette to the CNC by operatlng as described ln
"CNC tape input" after searching the file head in EDI'T or AUTO node as described
above.
1) Search the file head.

' Push Nl to N9999, N-9999.or N-9998 l--ffil
t.y.
2) Push INPUT button again. (Data is input by this operation.)
(When changing the program No. r push as follows.:
f O-l r program No. +
INPUT
button. )
(Note) If the above input operation is conducted by turning on the protect key
(r(d\.V ) the program in the memory is collated with that in the cassette
'
tr*"rpriiti;*r"."ring
(Operation I)
N2 [-rNPUr
N2
frNFur I
N-9999
Ns
N-eeee
ITTFI-fl]
| ?t\lDrrT
I rrrr ur
I
I
I rNPUfl
f rNPUr I
Slow
(Operation 3)
l-rNPUfl
INFUT-I
...
Second
file
FN-FU-f-l
...
Second
file input
N2
l-iNP-uT-l
rTN'mrl
N4
to'fifrh files of the "r"".ttj ro the memory.
(Operation 2)
t-irFdf-l
N3
second
head searching
[TN-mtl
| rNpur I ... Third file head searching

[TFFU-T-] ... Third f ile input
|_Txmtl
t-lN-FTf] .. . Fourth f i1e head searching
l-rNPufll
N-9998
t-ffi]
... Third file input
N-eeee l-lNFtrT-l
frNpur
Quick
fTFmil ...
Fif th f ile head searching
Fifth file input
Quick
-317-
Head search tlme
c)
N-9999
The file next to that accessed just before is searched.

d) N-9998
When N-9998 is designated, N-9999 in (c) is automatically
inserted each time
a file is input or output. This condition is reset by the
designation of
(a), (b) or (c) or reser.
Note I) when files exist in the cassette, designations of

N0 and NI resulr in
the same effects. However, when the files do not exist
in the cassette,
an ararm is indicated if Nt is designated (since there
1s no first
file).
When N0 is designated, an alarm is not indicated
since
the head
is searched regardless of the existence of file.
conduct
N0 head
searching when writing the programs from the beginning of the cassette
"fil.".
after cancelling a new cassette or a1r of the
Note 2) An alarm is not in'uoediately indicated in the cNC
"*i"ai'g
unlt even when an alarm
occurs during head searching (when a file is not found,
or the like).
P/S alarm 86 is indicated when the inpui/output operation
is performed
arEer Enat.
Note 3) The same result is obtained both by sequentially searching
files by
specifying Nos. Nl ro N9999 and by firsr searching one of the
Nl
ro
N999b
and then using rhe N_9999 searching nethod. The searching tj_me
is
shorter in the latter case.
13.3
Data Output Operation
Observe the follcwing procedure to output data from the CNC

to the cassette.
output F
A program can be output frorn the cNC Eo the cassette by the folrowing
operation.
1) Output of one program
. o + program No. + [-srenFl tey
2) Output of all programs
o + _e999 * l-stenFl ruy
lfith this operation, the program is output as the. new file after
files
existing in the cassette. A new cassette or a cassette in which old the
files
are
made invalid and new files are to be written from the
beginning,
use
the
above
output operation after the N0 head searching.
13.3.1 CNC program
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
r) when P/s alarm 86 occurs during program output, the cassette i,s restored
to the condition before the outpuc.
2\ when program output is conducted after
NI to N9999 head searching,
new f_ile is output as the designated n-th position. rn this case, the
r to
n-1 files are effective, but the files
the
old
n-th
one
are
deleted. rf an alarm occurs during output,"rt",
only the 1 to n-I files are
restored.
3) The cassette is provided with the wrj.te protect
slide.
the slide to
the upper position (RECORD side) and inserr the cassetteset
ro
rhe
adaprer.
rn thie condition, make sure that the red lamp lights.
Then,
start
output operation.
4) Head searching with the file No. is necessary when
file output from
the cNC to the cassette is again input to ir," cNCthe
memory or conpared
with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, irnme4i3g"1, after the
file is output from the CNC to the cassette, record the file No. on the
memo sheet of the cassette.
5) To efficiently
use the memory in the cassette, output the program by
setting parameter NFED of parameter No. 0002 or 0012
to 1.
.a
-316-
..1r"r,
13.
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1IBZIF'II
13.1
What is a File
unlt of data, which ls lnput/output between the cassette and the CNC by one
input/output operation (pressing the l-REID-l or l-?ffiettl k"y), is called a ttf iletr.
When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette, for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file.
Files are assigned file numbers I,2,3r4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
The
Flle I
One
File
File
File n I
Blan]c
flle can also be written over two cassettes as folLows:
Cas-
File I
sette I
Onee
ntinuation
of file k
Cas-
sette
File
File
File(k-1) I
File n I
File (k+l )
written ln the cassette, data
can subsequently
FrLE k
Blank
be read out by correspond-
file numbers. This correspondence cannot be

data
contents
and file numbers are outPut to the CNC and
verified, unless the
displayed. Therefore, wtren,writing data Ln the cassette, enter the file numbers
and data contents in the memo column.
ence between the data contents and
Entry example on MEMO

File
NC parameters
File
Offset data
File
NC
Ftle (n-1)
NC program 00500
FiIe
NC program 00600
13.2 File
When
progran
00100
Heading
the program is input from the cassette, the file to be input first nust
searched.
For this purpose, proceed as follows:

l) Select EDIT or AUTO node.
2) Push l-Pnffil t"y.

4) Kev in the file No.
5) Push ttre l-rllPur I tey.
The following head searching occurs aecording
a)
N0
to the nurnber speeified:
The beginning of the cassette is searched.

b) One of NI to N9999
of rhe file Nos. I to 9999, the designated flle is searched.
-3r5-
be
12. DATA
OUTPUT
12.1 Tool Offsets

The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The
output data format is the same as the offset data input (programnable data
input - G10 -) format specified by the tape command.
l) Seting the data output interface.
Set the data output interface in the parameter.
Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casset.te, or ASR33/43.
2) Setfing the output code

Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data.
3) Set the mode to EDIT.
4) Press OFFSET key.
5) Press START key.
6) Offset values are started to be output and OUTPTTT is displayed during output ting .
7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key.
After the RESET key is pressed, output of remaining offset data cannot be
started.
12.2
Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output
data format is the same as the parameter tape format.
1) Setting the data ousput interface
Set the data output interface in the parameter.
Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casserte, or ASR33/43.
2) Setting the output code

Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data.
3) Set the mode to EDIT.
4) Press PARAM.
5) Press START key.
6) Parameters are started to be output and "OUTPUT" is displayed during outPut t ing
7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key.

After the RESET key is pressed, output of rernaining parameters cannot
started.
-314-
be
11.9 Clock
Time is displayed on the status indication line (line l5)
setting I screen.
00001
PARA]"IETER
(SETTING
=
REVY =
TVON =
REVX
0
0
0
and
thg parameter
N000i
I)
rS0 =0 (O:ErA
INCH=0 (O:MM
(0:INC
ABS =0
sEQ =0
1:rSO)
1:INCH)
1:ABS)
NO. CLOCK ='

I7H251"105S
Correction of time can be urade on the parameter setting I screen.

llove the cursor to the itern'to be corrected, enter correct time, and then press
the rrrNPUT" key.
However no time is set if a negative value is entered or the maximun value ln
each item is exceeded.
Item
Maximum
Year
I'1onth
99
value
L2
31
23
59
59
Day
Time
Minute
Second
Note) The time at the status indication line (1ine l5th) is not displayed
rhe "NOT READY'I is displayed.
313
when
HOLE PATTERN
Menu
title
An optional character string can be displayed within 12

characters.
BOLT HOLE
Pattern name
An optional character string can be displayed within l0
characters.
The machine tool builder should program character strings of menu title
and pattern name by custom macro, and load thern into the program memory.
Enter the desired pattern number by keying operation.
r--]
-;l:
l, for example
I TJIINPUT
2) Pattern data display

When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are di.splayed.
: BOLT HOLE
M1@ t&glz
NO. ].|ANE
DNTA COHHENT
Tma
_5S8
541 KIJUN X
E .BoLT HOI-E
SAzKIJUNY
A
CIRCLE*
543 RNDILIS
8 SET PRTTERN
544 S. ANGL
B DATA TO UAR.
5Z5r{_E. No
a ND.5AA_5A5.
UAR.
566
a
5A?
a
ACTUq- POSIT IOI.I (RELRTITE)
x
6.ga@
g.w
z
f,. W=
I1D
BOLT HOLE
TOOL
....
*BOLT HOLE CIRCLE* :
@.w
S gT
I
Pattern data title

An optional character string can be displayed within
12 characters.
Variable name
An optional character string can be displayed within
l0 characters.
Corment statement
An optional charaeter string conment can be displayed
up to 12 characters/line, g lines.
The machine tool builder should program the character strings of variable
name and comment statement by custom macro, and load thern inlo the prograrn
memory.
Enter necessary pattern data value.

set the, cursor to a desired variable by
udLd
vdruE.
r '
q
|I _
rr\rul
- lltl J llo
il v llll Tl\.]F"h
I, Iof
example
cuRSoR
tf
keys, and inpur rhe
After inputting all pattern data, select the AUTo mode, and depress the
cycle start key, and the desired machining can be done.
-3L2-
,i*Ffi;i
b)
Usage
When
the
command
of
M02
or
1,130
is
executed, the
re
parts and the number of nachined parts ar

Therefore, create the program so that t
total number of
dbv one.
machined
ar -eJ eggg e- 4-*-eJeJJ- !-lne

i"_9!_ ot. -par_t.-iE
Furthermore, even if the M code set to Ehe pararneter ry
count.ing is made in the sinilar manner.
Also, it is possiJrle- to-*itle
counting even if the M02 or M30 is executed
the _proce
xs
$e:e
When the
number of marc.--h1_-ed parts reaches the number of required parts'

signal is output to the PMC.
However, when the number of require-d. paEts is ttOtt (inf init{ maximum), no
outPutismade.Fordetai1s,Sachinetoo1builders.
11.7
Alarm Display (Function t<ey.
IEAF'M])
When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displdyed at bottom, pressing the

button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below.
See APPENDIX 9 for the meaning of the alarm number.
I'EsSME
514 GrR 1gq-n :
536 o|.,|:R TRT.E- :
ALARM
WEB IWB
CL.RI,I
+X
+Z
Note) When an alarm occurs the alarm message is usually automatically displayed.
11.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Display
l) Pattern menu display

a) Select an offset or custom macro variable cRT by depressin,
b)
Depres"
key again.
I.E}{.J
: HX-E PNTTERN
Ot@ NIWB
1. Bg_T t-g_E
2. GRID
3. LIF NN-E
4. TAPPII.G
5. DRILLII.
6. Bmlls
?. FOQ<ET
8. PECK
9. TEST
1el. mK
el=IFCT=
S
MDI
311
gT
Et#rlo.r.
I
PART COUNT
RUN TIME
CYCLE
1.6.2
TIME
Indicates the number of parts. IÎhen M02 or M30 is executed,

it is increased by +I. To preset the PART COUNT to "0",
press P and CAN key.
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation'
excluding the stop and feed hold time.
To preset the RUN TIME to "0", press R and CAN key.
(It is not preset Lo "0" by cutting off power. )
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
This is automatically preset to ttOrr when a cycle sEart is
performed at reset state.
(It is preset to "0" by cuEting off power.)
Parameter setting screen
(m1 h@
PrnflIER
(SETTIhG 2)
pt = 1 (O:DISAH 1:ElRHl)
g
=
-RElr4
TNPEF= A
I
TgTfl- =
A
15
PART CIII.IT =
1Ht6r,l cYol Tll anlgtE!;
Ftl.t rric
fO. RE\4 =
FDI
29:3:l:43
PffiT
Pffif FFT|JIROE
lPffi*4
llFGll
ll
ll
a) Display contents and setting

l) PART TOTAL (tota1 number of machined parts)
It is incremented by one when the M code specified by M02, M30 or
parameter fnO. --7T-91. i.s. commanded. The setling cannot be made on this
screen. On-FTetting of parameter :(\0: !ll2)'can be made.
REQUIRED (number of parts required)PART
2)
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required. When the
trOrr is set to it, there i-s no lirnitation to the number of parts. A1so,
its setting can be made by the parameter FO:lqC]
3) PART COUNT (number of machined parts)
It is incremented by one along with the total number of machined parts.
4) RllN TIME (operation time)
The operation time added during automatic operation is displayed.
5) CYCLE TIME (cutting tine)
The run time during one automatic operation is displayed.
Note 1) Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of ttMtt andttStt of run
time is valid from 0 to 59.
Note 2) Even if a negative value is set to the parameter nunber 0779 of the
total number of machined parts, a positive value can be displayed. Do
not set a negative value since the value is decremented by one when
counted.
-310-
iv) Actual rate display

The actual feedrate per ninute of machine can be displayed on the current
display screen and program check screen by setting the parameter (No. 0028
DACTF).
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:

n4
Fact
r (fi)z
i=I
where,
n
fi
: Number of axes
: Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axls or rapid
traverse rate
Fact: Display speed
The display unit: mm/urin (Input in units of mn).
inch/rnin (Input in units of inch. However' t\^to places

below the decimal point are displayed.)
In the case of per revolution feed and thread cutting, the dtsplay speed
is displayed by the speed per minute rather than that per revolution.
Note 2) In the case of shift of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of
deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that
time. For example, when the shift speed of rotary axis is 50 deg/rnin,
the following is displayed: 0.50 INCtiiM
Note 3) Display is made only during automatic operation on the program cheek
Note 1)
screen.
11.6 Display of Run Time
and Parts Count
When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are
'
displayed on the screen.

11.6.1 Actual position
screen
MN.r{- POSITI(N (ASILUTE)
o2@@@ NA19A
x
Y
z
RrN
-1,2.5@A
-42.5@@
@.@@@
rrFE *,r- .*-ETIAfl -.J
t;_ll-.*lr*Jfun
-309-
ii) In the relatlve coordinate system

(It can be displayed by pressing soft
key I REfl. )
rcTLrL PGITISI (RELATILE)
a@@@L
x
Y
z
224.359
285.449
TIt
Ff,T.F tw
29: 18:21
R.H
N@A@@
L9@.299
PRT qINT
1H1$1 Crc-E
llv'tl
TII A.l 1l'143S
-l[*'11-ll-l
t"* lf*l'lDI
The relative position is displayed in which the position reset by

operaEor is zero.
an
Reset oDeration
thG-G-Aisplayed, prss the l-Xl, l-Fl or l-ilI tcey. The address on

the display witl flicker. Then press the l-Tffi-l key. The relative
position of the flickering address will be reset to zero.
ffi;
lii)
Overall display
'
simultaneously:
(It can be displyed by pressing soft key lTi,L-].)

The current position in the following coordinate system is displayed
(a) Position in the relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
(b) Position in the work coordinate system (ABSOLUTE)
(c) Position in the machine coordinate system (MACHINE)
(d) Residual movement amount (DISTANCE T0 G0)
trruf_ P(FITtg{
(REIJTII)
xY &.*
G. 156
4I.45
(Fm{r)
x 34.35Et
Y
.234
z &L.g?
tE61
(SEILIJTE)
r.@
xY &.*
S. 156
Z 4r.97
(DlsTF}G
TO Gn)
X E_641
Y W.Tn
7 1g,.5E,62
PRT CCI.|.|T
15
R_N TIt
ltAl CYCLE TIl Or 61455
FCT. F
t@ rwtl
21:35: S
llDI
IRE IIREL llflr
ll
ll
The residual movement amount lndicates the uovenent amount remalning in

one block of a conrnand, and is displayed ln AUTO or MDI mode.
The unit of the machine coordinate system is the saue as that of Ehe
-achine system.
-308-
W2 IW,
CHECK
Wt
ira egz ><B Y8 F8 ,
t@ w xLffi. YLa. t
t{fi @l Z16. FL6.5 t
(G)
(PFSA-UTE) (DIST TO GO)
6.@A W VA 6?
'/, -ts.na x
a.w GL? g9 Gg
'(
-5.%6 Y
a.qaa G% w 64
z -15.n4 z
A.AW G94 GS
A -a.sw A
GzL t=Jg
trPHS
ttr657
P
o
PRMRFfl
RDRS.
f,JTO
F**'l I.*-*l l-**l F**l
f*l
The data is displayed only in |'AUTO" mode. For the display of a Page of block
being executed withi.n the memory, the block being executed is displayed at the
top. The position (ABSOLUTE) in the work coordinate system or relative

coordinate system (RELATIVE) and remaining movement (DIST T0 G0) are displayed.
11.5 Current Position Display (Function key. lilSl)
(1) Push tne IETI tey.
(2) Push a PAGE key. Data will be displayed in one of the following three ways.
i) In the work coordinate system
(It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-AEil.)
rruH.
PCSITI(N CNF(IUTE)
N@A@A '
22A.261
o@@@1,
xY
z
27I.58?
339.483
6
PrRT CofiT
TtrG 1Ht3,| Crc-E TIt An il'ets
ACT.F ten l'nfl
llDI
2g:15:B
RrN
I"*ll
*"-
ll*ll-lt-l
The current value in a prograrmed coordinate system seE with G92, is

displayed.
-307-
r
I
111)
il
values entered fron the MDI or nodal values prevlously speclfied

are displayed.
(It can be dlsplayed by pressing soft key llmt l.l
Command
PR$RFr'r
0'1D I )
x
Y
(]2m
(ttrDnt_)
La'fl2
M.ffi
&B
G@R
G1?
GgB
G21
GgtH
. BlaS
G49 T
fi
M138
15
w.
GM
Gga
6?
Are.
I'IDI
iiil
l**'l l"*".'ll-*l [_*;l T-_l
Hii
il
Display in MDI mode only
lv) one page includLng a block currently executed in the

p 1ayed.
(It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-FRGRM l. )
PRfERtr,I
W:
\t<9
program
ls dls-
TPM tg138
\g m. t
VB Y-'78. :
t
Nlz Z-n.
N13a G1? 4L GaL X1?.5 l FnzB t
N74Z U2 G39 l-l?.s :
N1@ G32
N11A G!f1
N1s6 Br1 GA3 X-1?.5 Yi.?.s R1?.5 ;

N16A G81 X-?F. t
Nr? GzP
N18[| G61
N1*t
BErt
p?.5 Y27.5 V7.5

X-15. ;
)<Et
Are.
A cursor
11.4 Display for
YEt ;
flJm
ls indlcated at the beginnLng of a block belng executed.
Program Check
The program check screen is displayed by pushing the CHECK soft key. The
display includes the page for a program block in memory being displayed at
present, th'd present positi-on, and modal value previously conuranded.
-306-
11.3 Command Value Display (Function key:
[FR-GF-M)
i) Push tt'e I-FIcnt't] tey.

2) Push a PAGE button. Data will be displayed in the following four'ways.
(Each screen can be selected by soft keys.)
i) Cornrnand values being executed, and modal values previously specified are
displayed.
(It can be displayed by pressing sofr t.y l-cunnrlrl.)
tP@ l130
PRGRFT.I
(CI-RRENT)
x
L?.v9
G61 F
XEB
G1?H
2
(l'nDfl-)
uL
F
R
6I?P
G91 0
63lH
@1 M
er1 s
G8A
GBA
GA1
G49 T
SEl
s6?
Bf
AJTO
11) Cornrnand values being executed or to be executed next are displayed.

(It can be displayed by pressing soft tey I nnxrl.;
PRGRFT,{
(ORRENT)
x
I?.frB
G61F
W
G1?H
2
(FEfi)
G3Er
tP@
I.813B
-t?.VB
G41
BA
Ef
RUTO
l'-*''11""...-l[_*;lnn
-305-
a)
PRoGRAM
NO.
USED
The number of the programs registered (including uhe

subprograms)
FREE
b)
MEMORY AREA USED

FREE
C)
PROGMM
LIBMRY LIST
The number of programs which can be registered additionally.

The capacity of the program memory .in which data is
registered (indicated by the number of characters).
The capacity of the program memory which can be used
additionally (indicated by the number of characters) ..
Program Nos. registered are indicated.
Also, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting the
parameter No. 0040 (NAMPR).
0n the program name display screenr. the program number and program name are
displayed.
PROGMM
SYSTEM EDITION
PROGMM N0. USED :
I'IEI'{ORY AREA USED :
PROGMM
00001
00002
8 FREE :
321 FREE z
0615
00010
N0001
01
I
!
55
37 44
LIBMRY LIST
(MACRO-GCODE. I'lArN)
(MACRO-GCODE. suBl)
OOOIO (TEST-PROGRAM. ARTHMETIC NO. 1)
00020
00100
00200
or000
(TEST-PROGMM. FrO-MACR0)
(INCH/Ift,1 GNVERT CHECK NO. 1)
(MACRO-MCODE. MArN)
(MACR0-MC0DE. SUB1)
O2OOO (OFFSET TYPE-C CHECK PROGRAM)
ADRS.
EDIT
Note l) Always register a program name beEween the control out and control in
codes irnmediatelv after the program nunber.
oDfrl
(aaaa.
-__I
Program name (up
to 31 characters.)
Program number
Note 2)
Note 3)
Up to 3l
characters can be used for naming a program within the

parentheses. If 31 characters are exceeded, the exceeded characters
are no! displayed.
Only program nuurber is displayed for the program without any program
name.
-304-
11.
DISPLAY
11.1
Program Display
A progran number
in the photo.
and
sequence number
are displayed at the top right ' as

W
PRMRtrI
@;
seen
T:BL?9.
Yg Zn. t
m1 6n Y-79. ,
lll?fj Z-',n. t
N138 Gl? BI1 GB1 X1.?.s IJaP. FAEB
'
Nr4E H2 Gi39 I-1?.5 ;
N158 Bl1 m3 X-1?.5 Y1?.5 R1?.5 ;
N16g GA1 X-8. t
N1'7g GEP }u7.5 Y27.5 p7.5 ,
N1E[| GA1 X-15. ;
N1*t G@ ru YA t
N1@ G92 \i<9
N116
ADRS.
IIJTO
l**.1t"**.'ll '-.'l f-__l f--l

the program ls being edlted tn EDIT mode, the program No. being edited and
the sequence number just prior to the cursor are indicated.
In case other than program edit, the program No. and the sequence No. executed
last are indicated. Or, lnnnediately after the program No. search and sequence
No. search, the program No. .and the sequence No. searched are indlcated.
Wtren
11.2 Displaying Program Memory
Used
Proceed as follows:
I ) Select EDIT rnode.

(For sof t key, press scf t tey [TnCml l. )
3) Kev in address P.
4)
p"strlrllpurlbutton.
Or re-push the
PRGRM
button instead of the step 3) and 4).
(]2@ l.o1$
WB _ 6L
:
S
I FREE :
36 FREE 2 37TO
I'E}.FV ARSR IJSED :
PRTER*I LIMFff LIST
EEBI WzB CEEEB VE$) BtN OT&
u9@. wB3
PRGRtr'I
S/STE}I EDITI$I
PRmRfl1 l.O. LEED
EDIT
-303-
#
6)
Shift the cursor to the offset number position in the

l-6-1
rhe of f ser value
;",' ;'J:l#
7) Depress
rrNpur r
played as an offset value.
::ij.
JJj
same
way as in setting
r---T,1
::r"ffi..:Jr:r|,*+1":n,,.
".,0
o,"-
Reference
tool
This difference is set
as an offset value.
I
I
I
I
Fixing point
(Note)
n", is depressed
"'E
H
or Y axis relative coordinate value is
rf
either
insread or
t.r in 6), the
l-9-l
input as an offset value.
.:
,t
!t
-302-
FFIL
OLW IW3B
SKIP : IOFF El.l
-B-OA<
Sltg-E B-OCK :
FF l0.l
lGCtlll LOO( : IFF
S{
: IFF
S{
DRI Rtfi
PROTECT KEY :
TPROTECT RELEffiE
: IOFF til
FEED F0-D
CPERITO?'S
MTLNL
x
z
P6ITIO{
g.w
g.w
(ABSO-UTE)
g.w
6T
t"-"".lffi--il_-1l---1n
[Tl or fTl key, and march rhe cursor ro the position of the desired
Push l-Fl or [Tl key to march the mark ! ro an arbitrary positlon and set
c) Push
switch.
d)
the desired condition.

2) Jog feed operation
a) Push the
key to display the screen of the software operatorrs
panel.
b) Select JOG node

c)
Jog feed can be performed by pushing the desired arrow

key.
Jog rapid tr.averse can be conducted by pushing the
key together with the arrow key.
Note l) When the CRT indicates other than the software operatorrs panel screen,
jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed.
Note 2) The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set
with parameters (paramerer Nos. 0f30 to 0135).
3) General-purpose switches
Eight optionally definable switches are added as an extended function of che
software operatorts panel. The name of these switches can be set by parameters as characEer strings of max. 8 charact.ers.
For the meani.ngs of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine
tool builder.
/ 10.8 Tool Length Measurement
I/
--l:I Setect a reference tool, and attach the reference tool to the rnachine fixing
point (or fixing point on the workpiece) manually.
2) Display the relative coordinate positlons by depressing l-pOS I and PAGE keys.
tAl
3) Preset the Z-axis relative coordinate value- to
depressing |)L |ana
a.by
-zero
a,t.,t.1 |
l-aAN
lkeys.>Ar z Zlaoecn^T*#''on' Cozt)
4) Select an offset
U"t.
l_&_l
5) Select a tool to be measured, and aitach it to the
page by depressint
same fixing point manually. A difference between the reference tool and the tool to be measured is
displayed as the relative coordinate va1ue. (This is also displayed on Lhe
offset page)
-301-
10.5 Pitch Error Compensation
Data
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the
machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the
machine model. rf it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced.
In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
10.6 Data Protection
key
A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of
parE program input and editing.
For where the kev is mounted, refer to the manual issued by machine tool
builder.
1O.7 Software Operator's Panel
I^lith this function, functions of the switches on the machine operatorrs panel
can be conducred from the CRT/MDI pane1.
The following can be conducted via the CRT/MDI panel.
a) Group I : Mode select.ion
b) Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapid traverse
c) Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse g"o"irtor feed axis, selecgion of manual
pulse magnification xl, xlO, xl00
d) Group 4 : Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
e) Group 5 : optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock, dry run
f) Group 6 : Protect key
g) Group 7 : Feed hofd
Whether to operate from CRT or uachine operator's panel can be determined bv the
parameter OPGI to OpGT (No. 017) for each group.
I) Setting of mode selection, etc.
t-- EE-r
a)- Push | ALARM
| .."::t-1.I.
b) ry"n ffi
key to display rhe necessary page
(rr can be"I1a
disptayed by pressing soft t"v ftpft-l]l
Pfl\FL
01@ tt&I3A
;
_IODE IF1DI FUTO EDIT t+{U_ JG ZRN
FFNq-E RXIS : IFrX I{Y IZ.
f-FND-E FllT. : l*1
'L@
RnPID O,RD. I ate2Y. gz 'f@
n4, FA
Jm FEED : 5cE1 tt'l,,t'ltN
Err
FEED O.RD. :
fff-r......
ACTI-H- PGITIS.| CNBSS-UTE)
g.w
x
Y
9.@
UcEqqTO?'S
a.w
g1
t"tDI
-300-
i
I
'
in a__p.ereqgter value by data input keys.

Depress
s)
lT?u-il. The paramerer value is input and displayed.
h) After all parameters have been set and confirmed, turn to
f)
?)
Key
the setting
screen, and return the PWE setting to i
i) Depress the RESET key ro release the alarm condition. When alarm No. 000
has occurred, turn off the power supply and t,hen t.urn it on, otherwise Ehe
alarm is not released.
Setting of parameters using a tape
This method is effect.ive only when the reader/puncher i.nterface option is
combined. Parameters can be input from the tape reader or teletypewriter
ASR33/43.
7o
L
F
L N
L N
F
(a)
Vo
(e)
N
L
F
\+
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fis. 10.4.2 Parameter setting tape format
a) Punch 7" (ia case of ISO code) or ER or CR (in case of LF of EIA code) at
the start of the tape.
b) Punch the data number following address N next to the end of block code
(lf i.n ISO code or CR in EIA code) .
c) Punch Ehe data to be set after address P. Punched data at the address
should correspond to the parameter number punched at address N.
d) Punch the end of block code. Continue steps b), c), d), as required. A
data number following address N must be punched at the start of each
block. Leading zeros of parameter data following P are omittable.
F
LF and Z (in case of rso code) or cR or ER (in case of ErA code)
t )--f) Punch
finally.
Data input from the tape is finished with'the input of these
t
codes.
E
t
Parameters not speclfied on the tape renain unchanged even if the parameter setting tape is input
The Parameter setting tape prepared by the above procedure can be input
f
according to the following proeedure.
i) Ser PWE = I (CRT/MDI lanet).
ii) Select EDIT mode on operator's panel.
iii) Select PARAI'I on CRT/MDI panel.
iv) Turn on INPUT button on CRT/MDI panel.
v) SeE PWE = 0 (CRT/MDI panel).
vi) Turn on RESET key on CRT/I'{DI panel. (Turn on and off the pov/er of CNC,
if alarm number 000 occurred.)
(rf
?.
Note l) The tape stops traveling when any of the following alarus ls detected.
i) TH or TV (with TV check rurned on) is in pariry error.
ii) An address other than N and P was input.
iii) An N or a P value is disallowable.
Note Ll Depress RESET k"y, if iE is desired to stop setting from the tape
halfway.
Note 3) A part of parameters doesnrt become effective unless power supply is
turned off (when alarm No. 000 occurred).
Note 4) Parameters related to the reader/puncher interface must be set from MDI,
etc. before inputting paramet.ers from the tape.
-299-
10.4.2 Parameter setting
1) Setting of parameters by using buttons on CRT/MDI panel

paqE-l .
a) Press I
n"r.
LEGI
Press page key to display setting parameter page.
(Ir can be displayed by pressing sofr key fSETmil.)
PFRtrTER
IWB
(SETTI}S 2)
jPtE = 6 (A:DISAE-E l:EMB-E)

REU4 = A
m.
PlEi
TT-] _
Press cursor button and set the cursor ro PIÎE. Key
l rurut l, and
- in Ii jn ft-parameter is able to be written. NC is placed to P/S alaru No. 100 con-
dition.
b) Select tp_MD.lnFde (or ser rhe emdrgency stop condition).

c) Depress I PaneU I key ro display parameters on the CRT screen.
d) Depress the page key to display a desired parameter Daqe.
(It can be displayed by pressing soft key lTExr l.l '
I
PARFTTM
f0.
mTF
_mt wtffi
w.
wffit
@3 Wt
w
ww7
w6 w^r
ffiwr@t6w
w7 wwffi!
w@w@raw
wE w
@74 Wtn
I'O. @11
|IPRR4 il
W IefEN
hn. mTA
e6tl w
taIz w
@13 W
@74 W
@ts w
eftt1 11111111
e3L9 W
@
@
=
MDI
r-----l
lloaruos ll
u
e)
--_-.|
Shift the'cursor Eo the position of the parameter
Method I
CURSOR
number
to be changed.
Depress FdGsoE-l tey. If this button is depressed continuously, the cursor shi.fts sequent ia1ly . If the cursor
exceeds a page , the next page appears on the CRT screen.
Parameter number
a.'a
lrxFirill.
!
I
I
I
I
e
-298-
10.3 Custom Macro Variable

common. variables (/l|100 to /1131, #500 to /153t) can be displayed on the
the following procedure.
The
\NRIRH-E
mTA
fn.
fo.
rw
1@
_l@
T61
6
LW
L@. -W
LLA
143
6
ItI
IU
t?sffl.L LIz
166tL3f,
16
a
L14
fn6115A
rcI,.H- PGITIO.I (RELFTIl,E)
x
s.w
Y
z s.w
hE- L@
CRT by
|WEb
mTA
A
$EM
L$Pffi
1
mffi
6.WE
lrDl
the absolute value of variable exceeds the value 99999999, rr**********tr is

displayed.
l) Display
.IMENT-I .butron.
a)\ s
Push
t;:-:_
|
I urJlr
b) Display the desired page by pAGE butron.
(It can be displayed by pressing sof t key I I,tecno-l.l
2) Serring
a) Display the desired page.
b) Move the cursor to the desired variable number. (Sane as item 10.i (l)
When
(c)
c) Key-in the variable value by data i.nput kev.

d) Push I-INPUT lkey, and rhe input value is displayed. '
3) Setting the coordinate value to variable
a) Move the cursor to the desired variable number
b)J* [-fl tr.. X axis) ,
(ror Y axis) or l ; | (for Z axis) while pushing
k.y.
lLl
c)-pustr'I INpUT I burron. The relative coordinate value for X, Y or Z axis is

input and displayed on the variables.
10.4
System Parameter
Parameters must be set correctly so that' the servo

machine tool specifications, and machine tool functions
NC is connected to the DC servo motor or nachine tool.
meters depend upon machine tools, refer to the atEached
by the machine tool builder.
10.4.1 Parameter display
motor charact.eristlcs,
are fulIy displayed when
Since contents of paraparameter table prepared
l) Depress [-F-AnMl button on CRT/MDI panel.

2) Select a desired page by depressing page k"y (,T1,[r]).
-297 -
15.4 Caution
1) Work coordlnate system revlsed by follow up becomes effective {rom the next
automatlc operation.
2) Inch/uretrl.c converslon functLon can not be used with this function.
.:
;'Jd;*t4t*ciuz
, / .,.
, ".r*;ii!'i"'
-331-
'
16.
DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF
OO-MB
The CRT/IDI panel of 00-I{B consists of a CRT display (14" color) and keyboard.
Contents of display and operation by k.y input are completely different

depending on whether the CNC screen or I'ffC screen is displayed on the CRT/Mnf
panel. In this manual, the operation when only the CNC screen is displayed ig
described. Refer to the manual of machine tool builder for MMC screen.
Reset key
MMC/CNC switch keY
Shitt key
Start/
output
key
Program
edit key
Input
key
Function key
Fig.
16
CRT/MDI for 00-MB
-332-
*63ii'#
^:'!6*^
16.1 Display
Press "CNCtr key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen when the MMC
screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/I{DI panel. The bnC screen
consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the
part that is surrounded by the fraue at t.he bottom right, and its display
contents are the same as displayed on the 9" CRT display of O-MB. Therefore'
the screen selecEed by function k"y, page k"y, cursor k"y, and soft key is
displayed.
The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display
contents are position data, operation time (optional)' modal data,. and S, T
command value, as shown on the screen in the Fig. 16.1. Display -iterns of this
section cannot be changed by the screen selecEion operation.
However, its display contents are always renewed.
N.E F(EI'IOI 6EOIJIE)
c!'|rn e
.@60 0a@a9 ffi
Er' rl' zn ,i
a . oo@
@,a@a N@aag cl.'E'fc o'i"'6
z
I
omt
64@F
61?
649
BP
840
EIH
64n
I
F
*?
N}.
_@1
@
@
a4
E
G
g,
@
@
ale
DfiN
!@tE
@11
EW
011181t1
t11t0111
XT
ott
@12
613
a14
A!5
81118111 @15
at1!R111 017
4$
@Ll
ef,t9
u@!4
&D
!t@1ss
hTA
@
q&nt
rogfim0
m
@
@&D
0111111t
@@
@94
@
61
l-|r-rrqnntrlrl[ti-ll--l
Fis. 16.1
16.2 Operation
Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT
display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently
arranged on 00-MB. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0-l'IB.
The page key t *, cursor key t *, and selection key <- + on the software
Press the
operatort s panel are of combined use wich the function k.y.
page
key,
and
key
on the
key
for
use
key,
cursor
selection
as a
corresponding
software operatorrs panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the
ttFUNC" key as the function key.
Five keys on the righc half ten keys are effective for the varl-able section, and
Ehe other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position
display data in the fixed section.
-333-
.t
-i
:t
a
:l
.l
tt
,,.,,,
, -:i!#
.::.1
IV
MAINTENANCE
i-
1.
FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
a fuse blows ln a part of the CNC unit, find and correct the cause of
failure and replace the fuse. Fuses used in the CNC unit are as follows:
When
1.1
Specif ication
Fuses used
in
of
Fuses
CNC
unlt are as follows:

Table
of unlt
Nrtne
Power supply
the
1.1
Parts svmbol
F11, Fl2
Units mounting fuses and specifications of fuses
Capacity
5A
Speclf icat ions

A60L-0001
-0194 #5.0
Fr3
3.2
A60L-0001
-a046
F14
5A
113.2
Use
For 200V AC lnput power

supply
For 24V DC for rnpstslr

option PCB, and CRT/MDI
unit
Not used
A60L-0001
-0046 #5.0
Additional
I/O 81
Input unit
F5l
Fl,
F2
1.6
l0A
A60L-000r
Protection from an
external defect of
machlne side 24V DC
line
A60r-0001 -0901
For 200V AC input power
-0046 llr.6
PCB
#P41C0H
F3
0.3 A
A60L-000i -0r72
/iDMo3
1.2
Mounting Positions of Fuses
1.2.1
Power supply unit
3.2 A fuse
(Fl3)
5A fuse (Fl4)
5 Afuse
(Fll,Fl2)
-337-
supply
Fot' power
ON/OFF
control clrcuit
1.2.2 Additional l/O
81
1.6A fuse (F5l)
DI/DO connectors
1.2.3 InPut unit

Input unit rcB
*:n ll+ll
:\J
l-l
>n
-'t'
For input unit
without
servo
-l
F--l .-
=b
:L
rpz
0.3A
Fuse
(F3)
10A Fuse
(Fl, F2)
;
G
.;
-338-
-_
*
f
2.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1
1)
General
the type of problem:

In what mode is the controller?
What is displayed on the CRT/MDI?
What is the status dlsplay?
Is there a posltioning error? If so, on whlch axis and by what amount?
Is there a tool path error? If so, by what amount?
Is the speed normal?
Check
Is the problem in an auxiliary function?

What is the alarm nuuber?
2) Check the frequency of occurrence:
When did the probleur occur? What is its frequency? (Was another machine
also being operated?)
What is the frequency on the same workpieces?
What is the sequence number?
Which program is it;
Is the problem related to a specific mode?
Is the problem related to tool replacement?
Is the problen related to the feedrate?
3) For re-occurring problems:
Go through the program tape where the error occurs rePeatedl-y.
Check the numerical value in memory of NC and conpare it with the prograrlmed
numerical value.
Is the problem due to an external cause?
Check the stored offset amount and the amount remaining after distribution.
Check the response to override (decrease or increase the override amount).
Ask the operator about details of the problem.
2.2
Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and
Interface Control
.
l)
Check the lnput voltage:

Are there fluctuations in the input voltage?
Is there a drop in the i.nput voltage?
Is front or rear door opened (door interlock)?
Is there some other device using large amounts of current?
Is there an electrlc discharge machine or welding nachine nearby?
2) Check perlpheral conditions:
What is the temperature of the controller? Did the temperaEure change?
it excessive?
Is the fllter dlrty?
Is the tape reader dirty?
Is there oil or cutting fluid about?
Are there any vibrations?
Is the unlt in direct sunlight?
3) Check for any external causes:
Has the machine recently been repalred or adjusted?
Has the magnetics cabinet recently been repaired or adjusted?
Has the NC unit recently been repaired or adjusted?
Is there a source of noise nearby?
(Example: Cranes, High-frequency machines, Electric dlscharge machines)
Has a new machine been mounted nearby?
Is there another NC with the same problern?
Has the user adjusted the NC?
Has the sarne problem occurred before?
-339-
Is
4) Check phases of operation:

Has the operator been properly instructed?
Has the operator been rePlaced?
Is the operator familiar with the program?
Does the program finish too early or vras lt lnterrupted?
Does the program contain an incremental command?
Is the tool compensation value correctly set?
If the tool compensation value was changed, was it done correctly?
Does the rnachine change to another mode of operation?
Is the block skip function used correctly?
Is the tape set correctly?
Are there any tape coding errors?
Has the machine tool been operated incorrectly.
5) Check punched tapes:
Is there dirt on the tape?
Are there any folds or wrinkles on the tape?
Are joints normal?
Did the program previously run norrnal1y?
Was the tape copied from a Baster tape?
Was it the punched tape?
Was the tape correctly punched?
Is the tape puncher normal?
I{as the wrong tape used?
Is the puncher in good condition?
6) Check the program
Is the program new?
Was the program crated according to the OPEMTORTS UANUAL?
Are addresses in the right order?
Does the problem occur in any specific block?
Does the problem occur in the sub-program?
Was the list of tapes created for checking?
7) Check for changes in operation
Has any change or adjustment been made in the operation procedure?
Has a fuse been blown?
Is the NC in the emergency stop state?
Is the machine tool ready?
Is the NC in the alarm status?
Is the MODE SELECT switch set correctly?
Is the switch on the tape reader set correctly?
Is the override switch set to the zero position?
Is the NC in the nachine lock status?
Is the NC in the feed hold status?
8) Check the machine itself:
Is the machine properly installed?
Does vibration occur during operation?
Is the tool tip normal?
Is there ahy offset due to tool exchange?
Is there sufficient backlash compensation?
Are there distortions in any part of the machine due to temperature changes ?
Was the workpiece measured correctly?
(1 meter of steel
Was the measurement nrade at a constant temperature?
changes lOp in length at a temperature change of loC)
Are the cables normal (bent, broken or damaged)?
Are the signal lines and power lines separated?
':
r-
it
'z
-340-
9)
Check the lnterface control:

Are power lines and NC cables nounted separately?
Is the shield normal?
Is a noise suppressor attached to the relay, solenoLd, and notor?
2.3 NC System Check (No tools required)

1)
control unit external conditions:

there damage to the cabinet?
the CRT/I"IDI panel normal?
the filter clean?
the reader clean?
the door of the reader closed?
Has operatlon nade with the door open?
Check that chips accurnulated on the cabinet did not fall inside when the door
Check
Is
Is
Is
Is
Is
was opened.
2) Cheek inside the control unit:

Is there dirt in the control unit?
Is the fan motor normal?
Is there corrosion?
3) Check the power unit:
Is the unit correctly connected?
Are all fuses OK?
Is the circuit breaker normal?
Is the voltage htithin the allowable
range?
Are the shield and cable duct grounded correctly?

Is the wiring path OK?
Are all terml-nals fully tightened?
.4) The grounding

Is the grounding connectLon OK?
Is the shield ground OK?
5)
Check
all
cables:
Are cable connectors fully pushed ln?

Are there any abnormalities in internal cables?
Are there any abnormalities in external cables?
Are there any scratches, bends or breaks?
6) Check prlnted circult boards:

Are all PCBs mounted properly?
Is the plug connector OK?
7)
Are physlcal condltions normal (no distortlons, etc.)?

What is the PCB editlon?
Are connections between prlnted circuit boards good?
Check the CRT/MDI unir:
Do the push buttons operate norrnally?
Is the tape cable nornal?
2.4
CNC Status Display
l-t seems that the CNC is executing nothing during cycle operatlng status,
the current status of the CNC is displayed on CRT screen at the diagnostic
number 700, 701 or 712 by pushing the DGNOS burton.
When
-341-
F'
Diagnostic llo.
0
CSCT
CITL
COVZ
CINP
CDWL
CMTI\
CFIN
a digit is 'rlr', the corresponding status ls effectlve.

CFIN: The M, S, or T function is being executed.
CMTN: A move command in the cycle operation is being executed.
CDh{.: Dwell is being executed.
CINP: An in-position check is belng executed.
COVZ: Override is at 02.
CITL: Interlock signal (STLK) is turned on.
CSCT: Speed arrival signal of spindle i-s turned on.
When
Diagnostl-c
0
No.
CRST
CRST: One of the followlng: The reset button on the MDI panel, energency stop,
or remote reset is on.
Diagnostic
No.
,,
STP
REST
RSTB
EMS
Indicates automatic operation stop or feed hold states.

troub leshooting
STP : The flag which stops the pulse distribution.
EMS :
:
CSU :
RSTB
2.5
These are used for
This is set at the followcondition.

External reset signal has been turned on.
Emergency stop signal has been turned on.
Feed hold signal has been turned on.
Reset button on the CRT/IDI panel has been turned on.
The mode has been changed to the manual node, such as JOG, HANDLE/
STEP, TEACH IN JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE.
(f) Alarm has been generated. (Soure alarms may not set the flag.)
This is set when one of the external reset, emergency stop, or reset
button has been turned on.
This is set when t.he emergency stop has been set on.
This is set when the reset button i.s on.
This is set when the emergency stop has been turned orlr or when the
servo alarm has been generated.
ing
(a)
. (b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
RESET:
CSU
Display of Position Deviation (DGNOS No. 800
Diagnostic
805)
No.
SVERRX
(X axis)
SVERRY
(Y axis)
SVERRZ
(Z axis)
-342-
Position deviation value of X, Y, Z l4th, 5th and 6th axes in order.

Diagnostic
No.
SVERR4
(4th axis)
SVERR5
(5th axis)
SVERR6
(6th axis)
2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point (DGNOS

Diagnoscic
i;
No. 820
'
8251
No.
ABSMTX
(X axis)
ABSMTY
(Y axis)
ABSMTZ
(Z axis)
ABSMT4
(4th axis)
ABSMT5
(5th axis)
ABSMI6
(6th axis)
The machine position from the reference point can be displayed on the CRT screen
as fol1ows.
i'
PtlSITI0.t
(RET.CTII)
x
19.868
Y -?.*t
z -27.?L6
(FM{IF)
x
5.141
Y -48. LZ?
z
L. r73
@24 tWffi
mTLH_
t.
CABSA-UTE)
X
Y
Z
18.86A
-7.W
-27.7L6
(DISTFTG TO E])
X
Y
Z
O.qBB
A-zBB
A.@B
T;_ll;-l|;_]T**ll-___l
The values displayed under "MACHINE'| are these value.
-343-
APPENDIXES
APPENDIX
,naracter
I
TAPE CODE LIST
S0 code
t'
o o
o o
o o
o
o
3 2
Character
EIA code
8
'l
0
o
o
o o
o o
o
o o
o o
o o
o o
at
3
4
o o 3
o
4
o
o 5
o
6
o o o 7
o
o
o o
o o
o
o
o
b
o o
d
o E
o
f
o c
h
o lo
J
o o k
o o
o o
o o
o
o
o o
o
o
o
o
o
K
o
o o
o
o
T.
!1
o o
o o
o o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o o
o o
ti
A
I
DEL
o o
o o o
o o
o
o o o
o
o
o
o
o o
o
o
o
o o
or
NL
o o
o o o
o
o
o o
o
o o o
]P
CR
o
SP
o ER
o
o
o
or
EOB
o
o
(2-4-7
-347-
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
l.rl
X
Y
Z
Delete (cancel an
error punch).
x Not punched. Can not
be used in significant
section in EIA code.
* Back space
* Tabulator
End of block
Carriage return
:t Space
o
o o
o
Jr
(2-4-s)
o o o
BS
o o
o
o
o
o o
o o o
o
o o
o Tab
o
o
o o o
o
z
o o o De1
o
o
Nuneral
cant information
section in ISO code.
Assumed as program No.
tn EIA code.
o
o
Blank
BS
o
o
o o
o c
x
o t
o o
o
o
o o o o
o
o
o
o
o
o
NUL
-F
Numeral
Numeral 6
Numeral 7
Numeral 8
Numeral 9
Address A
Address B
Address C
Address D
Address E
Address F
Address G
Address H
Address I
Address J
Address K
Address L
Address M
Address N
Not used at signifi-
o
o c
o o o
Nuneral 2
Numeral 3
c
o
o o
p
o
o o
Nurneral 0
Numeral I
o
o
o
o o
o o o
o o o
o
1
o
m
o o
n
o
o o
o
o
o
Meaning
I
I
o
o o
3
0
o o
Absolute rewind stoD

Control- out (a comment
is started)
Control in (the end of
a conment)
IS0 code
Uharacter
.-
6 5
o
o
o
o o o
o
o
o
Characte
o o 1-
EIA code
8 7 6 5
o o o
3 z
Meani-ng
o
o
o o o
o o
Colon
o o
o o
Positive sien
Neqative sign
Optional block skip
Period (A decinal
poinE )
&
o o
o o o
o
o
o
o o o
o
o
o
o o
o o o
o
o o
o o
* Ampersand
* Apos t rophe
* As teri sk
>t
1t
o
o o
o
o
Comma
* Semicolon
* Left angle bracket
* Equal
Rj-eht ansle bracket
Js
Ouestion mark
o
o o
Commercial
Ouotat ion
Left brace
o o
o o o
.?
, Dollar sien
&
o o
o
o
(Note
* Sharp
o o
It
at
mark
Risht brace
*: when read in the 'significant
information section, the codes are

ignored.
(Note 2) ?: when readr in the signi.ficant information section, an alarm is
generated. However, it is stored in the meruory.
(Note 3) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
(Note 4) codes with incorrecc parity cause che TH alarm. But they are ignored
without generating the TH alarrn when they are in the comment section.
(Note 5) A character wi-th all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm
even in EIA code.
1)
t
t
r
-348-
APPENDIX
The symbols
FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
in the list represent the followings.
IP_:X
A ...
As seen above, the format cons{sts of a combinatlon of arbitrary axis addresses

among X, Y, Z, A, B, and C.
x: First basic axis (X usually)

y: Second basl-c axis (Y usually)
z: Third basic axis (Z usually)
Functions
Illustrations
Positioning
Tape format
GOO ]P
(c00)
Start point
Linear interpolation
GOI]P
(c0r )
Start point
Circular inter
polation
(c02, c03)
c17
GI8
Gl8
Dwel1 (c04)
{:33}'
f G02't
lco:l
'
{:33
{X
Exact stop
G04;
of offset value by
GIOP
Change
,- [=-_i'
Per second dwell

co4
(c04)
' - {l - , _ }' _t
program (ClO)
-349-
- i'
-;
_t
-,{} - * _ i' -,
;#
Functlons
Cutter
sation
(c3e
compenB
o4t
/-\/
$lorz
/'l'v
c42)
Cutter compensation C
(c40
I 1lust rat ions
c42)
Itl
Tape format
rcrTl f c40'l
1c18flc41l
lcl9J \c42)
H: Tool offset
Yo40
Tool length
offset A
(c43, G44, c49)
c43l 7 vl
--"-'
[c44J
Jc43 \
lc44 J
"
H: Tool-'offset
Cancel
G49;
Tool length
offset B
(c03, c44, c49)
{:ii}t:n}ii
No.
':,
{:[]t:n]
H: Tool offset
G49z Cancel
Inch input : GzO

Metric input z G2l
Inch/metric
conversion
(G20, G21)
Reference poin
return check
(G27 )
-t-/"
Start point
Reference point
G28 IP _;
G30 IF _;
rerurn (G28)
2nd reference
point return
(c30)
G29 rP
Return from
reference point
(c2e)
lntermediate Doint
Skip function
(c31)
i:Tl'-s*
-350-
_;
functions
Custom acro
(c55, c66, c67)
Illustrations
General format
R/i k;
m : Specifles macro
c6sHnP#IQ/ij
functlons with
01 ro 99
/11: Variable number
Tape fornat
c6s HnP/llQ/ljRi/k;
Modal call
G66 P
G67:
...
-;
Cancel
c80
c73
c74
c76
c81
...
Cancel
of operatlon
result
#j: Variable number

used ln
oPeratlon
(or constant)
/lk: Variable number

used in
operatlon
(Meantng)
lfi=llt @ #t
+
Operatlon
IIm
Canned cycles
(c73, c74, c76,
c80
c89)
xYz
P_-a_R_F_K_;
c89
Absolute/incre-
G90
mentaL program-
G91
G90 _
ming (c90/c9l)
Change
of
coordinate
work
G92 IP'
G91
-; -;
(ce2)
Initial point
return/R point
return
(c98, c99)
I point
c98
c99
point
-t
Z point
-351-
_;
Ab'solute
rncremental
Combined use
#i.
APPENDIX
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Table 1
(a)
Linear axis {in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric
input)
Increment system
lou
Standard
o. 1u
Least input
0.01
0.001
0.000r
Least
0.01
0. 001
0. 000 I
+999999.99
+99999.999
+9999.9999
240,000
100 , 000 rnrn/rnin
24,000 rnm/nin
increment
command
inerement
Max. programnable
di,mension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*l
Step feed
I -
urm/min
150,000
mn/urin
100,000 nrn/nln
0.01 , 0. 1, 1,
l0rnm/ step
Tool compensation
0 - +999.99
Backlash
compensation
0 - !2.55 m
Dwe1l time
rnm
99999.999
sec
001, 0.01, 0.1,
0 0001
mur/step
0l,
+999.999
*0. 255
- 10.255
nrn
99999.999
sec
-352-
12 , 000
nrn/urir
0.001
0.1
rnm/ step
999.9999
rnrn
urn
9999.9999
sec
Table 1
(b)
Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
lou
Least input
i-ncrement
Least
cornmand
increment
Max. programmable
dimension
Max. rapid
traverse
*1
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed
t{.
Standard
o. 1u
0.001 inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
0.01
0.001
0.0001
+99999.999 inches
+9999.9999 inches
-F393.70078 inch
240
'
000 n'n/min
0.01
100
6,000
inch/rnin
,000
rnm/min
0.01 - 4,000
inch/nin
0.001, 0.01, 0.
1 inch/step
0.000r,0.001,
0.01, 0. I lnch/srep
24'000
01
mm/min
480
inch/min
0 00001,0.0001
0 001
0 .01
inch/ step
Tool compensation
Backlash
compensation
Dwell tirne
0 - t99'.999 inches
0
+99.9999 inches
!2.ss
+0.255
99999.999
sec
99999.999
sec
l:
p
F'
|:i
-3s3-
199 .99999
+0.255
inch
mn
9999.9999
sec
:FG
Table 1
(c)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem
Standard
Least input
0.00I inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
0.001 inch
0.000I inch
0.00001 inch
+99999.999 inches
+9999.9999 inches
+9999.9999 inch
9,600 inch/rnin
4,000 inch/rnin
960 inch/urin
0.01 - 6,000
inch/rnin
0.01 - 4,000
inch/rnin
0.01 - 480
inch/min
0.001,0.01,0.i,
I inch/step
0.0001, 0.00I,
0.0I, 0.1 inch/step
0.00001,0.0001,
increment
Least
command
increment
Max. programmable
dimension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed
Tool compensation
Backlash
- 40.255 inch
+99.999 inches
0.00r,
0.01
inch/ steP
0 - t99.9999 inches 0 - +99.99999

-inch
0 - +0.0255 inch
0 - +0.0255 inch
0-
0-
comPensation
Dwell time
o-
99999.999
sec
-3s4-
99999.999
caa
9999.9999
sec
Table 1
(d)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system
I0u
Least input
increment
Least
command
increment
Max. programmsflg
Standard
0.0r
0.00r
0.000 l
0.001 inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
+999999.999
+99999.999
19999.9999
9,600 inch/urin
4,000 inch/urin
960 inch/min
di-mension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed
o. 1u
I50,000
rrn/min
01, 0.1, 1,
10
mrn/ s t ep
100,000
rnm/uin
001, 0.01, 0. t,
rnrn/ s
tep
0
0
12,000
mm/min
0001,0.001,
01, 0.I
nm/
Tool compensation
+999.99
+999.999
uur
tep
999.9999
mm
Backlash
comPensation
*0.255 inch
+0.0255 inch
Dwell tine
99999.999
see
99999.999
sec
-355-
- +0.0255 inch
9999.9999
sec
-!G
qF
Table 1
(e)
Rotation axis
Increment svstem
Standard
0.0001
0.001
deg
0.0001
deg
Least
0.001
deg
0.0001
deg
command
increment
Max. prograromable dimension
+99999.999 deg
+9999.9999 deg
deg
Max. rapid traverse
*l
100,000 deg/min
24,000 deg/rnin
Feedrate range
*l
1 - 100,000 deg/rnin
L - L2,000 deg/min
0.001, 0.0I, 0.1,
0.0001, 0.001 , 0.01, 0. I
Step feed
deg/min
Backlash compensation
0 - +0.255
deg
deg/ scep
+0.255
deg
Note to Table f (a) - (e)
*l The feed rate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC
interpolation capacity. When ragarded as a whole system, limitations
depending on servo system must also be considered.
t
i:
;
t
Z
it
t
-356.t
APPENDIX
1.
MONOGRAPHS
INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH
The leads of a thread are generally incorrect tn 61 and 62, as sholrn ln Fig, l,
due to automatic acceleratlon and deceleration.
Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of d1 and 62 in the program.
Fig.
Incorrect threaded length
1) 62 is deternlned by cutting speed V (nn/sec) and time constant (T1) of the

servo system as shown below.
62 = Tl . V (m)
(1)
.....
.....
where T1 i-s in sec., and V is in nrn/sec.
v is determined by thread lead L and spindle speed R as shown below.
V = R (rpm) t (urn)/60
L (run)
Lead of thread
R (rpn)
.....
spindle-speed
o Time constant T, (sec.) of the servo system: Usually 0.033 sec.
2) How 61 is determined
The value of 61 is determined by cutting speed V in thread cuttlng, tlme
constant T1 for the servo system, and thread accuractttatt as shown below.
6r = {t - Tr * T1 exp (- f')i v (mm)
(2)
, t.
a = exP ,(3)
, . . o. . . . . .
Tt,
The lead at the beglnning of thread cutting is shorter than the specified
lead, L and the allowable lead error is AL.
Then,
a=T AL
when the value of rrarr is determlned, the time 1apse, t, until the thread
accuracy is attained can be calculated by formula (3) r The tine "t" is substituted in (2) to determlne 61. Constants V and T1 are determined in the
same eray as for 62.
Since the calculation of 61 is rather complex, a nomography is provided on
the following pages. Instructions on how to read the appropri.ate 6l value on
the nomography is shown below.
-357-
F.
{G
a
,tr (V = lgpp/sec
y: !Q6p/sec
y: dQ66/sec)
Tirne constant of servo system
<lr
First specify the cl4ss and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy' a,
will be obtained at C, and depending on the time constant of cuEting feed
acceleration/dece1.r"iion, the 61 value when V = 10 urn/sec will be obtained
at @. Then, dependingôn the speed of thread cutting the approach distance
O, witt be obtained ar @ for other speeds than 10 mm/sec.
(Note) The equation of 6-1, 62 is for when the acceleration/deceleratlon ti-me
constant for cutting feed ls 0.
Simple Calculation oll Incorrect Thread Length
ffi
l) o, =
2)
o,
=#'.
to.)
(-1-1na) =
6z
. (-1-lna)
An t'att indicates the error allowances.
L: Thread lead (rnm)

R: Spindle speed (rprn)
* I'Jhen time constant T of the servo
system is 0.033 sec.
And the "1-lna" follows as below.
;
d
- 1- lna
0.005
4.298
0.01
3.. 60s
0.015
3.200
0 .02
2.9t2
T
(Exanple)
R = 350 rpn
L=1trmt
a = 0.01
350xI
^ =ffi
Oz=
= 0.194
6l= 62 x 3.605 =
-358-
nm
0.701
J
tl
,.1
.l
6
a
FI
-.t
6
trc
{{
eo
dtr
;6
76
Y>
oo
tr>
&d
'F9
N-
@
N
Ô
Aa
(o
o
(,
N
@
.ri
.!
.3
!,
C'
o
o
-o
d
,ui Gt
.9s E
o
{3
6zl
2 EeeE 3
I
t-
1c;
;
3
:^
.!9s
R
g
4..^
6
.,o-
_q6
I
I
I
q)
l-
-;3
ld
Ei
Ea
I
I
>J:
'r
il'
I
I
3?
oq
I^
l.E
Ec
Ei:
E
E
oh
3
ll
>J:r!
lo
l'
I
N
ll
-359i
o,
.E
o
(!
gt
o
E
=a
>{r
to
.E
i""Ei'
rEc{6 6:
Jhh9d
Ec
3?
d>
Ei;
R\
>::
Ea .9^
E
2.
TOOL PATH AT CORNER
I) Descriptfon
sLrvo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting

or caused by the positioning systern when a servo motor is used) is acconpanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path
(too1 center path) and the prograrmed path as shovm in Figure 2 (a).
Time constant T., of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
Inhen
Yz
Programmed Path
Tool Path
",f'
Fig. 2
(a)
Tool patch at cornering
This tool path is deternined by the following parameters:

a.) Feedrate (V r, .Yz)
b) Corner angle Gi
c) Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (Tr) at cutting (Tr=0)
d) Loop gain of positioning system
e) Presence or ab-.ence of buffer register
The above parameters are'used to theoretically analyze the tool path.
Itlhen actualJy programming, the above items must be considered and programrning
must be performed carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the
desired precision.
In other wo::ds, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical
precision, the comrnands of the next block must not be read until the
conrnanded feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used to stop the
machi-ne for the appropriate period
2) Analysis
The tool path
t ions
shor^m
in Fig. 2
(b) is analyzed based on the following condi-
*
t
,{
i:
t
*
.
a) Feedrate is constant at the block before and afcer cornering.
*
{
i
,1
t
t
{
!
tt
-360-
controller has a buffer reglster.

error differs with the reading speed of
characters of the next block, etc. )
b) The
(The
Fig.2
(b)
the tape reader, number of
Gommand
(Conditions exPressions)
Vxl=V'cos,/1
Vyl=V'sin91
Vx2=V'cos92
Yyz= V. sin q2
n-(4r-{2)=o
(Description of synbol)
V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornerlng
Vx1: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of preeeding block
, Vyr: Y-axis conPonent of feedrate of preeeding block
Yx2: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of following block
Vyit Y-axis comPonent of feedrate of followlng block
. 0 : Cornerangle
block and X-axis
tt:. : Angle forned by comrnanded path dlrection of preceding
block and X-axis
following
of
path
direction
,!; : Angle forned by connanded
-36r-
Initial value calculation

-ttt" ittitial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at
the end of command distribution of the controller, is determined by the feedrate
and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.
Fig. 2
(c)
Initial value
(I)
Vx1 (Tl + T2)
:
Q)
Y; vyi(r1 + 12)
time eonstant. (=0)
fi, Exponential acceleration/deceleration(Inverse
of position loop gain)
system
positioning
Tz2 Tj-me constant of
Xs =
Tool path analYsis

+thefeedratesforthecornersectioninX-axis
Ttre equations below i.rePresent
direction and Y-axis direction.
d,}
t'l - rt' exp,t
Vxr.
,
-Vx2L1-fr{r1
'exP(-r,i) - 12 ' exp (- i))
T1+T2
t.
ttr. ""p (- d)l-tr.exp,-t'rr]+vyz
vy(t) =ffi
vx(t) =
(Vx2
- vxr) t r - #h;
{rr'
exP CE
+ vx1
(3)
(4)
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the
following equations:
x(r) = /f, v"(t)dt -xu

Vx^ - Vxt
Tt -
Tz
{r? . exp (\41
l'
Y(y) = ,ilU-Vv(t)dt
VY^ - VYr
{r?
'z
exp
t', - ta'
,- ,tJ - r?
exp
(-
+ ] - vx2 (r1
'exp (- + )
-362-
- vyz (rt
3.
RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING
a servo motor is used, the positionlng system causes an error betyeen lnput
commands and outPut results. Since the tool advances along the cornnanded
segment' an error ls not produced ln linear lnterpolation, but when especially
high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, an error is produced
in the radius dlrectlon. This error can be sumnarized as follows:
When
Ar: Maximum radius error (m)

v: Feedrate (m/sec)
r: Circle radlus (m)
Tl: Exponentlal acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec) at cutting (=0)
Tzi Time constant of posltlonlng system (sec). (Inverse of position loop gain)
^r=+
since the machining radlus r (m) and allowable error Ar (rm) of the workpiece
ls given in actual machining, the allowable lirnit feedrate y (m/sec) ls determined by equation (1).
Since the acceleratlon/deceleration time constant at cutting which ls set by
this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool builder's
i.nstruction manual.
-363-
'q
APPENDIX
TAPE JOINING
punched tape is to be rnade or tape is broken or in similar cases,

sections
tape
must be joined. Join these tape sections as described below.
two
two
tape sections and paste them together, placing the section on
a) Butt the
on
the side
which the tape is fed' on top of the other.
joint
at which the two tape sections overlap must be approx. 3 pitches.
b) The
If a loop of
,
_-lr
3 pitches
Less than 0.270 mm
Direction of feed
c) l'lake sure the punched holes of the overlapped cape sections at the joi-nt are
correctly aligned. IIse special care with the feed holes.
fi-t.ll
\Jl-.,
F
Correct
Incorect
d) Trin both edges of the joint to smooth
them.
Trim
e) Ilake sure punched holes are not clogged up with the paste.
-364-
APPENDIX
STATUS WHEN TUR NING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET
Parameter (No. 045,. CLER) sets whether clear condition by reset or reset
condition.
o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued.

x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
When
on
I tem
serrinE Offset value

data
Data set by the
MDI setting
oPeration
Other
data
turning
power
When reset
clear
When
Parameter
Programs in
Contents in the
buffer storage
mode
mode
Display of
o: MDI
x: Other
o
(Note
1)
o (Note
1)
sequence number
One
shot G code
Repetition
codes.
(G20 and G21
are
noE
changed. )
Zero
Inirial
Initial G codes.
(For G20 and G21
the one eftectivi
before cutting
off the power is
effective.)
I"lodal G code
S, T,
Zeto
Zero
count
specification
(K)
Work ccordinate value
Action
oper-
ation
Movement
Dwe11
Issuance of
and T codes
M,S
Tool length
compensat
o: MDI mode
ion
Other
modes
depend on parameter "RS43".
i
I
-365-
Depending on
Parameter
ttRS43tt
When
on
Item
Cutter
Action
in
turning
power
When
o: MDI mode
x: Other mode
o: MDI mode
x: Other mode
compensation
oper-
Storing called
ation
clear
When reset
x (Note
2)
(Note)
output
Extinguishes if
there is no cause
for the alarm
ALM
signalsl
for
indicaEron
of
Extinguishes if
there is no cause
for the alarm
Extingui shes
if there is no
cause for the
d!4lur
NOT READY
(Lights in
LEDs
Extinguishes
BUF
REFERENCE POINT
emergency stoP)
o: MDI
Extinguishes
mode
mode
x: Other
(x:
RETURN COMPLE-
TION LED
(Llghts in
emergency stop)
Emergency
stop)
(x:
EmergencY
stop)
S, T and B codes
I'1 code
M,SandT
strobe signals
Spindle revolution signal

(S analog
signal)
ON
CNC
ready signal
(MA)
Servo ready
signal
CYCLE
LED
.START
FEED I{OLD LED
0N (When other
than servo alarm)
0N (When other
than servo alarm)
ON (When other
than servo
alarm)
x
(Note 1) When heading is performed; the main Program number is displaYed.

(Note 2) When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution
returns to Ehe head of Ehe main program. Execution cannot be started
. frsrn the middle of the subprogram.
-365-
ir
's.
APPENDIX
1.
7.
t:
PARAMETER LIST
PARAMETER DISPLAY
1) Press the "PARAM" k"y to select a parameter screen.

2) Key in Address No.
3) Press cursor key or page key to change the screen instead of Address
No;
too.
Set parameters to 0 without fail,
if their usage is not specified in the

following detailed description.
Parameters dontt always function unless the CNC function (option) is provided,
even if their usage is specified. Confirm which paraueter options 3re mounted
in advance.
Note) The name of parameters on upper side are used for only T series:
f or__Tutning machine (0-TB,..-00-_TB) , the names of Parameters on
are used for only M series: CNC for Machining center (0-l[B,
CNC
,l
'I
.{
-:1
e'.
1
I
I
,l
;l
.l
il
Parameter No.
Bit
RDRN
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
No.
1:
0:
Dry run is effective for rapid traverse.

Dry run is not effective for rapid traverse.
Declaration signal "1" in reference point retu;n

indicates deceleration.
DECI
1:
oRc
1: Offset value becomes a radius designatlon.

0: Offset value becomes a diameter designation.
IOF
l: Offset value is input in incremental value.

0: Offset value is input in absolute value.
TOC
1: Offset is cancelled by reset button.

0: Offset it not cancelled by reset button.
RS43
1: Offset vectof in G43, G44 rernains in reset state.

0: Offset vector in G43, G44 is cleared in reset state.
DCS
1: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel directly

actuate the CNC start without going through the
machine side (MDI mode only)
0: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel issues
the signal to the machine side. The CNC start is
actuated when the CNC receives the start signal
ir
E.
F
i
i'
it
I
from machine side.
\
t
't'
F'
-367-
Parameter No.
PROD
Displays progranmed position in current value

displaying for U and W.
Displays actual posi-tion.
1:
0:
Less command increment is input in inch system.

(Machine tool: inch 'systern)
Less command ingrement is input in metric system.
(Machine tool: mm system)
If you want to change this parameter, turn off
1:
scI\I
Remarks
0:
power.
NFED
TJHD
NFED
TJHD
IiSLE
ASR33
PPD
STP2
Pi'OfY2
Ploryt
ASR33
PPD
STP2
)
Bir
No.
NFED
1:
0:
TJHD
t:
O:
Feed is not output before and after progran is

output by using the reader/puncher interface.
(Sg.!_ "1" f or FANUC cassette. )
reEl*ii o"tp"t befd;;;"-a*"ii"r program is ourpur
by using the reader/puncher interface.
(Effectiver(rhen the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG node by manual
pulse generator is possible.
Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG mode by manual
pulse generator is not possible
the manual pulse generators are provided for

two axis, the axis selecting signal is valid
When
HSLE
0:
(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual

pulse generators can not operate.)
When the uianual pulse generators are provided for
(The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated
is moved regardless of the axis selecting signal.)
(Note)
PI'O(Y2, I
pulse generatgr is provided,

set 0 to this parametei
When one manual
The shift direction in canned cycles G76, GBl .

Pldff2
PlorYl
Shift direction
+x
-X
'1-
-Y
-368-
Ine Daucl
rate is
set with
parame ter
No. 0552.
,
*J
.i
I
tt
T
{
Parameter No.
I:
ARS33
I:
Bir
PSG2,
PSG2
PSGl
HSLE
TLCP
OVRI.
zt{,4
zM3
ZI,4Z
ztfi.
OVRI
zyw
zlu
ZI,[Y
ztff.
No.
Gear
0:
2l
ratio of splndle and position coder.

PSG2
PSGI
xl
x2
x4
x8
Magnification
l:
GST
s43
Magnification
I{SLE
M series)
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit is

set by 2 bits
In the reader/puncher i_nterfaee, the stop bit is
set by I bit.
(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
1:
0:
Remarks
The relative coordinate value is preset when the

coordinate system is set.
The relative coordinate value is not preset when
the coordinate system is set
0:
STP2
Lower
The 2OmA current interface is used as the reader/

puncher interface.
FANUC PPR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader
are used as the reader/punch interface. (Effective
when the setting parameter I/O is 0..)
0:
PPD
: T series,
Parameter (Upper
r=
Number.of position coder rotation
the manual pulse generators are provided for

three axes, the axis selecting signal is valid.
(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual
pulse generators can not operate.)
When the manual pulse generators are provided for
three axes, the axis selecting signal is invalid.
(The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated
is moved regdrdless of the axis selegting signal.)
(When one or two manual pulse generators are
provided, see ttOtt to Ehis parameter. )
When
-369-
Parameter No.
TLCP I:
0:
t:
GST
0:
The tool length offset is perforrned in the axis
direction being normal to the plane specified by

plane selection (G17, G1B, c19)
(Tool length offset B).
The tool length offset is performed in the Z axis
irrespective of plane selection.
(Too1 length offset A).
Gear shift is performed by SOR signal when S analog
is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant)
Spindle orientation is performed by SOR signal when
S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant)
Setting values 0 and I can determine the direction

in which the override value increase. See table 6
(a) in following page for details.
OVRI
21"ff, z\N
zl4z,
zl44
(0M)
The reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Y, Z and
4th axis in order.
l: Mlnus
0: Plus
(Note) file Uactfash compensation is inirially

performed when the axis moves in the
opposite direction against the direction
which is set by this parameter after the
po\^rer is turned on.
zux,
zttz
ztq3,
zl{,4
(0r)
The reference poi-nt return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Z, 3rd and
and 4th axis i-n order.
l: Minus
0: Plus
-370-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Pararneter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Table 6 (a) Relationship between Overrlde Signals and Override

Value
Contact status
Machine side
kov
Parameter OVRI=0
Over-
ride
I *ov2 *ov4 :tovt
10
20
30
40
50
o
o
60
o
tr
J
tti
.o
1)
(Noce 2)
(Note
o
o
o
3)
Over-
ride
svstem sys ten
nm/
inchl
1507"
min
2.0
3.2
5.0
min
0. 0t
0.1
140
130
70
t2.6
20
30
50
continue
feedrate
Me tric
Inch
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.8
L20
L.2
L2 6 0
50
nm/
min
790
inch/
min
500
30
20
320
L2
tl0
200
8.0
100
90
80
LZA
).u
79
3.0
50
JA
70
32
20
1')
120
320
o
o
o
130
500
20
30
20
12.6
7.9
5.0
3.2
140
790
30
t0
2.0
0.8
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0. 0i
150
r260
50
continue
feedrate
Metric Inch
z.o
3.0
5.0
8.0
t2
o
o
o
(Note
70
I'tanual
svstem svs t en
07"
o
o
Parameter OVRI=l
Manual
on
80
90
79
I00.
r26
110
200
60
50
40
o indicates signal is open and blank indicates signal

is closed.
When the override switch is changed during axis movement, the axis moves at the new speed.
Generally, this signal is designated by the override
switch.
(Note 4) In the above table, the speed error is +32.
371
Remarks
Parameter No.
Bir
Bir
Bit
Bir
DMRX
GRDX
DMRX
GRDX
DMRZ
GRDZ
D},IRY
GRDY
Dl,lR3
GRD3
D},IRZ
GRDZ
D},IR4
GRD4
.+
No.
No.
No.
No.
-372-
Remarks
DMRX
to
Setting of detecrive mulriplier
DMR4
Setting
Detective rnultiplier
code
Digital servo
Analogue servo
654
0
0
0
0
0
0
r/2
t
I
I
I
3/2
s/2
GRDX
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
I
5
7
/2
4
Capacity of reference counter

Except for 0.lU
0. lU detector
code
Analogue servo
3210
I
I
I
I
3/2
to GRD4 Capacity of reference counrer

Setting
r/2
0
0
0
0
I
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
I
I
1
I
I
detector for
Digital servo
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
I 1000
I 2000
I 3000
14000
15000
I 6000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
8000
10000
I
I
-373-
for Digital
servo
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
7 0000
80000
90000
r00000
r 10000
I 20000
I 30000
140000
r 50000
t 60000
Relationship
Metric
among DMR, CMR and
GRD. (In case of System series
T)
system
l,loving distance
per I revolution of motor

(Pulse coder)
12
Axis
Counting
(de tec tion)
unit
Detect multiply
Command
ratio
nult iply
ratio
(cm1
(um)
X
Capacity of
(DMR)
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
2000
2500
3000
ference
counter
re
/0.5
6000
6000
mm
,t
I
r/0.5
10
10000
10000
8mm
I
r
/o.s
8000
8000
zl'+
6000
6000
1i0.s
2/4
5000/ 10000
tI
5000
1/0.s
2/4
4000/8000
'|
4000
nrm
4mm
,
X
/0.s
I
1/0.s I
L.5 /3
r/2
3000 / 6000
1.5
3000
r/2
1
2000
2000 / 4000
ntm
0.5
2/r
2000
0.5
2000
lmm
In thq above table, right side value is in diameter designati-on, and

lett eiae value is in radius designation in X axis.
?\ Data in the above table is standard.
Command and detect multiplY
in
that
case
there is limit for maximum
but
changed,
ratio can be
feedrate.
Note 1)
Note
*I
374
'&
1/0.
6mm
3mm
*g
6
mn
.I
t*,
Relationship among DMR, CMR, and GRD. (In case of series T)
Inch svstem
ltoving distance
per I revolu-
tion of motor
Count
Axis
(Pulse coder)
tion)
unit
(
10-4)
Command
urultiply
ratio
(CMR)
Pulse
2000
2500
3000
2l+
6000
6000
/o.s
L/0.s
2/4
r/0.s
L.s /3
I
I
2/a
s000/ r0000
5000
4000/8000
4000
r/2
I
t\
3000/6000
3000
/O.s
r/2
5000
0.5
n
L
5000
r/0.s
r/2
0.5
I.5
3000
0.5
1.5
3000
0.5
2000
0.5
2000
0.25 lnch
0.2 inch
0.15 inch
L)
Pu I SE
0.4 inch
Note
Pulse
Capacity of
reference
counfer
l\
Note r)
rario (DlR)
1/0. s
0.5 inch
0. I inch
Detect rnultiply
0.6 inch
0.3 inch
ing
(de tec
2000/4000
2000
In the above tab1e, right side value is in diameter designation, left

side value is in radius designation in X axis.
Data in the above table is standard. Conunand and detect nultiply
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for naximum
feedrate.
375 '-
Relationship anong DMR, CMR and GRD. (In case of series
Metric
M)
system
oving distance
er I revoluion of motor
Pulse coder)
12
mm
l0
mm
Counting
(detection)
unit
(um)
Detect nultiply
ratio (DMR)
Command
mult iply
rat io
Pulse
Pulse
(CMR)
2000
2500
Capaclty
Pulse
3000
1,1
re f eretr1,1,
counter
6000
8mm
6mm
5mm
rI
4m-
3mm
I
I
t.5
2mm
2000
lmm
0.5
.'
2000
r0000
8000
6000
5000
4000
3000
Note l) Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiply
ratio can be changed, but in that case there is linit for maximuur
feedrate.
Inch system
Moving dj-stance
Counting
(detection)
unit
0.6 inch
0. 5 inch
1o-+r;
0.4 inch
roult iply
ratio
Pulse
Pulse
Pu 1
(cl,IR)
2000
2500
3000
0.5
0. 15 inch
0.5
0. I inch
0.5
0.2 inch
ratio (DlR)
3
Capacitv of
reference
counfer
6000
5000
0. 3 inch
0.25 inch
Detect rnultiply
Command
per I revolution of motor

(Pulse coder)
4000
2
1
3000
5000
2000
I
1
3000
2000
Note 1) Data in the above table is standard. Comrand and detect mult ip lyratio can be changed, but in that case there is lirnit for maximun
feedrate.
376
:'ij
-.
r:.-
.'.
Parameter No.
E
l
r
EILK
I
F
I
BiE
NOFC
ROVE
I4FPR
OTZN
ROVE
ADW2
8
ADWI
ADWO
No.
l: Interlock is
performed for each axis.

L is necessary.)
0: Interlock is performed for all axes or for Z axis
(it needs that No. 012 ZILK=I) on1y.
EILK
(FANUC PMC-MODEL
NOFC
l: Offset counter input is not used.

0: Offset counter input is used.
OTZN
I: Z axis sEored strok check is not done.

0: Z axis stored strok check is done.
ROVE
1: Rapid traverse override signal

effective. (1002, Fo)
0: Rapid traverse override signal
(
is
R0V2
is effective.
100%, 507., .257" Fo)
1: Manual synchronous feed is done.

0: Manual synchronous feed is not done.
}MPR
ADW2,
ROV2
ADI4I1
Name
of the 4th axis
ADWO
ADW2
ADWI
ADWO
Name
I
t
t
I
t\
-377 -
noE
Remarks
Parameter No.
Bit
TMF
TFIN
TMF
TFIN
l0
43,2
No.
TMF
Time from M, S, T code issue to MF, SF, TF issue.

Setting range 16 to 256 msec. (16 msec increment)
TFIN
Time of reception width of FIN.

Setting range 16 to 256 usec. (16 sec increment).
T code
TF
FIN
LI
Fl! signal is ignored,

TMF
because X < T FIN

Parameter
TFIN
setting
msec
More than 16 msec
32 msec
More than 32 msec
,0
48 msec
More than 48 msec
64 msec
More than 64 msec
80 msec
More than 80 msec
96 msec
More than 96 msec
12 msec
More than l12 msec
I
I
128 msec
Mcre than 128
144 msec
More than 144 msec
160 msec
More than 160 rnsec
II
I 76 msec
More than 176 rnsec
192 msec
More than 192 msec
l6
msec
-378-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series; Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
More than 208 msec
224 msec
More than 224
rnsec
240 msec
More than 240 msec
256 rnsec
More than 256 msec
WSFT
DOFSI
PRG9
OFTVY EBCL
ISOT
PRG9
OFFVY EBCL
ISOT
0
APRS
Bir
setting
208 msec
APRS
Parameter
TFIN
TMF
No.
l:
setting is conducted
return is performed.
setting is not
APRS
Aut.omatic coordinat.e system

when manual reference point
0: Automatic co.ordinate svstem
conducted.
WSFT
I: The di-rect measured value input for tool offset is

set in the work shift memory.
0: The work coordinate system is not shifted.
DOFSI
l: The direct measured value input for tool offset is

effective.
0: The direct measured value input for tool offset is
ineffeccive.
PRG9
1: The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999

are protected. The following edit function are
disabled.
(l) Deletion of
program
the deletion of all programs is

specified, the programs with program
9000 to 9999 are nor delered.
When
(2)
Punch of program
These subprograms
number
are not punched out when

the punch of all programs is specified.
(3)
Program number search.
(4)
Edit of program after registration.
i
I
t-I
-379-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series ' Lo\iter : !1 series)
Parameter No.
llowever, the followings are possible.
(1) Registration of Program

Registration by MDI key and through paper
tape.
(2) Collation of program

(Note) These programs are not normally indicated,
because program number search is disabled
in the EDIT rnode. However, it maY be
indicdted when protected programs alone
remain in the memory after deletion of al-l
programs, for example, or when a protected
subprogram is interrupted while it is
running, by a single block stop and the
EDIT rnode is set in. In such a case, the
program edit is abled.
The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999
can also be dated.
0:
OFFVY
Servo afarm ls not actuated when VRDY is on before

is output.
Servo alarm is actuated when VRDY is on before PRDY
is output.
1:
PRDY
n.
In the display of the nto*t"t stored in the memorlr

the EOB code is indicated by * (asterisk).
In the display of the program stored in the memorlr
the EOB code is indicated by; (semicolon).
1:
EBCL
0:
Rapid traverse is effective even when reference

point return is not conducted after turning the
power on.
Rapid traverse is invalid unless reference point
return is conducted after turning the power on.
l.
ISOT
0:
MCINP
MCINP
Bit
SBKM
G0l
MCF
SBIO,I
ADNW
PMLI
ADLN
PML2
PMLl
2L0
543
No.
MCINP
PML2
1:
Program input
is started with
0:
Program input
is not started with the data input
external start signal
MINP.
external start signal
MINP.
-380-
the data input
Remarks
Parameter No.
c0t
l: GOl mode when power is on.

0: G00 mode when power is on.
SBKM
1: Machine
Remarks
is stopped in single block skip by macro'
command.
0: Machine is not stopped in single block skip by

macro command.
(usua1ly set rr0'f)
MCF
ADNW
l: EF (external operation slgnaL) is output when G8l

positioning is completed.
0: EF (external operation signal) is not output when
G81 positioning is not completed.
l: Select B type for feed rate.

0: Select A type for feed rate.
(A type)
(1)
JoG feed rate
feed rate of additional axis is the

that of basic axes.
JOG
same AS
(2) Cutting feed upper lirnit feed rate

Tangential speed is clamped at. parameter value
for a1l axis.
(B type)
(1)
rate
rates of basic axes and rotary axis can
be set by different parameter (No. 565, 566).
When an additional axis is moved with another axis
in simultaneously 2 or more axes control, feed rate
is the same as that of another axes.
JOG feed
JOG feed
(2) Cutting feed upper liurit feed rate

When command linear interpolation including
addit.ional axis, (G01), clamp each axis feed rate at
smaller than the setting value j-n another parameter
(No. 567). In circular interpolation, tangential
speed i,s clamped at parameter value.
(Sane as A type)
(3) Minimum rapid traverse rate (Fo)
0n1y additional axis is set by another parameter.
(No. 0568)
(4) Low feedrate (FL) additional axis at reference
point return is seE to another parameter.
(No.0s69)
-38r-
parameter (upper : T series, Lower

: M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
1: 4th axis is used as a linear axis.

0: 4th axis is used as a rotary axis.
ADLN
4th axis is used as linear axis, there are

following restrictions.
1) Circular interpolation including the 4th axis
When
cannot be performed.
2) Cutter compensation B/C in the 4th axis cannot.be

applied.
3) Tool length compensation in the 4th axis cannot
be applied.
Pitch error compensation magnification.

The value, with this magni.fication multiplied
to the
set compensation value, is outDut.
PML2, t
PML2
X1
x2
I
(Cornmon
Bir
NFED
Fo
x4
X8
to all axes)
No.
1:
0:
G84S
Magnification
PMLl
Feed is not output before and after the progran

is
outPut by using the reader/puncher interface.
(Set to "1" when FANUC
is used.)
"""""tt"
Feed is_ output before and
after the program is
by using rhe reader/puncher interface.
9::l"t
(Effective when the setting parameter
I/O is 1.)
Type B is effective in canned cycle G74
and GB4
with S analog voltage output.
Type A is effective in canned cycle G74
and Gg4 '
with S analog voltage output.
(See connecting manual for type A/B.)
-382-
Baudrate
is set
by
parameter
No. 0553.
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
I:
l:
l:
o:
1:
Interlock is effective only for Z axis.

Interlock is effective for all axes.
ZTLK
0:
0:
TCW,
TCW
CI.IM
ORCW
INHMN GOFC
TCW
CWM
ORCW
INHMN
No.008i
GOFU2
JHD
J}lD
No.
Output code at S analog output.
CWM
cI.]M
Plus ouEpuE for both M03 and
Minus output for both !103 and M04

Plus output for M03, uinus output for
I
1:
0:
Output code
TCI,J
M04.
Minus output
for
M04.
M03, plus output for
M04.
Minus output in orientation S analog output.

Plus output in orientation S analog output.
-383-
w
parameter
0Rct^l
GMOFS
Remarks
Relative
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit 1S

set by 2 bits.
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit ls
set by I bit.
(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
1:
Bit
M series)
The 2OmA currerlt Lnterface ls used as the reader/

puncher interface.
FANUC PRR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader
are used as the reader/puncher interface.
.(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
ASR33
In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindte CH/CCW

rotation is performed without M05 code output.
In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindle CW/CCW
rotation is performed afcer M05 signal output.
0:
Lower
In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle

stop is performed without outputting M05.
In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle
stop is performed after outputting M05.
0:
FXCS
: T series,
EILK..
is
.::,*
Parameter No.
INHMN
Remarks
The menu ls not indicated even r^rhen the menu a

programrning option is provided.
The menu is indicated when the menu programming
l:
0:
option is provided.
The tool geometry offset is also cancelled with
the designation of offset No. 0.
0: The tool geometry offset is not cancelled with the
designation of offset No. 0.
l:
GOFC
GMOFS
The tool geometry offset is cancelled with vector
1:
processing, i.e. tool movement.

The tool geometry offset is conducted by the
shifting of the coordinate system.
0:
l:
GOFU2
The geornetry offset number is designated by two

high order digits of the T code.
The geometry offset number is designated by the
two low order digits of the T code.
0:
The manual pulse generator is valid in JOG mode.

The manual pulse generator is invalid in JOG mode.
1:
0:
JHD
T2T4
0
i$i
':t1
vI
I\JA
OFSB
STDP
SMCL
T2D
Bit
No.
T2T4
I:
0:
3210
the T code is designated with a 2-digit value,
it is regarded that the two high order digits are
equal to the two low order digits and the T code is
set to the 4-digit value.
When the T code is designated with a 2-digit value,
the two high order digits are regarded as 00, and
the T code is set to the 4-digit value.
I,ltren
WIGA
1: Setting of the tool wear offset amount ls lirnited

to incremental designation, and the setting of the
tool geometry offset amount is lirnited to absolute
de s ignation.
0;. The incremental and absolute designations are
possible for both tool wear offset amount and tool
geometry offset amount.
OFSB
1:
Parameter
No. 014:
ir is
e
ffec t ive
only
when
T2D=0
Tool offset is conducted tosether with axis

movement.
o:
Tool offset is conducted by the T code block.

(The tool geometry offset by the shifting of the
coordinate system is conducted by the T code block
regardless of this parameter.)
-384,i
Parameter No.
t:
STDP
The actual spindle speed and the
code are always
displayed.
The actual spindle speed and the
0:
always displayed.
code are not
Cancels the tool geometry offset vector by resetting.
1:
GMCL
not cancel the tool figure correction vector by

resetting.
0:
Does
t: T code is specified in 2-digits.
T2D
T code is specified in 4-digits.
0:
Bit
CPRD
REP
PRWD
MORB
CPRD
REP
PRWD
Lvt2
NWCH
SKPF
No.
l.
0:
REP
CPRD
CBLNK
1:
RILK
CBLNK
Unit is set to mm, inch or sec. When the decimal

point is omitted in the address for which the
decinal point can be used.
The least input increment is set when the decimal
point is omitted in the address for which Ehe
decimal point can be used.
the program with same program nuuber in the
is registered through interface, the altarm
does not occur and the registered reader/puncher
program is replaced.
When the program with same program number in the
memory is registered through reader/puncher
interface, the alarm occurs.
When
memory
n.
PRWD I:
0:
MORB
'I .
Rewind signal is output by portable tape reader.

Rewind signal is noE output by portable tape
reader.
The direct neasured value input for tool offset and
work coordinate system shift is performed by
retracting both 2 axes after cutting and pushing the
RECORD
Lr42
button.
is necessary for this function.)

button is not provided for direct measured
value input.
(FANUC PMC-L/M
n.
The
t:
Makes valid stroke limit 2

(EXrM2 Gr29.6).
Makes invalid stroke limit
(EXLM2 Gr29.6) .
0:
RECORD
switching signal
2 switching signal
-38s-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T serles, Lower :
Remarks
Dry run, overri-de and automatic acceleration/

deceleration is effective in skip function (G3l).
Dry run, override and automatic acceleration/
1:
0:
deceleration is ineffective in skip function (G31).
1: Interlock processing is done at htgh speed.

(FANUC PMC-MODEL L or M is necessary. )
0: Normal interlock processing is done.
RILK
1: The character "W" is not displayed at the left

side of the offset No. in wear offset value
display.
0: The character "I'1" is displayed at the left side of
the offset No. in wear offset value display.
NWCH
't.
0:
CBLNK
The cursor does not

The cursor blinks.
blink.
I'{DEC
M series)
NPRD
NPRD
Bir No.
MDEC
NPRD
SUPM
RSTMB
RSTMA
1: M code is output in decode signal.

0: M code is ouEpur in BCD 2 digits.
SUPM
(not available)
1: Input and display with decimal point is ineffectlve.

0: Input and display with decimal point is effective.
1: Start-up B type is effective i-n cutEer compensation
V.
0: Start-up type is effective in cutter compensation C.

For details of start-up, refer to operatorts manual.
RST}ts
RSTMA
*
*
1: B group decode M signal (M21A, 1422A) is cleared

reset. (not. available)
0: A group decode M signal is not cleared by rest.
by
1.: A group decode M signal (MflA-Al38) is cleared by

reset. (not available)
0: A group decode 11 signal is not cleared by reset.
-385-
Parameter No.
Bit
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lo\rer :
M series)
OPGT
OPG6
OPG5
OPG4
OPG3
OPG2
OPGI
OPGT
OPG6
OPG5
OPG4
OPG3
OPG2
OPGI
No.
OPGT I:
0:
Feed hold is effected with the software operatorrs

pane1.
Feed hold is not effected with the software
operaEorts panel.
OPG6 I: Protect key is actuated with the

0:
OPG5
1:
0:
OPG4
1:
0:
OPG3
1:
0:
software
operatorts panel
Protect key is not actuated with the software
operatort s panel.
Optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock
and dry run switches are actuated with the software
operatorrs panel.
The above switches are not actuated with the sofcrdare operatorf s pane1.
Jog feed rate, override, and rapid traverse
override switches are actuated with the software
operatorts panel.
The above switches are not actuated with the
software operatorts panel
.
Axis select (IIX, Hy, HZ) and magnification (x10,

x100) switches for manual pulse generator are
actuated with the software operatorts panel.
The above switches are not actuated with the
software3 operatorrs panel.
OPG2 I: Jog feed axis select and jog rapid traverse buttons
are actuated with the software operatorrs panel.
'
0: The above buttons are not actuated with
software operatorts panel.
OPGl
l:
n.
the
select (MDl to MD4, ZRN) is conducted from

the software operatorts panel.
Mode select is not conducted from the software
operatorrs panel.
Mode
(Note) The above parameters are effective only when

the optional software operatorts panel is
selected.
-387-
Remarks
:{!l'eFfF
Parameter No.
EDITB
TVC
EDITB
TVC
Remarks
Bit No.
SQTYP
NZMP4 NZMP2 NYMP2 NXMP2
Editing on standard keyboard shal1 be editing

oPeration B,
0: EdiEing operation shall be as specifie{ in standard
specifications.
EDITB l:
I: TV check at the conment.

0: No TV check at the comment
TVC
1: The program restart method should be R type. (not

available)
0: The program restart meEhod should be P or Q type.
SQTYP
1: Handle feed magnification xl00 is ineffective for

X, Y, Z and 4th axes' resPectivelY.
0: Handlerfeed rnagnif icati-on x100 is ef fective for X,
Y, Z and 4t.h axis' resPectivelY.
N)O{P2,
NYI'IP2,
NZMP2,
NZMP4
(Note) The magnification of an axis whose rnagnification xl00 is ineffective becomes xl or x10
by signal MPI.
MPI=1:x10
I
MPl=0:x
Bit
1:
n.
l:
0:
MO2NR
NEOP l'102NR
DBCD
NEOP I,102NR SRGTP
XRC
DC4
DC3
I:
O:
C4NG
}lHPGB
No,
DBCD
NEOP
DCZ
DBCD
9
In the diagnosis display' the timer counter data is

displayed in decimal.
The diagnosis display is d isplayed in binary as
usual.
M02, M30 and M99 command the end of registration
into part program storage editing area.
M02, M30 and M99 do not command the end of
registration into part program storage editing area.
Return to the head of program after executing

Do not return to the head of program after
executing M02.
-388-
M02.
1'
a
Parameter No.
Lower : M series)
G135.0 is used for the rigid tap selection signal.

G123. I is used for the rigid tap selection signal.
l.
SRGTP
Parameter (Upper : T series
0:
0:
Diameter designated for Z axis (Disable).

Radius designated for Z axis.
XRC
1:
0:
X-axis is rad.ius desi-gnati.on.

X-axis is dianeter desi_gnation.
DC4
l.
0:
Diameter designated for 4th axis (Disable).

Radius designated for 4th axis
1:
t: 4th axis neglect signal is valid
C4NG
DC3
0:
4th axis neglect signal is invalid.
t:
Diameter designated for 3rd axis (Disable).

Radius designated for 3rd axis.
0:
I: Multi-handle function is specification
MHPGB
B.
Multi-handle function is specification A.

(For specification A/B, see connecting manual.)
0:
NCIPS
0
SFOUT
Bir
SFOUT
to
No.
1.
0:
NCIPS
NCIPS BCD3
1:
0:
is output in S4/5 digit even if gear change

is not performed.
SF is output in S4/5 digit on changing a gear.
SF
In deceleration, the control proceeds to Ehe next

block after the specified speed has become zero.
The control does not confirm that the machine
position meets a specified position. (No inposition
checking) .
The control proceeds to the next block after the
spcified speed has become zero and confirms that the
machine position has reached the specified position
in deceleration.
BCD3
l.
0:
(Inposition ckecking).
B code is 3-digit output.

B code is 6-digir output.
i
-389-
Remarks
.re:
l
ma
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
APCZ
APCX
APCY
APCX
Remarks
APC4
Bit
M series)
APCZ
16
No.
APCX, 1:
Y, Z, 0:
When
When
absolute pulse coder detector is optioned.

absolute oulse coder detector is not optioned
tt
3
.t
ABSZ
ABSX
ASSY
ABSX
ABS4
ABSZ
t
f
*
a
Bit
No.
A3SX, l:
Y, Z,
0:
4
Reference point position in absolute Pulse coder

se
ttled
Referepce point position in absolute pulse coder is
;
&
not settled.
(It is automatically set to "1" when manual
reference point return is executed. Do not change
the setting without changing the detecEor')
Set "0" without fail when primary field
installation and adjustment and when position
detector exchanging. And execute manual reference
point return after Power on/off.
DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM
DJPN
DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM
DJPN
Bir
5432
No.
DITA
CRT
screen ls displayed in Italian.
DCHI
CRT
screen is displayed in Chinese
DFRN
CRT
screen is displayed in French
DGRM
CRT
scteen is displayed in
DJPN
CRT
screen is displayed in JaPanese.
(ROC) -
German.
-390-
Parameter No.
EDILK
0
QNI 'IEGWSF INOUT GNSR
SCTO
UWKZ
Bit
QNr
IGNPM(
LII
IGNP}I(
1O
765
Data format: Bit
No.
EDILK
scTo
.+
0:
Interlock signal per axis direction is va1id.

Interlock signal per axis direction is invalid.
1:
Automatic selection of tool offset number is
1:
done
during offset writing

Automatic selection of tool offset number is not
done during offset writing mode.
mode.
0:
0:
work shift amount is input in incremental

system, sign is eonverted and input to memory.
When work shift amount is input in incremental
I.
When
NEGWSF 1:
UWKZ
0:
When
systen, sign is not converted. (Usual)
the work zero point offset value is modified'

absolute coordinate value is changed at once.
(Not available)
After modification, the absolute coordinate value
is updated at the initial preProcessing.
Outside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to
the forbidden area.
Inside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to
the forbidden area.
1:
INOUT
0:
GNSR
SCTO
0:
position is drawn in graphic function.

Actual position where tool nose radius compensation
is thought in is dravm in graphic function.
1:
Spindle speed reach signal is checked.

Spindle speed reach signal is not checked.
1:
,Progranmed
0:
LIIlO
Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.01 unn/O.001 inch.

Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.001 mrn/0.0001 inch-
1:
0:
(Usua1)
Control by PMC is made ineffective.

(Same as without PMC)
0: Control by PMC is made effective
1.
IGNPMC
t.'..F
I
RSFT
0
)ACTF
]RCMSG PRCPOS
EXTS MMDL
)ACTF
?RCMSG
8
PSG2
Blr
EXTS MMDL
PSG
EXI
OD
No.
391
PRCPOS
Remarks
!F'
Paraneter
PSGl,
No.
Remarks
Gear ratio of spindle and position coder
Scale factor
1:
RSFT
0:
EXlOD
1:
0:
EXTS
1:
0:
DACTF
M}!DL
PSGI
xl
x2
x4
x8
value is entered with a radius value in work

coordinate system shift.
lD( value is entered with a diameter value in work
coordinate system shift.
(It is valid only when radius designation XRC=I.)
l'fl(
External work coordinate svstem shift function:

1O times the input value
to the
"ttr""porrds
value.
external work zero point offset
The inpu= value corresponds to the external work
zero point offset value
Search by external program No. search (01 to 0999
search)
Search by external work No. search (01 to 015
search)
0:
Actual speed is displayed on the current position

display screen and program check screen.
Not displayed.
1:
0:
Modal status is displayed in MDI operation B.

Modal status is not displayed in MDI operation B.
1:
PRCMSG 1:
0:
PRCPOS
PSG2
I:
0:
the program check screen, a message fron

is displayed. (not available)
The remaining motion is displayed
On
On the program check screen, the absolute

coordj-nates are displayed.
The relative coordinates are displaved.
-392-
PMC
Parameter No.
DSPSUI
ADRC
DSPSUi
Bit
G604
G6OZ
G6OY
G6OX
t: Displays 5th/6th axis current positions for

Does
Use ttlil or tfKtr, not ttCtt for the address in

chamfering and corner radius (R). For the addresses
used for direct drawing dimension prograrnming, use
tt,Ctt and ttrRtt (a eonma is put before C
and R).
For the address in chamfering, corner R, and direct
drawing dimension programmingr use ttCtt and |tRtt as
1:
ADRC
axis
PMC
not display 5th/6th axis current positions for

PMC axis. The axis name is in accordance with the
parameters (No. 7130, 7131).
0:
0:
DSP3
No.
DSPSUB
c60x
DSP4
per the standard specification.

(3rd axis cannot be used with address "C".)
Specify the approach direction in the unidirectional
positioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th in
sequence.
I: Minus direction
0: Plus direction
DSP3
The current position of 3rd and 4th axes is displayed in sequence.

l: The present position is displayed.
0: The present position is not displayed.
ADW4O
ADW3O
EACl
Bit
EACO
No.
ADW30, 40
The nane of 3rd and 4th axes is specified in

sequence.
1: The name is C and the Y axis control is used.
0: The name is B.
-393-
Remarks
It, | ,,fr,,
,
l,/rr,tt
uoo .
",
t'ACl: Axis setting for

EACl
"l,'
Irtr
axis control
ConErolled axis
EACO
0
0
l,E
PMC
4th axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
CNRST
ESFC
ADDCF RTCT
ILVL
TAPM
11o.
lllr1,,
l.
n.
SDRT
SNRL
At the time of reference point return, Cf axis

relative coordinate value is cleared.
At the time of reference point return, Cf axis
relatiye coordinate value is not cleared.
rll'r
l:
o:
Alt11,
t:
Even in the turning mode (signal COFF is closed) in

Cf axis control, the feedback pulse from the
position detector becomes effective.
The feedback pulse in the turning mode in Cf axis
control becomes invalid.
Signals DRN, GRl,

PMC
l'ltl
GR2
are set to Gl23
(DGN
123) of
address.
tl.
Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set ro cl18

(standard specif ications) .
t;
In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, c87), the

tool returns to R point level in the course of
(B type)
drilling.
In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87), the
tool returns by the retract amount in the course
(Type A)
of drilling.
t|:
tt\,1
t.
tl.
(DGN 118)
In the drilling
cycle, the init ia1 point level is
In the drilling
cycle,
updated by resetting.
updated by resetting.
no
init ial point level is
^l,ll
t.
lt:
b=
In the tapping cyele, M05 is sent out first when

the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
In the tapping cycle, I'103 and M04 are sent out when
the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
-394-
Reuarke
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
Lower
The spindle indexing direction by M conmand

minus.
The spindle indexing direction by M cornrnand
l.
SDRT
: T series,
0:
M series)
IS
IS
plus.
The spindle indexing rnode is released by resetting.

The spindle indexing mode is not released by
l.
SNRL
n.
resetting.
BLIN
ROTiO
0
?NGMLK
LIN4
LIN3
a
L
?NGMLK
Bit
R0Tl0
No.
The parameter unit of JOG feed, cutting feed upper

limit speed, rapid FO speed and FL speed for
1:
reference point return at the tine of inch output

for Cs axis is I deg/min.
The parameter unit is 0. I deg/urin.
0:
.BLIN
For B8-digit input, the input unit when the decimal

point is inputted is 1.000 (metric system) and 1.0000
(inch system)
1.000 regardless of the input unit.
l.
n.
PNGMLK
In
In
1:
n.
PMC axis
PMC axis
control, machine l-oek shall be intalid.

control, machine lock sha11 be valid.
Selection of linear /rotary axis for 3rd and 4th axls
LrN3,4
Linear axis
1:
0:
Rotary axis
ACMR
ACMR
Blr
ACMR
LGCM
NDSP4 NDSPZ NDSPY NDSPX
LGCM
No.
l.
0:
Optional
Optional
1:
Low-and high-speed gear changing speed rpm depends

on parameter SPDWL (No. 585). l.Ihen gear 3-step is
used, low- and medium-speed gears, and medium- and
high-speed gears changing speed rpm dpend on
parameter SPDIO(L (No.585) and SPDUCT (No.586).
Gear changing speed rprn shall be the respective
maximum gear speed rpm.
0:
CMR
Cl"fi.
is used.
is not used.
-395-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (UPPer
T series, Lower : M series)
X, Y, Z and 4th
Z, \, X, whether the current positions of
axes are disPlaYed or not
l: The current Position is not disPlaYed.
0: The eurrent Position is displaYed.
NDSP4,
Bir
No.
SCR
1:
be 0.001 .
The scaling rnagnification incrernent sha1l
be 0.0001.
The scaling magnification increment shall
1:
type'
Special G code system "1"11 be C
B
type'
be
shall
system
Special G code
n.
GSPC
0:
SCLX,
SCLY,
1:
0:
Each axis scaling is valid'

Each axis scaling is invalid'
SCLZ
Bir No.
PLCOI
SPTPX
to
SPTP4
be used'
1: A pulse coder of 0'1u detection is to
(Va1id for OG onlY)
to be used'
0: A pulse coder of b'1u detection is not
TypesofpositiondetectoroftheX,Y(Z)'z(ct)andthe
fturth axis in this order'
as a
1: The separate tyPe pulse coder is to be used
detector.
be used as
0: The separate type pulse coder is not to
a detector.
-396-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lohrer : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
In
case of the FOG with 0.1U pulse coder, set the

following parameters in units of lU. (The set data
is multiplied by ten within the CNC)
No.
Paraueter
0504
SERRX (X)
Limitation value of position deviation

amount during movement of X axis.
0505
SERRY (Z)
Limitation value of position deviaEion

amount during movement of Y(Z) axis.
0506
SERRZ (3)
Linitation value of position deviation

amount during movement ot Z(3) axis.
0507
SERR4 (4)
Limitation value of position deviation

amount during movement of 4th axis.
0508
GRDSX
(x)
Grid shift amount of the X-axis
0509
GRDSY
(Z)
Grid shift amount of the Y(Z)-axis.
r0
GRDSZ
(3)
Grid shift amount of the Z(3)-axis.
05
Contents
GRDS4 (4)
051i
Grid shift amount of the 4th axis.
Note) Above explanation is applied

(No. 0037 bir 7) = 1.
when
the y'arameter "PLCOI"

I
RSCMDl DEVFL
0
RSCMDl
Bir
RSCMDl:
DEVFL
RSCMD2:
DEVFL2
No.
RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3
DEVFL3 DEC34
DEVFLI RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3 DEVFL3

6
Setting r/o device of reader puncher interface

t
channel
l-
Sett ing
channel
rlo device of reader puncher interface

2
RSCMD
DEVFL
I/O device
Bubble cassette,
Floppy cassetEe
Paper tape reader
Paper tape reader, etc.
-397-
used
PPR
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
FLKY
t:
CRT/MDI
0:
CRT /},ID
return
deceleration signals for reference point
*DEC3/*DEC4 addresses
DEC34
DEC34
=I
:IDEC3
xI9.7
x16.
*DEC4
xI9.
xI7 .7
M6TCD
Bit
M series)
keyboard uses a fuIl key

I keyboard uses a standard key.
Changes
DEC34:
: T seriesl Lower :
IGIN
IGSK
GRST
TLSK
LCTM
GST2
GSTl
32
No.
Following is the setring for tool life management.

te
M6TCD
1:
0:
IGIN
1:
0:
IGSK
1:
Regards M06 and the

tool group comrnand.
Regards M06 and the
same
block T
code
as the next
same
block T
code
as backnumber.
Ignores tool backnumber.

Does not ignore tool backnumber.
Took skip signal is accepted only while the tool life
tool is in use.
Tool skip signal is always aceepted.
managed
0:
GRST
1:
0:
TLSK
1:
0:
Clears all group executlon data at the tirne of

tool reset signal input. (This is the same with
when this operation is performed.)
Clears execution data only for the group with
the nurnber inputted from the outside at the time
of tool reset signal input. (Only the group shown
by the cursor positi-on when thj,s operation is
performed from MDI.)
At the time of tool skip signal input, Group No. is

also entered.
At the time of tool skip signal input, the group
eurrently being selected is skipped.
-398-
Remarks
Parameter
LCTM
Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
No
Remarks
Designates the tool life by tirne.

Designates the tool life by frequency.
1:
0:
Designate the number of registerable groups in tool

group setting.
GSTI /GST2:
No. of groups
No. of tools/group
GST2
GSTl
r-
16
i-16
l-
32
l-
r-
64
r-
t -
128
1-
././.---*--.,--,^\
0
J/
Bir No.
LOCC 1:
0:
coMc t:
0:
T},TCR
LOCC
coMc
TMCR
RWCNT
NAMPR
LOCC
COMC.
TMCR
RWCNT
NAMPR
1:
0:
.- RrtefrFl (i.i
*/-/
0:
76
s4i,
2r0
'J
<> 'i
c)
//
Does not place 1oca1 variables (/tl to 33) in
<vacant> state during resetting.
Places local variables (lfl to 33) in <vacant>. state
during resetting.
.>
Does not place conmon varLables (#100

<vacant> state during resetting.
P1aces conrmon variables (/1100 to 149)
state during resetting.
i'"i
to 149) ln
in
<vacant>
T code calling subprogram 09000

T code as a normal tool function
Does not count the total number of parts machined
and the number of parts machined even when
U9?lyiA_erS_ :sessqed .
Counts the total number of oarts machined and the
n"rb";-E-Darts rr"tritt.a "iffi

ex_e_cuted
NAMPR I:
Displays the program name on the program directory

display unit.
0: Does not display the program name on the prograu
directory display unit.
W:
6:
-399-
':
Parameter
No
RIN
Bir
No.
RIN
the coordinate rotation angle by

incremental command.
Commands the coordinate ro t at i-on angle by absolute
1:
Commands
0:
command.
ASTCD
ASTCD
I
EQCD
{+
EQCD
I
SHPCD
SHPCD
l
Bir No.
ASTCD/EQCD/
SHPCD:
Bit
HSIF
432
Set the hole parrern of *, =, /l EIA codes

in sequence, using 8-bit data.
t
f-
macro B
custom
HSIF
CLER
NUASS CCINP
RAL
RDL
HSIF
CLER
NUABS
RAL
RDL
No.
I:
0:
CLER
1:
0:
76543210
14/S/T/B code processing sha11 be a high-speed interface.
l{/SlT/B code processing shal1 be a normal interface.
Selects clear conditions, using the reset button,

external reset signal and emergency stop.
Selects reset conditions, using the reset button,
external si-gna1 and emergency stop.
-400-
Remarks
Parameter No.
1:
NUABS
0:
CCINP
1:
0:
RAI
Parameter (Upper
Lower
M series)
Remarks
Returns to the status when the coordinate system is

ON with machine lock signal OFF. (Disable)
Does not return to the status when the coordinate
system is 0N with machine lock signal OFF.
In-position width between a feed block and a feed

block is set by another parameter (No. 0609 to
0612) (Must not be used)
In In-position width is set by nornal parameter.
I: Registers only
puncher.
0:
: T series,
one program for reading in readerf
Registers all programs for reading in reader/

puncher.
l.
RDL
0:
Registers a program after all programs are erased

for reading in reader puncher interface.
The reading is the same as in normal specJ.fication
in reader puncher interface.
GRPOS
Bit
IGNAL SBAB
RSTSW
No.
GRPOS
1:
0:
The actual position

screen.
The actual position
screen.
I-S
displayed on the graphit
only
0TT
is not displayed on the graphic
IGNAL
1: Even when an alarm occurs on the other tool post,

no feed hold status is reached.
0: When an alarm occurs on the other tool post,
the feed hold status is selected
only
0TT
SBAB
l: Head 1 is upper on the conmon screen.

0: Head 2 is upper on the conrmon screen.
only
0TT
RSTSW
l:
only Ofi
0:
The reset key is valid only for the tool post

se lec ted
The reset key is valid for both tool posts.
-401-
,t
Parameter No.
!13LMT
2SP
SEPH
SP2C
Remarks
TlST
Bir
No.
M3LU[
1:
only 0TT
The range of the waiting M code is.
(Parameter No. 243 value) x (100) to 999.
The rane of the waiting 1"1 code is (parameter No. 243
value) x 100 to subsequent 100 pieces.
0:
0:
I:
SEPII
0:
0:
TIST
only
The lst handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent

to 1st tool post, and the 2nd handle pulse to the
2nd tool post.
The handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent in
parallel to both tool posts.
only
0TT
are drawn on a single screen for both

posts.
tool
Graphics are drawn on a separate screen by both
tool posts.
only
0TT
Tool post selecting signal is invalid (HEADI only).

Tool post selecting signal is valid.
1:
0:
0TT
t4,
GraphiqS;
1:
SP2C
spindle (Two spindle Two tool post)

Single spindle (Single spindle Two tool post)
Two
1:
2SP
l
.
*
n
Bir
No.
IFE
76
ITO
IFM
FY1
TYO
,t
,I
'$
54
Set the parameter only to lst tool post
.!
ri'
ti'
7
!
!,
-t
v
E
-402-
Parameter No.
TYI
00
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
-1-
1 2nd tool post
TYO
lst tool post
TYI
0l
TYO
-d-t*'oot
not'
TYI
l0
TYO
TYI
tl
TYO
IFE
ITO
n.
the conditlons for tool post checking are

established, no tool post interference is checked.
I.lhen the conditioons for tool post checking are
established, tool post interference is checked.
l:
When
[:
0:
Even when
Offset No. 0 is designated by T code,

interference check ls contlnued according to the
current Offset No.
Wtren Offset No. 0 is deslgnated, using T code, tool
post interference check 1s lnterrupted until offset
No. other than 0 ls designated by the next T code.
-403-
Remarks
Parameter No.
I:
IFM
Remarks
Tool post interference is checked in the manual mode

Tool post interference is not checked in the mnaual
mode.
FMLlO NPRV EFMLlO

0
FMLlO NPRV EFML I O
Bit
1:
The rapid traverse rate and cutting feed upper liurit

speed parameter increment system shatl be l0 nun/min
or I inch/min.
..g) For 100 m/min, the increment system shall be
n.
As per normal specifications.
1:
Even when no
10000.
position coder is provided, the

per-revolution feed command sha1l be valid.
(The per-revolution feed command is converted
automatipally to the per-minute feed in CNC.)
When no position coder is provided, the
per-revolution feed command shall be invalid.
0:
EFML
1O
DILK
No.
FML1O
NPRV
RDIK
The feedrate command (cutting feed) of

control is used by I0 times.
Standard specif ication.
1.
0:
1.
RDIK
pMC
axis
The high-speed interlock signal sha11 be invalid

when the each directional interlock signal goes off.
The high-speed interlock signal shall be always
0:
va1id.
The each directional interlock signal shatl be valid

only in manual operation.
The directional interlock slgnal shall be invalid.
l.
DILK
0:
Blt
NFED
RSASC]
>Lrz
NFED
RSASC]
STP2
NFED
RSASd
PARTY STP2
NFED
RSASC]
PARTY STP2
No.
-404-
Parameter
Parame t
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lolrer : M series)
No
er Nos. 0050/0051 correspond to setting l/O=2 and 3.

1:
NFED
0:
1:
RSASCI
0:
l:
STP2
the reader puncher interface is used to output

a program, no feed is output before and after that.
When the reader puncher interface is used to output
a program, feed is output before and after that..
the reader puncher interface is used to
input a program, ASCII code is used.
When the reader puncher interface is used to input
a program, ISO/EIA code is used.
When
blt shall be 2 birs in rhe reader
interface.
0: Stop bit shall be I bit in the reader

interface.
puncher
puncher
1: Parity bit shall be present.

0: Parity bit shall be absent.
PARTY
$'{
When
Stop
NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4
IIODIC3
NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4
\toDIcz
BirNo.
NODICX-NODIC6:
NODIC
1:
0:
'IODICY
NODICX
For increment systen 1/10, this sets wherfier

the decimal point position of the current positLon
display of each axis PMC axis control is made
identi-cal to increment systen 1/I0 or not.
The current position display of PMC axLs control
sh.all be the same as in standard specifications,

not in accordance with the decimal point position
of increment systen 1/10
The current position display of PMC axis control is
in accordance with the decinal point position of
increment system 1i tO.
-405-
Remarks
\
L
5*e
Parameter
No
Remarks
LBLCD
0
LBLCD
I
RBLCD
RBiCD
I
Bit
No.
LBLCD /RBLCD:
3210
The hole pattern of [' ] in EIA code in custom

macro B is set by 8-bit data in sequence.
t
:
Bit
PRORCA
ETX
ASCII
?ROTCA
ETX
ASCII
I: ao.
0:
0:
ASCII
10
No.
1:
EXT
1:
0:
]ROTCA
5
D]C
protocol, protocol
For "ororlication
communication protocol, protocol
is
is
used.
used.
:
I
End Code shall be I'ETXrr.

End Code shall be "CR".
For all communj-cations except NC data, ASCII code

is used
For all cornmunications except NC data, ISO code
is used.
il
7
"
u(\
$t'
tt
'b
-406-
.tt
&-
*,
-_
Parameter No.
Al-1 subsequent parameters are set in decirnal
CMRX
0
CMRX
CI,IRZ
I
CMRY
cl'IR3
0
2
CI',IRZ
CMR4
cuR4
an optional comand nulttply (No. 0035 4CMR=1)

is used, there are 2 types of setting methods as
follows.
When
a corwmand.nultiply 7s I/2 to
presetvalue=*+Ioo
(Comand rnultiply)
1)
When
2)
$fben
|127z
a comand rnultiply is 2 to 48:

Preset value = 2 x (Comnand urultiply)
Note 1) For (2) above, be sure !o set a value such

that the coumand rnultiply should be always
an integer.
Note 2) Set the backlash compensation and pitch
error compensation values with detection
unit when an arbitrary conutrand rnultiply
is used.
-407-
Remarks
Refer to
parameter
No. 00040007.
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
CMRY Cgmmand rnultiply
CMRX,
CMRZ,
for
Remarks
Z and 4th axes, in turn.
X,
C},IR4
Setting
code
I'lultiplier
0.5
l0
20
10.
SPLOW
d
SPLOW
For spifidle speed during constant speed spindle

rotation.
For spindle speed at gear shift
(when parameter No. 0003, GST=I), set as
Gear shift spindle speed __ ,^^
x 4095
SPLOW
Maxi-mum
*oaoffi
'
Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit:
rprn)
THDCH
THDCH
Width of chambering for thread cutting cycle in

Setting range: 0 to I27 (unit : 0.1 lead)
G92.
ts
-408E
t'
.?
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
SCTTIM
SCTTIM
Set the delay timer for checking. the spindle speed

reach signal. This sets the time required from
execution of the S function to the beginning of
checking the spindle speed reach signal.
Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: msec)
SCTTIM
Spindle speed
reach signal.
distribution
a
}{BUFl
0
}{BUFl
}{BUF2
0
I,IBUF2
MBUFI,2
codes which are not subjected to

the next block can be set.
for
buffering
M03 is not subjected to buffering
is
set'
When 03
block.
next
for the
Up to two
14
-409-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
PSORGX
PSORGZ
Grid numbers at the reference point of X and Z axes,

respectively.
Setting range: o-255
PSORGX,
PSORGZ
OFCMP
H4NO+HZNO
tt
0
TLCMP
8
NUMHG
OFMAX
TLMAX
OFCMP
TLCMD
Offset value compensation value setting value

0 - 32.
Tool selection number compensation value
Setting value: 0 - 99
NU}4HG
The number of manual pulse generators to be used
OFMAX
Maximum
TLMAX
Maximum
in multi-handle is set.
Setting value z l/2/3 (unit)
value of offset number

Setting valuez O - 32
value of tool setting
Settingvalue: 0-99
-4r0-
number
,3
!j
Parameter No.
Remarks
In case of multi-handle B specification, which

manual pulse generator is used for the Z axis in
HZNO
ified.
Setting value:
spec
1, 2 or
In case of rnulti-handle B specification, which

manual pulse generator is used for the 4th axis
H4NO
specified,
Setting valuei
l, 2 or
1S
settlng
method
Second digit:
First digir :
H4NO
HZNo
(Exanple) When the 2nd manual pulse generator is

used for the Z-axis and the 3rd manual'
pulse generator is used for the 4th axis.
Setting value.
32
MOLHPG
I
I
MOLHPG
Multiplier n of the manual handle feed

Setting valuez L - 127
Uultiplier n when selection sighal MP2 for the
manual hand feed move distance in on, set to 100 as
a standard value.
},IOLHPG
OFSNO
.l
I
I
OFSNO
Setting of tool offset number Ln tool offset value

direct input function B (at the setting of work
coordinate system shift amount).
Setting valuet | - 32
- 4II -
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M seri_es)

GRPAX
Graphic coordinate system setting in graphic

func t ion.
GRPAX
GRPAX=0
GRPAX=1
GRPAX=2
GRPAX=3
GRPAX=6
GRPAX=4
LrJ(fA
=/
(Note) The difference between GRpAX=0, lr 2 and

GRPAX=3,4,5 is the difference that the work
coordinate system zero point is at chuck
side or not.
PSRNQI
5
PSRNQ2
6
PSRNQ3
-4L2-
Remarks
I
I
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
PSRNQ4
PSRNOI
Set the order of moving to the dry run restart

position in program restart of X-axis, Y-axis,
Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
Sett.ing value: I - No. of axes (Moves in the order
of 1, 2, 3 and 4)
(eg)
When setting to PSRNQ1=2, PSRNQ2=3, PSRNQ3=4

and PSRNQ4=l, the tool moves to the restart
position by one axis in the order of 4th -Y-2.
(Note) When all zero, the value out of the setting

range or the same value is overlapped on the
above parameter for setting, the setting is
made automaticallv in the order of 4th - X
-\-2.
UPKY
UPKY
a
DWNKY
DLINKY
RGTKY
)
RGTKY
LFTKY
0
LFTKY
FWDKY
J
FWDKY
-4r3-
Remarks
Parameter No.
BACKY
BACKY
Specify the JOG move axis and direction on the

software operatorts panel corresponding to keys.
KEEHHE
Setting value: I to
Axis /Direc t ion
Setting Value
+x
-X
+z
-z
+;t
-5
(Exarnple)
when
serri"c
ro *x,
m qlro -X, FFI to +2,
f
Trl
+3
anal
-t,
.
l*i1.. I ulto
f-il
to -3, set as follows
UPKY=I, DWNKY=2, RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4, FI.IDKY=5, BACKY=6.
RTDKY
LTUKY
RTDKY=7, LTOKY=8
-4L4-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper:
Parameter No.
a) In
case
Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
of T series
Sets the jog feed axes and directions on the
software operatorts Danel corresponding to
UPKY,
DWNKY,
trEHH;.'
RGTKY,
LFTKY
Axis, direction
Setting value
+X
-x
+Z
-z
(Examo 1e )
*"'
""..r",
to *x,
ro -x,
H.'
*2,
and
to -2, set as follows.

UPKY=I,
b) In
URKY
LTUKY
case
DWNKY=2,
RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4.
of M series
Set the jog feed axes and directions on the
software operatorts Danel corresponding to
teY?'
EEtrEtr Eil EE
Axis, direction
Setting value
+X
_X
+Y
-Y
+z
-z
+4
-4
(Exanple)
When
setting
to
to -X,
to *Y
+2,
and
to -2,
to *X,
to -Y, set as follows.
UPKY=5, DWNKY=6, RGTKY=l, LFTKY=2, FWDKY=4, BACKY=3.
-4r5-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
NSWI
NSWI
M series)
\
NSW88
J
NSW88
The names of general purpose switches (SIGNAL 0 SIGNAL 7) on the software operatorts panel in the
following figure are set as fo1lows.
OPERATOR'S
SIGNAL0
SIGNALI
SIGNAL 2
SIGN.trt 3
SIGNAL 4
SIGNAL 5
SIGNAL 6
SIGNAL 7
PANEL 02334
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N5678
ON
IOFF
OFF fON
OFF ION
ON
IOFF
ON
IOFF
I0FF
ON
0N
IOFF
OFF ION
AUTO
Characters are set by codes in parameters 0140 to

0203 as follows:
-416-
Remarks
Parameter No.
No.
140
Code (083) corresponding to character ttStt

of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No. 141
Code (073) corresponding to character ttltt
PRM.
of
SIGNAL
0 in the
above
figure is set.
PRM. No. t42
Code (071) corresponding to character ttGtt

PRM. No. 143
Code (078) corresponding to character ttNtt

PRM. No. 144
Code (065) corresponding to character ttAtt

PRM. No. 145
Code (076) corresponding to character ttlt'

PRM. No.
146
Code (032) corresponding to character tt

PRI"I. No.
L47
Code (048) corresponding to character ttort

tt
PRM. No. 0148-0155 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL I in the
above figure.
PRM.
No. 0156-0163
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 2 {n the

above figure.
PRM.
No.0164-0171
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 3 in the

above figure.
PRM.
No.
OL72-0179
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 4 in the
PRM.
No. 0180-0187
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 ln the
PRM.
No. 0188-0195 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 in the

above figure.
PRM.
No. 0196-0203 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 7 in the

above fisure.
above figure.
above figure.
For character codes, refer to the

characters-to-codes table in the next page.
Setting value 0 is a space.
-4I7-
Remarks
Character-to-codes Correspondence Table

Character
Code
065
054
066
055
067
056
068
057
069
032
Space
070
033
Exclamation mark
071
tl
034
Quotation mark
072
tl
035
Sharp
073
036
Dollar
074
o/
037
Percent
075
&
038
Ampersand
076
039
Apostrophe
077
040
078
041
Left parenthesis
Risht parenthesis
O79 F
042
Aster j-sk
080
043
Plus sien
081
044
Comma
082
045
083
046
084
047
Minus sisn
Period
Slash
085
0s8
Colon
086
0s9
Semi-co1on
!l
087
060
088
061
089
Left ansle bracket

Sisn of equality
Rieht anele bracket
Conment
Character
Code
Comment
l
i
:
i
t;
i
i,
svmbol
.i
I
062
,|
090
048
049
050
051
093
Yen srrmbol
052
094
Risht square bracket
0s3
095
Underline
UOJ
uo4
09r
A
t
1
Question mark
Commercial at mark
Left square bracket
092
4
n
-4rB-
{
.:
I
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
CCLMP
.+
POSTNi
5
POSTN2
6
POSTN3
POSTN4
INTPLN
0:
INTPLN
1:
2:
is selected with power on.

is seleeted with power on.
Gl9 is selected with power on.
G17
G18
M-code of clamp of C-axis in the drilling
CCLMP
Setting value 00 to
POSTN1
cycle
99
Approach amount for single directi-on posi-tioning of

X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axi-s and 4th axis
Setting value 0 to 255 Unit 0.0I m

(rnetric output)
setring value 0 ro 255 unit 0.001 inch
(inch output)
Note) In increment systern l/10, the uni-t is the
same as above. But the Max. value is 163.
-419-
Remarks
Parameter No.
3
AO\IMDR
Mininum deceleration ratio of circular cutting

speed inside the automatic override-
AOVMDR:
Setting range: I to 100%

Standard preset value: I
Set the mj-nimum deceleration ratio (lDR) when the
inside circular cutting speed is changed.
4
AOVOR
Deceleration ratio of inside corner automatic

override.
Setting Jange: I to 1001l
Standard preset value: 50
Set the inside corner override value.
AOVCR:
AOVTH
AOVTH:
'1
f
1
1
Inside judgement angle of automatic override at

inside corner part.
Setting range: I to 179"
Standard preset value: 91
-420-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower':
M series)
FIDN
Constant to find the feedrate variations when manual

pulse generator is rot.at.ed one scale for Fl digit
FIDN:
command.
AF=
Fmax i
100n
Set n above. In other words, set the feedrate

the manual pulse generator is rotated.
Fmax
when
Preset value
I to
I27
Frnax i in the above equatlon is the upper linit

value of feedrate for Fl digit conmand: set it to
parameter Nos. 0583/0584.
trhax
Fmax
1:
2:
Upper
Upper
linit
linit
value of Fl to F4 feedrate
value of F5 to F9 feedrate
MCDCNT
9
MCDCNT
the preset M*cgqg_ig executed, the total- number

of machined parts and the number of machined parts
are counted.
Settlng value: l_tg 255
(0 is eguivalent
to no setting.
98 and 99 cannot be set.)
I,Ih_en
MCDCNT:/
E
F:
la
i]MGCDO
0
II}IGCDO
UMGCD9
----.-
UMGCD9
.-42L-
Remarks
Parameter (UPPer
No
Parameter
: T series'
Lower
Remarks
: M series)
macro'
Set uP fo l0 G codes calling custom
calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code calling
G code
U},IGCDO:
UMGCDI:
UMGCD2:
UMGCD3:
UMGCD :
UMGCD5:
UI"IGCD6:
UMGCDT:
UMGCD8:
U]'IGCD9:
custom macro bodY 090 10

custom macro bodY 0901r
custom uacro bodY 090r2
custom macro bodY 090r3
custom macro bodY 090I4
custom macro bodY 090I5
custom macro bodY 0901 6
custom macro bodY 090i7
Setting value:
001 to 255
(with G00' no custom macro can be
called. Even when 0 is called'

it is equivalent to no setting.
l
I
Set up to 10 M codes calling custom macro'

UM{CD5:
UWCD6:
UMMCDT:
UMMCD8:
iD,IMCDg:
UMMCDlO:
UMMCDIl:
UI'IMCD 12 :
UMMCDI3:
code calling
M code calling
M code calling
M code calling
1"1 code calling
M code calling
M code calling
!1 code calling
M code calling
U cbde calling
1"1
UMMCD4:
,
Setting value:
custom macro bodY 09020

custom macro bodY 0902 I
custom macro bodY 090 2s
006 to
255
(with M00' no
cuscom macro
can be
0 is set'
called.
to
ic is equivalent no setting.
Even when
-422-
*:,
't.
Paranoe
ter
Parameter (Upper:
No.
Tserles, Lower: Mseries)
Remarks
UMMCDl
UMMCDl
UMMCD2
I
UMI'TCD2
UMMCD3
2
UMMCD3
Set up
to
UMMCD1:
UMMCD2:
UMMCD3:
M codes
1.1
calling custom Dacro.
code calling custom macro body 09001

calling custom macro body 09002
calling custom macro body 09003
M code
M code
Setting value: 003 to
255
(With M00, no custom Eacro can
be
cal1ed. Even when 0 is set,

it is equivalent to no settipg.)
WAITM
I.IAITM:
Setting of the mlnimum value of 3-diglt code which

waiting M code (only OTT):
Input the 3rd figure as a setting value.
Up to 100 waiting M codes are available.
becomes a
Exanple) When the setting value = 5, the lraiting

M codes are 500 to 599.
-423-
only
OTT
i-{F
ifJ+*F.+i-a4
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
BRATE2
0
BRATEz
.-
BMTE2:
Baud rate when the reader puncher interface is

used (valid when setting parameEer Ilo is 2).
BRATE3:
Baud rate when remote buffer

(va1id when setting paramete
F*used
The correspondence between Secting No. and actual

baud rate i-s as fol1ows.
SettiFg No.
Baud rate
50
2
3
r00
110
150
200
300
600
6
7
8.
POFF
TPSUP
TPSUP:
Z-axis acceleration/deceleraEion type in fhe rigid

tapping node
Data type: Byte type
Set value: 0: Exponenti-al acceleration/
decelerati-on
Standard set value: 0
-424-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
BKL9
Spindle backlash
amount
Ln the
rigid talnin8 node
Data type: Byte type

Set value: O - LZ7
: Detection unit
Unit
Note) Power should be turned off whenever the parameter is

ehanged.
6
MCODE
MCODE:
M-code
to specify the rigid tapping
mode
type: Byte tyPe

Setvalue: 0-99
Data
Note) Power should bef,turned off whenever the pararneter ls

changed.
Standard
rNPx
0
setting
20 (netric
INPX
outPut)
12 (lnch
outPut)
INFZ
0
I
INPY
INP3
0
INP3
INPZ
3rd axls Ln-posltion width
Settlng value O to 32767 detection unit
:.i
-425-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
INP4
INPX, INPY In-position width

INPZ, INP4 respectively.
Setting range:
for X,
to
Y,
32767
Z, and 4th axis,

(detection unit)
Position
deflection
Next block
value
In-position width
In position check is performed when the feed mode
changes from rapid traverse to rapid traverse,
rapid traverse to cutting feed , or cutting feed to
rapid traverse.
SERRX
4
SERRX
SERRZ
5
SERRY
SERR3
6
SERRZ
SERR3
3rd axis position deviation linit value

Setting value 0 to 32767 detection unit
ril
-426-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
series)
SERR4
Lirnitation value of position deviation amount during

movenent for X, Y, Z and 4th axis' resPectively.
serring range: 0 to 32767 (detection unit)
SERRX,
SERRY,
SERRZ,
SERR4
(Exarnple) When the rapid traverse rate

and the position gain is 30,
calculated by:
is
10 n/nin.
the error is
s=-IG
Conversion of 10 u/nin. into pulses/sec.

with the detecEion unit of 1u/pulse gives
166,666 pulses/sec.
Therefore, E = L66,665/30 - 5'555 pulses.
Multiply this value by a factor of 1.5'

and set the obtained value 8333 as the
paraueter.
GRDSX
8
GRDSX
a
GRDSZ
GRDSY
.!
GRDS3
U
n
GRDSZ
3rd axis grid shift

Setting value O to
GRDS3
amount setting
+32767 detecting
unit
I
GRDS4
GRDSX,
GRDSY,
GRDSZ,
GRDS4
Setting of grid shift amount of X axis, Y axis, Z

axis and 4th axis respectively.
serring range 0 to +32767 (detect unit).
Wtren the reference !'oint is shiftefiTte slgn of
this parameter is
necessary.
-427-
Remarks
<;;llP
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :
Parameter No.
11
series)
Remarks
Reference point return procedure

Select manual continuous feed mode, and turn
signal ZRN on (connect it with +24V) ' When
feed towards the reference poi-nt is designaEed
with the manual feed button, the moving part of
the machine Doves at rapid traverse.
When the deceleration limit switch is operated
and the contact of reference point return
deceleration signal ttDCX, *DCY, i<DCZ, *DC4
opens, and the feed is decelerated.
Thereafter, the moving part moves at a Predetermined low sPeed.
Thereafter, when the deceleration lirnit switch
is operated and the rnoving Part reaches the
(i)
electric grid position, feed stops, and

reference point return completion signal ZPX,
ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 is outPut.
The direction in which an axis is returned to
reference point can be set for each axis.
Once an axis is returned to reference point
and the corresponding signal ZPX, ZPY' ZPZ ot
Z{4 is output, jog feed for that axis is
invalid until signal ZRN is turned off'
(2) Timing charE

Lock condition
ZRN (Reference Point return)
ffi---
+X
(Reference point
is reached with the
tr
pL
No.0534)
criollllllllllt
/ on)
i (Set Darameter
\r
*DCX
(One.rotation signal)
/one rotation sisnal I

/ after *DCX is iurned \
'IDCX
ON
(Grid shift amount set bY

parameter No. 0508 - 05f I
PX
(X axis plus return direction.)
'ii
-428-
{_
.i
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower :
Parameter No.
series )
PSANGN
I
PSANGN
S4/S5 digits control (Analog output)
PSANGN
Sets the data for adjusting the gain of constant

surface speed control. (analog output) This seEs
the data for gain adjustment in analog output'
setting range: 700 to 1250
Standard setting value: 1000
(Adjusting nethod)
(1)- Set the standard setting value 1000'
(2) Designate the maximum S analog value (fOVl '
(3) Measure the outPut voltage.
(4) Set this value according to the following
formula.
i0
lfeasured voltage (V)
1000
= setting value
(5) After setting the Paramqter.' designate the

maximum S analog value (10V) again, and make
sure that the outPut voltage is 10V.
LPGIN
0
LPGIN
Setting of servo loop gain in position control'

Setting range: t to- 9i99 (unit: 0.01 sec-1)
Note) To set a loop gain to each axis, set No' 5L7
to 0 and set a loop gain of X axis, Yaxis and
so on. (The increment system is the same' )
LPGIN
RPDFX
8
RPDFX
RPDFZ
r.l
RPDFY
-429-
Standard
setting
3000
; ,{aE}F.
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T seriep, Lower : M series)

RPDF3
RPDFZ
RPDF4
Rapid traverse rate of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn.
PPNFY
Setting
30 to
30 to
Note i)
RPDFY,
range
24000 Unit mm/nin (mno output)

9600 Unit 0.1 inch/min (inch output)
Set rrl'r to the FML10 of parameter No. 49
for the other seting values.
Note 2) In increment system 1/10, the unit is the
RPDF/32,
RPFD4
same.
'F
LINTX
LINTX
LINTZ
0
LINTY
LINT3
0
LINTZ
LINT3
3rd axis linear acceleration/deceleration time

constant (for rapid traverse)
Setting value 8 to 4000 Unit msec
-430-
Remarks
Par'ameter (Upper
Parameter No.
Lower
M series)
Remarks
: T series,
LINT4
Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration

of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn during rapid
LINTX,
LINTY,
LINTZ,
LINT4
traverse.
msec.)
THRDT
The time constant value of X axis in thread cutting
THRDT
cycle (G92).
Setting range: I to 4000 (unit: msec.)
Set the most suitable value to this parameter in
combination with the parameter THDFL (pararneter
No. 0528)
FEDIO(
FED}fl(
Upper speed of cutting feed (available for X, Y, z
FED}fl(
axes)
Setting range
6 to 15000 unit:
6 to 6000 unit:
rnn/rnin (m outPut)
0.I inch/nin (inch output)
Note 1) Set 'r1" to the FMLI0 of parameter No. 49

for the other cutting values.
Note 2) In increment system the unit is the same.
THDFL
0
THDFL
value (FL) of X axis acceleration/

deceleration in thread cutting cycle. (G92)
Setting range
6 to i5000 unit: nm/rnin (rnm output)
6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch output)
Set the most suitable value to this parameter in
consideration of the parameter No. 0526.
The lower linit
Note 1) In incrernent systen the unit is the
-43r-
same.
See
parameter
No. 0526
Parameter No.
Remarks
FFFDT
0
FEEDT
Time constant of the exponential acceleration/

deceleration in cutting feed and jog feed.
0 to 4000 unit: msec
Setting range:
Set this to tt0tt, when the exponential accelerati-on/
deceleration is not used.
FEEDT
FEDFL
5
FEDFL
The lor.rer lirnit of feed rate in exponential

acceleration /deceleraE ion.
SeEting range
6 to t5000 unit: mu,/min (nrn output)
FEDFL
6 to 6000 unit: 0.I inch/nin (inch output)

Note)rIn increment system 1/10, the unit is the
r'.
!
!
'1l/
same.
-,
;'-----SPALW
/ f--'1:--T--1
CYCR
Tolerance (g) at which the actual spindle speed is

regarded to reach the command value in the detection
SPALW
of soindle function.
Setting range: I to 100 (7")
(For constant surface sPeed control)
Setting of relief amount in canned cycle G73 (high
speed peck drilling cYcle)
Setting range: 0 to 32767 unit: 0.001 mn ., /
(rnrn input)
0 to 3/767 unit: 0.0001 inch
CYCR
-J
trf,iii.-i;p'u11
Noce) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the

same.
SPLMT
0
.,
CYCD
SPLMT
Spindle speed fluctuation (r) at which an alarm is
indicated in the detection of spindle

fluctuation.
Setting range: I to 100 (%)
(For constant surface speed control)
-432-
speed
=:=
Parameter No.
Paraureter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
Setting of the cutting start point in canned cycle
CYCD
G73 (peck
drilling cycte)
Setting range: 0 to 32767 unir: 0.001 un

(rnn
input)
to 32767 unit: 0.0001 inch
Note) In increment
(inch input)
system
L/IO, the unit is the
same.
RPDFL
0
3
RPDFL
The least speed of rapid traverse override (Fo)
RPDFL
(Cornrnon to all axis)

Setting range
6 to 15000 unit: mr/min (mr output)
6 to 6000 unir: 0.1 inch/nin (inch ourpur)
Note) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the

same.
ZRNFL
0
4
ZRNFL
Low feed speed at reference point return (FL)

(Cornmon to all axes)
Setting range
6 to 15000 unit: rmn/min (mr output)
ZRNFL
6 to 6000 unit:
0.1 inch/min (inch output)
Note) In increment systen l/10, the unit is the

same.
BKLX
0
BKLX
BKLZ
0
BKLY
-433-
Rernarks
n+rq'
'ffi*ffftf*
Et,
Parameter
Parameter No.
(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
Remarks
BKL3
0
BKLZ
BKL4
BKLX,
I)I\LZ / I t
BKL3IZ
BLK4
Backlash amount
respect ively.
of X, Y, Z and 4th
Setting amount
0 to 2550 unit:
0 to 2550 unit:
0.001 nm
(rnm
axes,
output)
0.000I inch (lnch output)

progranming,
set the value of X axis
In diameter
(For
T
series)
i-n diameter va1ue.
Note I) Unit becomes l/tO in increment system LlL}.
t
Setting M series spindle function

2-stage
gear
3-stage
gear
GRIO
Low
Low
GR2O
GR3O
Hieh
l'liddle
Hieh
Remarks
L0\{ : LOW Gear

l"liddle: Middle Gear
Hieh : Hieh Gear
Spindle motor rotation command

(analog voltage output)
t.
i;
l0v
Voltage (NC) corresponding
to the upper limit of the
spindle motor rPm
GR2O
(GR2q
Spindle rotation
command
,x
A
76t5
vmin
lBf
V*""
*?ffi
(S code input)
Vmux
*?0ff
Designation included in parentheses

is concerned with the 3-stage gear.
Note 2) Set a backlash compensation value with a

detection unit when an arbitrary command
multiply is used.
-434-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T seri-es,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
The following values are first. set in the parameters

. Constant Vmax regarding the upper limit of the
spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 542).
This constant is obtained by the equation below.
The upper
Vmax
lirnit of
the
spindle motor rpm

The spindle motor rpm when
the command voltage is 10 V
= 4095 x
. Constant Vmin regarding the lower limit of the

spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 543)
Vglin = 4095
The lower linit of the

soindle motor rDm
The spindle motor rpm when
the comrnand voltage is 10 V
. Spindle rpm A with low gear whei-the comnand vifltage

is l0 V (parameter No. 541)
. Spindle rpm B with high (or middle) gearwhen the
corrnand voltage is 10 V (parameter No. 539)
. Spindle rpm C with high gear when the command
volEage is I0 V (parameter No. 555) (3-stage gear)
(Note) If the sPecified voltage exceeds the allowable input
voltage for the spindle drive system' rpu at l0 V
is assumed by proportional calculation, and the
resultant assumption should be used.
From above, the spindlJ'motor rotation conrmand (0 - 10 V) and
the gear selectj-on command (GR30, GR20, GRl0) are outPut for
the specified S code, as shom in the Fig. above.
J TU
L\,
GRHYJ,\
SPDLC
GRH}IA.X
Sets the spindle speed offset compensation value,

that is, compensation value of zero offset of
spindle speed command voltage.
(for constant surface speed control)
Setting range: 0 to +8191 (unit: VELO)
spindle speed (for analog output with

spindle funct,ion) at high gear (intermediate
gear in case of 3-stage gear).
Maximum
(Spindle speed with spindle speed voltage of

Setting range: I to 19999 (unit: rpm)
i
I
10V)
In case ofonly one

gear, set
thi-s value
to low gear
--'{'+Tc
e{4ilEF:
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lo\ter : M series)

cRI'!(l
0
GRHMIN
GRI'fl(2
GRLMAX
GR}D{3
SPDMAX
GR}D(4
0
SPDMIN
ae
GRI'D(I
GRHMIN
GRLMAX
SPDMAX
SPDI'TIN
The spindle speed corresponding to gears I to

when the spindle speed command is lOV.
(for constant surface speed control)
Secting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rpn) /
Setting of the lower limit of the spindle speed

high speed gear. (Medium speed gear in
3-step gear selection) (for S analog output type B)
(for S analog output)
Setting range: I to L9999 (unit: rPn)
when using
Setting of the max. spindle speed at low speed

gear (for S analog outPut).
Set the spindle speed when the velocity command
voltage is 10V.
Setting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rPm)
Setting of the upper limit of output value to the
spindle motor.
limit of spindle motor 4095
Setting value Upper
llax. spindle motor speed x
Setting range: I to 4095
Setting of the upper limit of output value to the
spindle motor.
Setting value = Lower limit of spindle motor X +uY]
Setting range: I ro 4095
-436-
Remarks
.{
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Rem:aft5
ii
I
DRFT3
0
Set a compensation value for drift generated in the

Cs-axis servo loop.
Setting value 0 to +8191
Unit VELO
The value of this parameter changes automatically
during the automatic compensation.
DRFT3
JOGFL
0
(+
JOGFL
of jog feed in exponential

acceleration/ deceleration (FL)
Setting range
6 co 15000 unit: nrn/min (mm oucpur)
6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/min (inch output)
The lower linit
JOGFL
Note) In increment systen 1/10, the unit is
Ehe
srme.
FINT
The cutting feedrate in
FINT
AUTO rnode
at turning
po\.rer
on.
Setting range
6 to 15000 unic: mn/rnin (uru input)
6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch input)
(Generally, set ttO" to this parameter and change it
by program command. When the feedrate i.s constant
and it is not necessary to change, set the feedrate
to this paraDeter. )
SEQINC
0
0
SEQINC
SEQINC
Number increment
sequence No.
Setting range:
value in automatic insertion of

0 to
9999
-437-
,*rf,l|;F*
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
LOI^lSP
LOWSP
llj-nimum spindle .speed

control mode (G96)
in constant surface
speed
rpm)
BRATEO
BRATEO
BRATEO
This sets the baud rate when the rea_d_e-{puncher

interface is used.
(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0. )
Relation between the setting value and the baud
rate is as follows:
Settiff
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
value
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1 200
2400
480096 00
-438-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Remarks
BMTEl
BMTEl
This sets the baud rate r^/hen the reader/puncher

,-\
interface is used.
(Effective when the setting paraaeter I/O is i.;,/
BRATEl
Relation between the setting value and the baud

rate is as follows:
Setting value
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ln
l',.2
0
Baud rate
'k
1)
150
200
300
600
I 200
-24Sq
-<-jJgaq)
f e600 \
GRTMAX
Setting of the max. spindle speed at high speed

gear in 3-step gear selection (for S analog output)
Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
GRTMAX
SCLMP
GRTMIN
SCLMP
GRTMIN
".t* |.?
50
100
110
Upper linit of spindle speed (for constant surface

speed control)
Setting range: I to f9999 (unlt: rpn)
(Valid both in G96 and G97 rnodes.)
Setting of the'lower timit of.rhe spindle

high speed gear in 3-step gear
selection. (For S analog output type B)
Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
when using
-439-
speed
n/*
F,
Parameter No.
Remarks
CRCDL
CRCDL
I{hen tool moves along the outside of an acute

angle close to 90" during tool nose radius
compensation (T-system) or cutEer compensation
(M-system) limitations on ignoring a small movement
CRCDL
amount.
Setting range:
0 to 16383 unit:
0 to 16383 unit:
0.001 mrn (mrn input)

0:0001 inch (inch input)
Note) Unit becornes t/10 in increment system 1/f0'
(AY)
path after offset

Programmed Path
If AX < CRCDL and AZ(AY) < CRCDL, the smal1

movement is ignored. This prevents the workpiece
from being affected by sEopping the tool at the
corner.
ACALFL
0
ACAIFL
Feedrate during rneasuring in automatic tool
ebmpensation function (common for a1I axes) '

Setting range:
0 to 15000 unit: rnrn/min (mrn input)
0 to 6000 unit: 0. I inch/min (inch input)
Note) In increment systern l/10, the unit is the

DdulE.
-440-
n
:
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lotrer : M series)
Parameter No.
RPDJX
0
RPDJX
RPDJZ
0
RPDJY
RPDJ3
0
RPDJZ
RPDJ4
Rapid traverse rate in
RPDJX,
RPDJZ/Y,
PFDJ3 /2,
RPDJ4
4th axis in turn.

Setting range:
30 to 24000 unit:
30 to 9600 unir:
If 'r0rr is set to these
of parameEer No. 0518,
JOG
node for X, Y, Z and
nm/min (nn output)
0. I inch/nin (inch output)

parameters, the set vd.lues
0519' 0520 and 0521 are
used.
the FML10 of parameter No. 49 to I for

the other setting values.
In increment systern l/10, the unit is the
Note 1) Set
Note 2)
same.
JOGF
JOGF
feed rate when the rotary switch position is I0

in feed rate B specification:
Setting value I to 2000 Unit mrn/rnin. deg/nin
JOG
(Metric ouEput)
Setting value I to 800 Unir 0.1 inch/min deg/nin
(Inch output)
Note) In increment system 1/10, the unit is rhe
same.
-44r-
Remarks
i6;aar*ii,'.
- .....*"crl|ff;F
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
(eg) When 200 is set to Parameter No. 565:

Feed rate becomes geometrlcal series of 200
rnm/min (for rnetric output) or 20 inch/rnin
(for inch output) in rotary SW position 10.
Rotarv
SW
hrhen parameter
When parameter
los iEion
Manual continuous feed rate
conditions
0VRI=0
*ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov
Metric output
I
*ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov1 Me tric Inch
input
Inch output
Inch
Me tric
input input input
mrn/
inch/
OVRI=
0
o
min.
o
o
o
o
I1
L2
l3
L4
15
o
o
o
o
rnn/
inch/
min.
min.
r0
0.4
25
t.0
t4
0.5
35
t.4
20
0.8
49
2.O
27
1.1
68
2.7
37
1.5
9s
3.7
52
2.0
t32
5.2
72
3.0
r83
7.2
250
t0.0
r4.0
100
140
5.0
3s0
8.0
490
270
rl.0
bdu
27 .O
370
15. 0
950
37.0
520
20. 0
r320
57.0
720
30. 0
I 830
r000
40. 0
500
2.0
100.0
(Note) O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact
is open, and Ehe blank shows that it is closed.
-442-
Parameter No.
Parameter
(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
5
JOGFAD
feed rate when rotary SW position is 10 for the

additional axis (rotary shaft) in feed rate B
specification
Setting value 1 to 2000 unit: deg/nin
(eg) When 200 is set to parameter No. 566:
Feed rate becomes geometrical series of 200
deg/nin in rotary switch position 10.
JOG
JOGFAD
Rotarv
SI.I
conditions
I{hen parameter
Pos t_-
tion
OVRI=0
uous
feed
*ov8 *0v4 *0v2 *ovi *ov8 *ov4 *0v2 *ovl rate
Note
contin
When parameter
OVRI=I
(Note l)
Manual
tr
ll
L2
l3
l4
l5
10
o
ro
r00
140
@
?7i
o
o
52
72
27
37
L4
20
deg/nir
370
520
720
r000
O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal

contact Ls open , and the blank shows that it is closed.
In increment s stem I 10, unit is the same.
-443-
Remarks
Parameter
No
FEDMAD
Upper lirnit of feed rate of all axes in case of

feed rate B specification.
Setting range:
6 to 15000 unit: deg/rnin (rotary axis)
6 to 15000 unit: mm/rnin (mrn outPut)
6 to 15000 unit: inch/min (inch output)
FEDMAD
Note) In increment systen i/10, unit is the
same.
RPDFLAD
of rapid traverse override for the

in case of feed rate B specificaaxis
additional
F
tion.
Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/min
Low speed (Fo)
RPDFLAD
Note) In increment systen t/tO, unit is the
same'
ZRNFLAD
at reference point return of the

additional axis in case of feed rate B sPecification.
Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/nin
Low feed raEe (FL)
ZRNFLAD
Note) In incremeht svstem 1/10' uniE ls the
same.
SPDLC
SPDLC
Set the
spindle
control
Setting
compensaEion value for zeto offset of

speed command voltage (for 54l55 digits
option)
range: 0 - +8191 unit:
-444-
VELO
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
SLPG},I1
AOVLE
End point deceleration distance of automatic
AOVLE:
override at inside corner Part.

serting range: I to 3999
Unit: 0.1rnn - Metric inPut
0.01 inch - Inch inPut
Set the oPerating range Le.
SLPGM2
AOVLS
End point deceleration distance of automatic
AOVLS:
override at inside eorner.

Setting range: 1 to 3999
Unit: 0.1 rnur'- Metric inch
0.01 inch - Inch inPut
Set the oPerating range Ls.
SLPGI'13
I
SLPGM4
0
F1DMAXl
SLPGIN
0
F1DMAX2
FIDMAX1
Upper lirnit of Fl digit command feedrate
FID}4AX2:
FIDT'IAXI:
FID}(AX2:
linit of Fl to F4 feedrate
Upper limit of F5 to F9 feedrate
Upper
-445-
!G
Parameter No.
Setting value: 0 to 15000 unit I mrn/min

(Metric output)
I to 6000 unit 0.1 inch/rnin
(Inch output)
For deviation, refer to parameter No.
SLPGM
{i
216.
Servo loop gain rnultiplier of spindle for gears I to
-4
4 in sequence.
Setting value = 2048 x (E/L) x a x 1000
where: E = Voltage when spi-ndle motor is rotating
at 1000 rpro (V)
L = Angle per spindle motor rotation
(normally 360)
s = Detecting unit (deg)
SLPGIN
Spindle loop gain

Setting value I to 9999 Unit 0.01 (l/sec)
SRPDFL
)
SPDI"DI
of spindle rapid feed override

Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deg/nin
SRPDFL:
Minimum speed
SPD}fiL:
Sets the spindle speed rpm when low- and high-speed

gears are changed over. Or set the spindle speed
rpm when 1or.r- and medium-gears (3-step gears are
used) are changed over
Set Spindle changing speed
Spindle max. speed
Setting value: 1 to
4095
-446-
4095
Remarks
(FO)
t.''-_
_i
ii
: M serles)
Parameter (Upper : T series '
Parameter No.
Remarks
SZRNFL
0
-t-
5.
ll
tt
It
I
I
SPD}O(H
1
FL speed at spindle orientation

Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deglmin
SZRNFL:
Sets the spindle motor speed rpn at the time of

medium- and high-speed gear change when 3-s tep
gears are used.
s,q
Set Spindle changing sp_eed rpm x

Spindle nax. sPeed
F-fl
r-.
Setting value: 1 to
F"t
'i
4095
4095
'*
MORT
+l
i.a
Spindle orientation M-code

Set ting value 06 to 97
MORT
I1
$
MSRES
-I
1'
Splndle indexing reset M-code

Setting value 06 to 97
MSRES
G
F:.'E
\I
I
G',1'
MSINDX
n
I'
M-code inlrial
MSINDX
value for M-code lndexlng
Setting value 06 to
$:
92
#
MSDEG
{9.
MSDEG
Baslc rotatlon angle for M-code lndexlng

Settlng value I to 60 Unlt deg
*l
t.i
fG
-447-
itffie:'
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
PDWEL
Dwell time at the tiure of C-axis unclamp

the drilling cycle
Setting value 0 to 32767 Unit msec
PDWEL
command
in
PECKC
Setting of return amount (d) for peck drilling

in the drilling cycle
Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.001 uun
(l'le tric input)
Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch input)
PECKC
Note) Ifiit b.cor""
1/ 10
in increment system 1/10.

STPEX
STPEX
STPEZ
STPEY
STPE4
STPE4
qTDFY
Z, 3,
Y,
4
Position error i inrit rral-ue during X-axis, Y-axis,

Z-axis, 3rd axis and 4th axis stop in seqr-re;:ce
Setting value 0 to 32767 Detecting unit
h'
&
t
-448-
---*
t-
I
I
-t.
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
series)
Remarks
PCHK
0
Minimum value of Progran No. used

posts I and 2.
PCI{K:
in
coruron i.n tool
TLCNEC
Tool life management ignore

Setcing value 0 to 9999
TLCNEG:
No.
PARTRQ
0
PARTRQ
9eqs--llrg number
PARTRQ:
Setting value
of
0_ rg_
machined
99pj
parts required.
PEXPJX
0
I
l-
PEXPJX
PEXPJZ
0
PEXPJY
PEXPJ3
6
PEXPJZ
-449-
oply
0TT
I;rF
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
PEXPJ4
0
PEXPJ4
Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration time

constant sequentially in manual feed.
Setting value 0 to 4000 Unit: msec
When no exponential acceleration/deceleration is
used, set them to 0.
PEXPJX-
PEXPJ4:
PFLJGX
0
PFLJGX
PFLJGZ
0
PFLJGY
PFLJG3
0
PFLJGZ
PFLJG4
0
PFLJG4
Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration rate

sequenti-ally in manual feed.
PFLJGXPFLJG4:
Setting value 6 ro i5000

Serting value 6 to 6000
Usuallv set them to 0.
Unit:
Unir:
INPDX
0
INPDX
INPDZ
0
INPDY
-4so-
rn/min
inch/min
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
ParameEer No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Rem:rks
INPD3
0
I
INPDZ
INPD4
0
INPD4
Sets the in-position width between a feed block

a feed block.
(Must not be used)
(Valid when parameter No. 45 CCINP=l)
INPDZ
to
INPD4
and
POFF
TPFDT
Time constants of spindle and Z-axis aeceleration/

decelerati-on in Ehe tapping in the rigid mode
TPFDT:
(Exponential/linear type is selected by TPSUP.)

The threading accuracy is affeeted when the time
constant is either too long or too short.
'
Data type: Word type
Setvalue: 0-4000
: msec
UniE
Standard setting: 200 - 150
POFF
TPFFL
TPFFL:
(valid only when TPSUP = 0) at

exponential acceleration/deceleration of the spindle
and Z-axis in the rigid tapping. When this is
increased, lact time is reduced, but the threading
accuracy is affected.
Data Eype: Word type
Setvalue: 6-15000
: rnm/min
Unit
Lower speed linit
Srandard
settlng:
30
10
-45r-
ttPoFFtt means
that power
should be
turned off
whenever the
parameter is
changed.
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
ttPOFF" means
that power
should be
POFF
TPLPG
turned off
Spindle and Z-axis Position control loop gain in the

rigid tapping.
This has a large influence uPon the threading
accuracy. Make fine adjustment to obtain the
optimurn value by perforrning the cutEing test and
matching wiEh the loop gain multiplier.
Data type: Word tYPe
Set value: I - 9999 -l
: 0.01 msec Unit
value: 1500 - 3000
set
Standard
TPLPG:
Remarks
whenever the
parameter is
changed.
POFF
LPGM9
LPGM9:
of the spindle in the rigid

tapping for the high speed range. This has a large
influence upon the thread accuracy. Make fine
adjustment Eo obtain the optimum value by
peiforming the cutEing test and natching with the
loop gain.
Data type: Word tYPe
Setvalue: I-32767
Calculation = 2048 * E/L * G * 1000'
E = Speed comrnand voltage at 1000 rpn
L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle
motor rotation
G = Detection uniE
Calculation example:
trr4ren the configuration is as shown
Position
in the left drawing:
coder
E = 1.667 [V]
Loop gg,in nultiplier
(motor
L =
SPINDLE
of
6000 rpm
at 10 tvl)
360"
(Spindle is rotated one turn bY

one spindle motor rotacion. )
p = la/4096
= 720" 14096 = 0.17578'
I\'lOTOR
l:l;2
La = 720"
(Spindle must make two rotations
= 360o * 2 for rot.ating the
position coder one turn. )
4096 = Detection pulse per position
coder rotation
-452-
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :
Parameter No.
Gea
r ratio
cod er
I
I
I
I
serie s )
between the spindle and the position
I ... 0.
2 ... 0.
4 ...0.
8 ... 0.
0 8 7 8 9 deg
I 7 5 7 8 deg
3 5 I 5 6 deg
7 0 3 I 3 deg
Therefore, the loop gain nultiplier = 2048 x

L.667 /360
0.17578
= L667
1000
Note) Do not ml-ss to set the gear ratio parameter

(No. 0028) between the spindle and the position
coder. Decide the detection uniE based on thi-s
parameter.
POFF
TPS}'(
Maximum
TPSMX:
allowable speed of the spindle in the rigid
tapping.
Set value: spindle: position coder gear ratio
1: t
0 - 7400
l:2
1:4
,\"
t..
1:8
: PRM
Standard setting:
Unit
1r'
000-
9999
9999
9999
3600
TPIPZ
TPIPZ:
Z-axis in-position width in the rigid tapping
Setvalue:
l-32767
Unit
: DetecEion unit
Standard setting: 2O
-453-
ttPoFFtt means
that po\ter
should be
turned off
whenever the
parameter is
changed.
G.*96
4{
,fi
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
.:
t
I
*
9
.x
INP9
t
Spindle in-position width in the rigid tapping
I,'{ren this is too much increased, the threading
accuracy is affected.
Data type: I^lord type
SeEvalue: 0-32767
Unit
: DeEection unit
Standard setting: 20
INP9:
.n
:I
:
*
0
TPERZ
TPERZ:
Linit value of position deviation during

Z axis in the rigid tapping rnode
Setvalue: 0-32767
Unit
DetecEion
unlt
movement
a one-tenth resolution det.ector is used, the

unit becomes Een times the detection unit.
When
-4s4-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
Remarks
TPER9
t
Limit value of position deviation during novement of

the spindle (5th axis) in the rigid mode tapping
TPER9:

Set. value: o - 32767
Calculation = S x 360/60
Maximum
S:
rigid
G:
G:
Spindle:
x l/G x l/G x
s . ..
3600
3000
@...
0.17578
(Gear
ratio
coder l: 2)
1.5
I : I ... 0. 0 8789deg
I : 2 ...0. I 7578deg
1 : 4 ... 0. 3 5156deg
I : 8... 0.
TPER5 =
tapping
(Value of paraneter No. 0517)
Axis loop gain in the rigid node tapping
(Value of parameter No. 06f5)
Detection type
Position coder Gear ratio
G ...
100
spindle speed to perform the
0313deg
between spindle and position
x 360) ldo x I/3000 x 1/0.17578 x .

100x1.5=6144
(3600
TPESZ
TPESZ:
Limit value of posiEion deviation during stop of

Z axis in the rigid node tapping
Setvalue: 0-32767
Unit
: Detection unit
Standard
setting:
500
ril
.ll
if;
.t
jl
il
'l
I
-45s-
FF?9.8!{4S':.
q
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
TPES9
LimiE value of position deviation during stop of the

spindle in the rigid mode tapping
TPES9:
Setvalue:
0-32767
Unit
: Detection unit
Standard value: 500
ttPoFFtt means
that power
should be
POFF
LGM9M
LGM9M:
SPINDLE
MOTOR
turned off
Spindle loop gain rnultiplier in the rigid rnode

tapping for rniddle gear. (Set when one or more
gears are used).
l-32767
setvalufi
Calculation = 2048 x E/L x G x 1000
E = Speed command voltage at 1000 rpra
L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle
motor rotation
G = Detection unit
trrlhen the configuration is as shown
in the left drawi-ng:

E = 1.667 [V]
(motor of 6000 rpm ar 10 [v])
L = 720"
G=
T^
Ld-
(Spindle makes two rotaEions

when spindle motor rotates
one turn. )
La/ 4096
720" 14096
7
2A"
= 0.17578"
(Spindle must make two

rotations=360"x2for
rotating the position coder
one turn. )
4096 = Detection pulse per position
coder rotation
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 * *
1.667 |TZO x 0. 17578 * 1000 = 833
-456-
-whenever the
parameter is
changed.
-t
i
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
J
i
Remarks
ttPoFFtt means
that power
should be
POFF
LGM9H
turned off
Spindle loop gain nultiplier for high speed gear in

the rigid tapping. (Used for 3-srage gear).Data type
: Word type
Setring value: I to 32767
(Note) Refer to parameter
formula.
No
. 0624 for calculation
ERR9
Spindle position deviation value in the rigid

tapping. (Used for diagnosis)
Unit
: DeEection unit
ERR9:
IPL9
IPL9:
Spindle distribution amount in the rigid tapping.

(Used for diagnosis)
Unit
: Detection unit
-457-
whenever the
parameter is
ctianged.
a=,$*8*.
i'+'
il
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
LTIXl
0
LTlXI
1
,.
LTTZI
0
I
;
i
LTiYI
.t
.,
LTIZl
LTI41
LTlX2
0
LT 1X2
LTIZ2
0
LTlY2
LTLZ2
LTI42
-4s8-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
Lrlnll
TI-
: T series,
Lower
M series)
nth top in
axis
square zone (see figure)
.)v
)-t
2
Set stroke lirnit mentioned above.

Serring amount 0 to *999ggggg (unit: 0.001 rnrn in
mm output or 0.000I Tnch in inch outpuL)
Set with the distance from the reference poLnt.
In the case of diameter designation, set the X axis
with the diameter designation value. (For OT)
The outside of the boundary set with the Parameter
is set as the inhibited region. Normally, set at
the max. stroke of the machine.
the axis enters the inhibited region'

overtravel alarm is indicated. A margin should be
provided with respect. to the stroke to cope wi-th
' the fluctuation in the detecting operation. As a
rule, in the case of metric designation, multiply
the rapid traverse by a factor of 1/5 and set it
as the margin.
When
(Example) Rapid traverse 10 m/rnin.
10x115=2nm
The actual position of the machine slightly
differs from the position stored in the CNC unit

after the power is turned on, emergency stop is
reset' or servo alarm is reset. Therefore, before
starting operation, be sure to return Ehe axes to
reference point. Otherwise, overtravel detecting
position deviates by the value corresponding to
the above-described deviation in the position.
LTI
Axis
(Exarnple) LTIZI =
-1
and LTIZZ
the Z axis stroke
name
becomes
infinite.
(Note 1) For the axis whose stroke is infinite,

the incremental command can be specified.
If the absolute co-mand is specified, the
absolute register may overflow and it is
not operated normallY.
(Note 2) These parameters cannot be set for the
rotary axis.
(Note 3) Unlt becomes 1/10 tn increment system 1/10.
-459-
Remarks
d
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorver : M series)
I
Remarks
'+
{
0
PRSX
PRSX
'1
PRSZ
PRSY
PRS3
0
PRSZ
PRSX,
PRSY,
PRSZ,
PRS4
AC
PRS4
These set the coordinate values of the reference

point of the X, y, Z and 4th axes when automatic
coordinate system setting is conducted,
respec tive ly.
Setting range:
0 to +99999999 unir: 0.001 rnrn (mm inpur)
unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inpur)
Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in incremenr systen 1/lO.
-460-
sfs
Pararneter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lourer : M series)
SPTIME
2
PECINTX
PSGRDX
PECINTY
PSGRDZ
I
PECINTZ
PECINT4
SPTIME
Tine (P) when starting rhe spindle speed

fluctuation after the comanded speed is not
reached a certain time.
Serting range: 0 to ggggggg (unit: r"".)'
PECINTX,
Pitch error compensation Lnterval for each axis

Setting range
8000 to 99999999 unir: 0.001 m (m inpur)
4000 to 99999999 unir: 0.000f inch (inch inpur)
PEXINTY,
PECINTZ,
PECINT4
Note 1) It zero is set, no compensation is done.

Note 2) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/iO.
PSGRDX,
PSGRDZ
Grid width of X and Z axes, respectively.

Setting range: 0 ro 99999999 unit: 0.001 nn
unit:
(run output)
0.001 inch
(inch ourpur)
No position signal is output vhen the setting

value is 0.
In order to output the position signal securely

without any skip when each axis moves at the
maximum setting value 24 m/min of the rapid
traverse speed, the grid width must be set to be
more than 6400.
Note) Unit
becomes 1/10
in increment sysrem 1/10.
-461-
Remarks
F.
rr
I
t
t
rt
[,
I
Parameter No.
MRCCD
1
Depth of eut in multiPle

Setting range:
MRCCD
I to 99999999 unit:
L to 99999999 unit:
repetitive cycle G7l'
G72.
0.001 mn (rm input)

0.0001 inch (inch input)
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10.

MRCDT
Relief amount in multiPle repetitive cycle G7l' Gl2.

Setting range:
I to 99999999 unit: 0. 001 rnm (rnetric input)
| 6 9v999999 unit: 0.0001 ineh (inch input)
MRCDT
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10.

PESCX
PESCZ
DFC'Y
PESCZ
Relief values in X and Z directions in rnultiple

repetitive cycle G73, respectively.
Setting range:
I to *99999999 unit: 0.001 nn (mm input)
1 ro 1999 99999 uni-t : 0 . 0001 inch (inch input)
Note) Unit becomes t/t0 in increment system 1/10.
'462-
Remarks
Parameter No.
PATIM
of div.isions in urultiole repetitive

Setting range: I to 99999999
Number
G73.
PATIM
cyc1e.'
GROVE
Return amount in multiple repetitive cycle G74,
GROVE
Setting range:
0 to 99999999 unir:
O to 99999999 unir:
C75
0.001 m (nn input)

0.000i inch (inch inpur)
Note) Unit becornes I/10 in increment system t/10.

THRPT
3
t
of repetitions of final finishing in

multiple repetitive cycle G76.
Setting range: I to gggggggg
Number
THRPT
THANG
7
TIIANG
Tool nose angle in nultiple repetitive cycle

Setting value: 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, g0
-453-
G76.
Remarks
F.
f.r
ti
Parameter No.
THCLM
l"linimum
G76.
THCLM
depth of cut in multiple repetitive cYcle
Setting range:
0to 99999999 unit:
0to 99999999 unit:
Note)
Unit
becornes 1/ 10
0.001 nnn (nmr input)

0.0001 inch (inch inPut)

THDFN
Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle
TT{DFN
c76.
Setting ?.ttg"
O to 99999999 unit:
0 to 99999999 unit:
Note) Unit
becornes 1/10
nrm (uur input)

0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
0.00I

WIMAX
I{IMAX
Sets the tolerance value of tool wear offset

incremental input.
Setting range:
I to 999999 unit: 0.001 run (nur input)
unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
Note)
Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.
-464-
Remarks
Parameter No.

WOMAX
Sets the uaximum of the tool wear offset value.

Setting range:
I to 9999999 unlt: o.ool m (m inPut)
unit: 0.0001 inch (inch input)
(Check together with pararneter No. 0728 in the
case of incremental input)
WOMAX
Note) Unit becones l/10 in increment system 1/10.

I,IIRSS
0
0
PROTAG
Used for mirror image for opposite tool post.

This parameter sets the distance between the tool
posts in the shifting of coordinate system.
Setting range:
I to 9999999 unit: 0.001 m (m output)
MIRSS
unit:
0.000I inch (inch output)
Sets with a radius value.
Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment syster ,rr0.

Parameter of angle vilue used when no angle
PROTAG:
is present at coordinate rotation.

Setting value:
unlt: 0.00I deg.
-360000 to 360000
CANMAX
I
PSCRT
GANMAZ
-465-
command
Remarks
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
The value of e on the X ar.d Z axes in the automatic tool compensation function' respectively.
Setting range:
I to 99999999 unit: 0.001 uun (mn output)
I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output)
The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
GAN]"IAX,
GANMAZ
Note) Unit becomes l/10 in increment system 1/10.

Parameter of magnifLcation value used when no
rnagnification command is present in scaling.
Setting value:
I to 999999 (Unit depends on parameter)
Unit: x0.001, x0.00001
PSCRT:
EPCX
EPCZ
The value of e on the X and Z axes, in the autornatic tool compensation functi-on, respectively.
Setting range:
L to 99999999 unit: 0.001 nun (urn output)
I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output)
The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
EPCX,
EPCZ
Note) Unit becomes 1/lO in increment system 1/10.

REF2X
0
REF2X
REF2Z
0
REF2Y
-465-
GF
Parameter No.
REF2Z
REF24
Distance from the reference polnt to the 2nd

reference point for X, Y, Z, and 4th axes,
respectively.
Setting range:
0 to +99999999 unit: 0.001 rnm (mm ourpur)
O to Tgggggggg unir: 0.0001 inch (incir output)
0 to ;9999999 unit: 0.001 deg (rotary a*il)
REF2X,
REF2Y,
REFZZ,
REF24
Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment system l/10.

ABSXP
0
ABSXP
ABSZP
0
0
ABSYP
F,
I
ABSZP
ABS4P
ABSXP,
ABSYP,
ABSZP,
ABS4P
Counter data at the reference point when the
absolute pulse coder is used.

These parameters are automatically set when the
tool has ret.urned co the reference point. So it is
not necessary to set values to these paiameters.
-467-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
TLSXP
LT2X1
TLSXY
0
LT2YI
TLSZP
0
{+
LT2ZI
TLSZM
0
LT24I
LT2Xl
0
LT2X2
LT2ZI
0
LT2Y2
LT2Z2
LT242
LT2X2
5
I
EXOFS
-468-
M series)
Remarks
;l
Parameter No.
LT222
0
EXOFS2
LT2
FF
T
'
of square area
Represents the axis
Set the stroke limit represented above.
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001
Apex No.
Setting value
to +99999999 Unir
urn
(l"letric output)
0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Set the stroke lirnit by the distance from the

reference point. For the designation of dianeter,
set X-axis sith the diameter.designated value. Use
parameter INOUT (No. 24) to set the forbidden area
to the inside or outside.
Note) Unit becoines l/t0 in increment system l/10.
TLSXP
X axis * distance to contaet surface (Xp)
TLS)O{
X axis - distance to contact surface
TLSZP
Z axis * d.istance to contact surface (Zp)
TLSZM
Z axis - distance to contact surface
(Xm)
|
(Zrn)
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.

Set the distance from the measurement standard
polnt to each contact surface (with sign).
For the diameter designated axis, set in diameter
value.
X axis
surface
Z axis
X axis
,_1)
,J
contact surface
-469-
Remarks
T
I
T
Parameter No.
Check stroke lirnit using these parameters, not

parameter Nos. 0700 to 0707 when EXLM2 (G129.6)
LT242:
(M series) signal is ON.
LT2XI
Note) Valid only when parameter No. 0I5

1
LM2=1
EXOFS3
EXOFS4
EXOFSI
External work zero-point offset amount of X-axis,

Y-axis, Z-axis and th-axis in sequence.
Setting value 0 to +7999 Unit 0. 001 rmn
(Metric output)
serring lalue 0 to +7999 Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Note) Unit becoures 1/10 in incrernent system 1/10.

This parameter sets the zero-point position of work
coordinate system (G54 to G59). The work zeropoint offset amount is different for every work
coordinate system, but this parameter sets the
offset amount colnmon to all work coordinate
systems. Normal1y, machine-side input (external
data input) is used for automatic settl-ng.
ZOFlSl
PECINTX
U
ZOFlS2
PECINTZ
0
ZOF
-470-
S3
Remarks
,?
j
.,t
;
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lovter :
Parameter No.
series)
PECINT3
0
zoFls4
PECINT4
0
ZOF2S
zoE2s2
t
zoF2s3
zoF2s4
zoFlsl
-4
1st work zero-point offset amount of X-axis,

Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs4)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 mm

(Metric output)
setting value 0 ro +99999999 unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Normally, data are inputted from the work coordinate
system setting screen.
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/10.
-47r-
3
Q
Parameter
Compensation intervals at pitch error compensation

of each axis.
PECINTX,
PECINTZ,
PECINT3,
PECINT4:
ZOF2S
No.
Setting value:
hrlren the radius is designated
8000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut)
4000 - 99999999 (Inch outPut)
Ilowever' set in diameter value for the diameter
designated axis.
hhen the diameter is designated
I6000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut)
8000 - 99999999 (Inch orrtPut)
2nd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis'
-4
(css )
Setting value
to
+99999999
Setting value
to
+99999999
unir 0.001 rmr
(Metric output)
Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Nornally, data are inputted from the work coordinate
Note) Unit becornes l/10 in increment system 1/10.
z0F3s
ZOF3S2
ZOF3S3
ZOF3S4
ZOF35
-4
3rd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis,

(cs6)
Unit 0.001 unt

(Metric input)
unir 0.000I inch
Set t ing value 0 to +99999999
(Inch input)
Normally' data are input from the work coordinate
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10'
Setting value 0 to !99999999
-472-
Remarks
1it
...tr
Parameter No.
Remarks
zoF4s
IDSTX
0
zoE4s2
IDSTZ
0
zoF4s3
ZOF4S4
z0F4s
-t+
4th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis,

(cs 7)
Serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 ffi

(Metric input)
Setring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch input)
work
coordinate
Normally, data are input from the
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.
IDSTX:
Distance from the first. tool head standard point

the 2nd tool head standard point on the X axis.
t.o
only
0TT
IDSTZ:
Distance from the first tool head standard point to

the 2nd tool head standard point on the Z axis.
Setring 0 ro +99999999
Unit:0.001 umr
(mn output)
0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
only
0TT
-473-
's
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
-j
q
t
ZOF5S
0
ZOF5S2
zoF5s3
ZOF5S4

Y-axis , Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs8)
Serring value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 rm
(Metric output)
serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output)
Norma11y, data are input frorn the work coordinate
zoF5s
-4
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system i/10.
ZOF6S
ZOE632
474
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
zoF6s3
ZOF6S4
ZOF6S

-4
(cse)
serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 urn

(Metric output)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unir 0.0001 inch
Normalty, data are inpur from the
ri:1":":::il:1"
Note) Unit becones l/I0 in increment system.

PARTAL
PARTAI
{g=-sl-eaqb+leq parts in total

Setting value 0 to ggggYggg -:
REF3X
0
0
REF3X
-475-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
M series)
REF3Z
0
REF3Y
REF33
0
2
I(-L.r
JZ
REF34
0
REF34
Sets distance of 3rd reference point on X axis to

4th axis from lst reference point sequentially.
REF3X REF34:
ing;rralue
o - +99999999 Unit:
o - iggsggggg Unit:
Set t
0.00f rnrn (Metric output)

0.0001 inch (Inch ourpur)
REF4X
REF4X
REF4Z
0
tJ
REF4Y
REF43
n
REF4Z
476
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
series
Remarks
REF44
1
REF44
Sets distance of 4th reference point on X axis to

4th axis froro lst reference point sequentially.
REF4X REF44:
Setting value
0 - +99999999 Unit:
O -1SSSSSSSS Unir:
0.001 rnm (Merric ourpur)

0.0001 inch (rnch oulput)
FIDFl
9
F
IDF2
FlDF3
-,
IDF4
1DF5
IH
|[
iii
il
ii
tl
rl
-477-
ll
Parameter No.
J
F
IDF6
FIDFT
9
F
FlDFI,2,
3, 4, 5,
7,8,
IDFS
FIDF9
Feedrate for Fl digit
6, Setting value
0 - 15000 Unit:
0 - 6000 Unit:
9:
coflrmands
FI to F9 in
sequence
0.1 nrar/min (Metric output)

0.1 inch/min (Inch output)
the manual pulse generator is rotated to change

the feedrate for Fl digit comnand, the value of this
parameter changes accordingly. This parameter can
be set even in setting.
When
A3S9
ABS9:
Spindle distribution cumulative value for the rigid

tapping. (Used for diagnosis)
data type: 2-word type
Unit
: Detection unit
478
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
PECORGX
I
PECORGX
X axis zero point of pitch error compensation.

Setting range 0 to 127
PECORGX
I
I
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for

Z axLs.
Setting range 0 to +7
PECORGZ
PECORGY
PECORGY
Y axis zero point of pitch error compensation..

Setting range 0 to 127
PECORGZ
Z axis zero point of pitch error'compensation.

|
setting range 0 to 127
to
2

Y axis (for M series), Z axis (for T series).
PECORG3
PECORGZ
'
PECORGZ
Z axis zero point of pitch error compensation.

setting range 0 to I27
PECORG3
3rd axis zero point of pitch error compensation.

serting range 0 to 127
-479-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper i T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
.)
Setting of picch error compensation amount for

Z axis (for M series), 3rd axis (for T series).
to
3
PECORG4
PECORG4
4th axis zero point of pitch error compensation.

Setting range 0 to L27
PECORG4

4th axis.
to
q
PECORG5
0
PECORG5
5th axis pitch error origin

Setting range 0 r^ -Ll 17
PECORG5
I
<
t
5
t+'
axis pitch error offset setting

0 to +7
Set ting range

8
PECORG6
0.
PECORG6
PECORG6
6th axis pitch error origin

-480-
Remarks
Pararneter (Upper
Parameter No.
6th axis pitch error offset setting

Setting range 0to*7
z
M series)
: T series, Lower :
Blr
DECIS
SCWS
DECIS
SCIÎS
76543210
No.
DECIS
Machine decelerates when deceleration signal is I
1:
reference point return.

l'lachine decelerates when deceleration signal is
0:
scws l:
1n
0 1n
Miniuum comand.increment is the inch system

(Machine inch system).
Minimum cowtand increment is the metric system
(Machine metric systeur) .
0:
PPDS
2
PPDS
Bir
43
No.
PPDS
Relative coordinate
setting.
Relative coordinate
setting.
1:
0:
zr0
IS
also preset by coordinate
l-s
not preset by coordinate
ZYL6
zt't5
ZIT6
ZYL1
Bit No.
543210
5th/6th axes reference Point return direction and backlash

initial directlon at Power 0N in the order of ZM5 and ZM61: Minus direction
0: Plus direction
1
Ii
I
I
-48r-
t"
.ry'
Parameter No.
'l
D!{R5
GRD5
DMR5
GRD6
Bit
32t0
654
No.
Detection mult iplier for 5th/6th axes in the order of

GRD6
DMR6
GRD6
Bir
43
765
No.
Reference counter capacity

and 6.
Bir
APRSS
OFFVYS
APRSS
)FFVYS
76543210
Sets automatic coordinate system at reference point
reEurn.
Does not set automatic coordinate system at
1:
0:
OFFVYS
GRD5
No.
APRSS
2L0
for 5th/6th axes in the order of
Servo alarm d.oes not occur even when VRDI is ON

before outputting PRDY.
Servo alarm occurs when VRDY is ON before outputting
l.
0:
PRDY.
BiI
APC5/
APC 6
SUB
APC6
APC5
SUB
APC6
APC5
NO
1: l,ihen the absolute pulse coder detector is rnounted.

0: When the absolute pulse coder detector is not
mounted.
SUB
APC5,
APC6
l:
0:
PMC
PMC
axis control is the 5th axls.

axis control is the 5th/6th axes.
: Absolute pulse coder provided.

0: Absolute pulse coder not provided.
.1
t'
:
:
:
D}G.6
and
DMR5
-482-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower
Parameter No.
A3S5
ABS6
ABS5
No.
ABS5,
1:
Reference point position in absolute pulse coder is
0:
Reference point position in absolute corder is
defined.
ABS6
ABS6
2
Bir
series)
PNGMLK
ROT6
ROT5
PNGMLK
ROT6
ROT5
Bit
not defined.
(The signal becomes r'1r' automatlcally if the
reference point return is performed by Pl'tC axis
control. Do not change setting by the time the
detector is replaced.)
When installing the CNC or replacing the position
detector, always set these Parameter to 0, turn off
and on the power then perforn manual reference
point return.
No.
signal is invalid for the 5th/5th axes.

MLK signal is valid for the 5th/6th axes.
ROT5,6 1 : The 5th/6th axes is a rotary axis.
0: The 5th/6th axes is a linear axis
PNGULK 1:
0:
MLK
CMR5
0
CMR5
CMR6
7
CMR6
Comnand
multiplier
for 5th/6th axes in the order of
Cl,lR6.
DSPSUB
DSPSUB
-483-
CMR5 and
ii:
F-
#'
ilt?
Parameter No.
DSPSUB2
DSPSUB2
DSPSUBl,
Set the axis names of the 5th/6th axes in sequence.

The setting code shall be in accordance with the
general switch code on the operatorrs panel.
2z
Usable characters:
(x, Y, z, u, V, w, A, B, C, H, 0 - 9, O, N, D, -, .)
Note)
displaying the 5/6th axis posi-tions,

the run hour, for example, is displayed on
the overall position display screen.
When
INP5
0
INP5
u
7
rNp6
I
INP6
In-position width for 5th/6th axes in the order of INP5 and INP6.
SERR5
1
5LKK]
SERR6
5
SERR6
Lirnit val-ue of rnoving position deviation for 5th/6th axes in

the order of -'SnnnS and SERR6.
GRDS5
7
8
GRDS5
-484-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
M series)
GRDS6
GRDS6
Grid shift amount for 5th/6th axes in the order of
GRDS5 and
GRDS6.
LPGINS
5
LPGINS
Settlng of position control loop gain (5th/6th axes Ln co-.on).

RPDF5
7
RPDF5
RPDF6
1
RPDF6
5th/6th axis rapid traverse rate in the order of
RpDF5 and RpDF6.
LINT5
5
LINT5
LINT6
7
LINT6
Time constant of linear acceleration and deceLeration for 5th/6th

axes in the order of LINT5 and LINT6.
I
I
-485-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
l'1
series)
FEEDTS
9
FEEDTS
Time constant of cutting feed exponent ial accel-eration/
deceleration (5th/6Eh axes in
common).
FEDFLS
0
FEDFLS
Lower lirnit speed of cutting feed exponential acceleration and

deceleration (FL) (5th/6th axes in common).
Usuallv set this parameter to 0.
ZRNFLS
3
4
ZRNFLS
Low feedrate
common)
at reference point return (FL) (5th/6th axes
l-n
BKL5
1
BKL5
DT\LO
7
t-*
Backlash amounc for 5th/6th axes in the order of BKL5 and
STPE5
7
STPE5
-486-
BKL6.
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorrer : M series)
STPE6
5
STPE6
Linit value of positional deviatlon for 5th and 6th axes at stop
in the order of STPE5 and STPE6.
PSANGNS
6
PSANGNS
Subspindle 54/55 digit control (Analog output).

Analog output gain adjusting data. (Set the data for
gain adjustment at analog output.)
The setting range, etc. is the sarne as with the main
spindle parameter (No. 5f5).
PSAI{GNS
SPDLCS
1
9
SPDLCS
Set Ehe subspinble speed offset compensated valuel

the zero offset compensation value of subspindle
speed corumand voltage.
SPDLCS
LTI5 I
7
LTI5 I
LTI6l
1
LTI6I
LT152
7
LT152
-487-
Remarks
1q*[ *!flprr{pee
!
I
.i
Parameter No.
Remarks
_"-
LTI62
7
LTI62
LT151, 161, L52, r52

Stored st.roke lirnit of 5th and 6th axes.
PRS5
1
8
PRS5
PRS6
PRS6
PRS5,
PRSS
Coordinate value of 5th and 6th axes reference point.
Parameters related to dlgital
servo for 5th axis.
Parameters related to digital
servo for 6th axis.

i
-488-
Ttre parameters of each axis for the digital

following:
The
servo
Axis
Parameter No.
Product
OT/OG
X axis
OM
X axis
or/oc
Z axis
OM
Y axis
lst axis
8100
The 2nd axis
8200
The 3rd axi-s
8300
8165
8265
8365
Cf axis,
PMC axis
Z axis
Cf axis,
PMC axis
The fourth axis
OT/OG
OM
The 3rd axi-s
8400
8465
are
OT/OG
OM
In the followingr parrmeter numbers of each axis are to be indicated by *.

Parameter No.
Data
sBoo
DGPRM
BirNo.
While the power is turned orlr the standard values of

parameters related to Digital Servo are '
0: to be set
l: noE to be set
When this parameter is set to 0 after seEting the motor tyPe'
the standard values which have been set corresponding to the
motor type of the parameter 8 * 20 are automatically set and
this parameter becomes ttltt.
DGPRM
Data
Parameter No.
8Eo
AMR5
Bit
No.
-489-
AMR4
AMR3
AMR2
AMRI
AMRO
_r'
,'d
AMRO
AMR5
&
No. of pulses/pulse
coder rotation(p/r)
Motor type
2-0, 1-0: 0, 5,
10,
AMR
2000
2500
3000
2000
l.
1000
I 2500
20000
t
I
25000
20,20M,30,30R
4-0,
3-0
5-0
2-O, l-0, 0, 5, 10,

20, 20M, 30, 30R
Data
Parameter No.
8E oz
Btr No.
6s
Since the set value has been fixed as in the following, never change lt.
setting value of the PSSEL is 1, While that of the VFSEL is
The
Data.
Parameter No.
8Bo3
Bit
No.
Data
Parameter No.
sEo4
Bit
No.
Setting data related to Digital Servo.

Nore) IÎhen phrameter No. 8 * 00 bit 1 (DGPRM) is set to 0, the standard
values of these parameEers are auturatically set. Normally' never
change these values.
-490-
Parameter No.
Data
8E2o
t'totor type
Parameter input
Data type : Word axls type
Data unit :
Data range: L to 32767
i
)
1
I
:
The standard values of the parameters related to the Digital Servo are stored
in the menory of the NC corresponding to each motor type. Set them for each
axis.
this parameter is 0 or less or an unavailable value is set, an-alarn

results.
When
Motor type
Parameter No.
sIz
5-0
4-0
3-0
2-O
t-0
Motor type
Parameter No.
eflz
t0
20M
20
i0
11
L2
Motor type
Parameter No.
aIz
30
30R
13
L4
Parameter No.
sEzL
Data
Load l-nertia ratio (LDINT)
Parameter input
Data type : IÎord axis type
Data unit :
Data range: L to 32767
Digital Servo is to be used, calculate the inertia ratio of the load

inertia and motor rotor inertia according to the following expression and set
lt for each axis.
Load inertla ratio = load ir-rerti+ x 256
Rotor lnertra
When
-491\'-
Paraueter
-sE
Data
No.
22
Rotating direction of motor
(DIRCTL)
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Set the rotating direction of a motor.

The motor rotares in the positive direction (Viewed from the motor
llI:
shaft side, it rotates in the CCW direction.)
-111: The motor rotates in the negative direction (Viewed from the motor
shaft side, it rotates in the CW direction.
If a value exceDt the aobve has been set, an alarm results.
Data
Parameter No.
8Ez3
Digital Servo related
(PULCO)
Parameter input

Data unit : PULSE/REV
Dara range: I to 32167
Digical Servo is to be used, set the number of pulses per rotation of

the motor of the detector to be used for the velocity feedback. Perform
calculaEion supposing-ttrat there are four pulses per pulse cycle phases A and
When
B.
However, when a pulse coder of 0.lu is to be used, set l/10 data.

If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
Data
Parameter No.
BEz4
Digital Servo related
(PPLS)
Parameter input
Data unit : PULSE/REV
Data range: I to 32767
Digital Servo is to be usedr st the number of pulses per one rotation

of t.he motor of the detecEor to be used for the position feedback. Perform
calculation supposing that there are hour pulses per pulse cycle of phases A
and B. (Exarnple, 2,000 x 4 = 8,000 for a pulse coder of 2,000 p/r.)
However,whenapulsecoderof0.liristobeused,Set1/l0data
If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
When
-492-
Parameter No.
Data
8E 40
a $50
Parameters related to Digital Servo
Parameter input
Data unit :
Data range:
Parameters related to Digital Servo
Note) I{hen parameter No. 8 * 0O bit I (DGPRM) is set to 0 and rhe moror type
is set to parameter No. 8 * 20, the standard value is autonatically
set. Norma11y, it is not necessry to change this parameter.
Parameters which can be determined by the motor to be applied.
(Data type: Word axis rye) (l)
AC servo
Parameter No.
5-0
4-0
uotor
3-0
co
be applied
t-0
2-O
a[+
241
460
669
322
469
828
pa
-527
-L467
-2I26
-1 103
-1625
-2782
[+ z
a[+:
a[a +
a[a s
a[a o
-i873
-2373
-237 4
-2488
-2503
-2457
80
r04
96
267
2I7
226
-300
-517
-1330
- 1082
-1t27
-1647 |
-1647 I
-1647 r
22556
r 3582
4t73
ra24
ro24
LO24
22552
13679
4t7 2
2607
2607
2607
2607
2607
2607
5560
5560
5560
5560
5560
5s60
2T
2L
2L
2I
2T
2l
3787
3787
3787
3787
3787
3787
319
319
319
319
3r9
319
afla
afl+
fla
afls
aEs
a[s z
a fls r
s[s +
a[s s
a
ps
-1647
-47
-493-
-1547
-1647
Falxlrr: -'r{.i6*r.tdffir"
AC servo motor
Parameter
s[s
e[s
e[s
a
flo
Co
be applied
No
5-0
4-0
3-0
2-O
1-0
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
57
(7
57
57
57
282
7282
7282
7282
7282
a
e
282
a[o
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
af,o
325t4
32543
3257 6
32507
325r9
327
317 3
28t7
2401
3265
3Lt2
706
85
225
475
853
28
5440
9437
83 75
136
97 L3
9256
2094
a[e
e[o
s[o
L7
t2
Pararueters which can be determined by the motor to be applied,

(Data type: Word axis type) (2)
AC servo motor fo be applied
Parameter No.
l0
afl+ o
s[+
e[+ z
a[+:
aIa a
a[+ s
a[+ o
sfln
2..
aIa a
sIa
eIs o
a[s r
aIs z
e
20
20r4
30R
30
I
t,<)
t7 20
Y44
-27 8r
-3532
-307
-3682
-557
-30s
-2622
-2649
-2646
-2665
-2669
3s9
654
824
535
s05
674
-L7 89
-3259
-4103
-2666
-25L6
-1647 r
t 941
835
491
49r
348
348
l024
LO24
t024
1024
1024
L024
L94L
834
49r
49r
348
348
-1647
808
-t647
970
-1647
-t647
705
-27
16
-JJ)O
0
-r647
2607
/-6U
zou I
2607
2607
2607
55 60
55 60
55 60
5560
5560
5560
-494-
i
{
AC servo aot.or t,o be applied
Parameter
No
10
a[s r
a[s
eIs s
aIs
aIs z
aIs e
aIs s
aIo o
a[o r
aIo z
aIo r
eIs
sIo s
+
2l
2L
2L
3787
3787
30
2I
30R
2L
2L
3787
3781
3787
3r9
319
319
319
3r9
319
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
57
57
57
57
57
57
7282
7282
7282
6918
6918
6554
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32645
32645
32r55
32509
32452
324L9
539
3796
6s9
3242
3947
4366
312
9410
r2705
95s6
29250
21926
4567
11299
22907
9644
LL752
r3005
for each motor model (Data type: bit axls type)

DaEa
Parameter No.
It7
It6
aPo:
sSo
Note 1) The parameters marked by * are not used currently.

Note 2) Wtren a pulse coder of 0.1u is used, the values of the paraneters
marked by /l are to be changed to 1/10.
Co'nnon parameters
I1
t
3787
20
201.1
tt\
#4
#3
ll2
tfL
ll0
-495-
APPENDIX
CODES USED IN PROGRAM

Character-to-codes correspondence table
Character
Code
u65
066
o67
068
069
070
071
tt
B
D
E
Comment
Character
I
J
054
055
056
05
tl
073
414
075
&
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
048
o49
050
L
M
N
T
U
\/
w
X
I
I
3
051
052
053
Code
r-
032
033
034
035
Left oarenthesis
Rieht parenthesis
As teri sk
Plus sien
041
043
044
Percent
Ampersand
Aoostrophe
Conma
045
|linus sign
046
Period
047
058
Co
059
Semi-colon
063
.064
091
Sharp
030
uol
062
t\
Exclamation mark
Ouotation mark
Dollar svmbol
060
Space
036
o37
038
039
o42
Comment
SIash
lon
Left ansle bracket

Sien of eaualitv
Rieht angle braeket
0uestion mark
Coumercial at mark
Left square bracket
092
093
094
095
000
Yen svmbol
Rieht square bracket

Underline
Space
')
-496-
<-4rn
3a&a
APPENDIX 9
1)
Program
ERROR CODE LIST
errors (p/S alarm)

Contents
A parameter which requires the power
off power.
off
was
input,
curn
alarn (A character with incorrect parity was input).

Correct the tape.
TH
TV alarrn (The nunber of characters in

block is odd).
This alarm will be generared oniy when a the
TV check is
effective. Correct the tape.
Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of

digits
was input. (Refer to the item of max. prograrnnabie
dimensions. )
A nuueral or the sign tt-tt eras input without an

address
at the beginning of a b1ock.
The address was noE followed by Ehe appropriate
data but
was followed by another address or EOB cod.e.
sign rt-tt i-nput error (sign tt-tt was i-nput af Eer an address
with which i.t cannot be used. Or two or more,r_r,
were input. )
"1rrr"-Decinal point tt.,t input error (A decinal point was.
after an address with which it ean not be used. Orinput
two
decimal points were input.)
Unusable character was
An unusable G code
input in significant area.
was
Feedrate was not cornmanded to a cutting feed or

the
feedrate was inadequate.
In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and

decremental outputted by idd.""" K exceed the maximum
command value or a conmand such that the

lead
negative value is given.
T only
becomes
A synchronous feed is specified without t.he option

for
threading /synchronous feed.
The nunber of the corqmanded axes exceeded
that bf
simultaneously controlled axes
An axis not included in the selected plane (by using
GI7, Gl8, Gt9) was commanded in ci-reular interDolation.
In circular interpolation bv radius designation,

negative value was corr-andei for address R.
Note) ttTtt is a general term for OT-B and OOT-8.
ttMtt is a general
term for OM-B and OOM-B.
-497-
M only
|;;rF.#
,e.&
;
!
i,
Contents
Number
029
030
offset value specified by
Remarks
is
Eoo large.
M only
The offset value specified by T code is too large.
T only
The offset number specified by H code for tool length

offset only or cutter compensation is too large.
M only
The offset number in T function specified for tool
T only
The
H code
offset is too large
03r
In setting an offset arnount by G10' the offset number

following address P was excessive or it was not
specified.
032
In setting an offset amount by GIO, the offset
amount
\itaS eXceSSive.
033
A poinf of intersection cannot be determined for cuEter

comDensation C.
M only
A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose
T only
The start up ror cancel was going to be performed in the

G02 or G03 rnode in cutter comPensation C.
M only
The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the

G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation.
T only
radius comDensation.
034
035
G39
is
commanded
in cutter comPensation B cancel mode or
M only
on the plane other than offset plane
Skip cutting (C:t) was specified in tool nose radius
T only
compensaEion mode.
036
Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation
M only
mode.
037
G40 (offset cancel) is commanded at the plane other than

offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected
by using GI7, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensati-on
C mode.
M only
038
Over.outting will occur in cutter compensation C because

the arc start point or end ooint coincides with the arc
center.
M only
0vercuttlng will occur in tool nose radius compensation

because the arc start point or end point coincides wi-th
the arc center.
T only
Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a

chncel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose
radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to
occur in chamfering or corner R.
T only
039
-498-
Number
ConEents
Remarks
040
overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation

in a canned cycle G90 or G94.
T only
041
Overcutting vill
M only
occur in cutter compensation
C.
Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
of
is
o44
One
046
Other than P2, P3 and P4 are comnanded for 2nd, 3rd

4th reference point return command.
050
The chanfering or a corner R was specified in a block

which includes a thread cutting command.
T only
051
The block after a block containing a chamfering or

corner R specification e/as not a GOl cornmand.
T only
052
The nove direction or the move amount in a block

following chaufering or a corner R command was not
adequate.
T only
053
2 or more of IrKandRare directed in chamfering and

corner radius R corrmand or C or R does not come after a
con-a (, ) in direct drawing dimension programming.
T only
054
A block in which the chamfering or the corner R was
T only
G27 t.o G30
conmanded i"n canned
specified includes a taper
055
0s6
t
i
commanded
0s8
to X-axis (Z-axis) in
T only
chamferin=g
Block end point ls not calculated correctly in direct
T only
Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
T only
progranning.
059
The program wlth the selected number

1n external program number search.
060
Cormranded sequence number was
number search.
061
T only
R.
dlmension drawing programming.
'--i
i
and
Both end point and angle are not designated in the next
block comrnand of the angle designation block (A ).
I (K) is
-i
'M only
mode.
The uove distance in the block which includes the

chamfering or the corner R specification is sualler than
command.
057
cycle
corrmand.
the chamfering aaount or the corner
T only
cannot be searched,
not found
in the
sequence
Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G7I, G7Z, or

command
-499-
G73
T only
nGY
Content s
Number
062
o The depth of cut in G7l or
G72
Remarks
is zero or negative
T only
value.
o The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value.

o The negative value is specified to Ai or Ak in G74
or G75.
o A value other than zero is specified to address U or W,
though Ai or Ak is zero in G74 or G75.
A
o negative value is specified to Ad, though the
relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined.
o Zero on a negative value is specified to Ehe height of
thread or depth of cut of lst time in G76.
o The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater
than the height of thread.
o An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G7L,
G72, or G73 command cannot be searched.
T only
065
o G00 or GOl is not
at the block with the

sequence number which is specified by address P in G71,
G72, or G73 command.
o Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a
sequence number which is specified by address P in G71
or G72, rejlpectively.
T only
066
An unallowable G code was comxnanded between two blocks

specified by address P and Q in G7l, G72 or G73.
T only
067
G70, G7I, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q was
T only
069
The final move command in fhe blocks specified by P and

Q of G70, G7l, G72 and G73 ended with chamfering or
T only
063
commanded
specified in MDI mode.
corner
R.
070
The memory area is insufficient.
07r
The address to be searched was not found. Or the

program with specified program number was not found in
progran number search.
072
The number of programs to be sEored exceeded 63 or I25
073
The commanded program number has already been used.
074
The'program number is oEher than I to 9999.
076
Address P was not commanded in the block which includes

an M98 command or a G65 command. -
077
The subprogram was called in three or five folds.
(option).
-500-
.l
.*
(r
:ia
1;
Number
078
Contents
Remarks
I
A prograu number or a sequence number which was

specified by address P in the block which includes an
M98, M99 or G56 was not found.
t
I
079
The contents of the program stored in the memory did not

agree r^'ith that in tape in collation.
080
In the area specified by parameter e, the ueasuring

posicion reach signal does, not come on. (Autornatic tool
compensation function)
T only
08I
Autonatic tool compensation was specified wlthout a

code. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T only
082
T code and automatic tool compensation were specified in

the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T only
In automatic tool compensation, an invalid axis was

specified or the command is incremental. (Automatic
tool compensation function)
T only
083
085
entering data in the meuory by using ASR or Reader/

Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error
lras generated. The number of bits of input data or
setting of baud rate is incorrect.
086
When
087
When
entering data in the memory by using Reader/Puncher

interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader/puncher was
turned off'.
I
entering data in the memory by using Reader/puncher

interface, though the read terninaEe command is
specified, lnput is not interrupted after 10 characters
read.
*t
090
The reference point return cannot be performed normally

because the reference point return start point is too
close to the reference point or the speed is too slow.
092
The commanded axis by G27 (Reference point

did not return to the reference point.
094
P type cannot be specified when the program is

re-started. (After program interruption, the coordinate system setting operation was perforned.)
M only
095
P type cannot be specified when the program is

re-started. (After program interruption, the external
work offset amount changed.)
M only
096
P type cannot be specified when che program
M only
is
re-started. (After prograrr lnterrupti-on, the work
offset amount changed.)
-501-
i
I
When
return
check)
ffi
Contents
Remarks
097
P type cannot be'directed when the prograrn is

re-started. (After power 0N, after emergency stop or P/S
94 to 97 reset, no autonatic operation is performed.)
M only
098
A command of the program re-start was specified without

the reference point return operation after power 0N and
emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.
M only
099
After completion of search in program re-start,

command is given with MDI.
I"1
100
Setting data
the system.
101
The power r{tas turned off while

the memory in the part program
operation. I{hen this alarm is
setting data PWE to I and turn
pushing the DELET to clear the
Number
PWE
move
t:
only
is set to 1. Turn it to 0 and reset

rewriting the contents of
storage & editing
generated, set the
on the po\rer while
memory.
110
The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data

exceeds the allowable ranse.
111
The calculatlsn result of macro instruction exceeds the

allowable range Gzsz to 232-1).
Lt2
Division by Zero was specified.
1r3
A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
(including tan 90")
commanded.
1i4
An undefined H code is designated in G65 block.
For custom
l"lacro
There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.

115
A value not defined as a variable number is deslgnated.
ti6
The variable number designated with P is forbidden for

assignment.
For custom
macro
The left side of substitution statement is a variable

whose substitution is inhibited.
rl8
The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit
iI9
The argurnent of SQRT or BCD is negative.
(quintuple)
For custom
Macro
SQRT argument 1s negative. Or BCD argument is

negative, and other values chan 0 to 9 are preserlt
eAch line of BIN argument.
The
-502-
on
Number
Contents
Rem:rks
specified in double
M only
L22
The macro rnodal call
L23
Macro
t24
DO-END
L25
<Formula> format
126
In
t27
NC and macro conrmands
128
The sequence number specified in the branch

not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched.
lzg
An addres3dni"n is nor allowed in <Argument

Designation> is used.
r30
In 3rd axis control-, a 3rd axis control command was n

given by PMC during Cf control. On the contrary, an
attenpt was made for Cf control fron PMC during axis
contro l.
i31
control
l_s
cornmand
is
used.
does not corresporid to 1: I
DOn,
lcn<3is
is
erroneous.
not established.
are confused.
comrnand rras
T only
Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm

message.
L32
133
No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message
clear.
Snall section data is erroneous in external alarn

or external operator message.
message
135
Without any spindle orientatloD, an attempE was made for

spindle indexj-ng.
T only
136
A move command of other axes was specified to the

block as spindle indexing addresses C, H.
same
T only
t37
A move command of other axes was specified to che

block as M-code related to spindle indexing.
same
T only
141
G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
M only
t42
Scaling uagnif i.cat ion
M only
1S
commanded
L-999999.
in other than
143
The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and

circular radius exceed the maximum conmand value.
M only
144
The coordinate rotatlon plane and arc or tool offset

plane differ from each other.
M only
148
AutomatLc override deceleration is out of the settable

range of judgernent angle. Check parameter No. O2l3'
02L4,02I5.
-503-
M only
*{H*.
s
*
Contents
Number
Remarks
r50
Tool Group No. exceeds the
151
The tool group commanded in the rnachining program i-s not
M only
t52
The number of tools within one group exceeds the
M only
153
The program setting the tool group is not entered in

block to store T code.
When the group

commanded.
maxi-mum
M only
a11owable va1ue.
set.
<,/,
value registerable.
is not
commanded, H99
maxi-mum
or D99 was
M only
M only
i55
In the machining program, M06 and T code in the

block do not correspond to the group in use.
156
P and L commands are missing at the head of program in

which the tool group is set.
M only
r57
The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxinum

a1lowab1e va1ue.
M only
158
The tool life
M only
M only
same
to be set is too excessive.
159 | During setting program executionr power was OFF.

160
Different M code is
commanded
M only
in Heads I and 2 as waiting
0TT only
M code.
r65
An attempt was made to execute a program of an even

number in Head I or an odd program number in Head 2.
199
Special word which cannot be used is
200
In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is

not specified. (programming error)
20r
commanded.
In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.
error
(progranming
202
In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too

large. (system error)
203
In the rigid tap, position for

incorrect .
204
205
0TT only
1429
or an S command is
In the rigid tap' an axis rnovement is specified

blocks. (programrning error)
between
M29 and G84 (G74)
In the rigid tap, no rigid

desoite M29 is specified.
mode
DI signal is turned
-504-
on
2) Alarms on the absolute pulse coder
Contents
Number
310
(APC)
is required for the
Manual reference point return
X-axis.
311
X-axis
APC communication
Renaiks
Failure in data
error
transmissi-on
312
X-axis
APC
overtime error
Failu-re in data
transmisslon
313
X-axis
APC
framing error
Failure in data
transmission
314
X-axis
APC
parity error
Failure in data
transmi-ssion
X-axis
316
X-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to

level so that the date cannot be held.
317
APC
alarm
APC
alarn
X-axis APC battery voltage ac a level where the

battery must be renewed.
APC
alarm
318
X-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level

where the batterv musE be renewed (including when
por./er is OFF) .
APC
alarm
320
Manual reference point return is required for the

Z-axis (T) or Y-axis (M).
321
Z-axis
APC communication
error (T)
Y-axis
APC communication
error
Z-axis
APC
overtirne
error
(T)
Y-axis
APC
overtine error
(M)
Z-axis
APC
framing error (T)
Y-axis
APC
framing error (l{)
Z-axis
APC
paritv error
(T)
Y-axis
APC
parity error
(U)
Z-axis
APC
pulse miss alann (T)
Y-axis
APC
pulse miss alarn
-l
I
pulse miss alarm
3r5
APC
low
I
{
I
322
323
324
325
326
Failure in data
transmission
(M)
Failure in data
transmi-s
ion
Failure in data
transmission
Failure in data
transmiss ion
APC
alarm
(M)
Y-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a lott

level so that the date cannot be held.
-505-
APC alarm
Contents
Number
Remarks
327
Y-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the

batterv must be renewed.
APC alarm
328
Y-axis APC battery volcage has reached a level

where the batterv must be renewed (including when
APC
porder
330
is
alarm
OFF) .
Manual reference point return is required for the
Z-axis.
Z-axis
33L
(M)
error
APC communication
Failure in data
(I'1)
transmission
Z-axis
332
APC
overtime error
Fai-lure in data
(M)
Z-axis
333
APC
framing error
ransmission
Failure in data
(M)
transmission
J
Z-axis
Jc+
APC
parity error
Failure in data
(M)
transmi-ssion
335
Z-axis
JJO
Z-axis APC bfttery voltage has decreased to

level so that the date eannot be held.
337 | Z-axis
I
338
APC
APC
pulse miss alarrn
APC alarm
(M)
a Iow
battery voltage at a level where the
APC
alarm
APC
alarm
baccerv must be renewed.
Z-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level

the battery must be renev/ed (including when
power is OFF).
APC alarm
wherej
340
341
Manual reference ooint return is required for the
4th-axis.
4th-axis
(M)
error
APC communication
(M)
Failure in data
transmiss ion
342
4th-axis
APC
overtime error
Failure in data
(M)
transmission
343
344
4th-axis
4th-axis
APC
APC
frarning
error
parity error
Failure in data
(I'1)
t ransmis s ion
Failure in data
(l'1)
transmission
345
346
th-axis
APC
pulse miss alarm
(M)
4th-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low

level so that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm
APC
alarm
-506I
Contents
Number
Renarks
347
4th-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the

battery must be renewed.
APC a1-arm
348
4th-axis APC batLery voltage has reached a leve1

where the battery must be renewed.
APC
(including when
por^rer
is
alarm
OFF.)
3) Servo alarms
Contents
Number
Remarks
400
The lst,
2nd-axis overload signal turns on.
401
The lst,
2nd-axis velocity control
402
The
403
The
404
Position control READY signal (READY) turns off, while

velocity control READY signal (VRDY) does not turn
off, or velocity control READY signal (VRDY) turns on'
although READY signal (PRDY) is not turned on yet when
turning on the power supply.
405
A position control system error. A reference point

return failure due to a trouble in CNC or servo systtem.
READY
turns off.
3rd, 4th-axis overload signal turns
3rd, 4th-axis velocity control

turns off.
Start operation with the
manual
signal
(VRDY)
on.
READY
signal
(VRDY)
reference point return
again.
410
(Note)
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is

greater than the setting value.
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is

greater than the setting va1ue.
411
The position deviation amount is larger than the set

value during move in X-axis.
413
The content.s of the X-axis error register exceed "32767,
4r4
An
or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside

a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused
by various setting failures.
error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of the

X-axis. Details of the error are output to the DGN0S
No. 720.
-507-
F*.
""i-w
Contents
Number
415
Remarks
An attempt \.ras made to specify a velocity of exceediirg

5f1875 detection unit/sec in X-axis. This error is
usually caused by a CIIR setting failure.
4t6
An error in the position detection system of X-axis

pulse coder (break alarm)
417
When
the X-axis enters any of the conditions shovm in

the following, this alarm results.
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been

set to the parameter 8120 for motor type.
.;
2) A proper value (l1I or -I1I) has not been set to the

parameter 8122 for the rotating direction of the
it
,};
motor.
fg
,::
'i
.!
3) An inproper data such as 0 or less has b..n set to

parameter 8123 for the number of velocity feedback
pulses per rotation of. the motor
i
a
4) An improper data such as 0 or less has been set to

parameter 8124 for Ehe number of positi-on feedback
pulses pef rotation of motor.
/,') i
(Note )
In Z-axis; the position deviation amount during scop is

greater than the setting value
In Y-axis" the position deviation amount during stop is
421 | The position deviation amount is larger than the set

I value during move in Y-axis (M) or Z-axis (T).
423
424
14
25
4LO
The position deviation amount exceeds "32767 in Y-axis
(M) or Z-axis (T), or the velocity couunand value of DA

converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This
error is usually caused by various setting failures.
An error has occurred in Ehe DigiLaI Servo system of rhe
X(0II) or Z(OT) axis.
o The details of the error are output to the DGNOS 721.
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding

511875 detection unit/sec in Y-axis (M) or Z-axi-s (T).
This error is caused by a CMR setting failure.
error of the position deEection system of Y-axis

pulse coder (M) or Z-axls pulse coder (T) (break alarrn)
An
-508-
4,
g,
Number
Lal
Contents
Remarks
Y-axis (01,I) or Z axis (0T) encers any of the

conditions shorsn in the following, this alarm results.
When-the

' set to the parameter 8220 for motor type.
2) A proper value (lI1 or -fll) has not been ser ro the
moE.or.
3) An improper data such as 0 or less has been sec to

paraueter 8223 for the number of velocity feedback
pulses per rotation of the motor
4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to
parameter 8224 for the nuuber of position feedback
pulses per rotation of motor.
430
(No te )
In 3rd axis, the position deviation

is greater than the setting va1ue.
amount
during stop
In Z-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is

431
Position deviation amount is larger than the set value

during move in Z-axis.
M only
433
The position dqvi.ation amount exceeds "32767 in Z-axis
M only
or the velocity command value af DA converter is outside

a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usuallv caused
by various setting failures.
434
An error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of Ehe

Z(oM) or 3rd (OT) axis. The details of the error are
output to the
DGNOS 722.
435
An attenpt was made to specify a velocity.of exceeding

51 18 75 detection unit/sec i.n Z-axis.
This error l-s
caused by a CMR setting failure.
436
An error of the position detection system of Z-axis

pulse coder (break alarrn).
-509-
only
M only
roFF
Contents
Nurnber
437
When
Remarks
the Z (0M) or the third (OT) axis becomes any of the

shown in the following, this alarm results.
conditi-ons

2) A proper value (111 or -I11) has not been set to the
parameter'8322 for the rotating direction of the
motor.
inproper data such as 0 or less has been Set to

parameter 8323 for the number of velocity feedback
pulses per rotation of Ehe motor.
3) An
data such as 0 or less has been set to

parameter 8324 for the number of position feedback
pulses per rotation of the motor.
4) An improper
440
(Note)
In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop is

In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop ts

44L
Position devfition amount is larger than the set value

during move in the 4th-axis.
M only
443
The position deviation aurount exceeds !32767 in the
M only
444
An error has occurred in the Digital
445
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding

511875 detection unit/sec in the Ath-axis.
I'1
446
An error of the position detection system of the

4th-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
M only
4th-axis or the velocity command value of DA converter

is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is
usually caused by various setting faj.lures..
Servo system of the
fourth axis. Details of the error are output to the
DGNOS No. 723.
-510-
only
Number
447
Content s
Remarks
the fourth axis enters any of the conditions

in the following, this alarm results
When
shown
1) A value whieh is out of the specified range has

been
2) A proper value (1ll or -tll) has not been ser ro the

motor
3) An improper data such as 0 or 1es6 has been set to

the parameEer 8423 for the number of velocity
feedback pulses per rotation of the motor.
4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to
parameter 8424 f.or the number of position feedback
pulses per rotation of motor.
4) Overtravel alarms
Contents
Number
Remarks
510
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke l_init of X-axis.
511
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke limit of X-axis.
5r2
2nd stroke
513
2nd stroke liurit at - side of X-axis was exceeded.
linit at * side of X-axis was exceeded.
T
T
520
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke lfuoit of y-axis

or Z-axis (T).
(M)
521
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit

or Z-axis (T).
of y-axis
(M)
522
2nd stroke linit
523
2nd stroke lirnit aE - side of X-axis was exceeded.
530
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke linit
of Z-axis.
M only
531
Overtravel Eo exceed the (-) stroke liurit of Z-axis.
M only
540
Overtravel to exceed the (+) srroke limit of the
M only
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit
M only
at * side of Z-axis was exceeded.
4th-axis.
541
4th-axis.
- 5lr -
of the
T.
:,#
r!
5) Alarm in
FANUC PMC MODEL I,/M
Contents
Number
Remarks
600
Interruption by illegal
60r
PMC RAM
602
PMC
serial transmission error is
603
PMC
watch dog error is occurred
604
PMC ROM
605
LADDER
is occurred
command
Parity error is occurred

occurred
Parity error is occurred.
Contents which can be stored in
PMC
is exceeded.
5) Overheat alarm
Contents
Number
700
704
Remarks
Master PCB is overheated.

Spindle overheat is detected by spindle flactuation
detection.
7> System
alarm
F
Contents
Number
Remarks
9r0
RAII
parity error (1ow byte).
911
RAM
parity error (high byte).
9t2
Parity error of shared
RAM
with digital servo
(LOW).
913
Parity error of shared
RAM
with digital servo
(HIGH)
9t4
Parity error of 1ocal
920
Watch dog alarrn.
930
CPU
940
This alarm results when any of the following conditions

is encountered:
RAM
Replace master
PCB
Replace master
PCB.
of digital servo.
Reolace master
error (abnormal interrupt).
PCB.
Replace master
PCB.
1) A PCB used for Digital Servo system is

malfunctioning.
2) Evel when there are more than two control axes, the
third axis (the third/fourth-axes) control printedcircuit board is not mounted. Example) The Z-axis
of the 0M becomes the Chird.
:) fhe master printed-clrcuit
servo is in use.
board for the analog
-5L2-
Number
Content
Remarks
950
Fuse disconnection alarm. Replace the +24E: Fx14 Fuse.
998
ROM
paritv error.
8) Background edit alarm
(BP/S)
Contents
Number
't?2
Remarks
BP/S alarm ls produced with the same nunber as P/S alarur

taking place in normal program editing. (070, 071, 072,
073, 074, etc.)
t
l
140
An attempt lras made to select or delete a program being

selected in foreground.
Note) An alarm on background editing is displayed on the key input line of

background editing screen, not on a normal alarm screen. It is possible
to reset it by some following MDI key operation.
The details of Digital Serv.o system alarm No. 4t 4 are indicated at the
diagnosis numbers 72O,721,722, and 723 in order for the X, Y(Z), Z(C and
PMC) , and the fourth (Y and PMC) axis.
DGNOS No.
w;4
OVL
LV
0vc
HCAL
HVAL
FBAL
DCAI,
I
OFAL: An overflow alarm has occurred.

FBAL: A wire disconnection alarm has occurred.
DCAL: An alarm of regenerative discharge circuit
HVAL: An overvoltage alarm has occurred.
I{CAL: An improper current alann has occurred.
OVC : An excessive current alarm has occurred.
LV : A voltage shortage alarm has occurred.

OVL : An overload alarn has occurred.
-513-
has occurred
OFAL
i:{r;:=lifi {q*e**itidbeil *a*f rL*sra
APPENDIX
10
LIST OF OPERATION
Class i f icat ion
Func t i on
Mernory
Clear
Key
SETTING
switch
PI,JE=l
all
Mode
swi rch
button
Power
0N
Power
ON
Power
ON
Func ! i on
but ton
Operation
and
clear
Cleari.ng
I DFeFT
Parameter
Clearing
s
to red
Program
Data InPut
from TaPe
Parameter
(Tape
Program inPut
from
PARA}I
EDIT
OFSET
firlpUrl
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
flNPUfl
MDI
PARAM
MemorY)
Offset value
Data InPut
I Tf,lDIIT
IT
ED
Parameter
+ Parameter No.
MDI
1:t
?
PWE=0+
OFSET
Offset value
+ of fser
11e.
+ Offset data
Search
PARAU
MDI
Setting data
Tape Punch
EDIT
PARAM
I ETADT
Offset value
ED
1T
OFSET
fsTFR-f]
A1l program
EDIT
PRGRM
Io
One Prograrn
LUII
PRGR}I
El .
Program No.
eearch
ED
PRGRM
[-1-l
Add res s
AUTO
IT i AUTO
PRGR}4
sequence
+ Data
+0-
Parameter
-9999 + | srARr
l.
P.ogram No. + | START
Program
xo. *
fII
TE=unson)
Program No. search * l-I--l

+ Sequence ,.'o. * fll
(cuRSoR)
number search
IT
PRCRM
EDIT
PRGRM
IT
PRCRM
ED
Address r,rord
search
Address
search
Deletion of
all Programs
* FfrFffl
ED
-5r4-
Searching address and data

input + l-Il (cunson)
Searching address
l-T-l
(CURSOR)
[-b-l
-eeee *
rcE
ET]
Classif icat ion

Prograo
Edir ing
Func t
lon
SETTING
switch
PI.JE
= I
Mode
Func t
switch
but ton
ion
0pera t ion
but ton
PRGRM
I U I r rrogram No. +l ur,Lt r
EDIT
PRGRM
[-N-l
EDIT
PRGRM
f-mfr-l
Deletion of
a word
EDIT
PRGRM
Alternation
of a word
Deletion of
ED1T
Deletion of
a block
progran
Deletion of
seve ral
b
+ sequence No. * l-SEiEfl
locks
'
l-5ErET-l
Search the word to be
deleted
EDIT
PRGRM
'
I-bEIEfl
Search the word to be
deleted+Addtess+Data
lnserti.on of
a word
CoIIation
Key
EDIT
Collacion in
PRGRM
|-TITEE-I
Search the word before the

pLace in the program
+ Address + Dara * fTfrSItl
f ilreur
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
EDIT
PRGRM
I-o]. -nrrg *l-srARr-l
EDI,T
PRGRM
ffl i
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
f-ilI + File No. or
menory with
taPe
Input / Output
with
Progran input
Cassette
Output all
prograB
outPut
one
Program
Searching
a head of
ior
Deletion of
f ile
CoIIation in
file with
EDIT
ED
IT /AUTO
taPe
I
t
---l
. FIFFI
etog.am No.
_eee8 + rTfrPtri-l
file
File tqo.
FANUC
-515-
* I-sreETl
-9999 or
PRGRI.l
El* rtr. r.ro. * l-3Te.fl*l
PRGRM
File No. * [-r]iFuE
/..r*#*.;".
"
;.d!e*l,
-r1*q
.g
.l
APPENDIX
11
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
f;
*; Function included in other optional items
Optional
o;t
3 axes (X, Y' Z)

* 4 axes (4th axis/PMC axis)
* 5 axes (PMC axis)
* 6 axes (PMC axis)
Concrolled axis
rr-2
rr-2. i
2 axes
Simultaneously
controlled axes
fi
axes
axes
* Controlled (3 axes Max.)
Axis control bY PllC
0.00t
Least input
increment
is required
Reference
itern
Specification
Name
PMC
mm/O.0001 inch
rr-2.1
Appendix
Appendix
*0.0001 run/0.00001 inch
Least command
increment
0.001 mm/O.0001 inch

x0.0001 rnm/0.00001 inch
r/r0
Max. Programmable
Tr-2.2
Provided
Increment system
+8
Appendix
digi ts
dimension
Rapid traverse rate
100 m/min, 4000 inch/min
I-5
x24 mlmin, 960 inch/rnin
Rapid traverse
override
Feedrate
range
Perminutefeed
Fo, 25, 50,
I -
1002
100000 mrn/min
TT-5.3.2
Tr-5 .2.3
0.01 - 4000 inch/min
*1 -
12000 mm/min
i - 480 inch/rnin
* o.ol - 5oo.oo mm/rev
0 .0
Per-
revolution
0.000L
rr-5 .2.4
9.9999 inch/rev
feed
Automatic
ac ce 1 erat ion /
rr-5.4
Provided
deceleration
-516-
#
PMC
Ref,erence
Specification
Name
is required
itern
Feedrate override
0-
Jog override
* Provided
Override cancel
Provided
Manual continuous feed
Simultaneous 1-axis
Manual synchronous
feed
*Provided
Positioning
Provided
rr-4. i
Single direction
positioning
:t Provided
Tr-4.2
Interpolation
Linear/circular
rr-4.3
rr-4.4
Thread cutting/
synchronous feed
* Provided
Helical cutting
*' Provided
rr-4.5
Fl-digit
* Provided
rr-5
Reference point
Provided
II-6. I
Reference point
Provided
rr-6.2
2nd reference
Provided
3rd/4th reference
point return
* Provided
CRT/MDI (sma11)
9tt
rr-5 .3. 1
1502
feed
return
return check
point return
CRT/MDr (small)
monochrome
. 2. 5
rr-6.3
III-2
9tt color
IIT-2
CRT/MDI
(ful1 key)
9tt monochrome
III-2
CRT/MDI
(full key)
9tt color
III-2
MDI
soft
key
I"lanual handle feed
*'5 + 2 pcs.
TTI-4.2
rIr-2.
1.1
III-4 .4
I unit
2 units
3 units
-517-
ffi
*iil
o;,
Manual handle feed
xl,xI0,xM
Handle interrupt
Job and handle in
Provided
magnifying factor
the
is required
Reference
Specification
Name
PMC
item
III-5
Provided
.6
same mode
Incremental feed
x 1, x 10, x 100, x
Rigid tap
* Provided
Program restart
*'Provided
Reader puncher
* Reader puncher interface

(1st channel)/ASR33 interface
inEerface
1000
III_5 .5
*' Reader puncher interfaee

(2nd channel)
Dwe1l time
(every seeond)
rr-5 .6
Provided
Each axis interlock
Provided
Machine lock
A11 axes
Stored stroke check 1
Provided
Stroke limit external
* Provided
Z-axis
Provided
qpf|-ino
command cancel
Additional axls
III-6.
Provided
ignored
Mechanical handle feed * Provided
III-I5
Skip function
Provided
rr-i5.1
Exact stop
Provided
rr-5
mode
Exact stop
Provided
ervo-of f
Provided
Provided
Manual absolute
ON/OFF
Stored pitch error

compensat ldn
* Provided
-518-
.5 .2
rr-5.
5.
rrr-10.
*3*
?o;,
is required
Reference
Soecification
Name
PMC
i teirn
III-II.9
Clock function
MDI ooeration
Provided
III-5.1.I
rrr-5
MDI operation
Provided
Provided
0rder-made macro
* Provided (64K8/128K8)
Reset
Provided
Optional
CMR
I .3
rrr-5. 4.5
Provided
Rapid traversing
Provided
Dry run
Provided
III-6
Single block
Provided
III-6.7
Program protect signal
Provided
Self-diagnosis
function
Provided
Emergency stop
Provided
St.atus output.
CNC
signal output.
III-7 . I
ready signal, servo ready

signal, alarm signal' distribution end signal, automatic
operating signal, automatic
operation starting signal,feed
hold larnp signalr power supply
ready signal and resetting
signal
Battery alaru signal

Position coder
F
F
It
6000
rpur
External dimensions
560(W) nn
Power supply
x 400(n)
5O Hzl6O
t-
or
I.
1,
rolo
Fz +t
phase 220 V AC +102,

60 Hz *l Hz
Connection servo motor
FANUC
AC servo motor
Connectable spindle
notor
FANUC
AC spindle
rl
200(D) nn
-L57"
ttz
-157"
motor, etc.
,l
phase 200 V AC +102,
F:'
t:
*'4000 rpn
.6
-519-
o:t
. I"lachine Operatorrs ?anel
Reference
Specification
Name
i i6m
* Provided
Software oPeratorr s
panel general Purpose
* Provided
Machine oPeratorr
panel
* Provided
Software oPeratorr
panel
Specification
Name
Incremental Pulse
coder interface
ITT_2
LLL-L.L
. Position Detector
is required
PMC
PMC
is required
Reference
itern
Provided
Provided
Absolute Pulse coder
i-nterf ace
,
PMC
Speci
3000 stePs
*
*
*
*
3000
5ooo
8000
12000
fi cation
steps
steps
steps
steps
No. of DI/DO
*
*
-520-
required
o:t
Program Inpu
is
required
Reference
Speci f icat ion
Name
PMC
item
Coordinate system
setEing
Provided
rr-7. I
Automatic coordinate
system setting
Provided
rr-7 . I .2
[,Iork coordinate svstem ;t Provided
rr-7.1.I
Decimal point
Provided
rr-8.3
Provided
rr-8.3
programming
Pocket calculator type

decimal point programming
Program input of
offset data
* Provided
Custom macro
:k Provided
II-I6
* Provided
II-
Custom B
format )
(F10/fl
rr-8.2
Inch/uretric conversion | * Provided
I
i
I7
Cutter compensat.ion
* Provided
II-T4.2
Cutter comDensation
* Provided
rr-14.3
Canned cvcle
rY Provided
rr-13. I
Playback
* Provided
Circular interpolation
by R programming
Provided
EIA/ISO automatic
discriuinat ion
* Provided
Mirror
Provided
image
Automatic corner
override
*' Provided
Scaling
rt Provided
rr-14.5
Coordinate rotation
* Provided
rr-14.5
I'lenu programming
:Y Provided
rrr-9.
Ff0/ffl
* Provided
II-18
tape format
'l
;|
I
.521
14
o:t
Pattern data input
* Provided
Conversational
*'Provided
programming with
Reference
Soecification
Name
is required
PMC
item
graphic
Conversational
programming with
graph for machining
*'Provided
center
Ilacro execucer
r rt. Auxiliary
64KB/*i28KB
o;,
lunction
Auxiliary function
Auxiliary function
lock
rr-11.1
M2
digits
M3
digits
86 digits
2nd auxiliarv funcEion
Provided
. Soindle Function
Spindle function
rr-9.1. i
s4ls5 dlgirs
* Provided
Spindle overr.ide
t, 50 -
Analog voltage control
Provided
l2O%
PMC
-522-
s requlre
item
S2 digits
PMC
.3
Reference
Specification
Spindle analog output
by
III-6
Name
is required
Reference
item
Specification
Name
PMC
. Tool Function
memory
item
II-10
T2
T4
Tool offset
requ
Reference
Specification
Name
Tool function
*6 di-gits x 32
* 64 nemories
f 99 memories
* 200 nemories
Tool length
rr-14. I
Provided
comoensation
Tool length measureuent
Tool life
* Provided
management
* Provided
External tool offset
*'Provided
o;,
Edi lo
, Edit/Operation
length
No. of programs
registered
PMC
is required
Reference
Specification
Name
Part program storage
rr-10.2
item
rrr-9. l8
10n
*.20 n
*40u
*80rn
rt 120 n
*320n
* 63 programs
* 125 programs
g 200 programs
rrr-9.
l7
Program name display
Provided
rrr-1 I . 2
Sequence No. search
Provided
III-9.9
Program No. search
Provided
III-9.4
Optional block skip
I block
rr-13 .4.4
9 blocks
Sequence No.
* Provided
comparison and stop
-523-
rr-I3.4.4
o:
Speci
Name
External work
PMC
is required
Reference
item
fication
Provided (15)
No.
search
Program protect
Provided
Background edit
* Provided
rrr-9. I 3
. Dlspl.a
Di
req u ired
, PMC 1S
Speci
Name
English
Japanese (Chinese characters)
Languages
*
*
*
*
German/French
Chinese
Italian
Run tine/No. of parts
'. t
display
Reference
ltem
fication
III_I
Provided
-:
I .6
.j
Graphic display
* Provided
III-14
Actual speed display
Provided
rrr-1 1 .4
Floppy cassette
directory display
* Provided
rrr-13.7
. External Data
Dat rnput/uutpu
/o,t
o:,
External key i,nput
*'Provided
External tool offset
* Provided
External
*' Provided
External dafa inDut
* Provided
o,
External work No.
15 works
message
search
Remote
buffer
High-speed remote
buffer
':t Provided
* Provided
-524-
is required
Reference
item
Specification
Name
PMC
is required
Name
High-speed remote
buffer
Sp
Reference
ecifi cation
item
* Provided
I/0 device external

control
* Provided
-525-
&:
a'
n1
,.t
-l
II
i)
i
I
o
O
uJl
sl
(Y)
Ig
Jl
It
-t
o
(l,
I
cc
<l
fl
zl
<l
EI
I
o
u,
(D
chl
E.
cc
uJ
o
co
=
o
o
o
I
irA
2o>
o
F.
po
o!
!o
o6
CD
6ko
l+'
lrt
:!
i,
I
t'
i_
(J
=qlltrF-:#.;.'
""*r{fff
'ir
S.t
lf,'-c-:.,{41
:
'i:,
\*'
^.\
\\.
\rI\
i.
ut
\
't
. l/o fart af this mnnunl may be

refiroduced in any form.
. All specifications and desigrs

are subject to cltnnge without
notice.
ii
'a
.*
;:i
ll#+-;r-ieK;ll.*,
-\l-./t#
\
'.:,.
'.
.,
'tt

Fanuc 0 User Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc 0 User Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

tltl;:

4.L Positioning (c00)

5.5.1 Exact stop

5.5.2 Exact stop mode (G61)

5.5.3 CutLing mode (c64)

Reference Point Return (G28, G29)

7.L Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, G54 to

7.1.4 Changing work eoordinate system by program command

COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

f Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91)

Decimal Point Programming

SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

Spindle Speed Command

IO. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

II. }IISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M, B FUNCTIONS)

1 Tape Start ..e.

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

I Tool Length Offset (c43, C44, G49)

14.2.8 Currer compensarion right (c42)

Skip Funcrion (c3I)

17. I Macro Ca11 Corunand (Custom Macro Command)

Dif ference between 1"198 (subprogram call) and

1.8 Multiplex calls

17.2.5 Control c,onnands ...

t A1l Axes I'lachine Lock .

Auxiliary Function Lock

WHEN ALARM ARISES

PART PROGMM STOMGE

& EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM

1 Preparation for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation

9.13.2 Registration from CNC tape .

t9 Editing Operation Using Full Keys

Data Protection Key .

12.I Tool Offsets

13. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1

13.3 Data Output Operation

f3.6.3 Write-protect key

13.7 Floppy Cassette Di-rectory Display

L4. GRAPHIC FUNCTION

MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION

L5.2 Fo1low-up Signal

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF OO-MB

FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT

L.2.1 Power supply unit

TAPE CODE LIST

FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH

RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING

STATUS WI{EN TURNING THE POWER ON, WI{EN RESET

4 CNC Status Displav

Sometimes, the specification and usage of the system may be different

General Flow of Operation of CNC Machine Tool

1.2 Notes on Reading This Manual

l) Tool movement along workpiece parts figure

b) Tool movement along arc

the table rnay be moved without moving the tool in an actual

function (See II-5)

of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called

3) Part drawing and tool movenent

The t,ool can be moved to reference poi_nt in two ways:

In general, manual reference point return is performed flrst after th,

b) Coordinate system on part drawing and